Home

- D-Link

1. 207 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DHCP RELAY COMMANDS The DHCP relay commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table a e string lt mutiword 255 gt relay lt ipaddress gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt all config dhcp_relay option_60 delete default lt ipaddr gt show dhcp_relay option_60 string lt mutiword 255 gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt default contig dhcp_relay option_61 state enable disable config dhcp_relay option_61 default relay lt ipaddr gt drop mac_address lt macaddr gt string lt desc_long 255 gt relay lt ipaddr gt contig dhcp_relay option_61 add drop show ahep reayopton 6p O Tenable dheplocalreay OOOO SO asable orep oca rey OOO SSSSCSCSCSCSCSSCSCSCSCSS show dhop_localrelay OOOO SSCS Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config dhcp_relay Purpose Used to configure the DHCP BOOTP relay feature of the switch Syntax config dhcp_relay hops lt value 1 16 gt time lt sec 0 65535 gt 1 Description This command is used to configure the DHCP BOOTP relay feature Parameters hops lt value 1 16 gt Specifies the maximum number of relay agent hops that the DHCP packets can cross time lt sec 0 65535 gt If this time is equal to or more than the entered value the Switch will relay the DHCP packet Restriction
2. DES 3528 5 232 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config 802 1x guest_vlian ports Purpose Used to configure ports for a pre existing 802 1X guest VLAN Syntax config 802 1x guest_vlian ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable Description This command is used to configure ports to be enabled or disabled for the 802 1X guest VLAN Parameters lt portlist gt Specify a port or range of ports to be configured for the 802 1X Guest VLAN all Specify this parameter to configure all ports for the 802 1X Guest VLAN state enable disable Use these parameters to enable or disable port listed here as enabled or disabled for the 802 1X Guest VLAN Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command This VLAN must have already been previously created using the create vlan command If the specific port state changes from an enabled state to a disabled state these ports will return to the original VLAN Example usage To configure the ports for a previously created 802 1 X Guest VLAN as enabled DES 3528 5 config 802 1x guest_vlan ports 1 5 state enable Command config 802 1x guest_vlan ports 1 5 state enable Success DES 3528 5 show 802 1x guest_vlian Purpose Used to view the configurations for a 802 1X Guest VLAN Syntax show 802 1x guest_vian Description This command is used to display the settings for the VLAN that has
3. Example usage To set up port range 1 10 to be static router ports DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan default add 1 10 Command config mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan default add 1 10 Success DES 3528 5 config mid_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden Purpose Used to configure ports as forbidden router ports Syntax config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command allows you to designate a range of ports that are forbidden to connect to multicast enabled routers This ensures that the forbidden router port will not propagate routing packets out Parameters vian_name The name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured add delete Specifies to add or delete the router ports portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set up port range 1 10 to static router ports DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden vlan default add 1 10 Command config mld_snooping mrouter_ports_forbidden vlan default add 1 10 Success DES 3528 5 407 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable mld_snooping Purpose Used to enable MLD snooping on the switch Syntax enable mid_snooping Description This command allows
4. Password Recovery Mode gt J In the Password Recovery Mode only the following commands can be used The reset config command resets the whole configuration will be back to the default value reboot The reboot command exits the Reset Password Recovery Mode and restarts the switch A confirmation message will be displayed to allow the user to save the current settings The reset account command deletes all the previously created accounts reset password The reset password command resets the password of the specified user If a username is lt username gt not specified the password of all users will be reset show account The show account command displays all previously created accounts 520
5. Specifies a gateway ip to be configured add gateway_mac lt macadadr gt Specifies a gateway mac to be configured ports lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured ports all Specifies all of ports to be configured delete gateway_ip Specifies a gateway ip to be removed Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example Usage To add an entry for ARP spoofing prevention DES 3528 5 config arp_spoofing_prevention add gateway_ip 10 254 254 251 gateway _mac 00 00 00 11 11 11 ports 1 2 Command config arp_spoofing prevention add gateway_ip 10 254 254 251 gateway_mac 00 00 00 11 11 11 ports 1 2 Success DES 3528 5 show arp_spoofing_prevention Purpose Used to show the arp spoofing_prevention entry Syntax show arp_spoofing_prevention Description This command is used to display the current ARP spoofing prevention entry Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example Usage To add an entry for ARP spoofing prevention DES 3528 5 show arp_spoofing_prevention Command show arp_spoofing_prevention ARP Spoofing Prevention Table Gateway IP Address Gateway MAC Address Ports 10 254 254 251 00 00 00 11 11 11 1 2Total Total Entries DES 3528 5 291 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up
6. Description This command is used to show ports Ethernet OAM event log information The switch can buffer 1000 event logs The event log is different from sys log It provides more detailed information than sys log Each OAM event will be recorded in both OAM event log and syslog You can specify an index to show a range of events Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to display index Specifies an index range to display Restrictions None Example usage To show port 1 external OAM event 469 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show ethernet_oam ports 1 event_log Command show ethernet_oam ports 1 event_log Event Listing Index Type Location Time Stamp Local Event Statistics Error Symbol Event Error Frame Event Error Frame Period Event Errored Frame Seconds Event Dying Gasp Critical Event Remote Event Statistics Error Symbol Event Error Frame Event Error Frame Period Event Errored Frame Seconds Event Dying Gasp Critical Event ei Quit h Next Page iiygyas Next Entry M All clear ethernet_oam ports statistics Purpose Used to clear Ethernet OAM statistics Syntax clear ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all statistics Description This command is used to clear ports Ethernet OAM statistics information Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to clear the statistics Restrictions Only Administrator and Operat
7. Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To create an access list rules DES 3528 5 create access_profile profile_id 5 profile _ name 5 ethernet vlan source_mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 destination_mac 00 00 00 00 00 02 802 1p ethernet_type Command create access profile profile_id 5 profile _name 5 ethernet vlan source_mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 destination_mac 00 00 00 00 00 02 802 1p ethernet_type Success DES 3528 5 delete access _profile Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to delete a previously created access profile delete access_profile profile_id lt value 1 14 gt all profile_name lt name 1 32 gt This command is used to delete a previously created access profile on the Switch proftile_id lt value 1 14 gt Enter an integer between 1 and 14 that is used to identify the access profile that will be deleted with this command This value is assigned to the access profile when it is created with the create access_profile command The user may enter a profile ID number between 1 and 14 yet remember only 14 access profiles can be created on the Switch profile_name Specifies the name of the profile The maximum length is 32 characters all Entering this parameter will delete all access profiles currently configured on the Switch Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete the access profil
8. Restrictions None Usage Example To display SSH algorithms currently set on the Switch 333 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show ssh algorithm Command show ssh algorithm Encryption Algorithm Enabled AES128 Enabled AES192 Enabled AES256 Enabled Arcfour Enabled Blowfish Enabled Cast128 Enabled Twofish128 Enabled Twofish192 Enabled Twofish256 Enabled Data Integrity Algorithm Enabled Enabled Public Key Algorithm Enabled DES 3528 5 334 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual SSL COMMANDS Secure Sockets Layer or SSL is a security feature that will provide a secure communication path between a host and client through the use of authentication digital signatures and encryption These security functions are implemented through the use of a ciphersuite which is a security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session and consists of three levels 1 Key Exchange The first part of the cyphersuite string specifies the public key algorithm to be used This Switch utilizes the Rivest Shamir Adleman RSA public key algorithm and the Digital Signature Algorithm DSA specified here as the DHE_DSS Diffie Hellman DHE public key algorithm This is the first authentication process between c
9. Specifies that the port is a VLAN trunk port disable Specifies that the port is not a VLAN trunk port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure VLAN trunk ports DES 3528 5 config vlan_trunk ports 1 5 state enable Command config vlan_trunk ports 1 5 state enable Success DES 3528 5 show vlian_trunk Purpose Used to display the VLAN trunk configuration Syntax show vian_trunk Description This command displays the VLAN trunk configuration Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the VLAN trunk configuration DES 3528 5 show vlan_trunk Command show vlan trunk VLAN Trunk Global Setting VLAN Trunk Status Enabled VLAN Trunk Member Ports 1 5 133 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual VoicE VLAN COMMANDS The voice VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table fssabeviceven fT config voice_vlan oui add lt macaddr gt lt macmask gt description lt desc 32 gt delete lt macaddr gt lt macmask gt config voice_vlan ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable mode auto manual aging_time show voice vian SOO show voice_vian oui S show voice_vlan lt portlist gt voice_device ports Each command is listed in detail in the following
10. To display the current traffic segmentation configuration on the Switch 211 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show traffic_segmentation Command show traffic_segmentation Traffic Segmentation Table Forward Portlist Ove ae OTe Quit aXe is Next Page IH yH Next Entry amp All 278 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual SFLOW COMMANDS The sFlow commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table jenabie stow jisable stow show stow create sflow flow_sampler ports lt portlist gt all analyzer_server_id lt value 1 4 gt rate lt value 0 65535 gt maxheadersize lt value 18 256 gt contig sflow flow_sampler ports lt portlist gt all rate lt value 0 65535 gt maxheadersize lt value 18 256 gt 1 delete sflow flow_sampler ports lt portlist gt all create sflow counter_poller ports lt portlist gt all analyzer_server_id lt value 1 4 gt interval disable lt sec 20 120 gt contig sflow counter_poller ports lt portlist gt all interval disable lt sec 20 120 gt delete sflow counter_poller ports lt portlist gt all create sflow analyzer_server lt value 1 4 gt owner lt name 16 gt timeout lt sec 1 2000000 gt infinite collectoraddress lt ipaddr gt collectorport lt udp_por
11. advertisement enable disable 1 config vlan vianid lt vidlist gt add tagged untagged forbidden delete lt portlist gt advertisement enable disable name lt vilan_name 32 gt 1 config port_vlan lt portlist gt all gvrp_state enable disable ingress_checking enable disable acceptable_frame tagged_only admit_all pvid lt vianid 1 4094 gt 1 lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt show port_vlan lt portlist gt create dot1v_protocol group group _ id lt id 1 16 gt group name lt name 32 gt config dotiv_protocol_ group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name 32 gt add protocol ethernet_2 ileee802 3 snap ieee802 3 IIlc lt protocol_value gt delete protocol ethernet_2 ileee802 3 snap ieee802 3 IIlc lt protocol value gt delete dotiv_protocol_ group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_ name lt name 32 gt all show dotiv_protocol_ group group _id lt id 1 16 gt group_ name lt name 32 gt config port dot1v ports lt portlist gt all add protocol_ group group_id lt id gt group_ name lt name 32 gt vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt id gt priority lt value 0 7 gt delete protocol_ group group_id lt id 1 16 gt all show port dot1v ports lt portlist gt enable pvid auto_assign disable pvidauto_assign show pvid auto_assign config gvrp timer join leave leaveall
12. log_to_fto Specify this parameter to upload a switch log to a member of the SIM group lt ipaddr gt Enter the IP address of the TF IP server to which to upload a configuration file lt path_filename gt Enter a user defined path and file name on the TFTP server so as to upload configuration files members Enter this parameter to specify the members to which the user prefers to upload the switch configuration or log files The user may specify a member or members by adding one of the following lt msilist gt Enter a value or values to specify which members of the SIM group will upload the switch configuration or log all Add this parameter to specify all members of the SIM group will upload the switch configuration or log Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To upload configuration files to a TFTP server 349 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 upload sim ms configuration_to tftp 10 55 47 1 D configuration txt members 1 Command upload sim_ms configuration_to_tftp 10 55 47 1 D configuration txt members 1 Success DES 3528 5 350 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual JWAC COMMANDS The Japanese Web based Access Control commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the follo
13. 3528 5 disable wac Command disable wac Success DES 3528 5 config wac auth_failover Purpose Used to configure WAC authorization failover Syntax config wac auth_failover enable disable Description When the authentication failover is disabled if Radius servers are unreachable the authentication will fail When the authentication failover is enabled if Radius servers authentication are unreachable the local database will be used to do the authentication The default state is disabled Parameters enable Enables the protocol authentication fail over disable Disables the protocol authentication fail over Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the WAC authentication failover DES 3528 5 config wac auth_failover enable Command config wac auth_failover enable Success DES 3528 5 437 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config wac authorization network Purpose Used to enable the acceptance of an authorized configuration Syntax config wac authorization network radius enable disable local enable disable 1 Description This command is used to configure the acceptance of an authorized configuration When the authorization is enabled for WAC s radius the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is also enabl
14. 417 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config mid_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry Purpose Used to configure the max number of groups that can be learned by data driven Syntax config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry lt value 1 1024 gt Description This command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven When the table is full the system will stop learning the new data driven groups Traffic for the new groups will be dropped Parameters lt value 1 1024 gt The max number of groups that can be learned by data driven Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the max number of groups that can be learned by data driven DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 100 Command config mld_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 100 Success DES 3528 5 clear mid_snooping data_driven_group Purpose Used to delete the MLD snooping group learned by data driven Syntax clear mld_snooping data_driven_group all vlan_name lt vlan_name gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipv6addr gt all Description This command is used to delete the MLD snooping group learned by data driven Parameters all Delete all groups learnt by data driven vian_name lt vilan_name 32 gt The name of
15. Example usage To display the DHCP server filter list created on the switch 267 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show filter dhcp_server Command show filter dhcp_server Filter DHCP Server Trap Log State Disabled Illegal Server Log Suppress Duration 5 minutes Enabled Ports 1 3 Filter DHCP Server Client Table Server IP Address Client MAC Address Port Total Entries DES 3528 5 config filter dhcp_server trap_log Purpose Used to enable or disable the trap or log that is triggered by the DHCP server filter events Syntax config filter dhcp_server trap_log enable disable Description This command is used to enable or disable the trap or log that is triggered by the DHCP server filter events Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable log and trap for the DHCP server filter event DES 3528 5 config filter dhcp server trap_log disable Command config filter dhcp server trap_log disable Success DES 3528 5 config filter dhcp_server illegal_server_log_suppress_duration Purpose Used to configure the illegal server log suppress duration Syntax config filter dhcp_server illegal_server_log_suppress_duration 1min 5min 30min Description The DHCP server filtering function filters the illegal DHCP server packet The DHCP server that sends the illegal pa
16. Local Broadcast Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Local Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic q Quit n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All clear arptable Purpose Syntax clear arptable Description Static ARP table entries are not affected Parameters None Restrictions Example Usage To remove dynamic entries in the ARP table DES 3528 5 clear arptable Command clear arptable Success DES 3528 5 296 Used to remove all dynamic ARP table entries This command is used to remove dynamic ARP table entries from the Switch s ARP table Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config arp_spoofing_prevention Purpose Used to config to prevent ARP spoofing attack Syntax config arp_spoofing_prevention add gateway_ip lt ipaddr gt gateway_mac lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all delete gateway_ip lt ipaddr gt Description This command is used to configure the spoofing prevention entry so as to prevent the spoofing of protected gateway s MAC address When an entry is created if the sender IP of the ARP packet matches the gateway IP of the entry but the sender MAC field and source MAC field do not match the gateway s MAC then MAC of the entry will be dropped by the Switch Parameters add gateway_ip lt ipaddr gt
17. Parameters application Choose the application to configure The user may choose one of the following five options to configure console Choose this parameter to configure the command line interface login method telnet Choose this parameter to configure the telnet login method ssh Choose this parameter to configure the Secure Shell login method http Choose this parameter to configure the web interface login method all Choose this parameter to configure all applications console telnet ssh web login method login Use this parameter to configure an application for normal login on the user level using a previously configured method list enable Use this parameter to configure an application for upgrading a normal user level to administrator privileges using a previously configured method list default Use this parameter to configure an application for user authentication using the default method list method_list_name lt string 15 gt Use this parameter to configure an application for user authentication using a previously configured method list Enter a alohanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define a previously configured method list Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the default method list for the web interface DES 3528 5 config authen application http login default Command config authen application http login
18. Purpose Used to enable disable the sending of gratuitous ARP requests while the IP interface status comes up Syntax config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up enable disable Description The command is used to enable disable sending of gratuitous ARP request packets while the IPIF interface comes up This is used to automatically announce the interface s IP address to other nodes By default the state is disabled Parameters enable Enable sending of gratuitous ARP when IPIF status comes up disable Disable sending of gratuitous ARP when IPIF status comes up Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable send gratuitous ARP request in a normal situation DES 3528 5 config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up enable Command config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up enable Success DES 3528 5 config gratuitous_arp send dup_ip_detected Purpose Used to enable disable the sending of gratuitous ARP requests while a duplicate IP address is being detected Syntax config gratuitous_arp send duplicate_ip_detected enable disable Description The command is used to enable disable the sending of gratuitous ARP request packets when a duplicate IP has been detected By default the state is disabled For this command the duplicate IP detected means that the system received an ARP request packet that is sent by an IP address that matches the system s own IP
19. Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To display authenticator session statistics information from port 1 238 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show auth_session_statistics ports 1 Command show auth_session_statistics ports 1 Port number SessionOctetsRx SessionOctetsTx SessionFramesRx SessionFramesTx SessionIiId SessionAuthenticMethod Remote Authentication Server SessionTime 0 SessionTerminateCause SupplicantLogoff SessionUserName DES 3528 5 show auth_client Purpose Used to display authentication client information Syntax show auth_client Description This command displays authentication client information Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To display authentication client information 239 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show auth client Command show auth client radiusAuthClient gt radiusAuthClientInvalidServerAddresses radiusAuthClientIdentifier radiusAuthServerEntry gt radiusAuthServerIndex 1 O O O radiusAuthServerAddress radiusAuthClientServerPortNumber radiusAuthClientRoundTripTime radiusAuthClientAccessRequests radiusAuthClientAccessRetransmissions radiusAuthClientAccessAccepts radiusAuthClien
20. This command displays all the fault conditions detected by the MEPs contained in the specified MA or MD This display provides the overview of fault status by MEPs xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show cfm mep fault Command show cfm mep fault MEPID Status Cross connect CCM Received DES 3528 5 show cfm port Purpose Used to show MEPs and MIPs created on a port Syntax show cfm port lt port gt level lt int 0 7 gt direction inward outward vianid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command is used to show MEPs and MIPs created on a port Parameters port Specifies the port number level Specifies the MD Level If not specified all levels are shown direction Specifies the MEP direction inward Inward facing MEP outward Outward facing MEP If not specified both directions and MIPs are shown vianid Specifies the VLAN identifier If not specified all VLANs are shown Restrictions None Example usage To display cfm ports DES 3528 5 show cfm port 1 Command show cfm port 1 MAC Address 10 10 90 08 8g 12 op_domain opl inward cust _domain custl inward serv domain serv2 DES 3528 5 show cfm mipccm Purpose Used to show MIPCCM database entries Syntax show cfm mipccm Description All entries in the MIPCCM database will be shown The MIPCCM entry is simlar to FDB which keeps the forwarding port i
21. Threshold 2 Errored Frame Frame Period Error Notify State Enabled Window 1000000 Frames Threshold 10 Errored Frame ei Quit h Next Page iiwyas Next Entry M All show ethernet_oam ports statistics Purpose Used to show Ethernet OAM statistics Syntax show ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt statistics Description This command is used to show ports Ethernet OAM statistics information Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to display Restrictions None Example usage To show port 1 OAM statistics 468 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics Command show ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics Information OAMPDU Tx Information OAMPDU Rx Unique Event Notification OAMPDU Tx Unique Event Notification OAMPDU Rx Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU Tx Duplicate Event Notification OAMPDU Rx Loopback Control OAMPDU Tx Loopback Control OAMPDU Rx Variable Request OAMPDU Tx Variable Request OAMPDU Rx Variable Response OAMPDU Tx Variable Response OAMPDU Rx Organization Specific OAMPDUs Tx Organization Specific OAMPDUs Rx Unsupported OAMPDU Tx Unsupported OAMPDU Rx Frames Lost Due To OAM O O O O O O O O O O O O O O OO O O DES 3528 5 show ethernet_oam event_log Purpose Used to show the Ethernet OAM event log Syntax show ethernet_oam lt portlist gt event_log index lt value_list gt
22. User account for web base access control vlan Authentication vlan name Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a WAC account DES 3528 5 create wac user 123 vlan default Command create wac user 123 vlan default Enter a case sensitive new password Enter the new password again for confirmation Success DES 3528 5 delete wac user Purpose Used to delete the account for Web based access control Syntax delete wac user user lt username 15 gt all_ user Description This command allows you to delete an account Parameters username User account for Web based access control all_users To delete all the users Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a WAC account DES 3528 5 delete wac user 123 Command delete wac user 123 Success DES 3528 5 show wac Purpose Used to display WAC authentication settings Syntax show wac ports lt portlist gt all Description This command allows you to display the Web authentication setting Parameters ports A range of member ports to show the status all Will show the status of all the member ports Restrictions None 443 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the WAC state DES 3528 5 show wac Command show wac
23. 1 Description This command is used to configure bandwidth on a port by port basis Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured rx_rate Specifies that one of the parameters below no_ imit or lt value 64 1024000 gt will be applied to the rate at which the above specified ports will be allowed to receive packets no limit Specifies that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the above specified ports lt value 64 1024000 gt Specifies the packet limit in Kops that the above ports will be allowed to receive tx_rate Specifies that one of the parameters below no_ imit or lt value 64 1024000 gt will be applied to the rate at which the above specified ports will be allowed to transmit packets no_limit Specifies that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the above specified ports lt value 64 1024000 gt Specifies the packet limit in Kops that the above ports will be allowed to receive Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure bandwidth control DES 3528 5 config bandwidth_control 1 10 tx_rate 64 Command config bandwidth_control 1 10 tx_rate 64 Success DES 3528 5 show bandwidth_control Purpose Used to display the bandwidth control table Syntax show bandwidth_control lt portlist gt Description This command displays the current
24. 388 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create vian_translation ports Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to create VLAN translation rule create vian_translation ports lt portlist gt all cvid lt vidlist gt add replace svid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt priority lt value 0 7 gt This command can be used to add translation relationship between C VLAN and SP VLAN On ingress at UNI port the C VLAN tagged packets will be translated to SP VLAN tagged packets by adding or replacing according the configured rule On egress at this port the SP VLAN tag will be recovered to C VLAN tag or be striped The priority will be the priority in the SP VLAN tag if the use_inner_priority flag is disabled for the receipt port This configuration is only effective for an UNI port This setting will not be effective when Q in Q mode is disabled Note that if the action of the rule replaces C VLAN tag the relationship between C VALN and S VLAN on the port shall be one to one mapping Multiple C VLAN map to one S VLAN ona port is not supported users shall take care of this while configuring the rules portlist A range of ports under Q in Q rules which assign the SP VLAN tag based on the C VLAN tag for received C VLAN tagged packets on these ports cvid C VLAN ID to match add The action indicates to add a tag for the assigned SP VLAN be
25. 802 1p ethernet_type 1 ip vlan source_ip mask lt netmasks gt destination_ip_ mask lt netmask gt dscp icmp type code igmp type tcp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt flag_mask all urg ack psh rst syn fin 1 udp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt protocol_id_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt user_define_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 packet_content_mask offset_chunk_1 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff offset_chunk_2 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_3 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_4 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 ipv6 class flowlabel tcp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt udp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt 1 source_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt destination_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt 1 profile_id lt value 1 14 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Description This command is used to create an access profile on the Switch and to define which parts of each incoming frame s header the Switch will examine Masks can be entered that will be combined with the values the Switch finds in the specified frame header fields Specific values for the rules are entered using the config access_profile command below Parameters
26. DES 3528 5 disable pvid auto_assign Purpose Used to disable auto assignment of PVID Syntax disable pvid auto_assign Description This command disables the auto assign of PVID When it is disabled PVID only be changed by PVID configuration user changes explicitly The VLAN configuration will not automatically change PVID The default setting is enabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the auto assign PVID DES 3528 5 disable pvid auto_assign Command disable pvid auto_assign Success DES 3528 5 show pvid auto_assign Purpose Used to show PVID auto assigment state Syntax show pvid auto_assign Description This command is used to show PVID auto assigment state Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display PVID auto assignment state 130 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show pvid auto_assign Command show pvid auto_assign PVID Auto assignment Enabled DES 3528 5 config gvrp Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure the GVRP s timer and its MAC address format for NNI ports when used in Q in Q mode config gvrp timer join leave leaveall lt value 100 100000 gt nni_bpdu_addr dotid dottad This command is used to set the GVRP s timer and i
27. Description This command is used to display mac_based_access_ control settings Parameters ports Display mac_based_access_control port state Restrictions None Example usage To display mac based access control auth state 427 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports 1 7 Command show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports 1 1 1 7 Port MAC Address VID Priority Aging Time Block Time Total Authenticating Hosts Total Authenticated Hosts Total Blocked Hosts config mac_based_ access _ control auth_fatlover Purpose Used to configure the MAC based AC authentication failover function Syntax config mac_based_access_control auth_failover enable disable Description When the authentication failover is disabled and if the Radius servers are unreachable the authentication will fail When the authentication failover is enabled and if the Radius servers authentication Is unreachable the local database will be used to do the authentication The state is disabled by default Parameters enable Enables the authentication database fail over disable Disables the authentication database fail over Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the mac_based_access_control auth_failover DES 3528 5 config mac_based_access_control auth_failov
28. Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Description Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Description Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Description Connection Speed Duplex FlowCtrl Link Down q Quit n Next Page p Previous Page Refresh Example usage To display disabled ports including connection status and reason for being disabled on a standalone switch 2d Address Learning Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Address Learning Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual 5 show ports err disabled show ports err disabled Port Connection Status Reason Example usage To display detail information of ports on the Switch Port Status Link Down Description HardWare Type Fast Ethernet MAC Address 00 21 91 AF EA 00 Bandwidth 100000Kbit Auto Negotiation Enabled Duplex Mode Full Duplex Flow Control Disabled MDI Auto Address Learning Enabled SFP Module Vendor SFP Module Part Number Loopback Mode Last clear of Counter 5 hours 43 mins ago BPDU Hardware Filtering Mode Disabled Queuing Strategy FIFO TX Load 0 100 Obits sec Opackets sec RX Load 0 100 Obits sec Opackets sec TX Counter Excessive Deferrals X Late Collisions e Quit MZ Next Page js Previous Page I4 Refresh enable jumbo_frame Purpose Used to enable the jumbo
29. Example usage To configure exclude the port and protocol VLAN ID TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports DES 3528 5 config lldp ports all dotl1l_tlv_protocol_vid vlanid 1 3 enable Command config lldp ports all dotl1_tlv_protocol_vid vlanid 1 3 enable Success DES 3528 5 377 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config lidp dot1_tiv_vlan_name Purpose Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of IEEE 802 1 Organizationally VLAN name TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements Syntax config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all dot1_tlv_vlan_name vlan all lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vianid_list gt enable disable Description This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System s VLAN name instance will be transmitted on the port If a port is associated with multiple VLANs those enabled VLAN IDs will be advertised Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured all Use this parameter to set all ports in the system dot1_tlv_vian_name This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System s VLAN name instance will be transmitted on the port If a port is associated with multiple VLANs those enabled VLAN IDs will be advertised The default state is disabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level
30. Example usage To create a unicast MAC FDB entry DES 3528 5 create fdb default 00 00 00 00 01 02 port 5 Command create fdb default 00 00 00 00 01 02 port 5 Success DES 3528 5 93 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create fdb drop Purpose Used to create a static entry to filter the packet with specified MAC address based on either source or destination MAC addresses Syntax create fdb lt vlan_name32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt macaddr gt drop Description This command is used to create a static entry to filter the packet with specified MAC address based on either source or destination MAC addresses Parameters lt vlan_name gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides lt vlanid _list gt Specifies a range of VLANs to be configured lt macaddr gt The MAC address that will be added to the forwarding table Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To filter an unicast MAC DES 3528 5 create fdb default 00 00 00 33 01 02 drop Command create fdb default 00 00 00 33 01 02 drop Success DES 3528 5 create multicast_fdb Purpose Used to create a static entry to the multicast MAC address forwarding table database Syntax create multicast_fdb lt vlan_name 32 gt lt macaddr gt Description This command will make an entry into the Switch s multicast MAC address f
31. Restrictions None Example usage To display a multicast filter profile DES 3528 5 show mcast_filter_profile Command show mcast_filter_profile Profile ID Multicast Addresses 1 234 1 1 1 238 244 244 244 2 customer 224 19 62 34 224 199 162 200 Total Profile Count DES 3528 5 167 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config limited_multicast_addr Purpose Used to configure the multicast address filtering function on a port Syntax config limited_multicast_addr ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete profile_id lt value 1 24 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt access permit deny 1 Description This command is used to configure the multicast address filtering function on a port When there are no profiles assigned to a port the filtering function is not effective When the function is configured on a port it limits the multicast group that hosts can join through the operation of IGMP Parameters lt portlist gt A range of ports to config the multicast address filtering function lt vidlist gt A range of VLAN IDs to config the multicast address filtering function add Add a multicast address profile to a port delete Delete a multicast address profile to a port profile_id A profile to be added to or deleted from the port profile_name lt name 1 32 gt The name of the profile permit Specifi
32. Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a link aggregation group DES 3528 5 create link_aggregation group_id 1 Command create link_aggregation group_id 1 Success DES 3528 5 146 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete link_aggregation Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to delete a previously configured link aggregation group delete link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 8 gt This command is used to delete a previously configured link aggregation group lt value 1 8 gt Specifies the group ID The Switch allows up to eight link aggregation groups to be configured The group number identifies each of the groups Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete link aggregation group DES 3528 5 delete link_aggregation group_id 6 Command delete link_aggregation group_id 6 Success DES 3528 5 config link_aggregation Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure a previously created link aggregation group config link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 8 gt master_port lt port gt ports lt portlist gt state enable disable 1 This command allows users to configure a link aggregation group that was created with the create link_agg
33. Syntax show vian_translation ports lt portlist gt Description The command is used to show pre created C VLAN based SP VLAN assignment rules Parameters ports A range of ports which the rules will be displayed If no parameters specified all rules will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To show vlan_translation rules in the system DES 3528 5 show vlan_translation Commands show vlan_translation SPVID Action Priority 390 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual RSPAN COMMANDS The Remote Switched Port Analyzer RSPAN commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table feabewoan fssabe wean delete rspan vlan vian_name lt vian_name gt vian_id lt value 1 4094 gt config rspan vlan vian_name lt vlan_name gt vian_id lt vlanid 1 4094 gt redirect add delete port lt port gt source add delete ports lt portlist gt rx tx both vian_name lt vlan_name gt vian_id lt vianid 1 4094 gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable rspan Purpose Used to enable RSPAN Syntax enable rspan Description This command controls the RSPAN function The purpose of RSPAN function is to mirror the packets to the remote switch The packet travels from the switch where the monitored packet is received through an intermediate switch then
34. Web Base Access Control Switch HTTP Port Enable Local Disabled 0 0 0 0 80 HTTP RADIUS Authorization Enabled Local Authorization Enabled DES 3528 5 To display WAC ports DES 3528 5 show wac ports 1 8 Command show wac ports 1 1 1 8 Port State Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled PPP PP PP Pp o yona WD PB DES 3528 5 Aging Time Idle Time Block Time Minutes Minutes Seconds Infinite Infinite Infinite Infinite Infinite Infinite Infinite Infinite show wac user Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to display the user account for web authentication show wac user This command allows you to show web authentication account None None 444 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To show Web authentication account DES 3528 5 show wac user Command show wac user Username Password Total Entries 1 clear wac auth_ state Purpose Used to clear the authentication state of a port Syntax clear wac auth_ state ports lt portlist gt all authenticated authenticating blocked Description This command is used to clear the authentication state of a port The port will return to an un authenticated state All the timers associated with the port will be reset Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies the list of ports whose WAC state
35. lt vidlist gt Specify the VID range from configured VLANs set on the Switch Supported VIDs on the Switch range from ID number 1 to 4094 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure instance ID 2 to add VID 10 DES 3528 5 config stp instance_id 2 add vlan 10 Command config stp instance_id 2 add_vlan 10 Success DES 3528 5 Example usage To remove VID 10 from instance ID 2 DES 3528 5 config stp instance_id 2 remove_vlan 10 Command config stp instance_id 2 remove_vlan 10 Success DES 3528 5 delete stp instance_id Purpose Used to delete a STP instance ID from the Switch Syntax delete stp instance_id lt value 1 15 gt Description This command allows the user to delete a previously configured STP instance ID from the Switch Parameters lt value 1 15 gt Enter a value between 1 and 15 to identify the Spanning Tree instance on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete STP instance ID 2 from the Switch 86 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 delete stp instance_id 2 Command delete stp instance_id 2 Success DES 3528 5 config stp priority Purpose Used to configure the bridge priority Syntax config stp priority lt value 0 61440 gt instance_id lt value 0 15 gt Descri
36. md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name Restrictions None Example usage To delete a cfm linktrace DES 3528 5 delete cfm linktrace mep mepl Command delete cfm linktrace mep mep1 Success DES 3528 5 500 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config cfm ccm_fwd Purpose Used to configure CCM PDUs forwarding mode Syntax config cfm ccm_fwd software hardware Description This coommand is for test purposes For ordinary user it is not suggested to use this command By default the CCM message is handled and forwarded by software The software can handle the packet based on behaviour defined by the standard Under a strict environment there may be substantial amount of CCM packets and it will consume substantial amount of CPU resource To meet the performance requirement the handling of CCM can be changed to hardware mode This function is especially useful for domain s intermediate device since they only have MIPS Note that this command can only be used under assistance of technical personnel Parameters software Specifies to forward by software hardware Specifies to forward by hardware Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the cfm ccm forwarding mode DES 3528 5 config cfm ccm_fwd_mode hardware Command config c
37. 1 Description This command is used to configure ports Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frame seconds An error frame second is a one second interval wherein at least one frame error was detected Link monitoring function provides a mechanism to detect and indicate link faults under a variety of conditions OAM monitors the counter on the number of frame errors as well as the number of coding symbol errors When the number of error frame seconds are equal to or greater than the specified threshold in a period and the event notification state is enabled it generates an error frame second summary event to notify the remote OAM Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured Use all to specify all ports threshold Specifies the number of error frame seconds in the period that are required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated The range is from 0 to 4294967295 The default value of threshold is 1 error frame second window Specifies the period of error frame seconds summary event The range is 10000ms 900000ms and the default value is 60000 ms notify_state Specifies to enable or disable the event notification The default state is enable Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage 463 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To configure the error frame seconds thres
38. 3528 5 show sred drop counter Command show sred drop_counter config dscp trust Purpose Used to enable disable DSCP trust state on selected portlist Syntax config dscp trust lt portlist gt all state enable disable Description This command is used to configure port DSCP trust state When DSCP is not trusted 1p is trusted Parameters portlist A range of ports to config state Enable disable to trust DSCP By default DSCP trust is disabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage This config dscp trust DES 3528 5 config dscp trust 1 8 state enable Command config dscp trust 1 8 state enable Success DES 3528 5 400 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show dscp trust Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display DSCP trust state show dscp trust lt portlist gt This command is used to display DSCP trsut state portlist A range of ports to display None To display the DSCP trust state DES 3528 5 show dscp trust Command show dscp_ trust Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled on DO UF FF WD FEF DES 3528 5 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled config dscp map Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to configure mapping of DSCP to priority and packet s initial color config ds
39. An alphanumeric name of up to 32 characters that will identify the SNMP group the new SNMP user will be associated with v1 Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP version 1 is a network management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control network devices v2c Specifies that SNMP version 2c will be used The SNMP v2c supports both centralized and distributed network management strategies It includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI and adds some security features v3 Specifies that the SNMP version 3 will be used SNMP v3 provides secure access to devices through a combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the network SNMP v3 adds e Message integrity Ensures that packets have not been tampered with during transit e Authentication Determines if an SNMP message is from a valid source Encryption Scrambles the contents of messages to prevent it being viewed by an unauthorized source noauth_nopriv Specifies that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager auth_nopriv Specifies that authorization will be required but there will be no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager auth_priv Specifies that authorization will be required and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP mang
40. Command create address _ binding ip_mac ipaddress 10 1 1 3 mac_address 00 00 00 00 00 04 Success DES 3528 5 Once an entry has been created and some IMPB enabled ports ACL mode belong to this entry the access profile table will look like this DES 3528 5 show access_profile Command show access _ profile Access Profile Table Total Unused Rule Entries 1790 Total Used Rule Entries 2 Access Profile ID 14 Type Ethernet IP Owner IP MAC Port Binding MASK Option Source MAC Ethernet Type Source IP Mask FF FF FF FF FF FF 255 255 255 255 Access ID 1 Mode Permit RX Rate 64Kbps gt no_limit Ports 1 5 00 00 00 00 00 04 10 1 1 3 Access ID 128 Mode Deny Ports 1 5 0x800 Unused Entries 126 DES 3528 5 The show access_profile command will display the one access profile created and their corresponding rules for every port on the Switch 153 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress Purpose Used to configure an IP MAC Port Binding entry Syntax config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress lt ipaddr gt mac_address lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all Description This command is used to configure an IP MAC Port Binding entry Parameters lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the device where the IP MAC Port binding is made lt macaddr gt The MAC address of the device where the IP MAC Po
41. DES 3528 5 config jwac user twatanabe vlan 3 Command config jwac user twatanabe vlan 3 Enter a old password Enter a case sensitive new password Enter the new password again for confirmation Success DES 3528 5 delete jwac user Purpose Used to delete JWAC user from the local DB Syntax delete jwac user lt username 15 gt all_ users Description This command deletes JWAC users from the local DB Parameters user To specify the user name to be deleted all_user All user accouts in local DB will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a JWAC user DES 3528 5 delete jwac user twatanabe Command delete jwac user twatanabe Success DES 3528 5 363 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show jwac user Purpose Used to show JWAC user in the local DB Syntax show jwac user Description This command displays JWAC users in the local DB Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To show a JWAC user DES 3528 5 show jwac user Command show jwac user twatanabe Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 clear jwac auth_state Purpose Used to delete host on JWAC enabled ports Syntax clear jwac auth_ state ports all lt portlist gt authenticated authenticating blocked mac_a
42. DES 3528 5 config address_binding recover_learning ports Purpose Use to recover a port from the stop learning state to the normal state Syntax config address_binding recover_learning ports lt portlist gt all Description This command is used to recover the port back to normal state under which the port will start learning both illegal and legal MAC addresses again Parameters portlist Specifies the list of ports to recover from stopped learning mode Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure address binding recover learning ports DES 3528 5 config address_binding recover_learning ports 6 7 Command config address_binding recover_learning ports 6 7 Success DES 3528 5 164 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual LIMITED IP MULTICAST ADDRESS The Limited IP Multicast command allows the administrator to permit or deny access to a port or range of ports by specifying a range of multicast addresses The Limited IP Multicast Commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create mcast_filter_profile profile_id lt value 1 24 gt profile _ name lt name 1 32 gt profile id lt value 1 24 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt profile _name lt name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcast_address_list gt 1
43. DES 3528 5 enable mirror Command enable mirror Success DES 3528 5 disable mirror Purpose Used to disable a previously entered port mirroring configuration Syntax disable mirror Description This command combined with the enable mirror command above allows the user to enter a port mirroring configuration into the Switch and then turn the port mirroring on and off without having to modify the port mirroring configuration Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable mirroring configurations DES 3528 5 disable mirror Command disable mirror Success DES 3528 5 117 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show mirror Purpose Used to show the current port mirroring configuration on the Switch Syntax show mirror Description This command displays the current port mirroring configuration on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display mirroring configuration Current Settings Mirror Status Enabled 118 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual VLAN COMMANDS The VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table config vlan lt vilan_name 32 gt add tagged untagged forbidden delete lt portlist gt
44. Example usage Used to bind a multicast group profile to a multicast VLAN The binding profile will affect the group joined to the multicast VLAN config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete profile_name lt profile_name 1 32 gt After binding a profile to a multicast VLAN when a multicast group attempt to join this multicast VLAN member port the group cannot join this multicast VLAN if the group does not belong to the range of binding profile e A NOTE Multiple profiles can be added to a multicast VLAN lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters add Used to associate a profile to a multicast VLAN delete Used to de associate a profile from a multicast VLAN lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the IGMP multicast VLAN group profile to be associated or de associated to the specified multicast VLAN Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To associate an IGMP multicast VLAN group profile g1 to IGMP multicast VLAN mv1 183 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group mvl add profile_name gl Command config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group mvl add profile_name gl Success DES 3528 5 show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group Purpose Used to di
45. Example usage To enable LLDP DES 3528 5 enable enable lldp Command enable lldp Success DES 3528 5 disable lidp Purpose Used to disable LLDP operation on the Switch Syntax disable Ildp Description This command will stop the sending and receiving of LLDP advertisement packets on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable LLDP DES 3528 5 disable lldp Command disable lldp Success DES 3528 5 config lldp message_tx_ interval Purpose Used to change the packet transmission interval Syntax config Ildp message_tx_interval lt sec 5 32768 gt Description This interval controls how often active ports retransmit advertisements to their neighbors Parameters message_tx_interval Changes the interval between consecutive transmissions of LLDP advertisements on any given port The range is from 5 seconds to 32768 seconds The default setting is 30 seconds Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage Example To show the packet transmission interval 372 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config lldp message_tx_interval 30 Command config lldp message_tx_interval 30 Success DES 3528 5 config lldp message_tx_hold_multiplier Purpose Used to configure the message hold multiplier Syn
46. Figure 1 3 Assigning an IP Address screen In the above example the Switch was assigned an IP address of 10 24 73 21 with a subnet mask of 255 0 0 0 The system message Success indicates that the command was executed successfully The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet SNMP MIB browser and the CLI or via the Web based management agent using the above IP address to connect to the Switch xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual USING THE CONSOLE CLI The DES 3528 52 Series supports a console management interface that allows the user to connect to the Switch s management agent via a serial port and a terminal or a computer running a terminal emulation program The console can also be used over the network using the TCP IP Telnet protocol The console program can be used to configure the Switch to use an SNMP based network management software over the network This chapter describes how to use the console interface to access the Switch change its settings and monitor its operation is NOTE Switch configuration settings are saved to non volatile RAM using the save command The current configuration will then be retained in the Switch s NV RAM and reloaded when the Switch is l rebooted If the Switch is rebooted without using the save command the last configuration saved to NV ail RAM will be loaded Connecting to the Switch The console interface is used by connecting t
47. Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward Forward 500 Normal 500 Normal 500 Normal 500 Normal 500 Normal 500 Normal 500 Normal 500 Normal 500 Normal 500 Normal 500 Normal 500 Normal 500 Normal ei Quit h Next Page bigyas Next Entry M All delete address_binding Purpose Used to delete IP MAC Port Binding entries and blocked MAC entries Syntax delete address_binding ip _mac ipaddress lt ipaddr gt mac_address lt macadds all blocked all vian_ name lt vlan_name gt mac_address lt macaddr gt Description This command is used to delete IP MAC Port Binding entries Two different kinds of information can be deleted e ip mac Individual Address Binding entries can be deleted by entering the MAC and IP addresses of the device Toggling to all will delete all the Address Binding entries blocked Blocked MAC entries bindings between VLAN names and MAC addresses can be deleted by entering the VLAN name and the MAC address of the device To delete all the blocked MAC entries toggle all Parameters lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the device where the IP MAC Port Binding is made lt macadadr gt The MAC address of the device where the IP MAC Port Binding is made lt vian_name gt The VLAN name of the VLAN that is bound to a MAC address in order to block a specific device on a known VLAN all For IP MAC Port Binding all specifies all the IP MAC Po
48. Specifies a range of ports to be configured Use all to specify all ports state Specifies to enable or disable the OAM function The default state is disable Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable Ethernet OAM on port 1 DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports 1 state enable Command config ethernet_oam ports 1 state enable Success DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports link_monitor error_symbol Purpose Used to configure Ethernet OAM link monitoring error symbols Syntax config ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all link_monitor error_symbol threshold lt range 0 4294967295 gt window lt millisecond gt notify_state enable disable 1 Description This command is used to configure ports Ethernet OAM link monitoring error symbols The link monitoring function provides a mechanism to detect and indicate link faults under a variety of conditions OAM monitors the statistics on the number of frame errors as well as the number of coding symbol errors When the number of symbol errors is equal to or greater than the specified threshold in a period and the event notification state is enabled it generates an error symbol period event to notify the remote OAM peer Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured Use all to specify all ports threshold Specifies the number of symbol errors in the period that is required to be equal
49. Success DES 3528 5 136 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config voice_vlan ports mode Purpose Used to configure per port voice VLAN mode Syntax config voice_vlan ports lt portlist gt mode auto manual Description This command is used to configure per port voice VLAN mode as auto or manual When the mode is auto the port can become the voice VLAN member port by auto learning If the MAC address of the the received packet matches the configured OUI the port will dynamically become a member port The dynamic membership will be removed via the aging out mechanism When the mode is manual the port needs to be manually added into or removed from the voice VLAN by 802 1Q VLAN configuration command Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports to configure all Specifies to configure all ports mode Specifies the voice VLAN mode e auto f the mode is auto the port can become the voice VLAN member port by auto learning If the MAC address of the received packet matches the configured OUI addresses the port will dynamically become a member port The dynamic membership will be removed via the aging out mechanism manual lf the mode is set to manual the port needs to be manually added into or removed from the voice VLAN by 802 1Q VLAN configuration command Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usag
50. by setting the the parameter of port_control to be force_authorized or force_unauthorized Besides the controlled port will reflect the outcome of authentication if port_control is auto quiet_period It is the initialization value of the quietWhile timer The default value is 60 s and can be any value from 0 to 65535 tx_period It is the initialization value of the txWhen timer The default value is 30 s and can be any value among 7 to 65535 supp_timeout The initialization value of the aWhile timer when timing out the supplicant Its default value is 30s and can be any value among 7 to 65535 server_timeout The initialization value of the aWhile timer when timing out the authentication server Its default value is 30 and can be any value among 7 to 65535 max_reg The maximum number of times that the authenitcation PAE state machine will retransmit an EAP Request packet to the supplicant Its default value is 2 and can be any number among 7 to 70 reauth_period lts a nonzero number of seconds which is used to be the re authentication timer The default value is 3600 max_users Specifies per port maximum number of users The range is 1 to m The default value is 16 enable_reauth You can enable or disable the re authentication mechanism for a specific port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the parameters that control the opera
51. clear_description mdix auto normal cross 1 Description This command is used to configure the Switch s Ethernet ports Only the ports listed in the lt portlist gt will be affected Parameters all Configure all ports on the Switch lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured speed Allows the user to adjust the speed for a port or range of ports The user has a choice of the following e auto Enables auto negotiation for the specified range of ports e 10 100 1000 Configures the speed in Mbps for the specified range of ports Gigabit ports are statically set to 1000 and cannot be set to slower speeds When setting port speed to 1000 _full user should specify master or slave mode for 1000 base TX interface and leave the 1000 full without any master or slave setting for other interfaces e half full Configures the specified range of ports as either full duplex or half duplex flow_control enable disable Enable or disable flow control for the specified ports learning enable disable Enables or disables the MAC address learning on the specified range of ports medium_type Specify the medium type while the configured ports are combo ports It s an optional parameter for configuring medium type combo ports For no combo ports user does not need to specify medium_type in the commands state enable disable Enables or disables the specified range of ports des
52. lt value 100 100000 gt nni_bpdu_addr dot1d dotiad E C C C OP Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 119 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create vian Purpose Used to create a VLAN on the Switch Syntax create vlan lt vian_name 32 gt tag lt vianid 2 4094 gt type 1q_vlan advertisement Description This command allows the user to create a VLAN on the Switch Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN to be created lt vlanid 2 4094 gt The VLAN ID of the VLAN to be created Allowed values 2 4094 advertisement Specifies that the VLAN is able to join GVRP Restrictions Each VLAN name can be up to 32 characters Up to 4094 static VLANs may be created per configuration Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a VLAN v1 tag 2 DES 3528 5 create vlan vl tag 2 Command create vlan vl tag 2 Success DES 3528 5 create vlan vlanid Purpose Used to create multiple VLANs by VLAN ID list on the switch Syntax create vlan vlanid lt vidlist gt advertisement Description This command creates multiple VLANs on the switch Parameters lt vidlist gt Specifies a range of multiple VLAN IDs to be created advertisement Join GVRP or not If not the VLAN can t join dynamically Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue
53. lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt udp src_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt 1 source_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt destination_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt 1 profile_id lt value 1 14 gt profile _ name lt name 1 32 gt delete access profile profile _id lt value 1 14 gt all profile name lt name 1 32 gt 243 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters config access _ profile profile _id lt value 1 14 gt profile name lt name 1 32 gt add access_id auto_assign lt value 1 128 gt ethernet vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt source_mac lt macaddr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt destination _mac lt macaddr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt 802 1p lt value 0 7 gt ethernet_type lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt 1 ip vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vian_id lt value 1 4094 gt source_ip lt ipaddr gt destination_ip lt ipaddr gt dscp lt value 0 63 gt icmp type lt value 0 255 gt code lt value 0 255 gt igmp type lt value 0 255 gt tcp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt urg ack psh rst syn fin udp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt user_define lt hex Ox0 Oxfffttttf gt 1 packet_content offset_chunk_1 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff
54. lt number 0 10 gt Specifies the number of ping packets 0 means there is no ping test Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure ping packets DES 3528 5 config dhcp ping _ packets 4 Command config dhcp ping_packets 4 config dhcp pool ping_timeout Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to specify the amount of time the DHCP server must wait before timing out a ping packet config dhcp ping_timeout lt millisecond 10 2000 gt By default the DHCP server waits 10 milliseconds before timing out a ping packet lt millisecond gt Specifies the amount of time the DHCP server must wait before timing out a ping packet The default value is 500 Only Administrator level users can issue this command To configure the timeout value for ping packets DES 3528 5 config dhcp ping_timeout 100 Command config dhcp ping_timeout 100 480 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create dhcp pool manual_binding Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to specify the distinct identification of the client in dotted hexadecimal notation or hardware address for example 0122 b708 1388 where 01 represents the Ethernet media type and the IP address pair create dhcp pool manual_binding lt pool_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt hardware_address lt macadd
55. lt vian_name 32 gt add delete profile name lt profile_ name 1 32 gt 175 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Command eee o ooo mult icast_vlan group vlan mult icast_vlan group show mld_snooping lt z 32 gt multicast_vlan_group show mld_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt config mld_snooping multicast_vlan disable enable forward_unmatched Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to create a multicast VLAN Syntax create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt lt vlanid 2 4094 gt remap_priority lt value 0 7 gt none replace_priority Description This command will create a multicast_vlan Multiple multicast VLANs can be configured When creating an ISM VLAN it cannot duplicate with the VLAN entries in the existing 802 1Q VLAN database The ISM VLAN snooping function can co exist with the 1Q VLAN snooping function Parameters lt vian_name gt The name of the VLAN to be created Each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters vianid The VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN to be create The range is 2 4094 remap_priority The remap priority value 0 to 7 is associated with the data traffic to be forwarded on the multicast VLAN If None is specified the packet s original priority will be
56. regardless of protocol etc Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the router port resides lt vidlist gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured add delete Specifies whether to add or delete forbidden ports of the specified VLAN lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports that will be configured as forbidden router ports Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set up forbidden router ports DES 3528 5 config router_ports_forbidden vlan default add 1 10 Command config router_ports_ forbidden vlan default add 1 10 Success DES 3528 5 195 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable igmp_snooping Purpose Used to enable IGMP snooping on the Switch Syntax enable igmp_snooping Description This command allows users to enable IGMP snooping on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable IGMP snooping on the Switch DES 3528 5 enable igmp_snooping Command enable igmp_snooping Success DES 3528 5 disable igmp_snooping Purpose Used to enable IGMP snooping on the Switch Syntax disable igmp_snooping Description This command disables IGMP snooping on the Switch Parameters Entering this command without the parameter will disable igmp snooping
57. show mld_snooping MLD Snooping Global State Data Driven Learning Max Entries VLAN Name Query Interval Max Response Time Robustness Value Last Listener Query Interval Querier State Querier Role Querier IP Querier Expiry Time State Fast Done Report Suppression Rate Limit Version Data Driven Learning State Data Driven Learning Aged Out Data Driven Group Expiry Time VLAN Name Enabled 128 default 125 10 2 1 Enable Querier gt FE80 221 91FF FEAF EAOO 0 secs Enable Enable Disable No Limitation 2 Enable Disable 260 gt mvl q Quit n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All show mlid_snooping group Used to display the current MLD snooping group configuration on the switch Purpose show mid_snooping group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt lt ipv6addr gt data_driven This command displays the current MLD snooping group configuration on the switch Syntax Description Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which you want to view the MLD snooping configuration If no parameter is specified the system will display all current MLD snooping group lt vidlist gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured lt portlist gt The list of ports for which to view MLD snooping group information lt ipv6addr gt To view the information of this specified
58. show multicast vian_ filtering mode Purpose Used to show the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs Syntax show multicast vian_filtering_mode vlanid lt vidlist gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Description The command displays the multicast packet filtering mode for VLAN Parameters vianid_list Specifies a range of vlans to be configured If no parameter specified the deivce will show all multicast filtering settings in the device Restrictions None Example usage To display multicast VLAN filtering mode for VLANs DES 3528 5 show multicast vlan_filtering_mode Command show multicast vlan_filtering_mode VLAN ID VLAN Name Multicase Filter Mode 100 Sales forward_all_groups 200 PM forward_all_groups 600 Customer filter unregistered groups Total Entries DES 3528 5 99 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual TRAFFIC CONTROL COMMANDS On a computer network packets such as Multicast packets and Broadcast packets continually flood the network as normal procedure At times this traffic may increase do to a malicious endstation on the network or a malfunctioning device such as a faulty network card Thus switch throughput problems will arise and consequently affect the overall performance of the switch network To help rectify this packet storm the Switch will monitor and control the situation The packet storm is monitored to determine if too many packet
59. used The default setting is none replace_priority Specifies that packet s priority will be changed by the Switch based on the remap priority This flag will only take effect when remap priority is set Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create IGMP snoop multicast VLAN mv12 DES 3528 5 create igmp_snoop multicast_vlan mvl 2 Command create igmp_snoop multicast_vlan mvl 2 Success DES 3528 5 176 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to configure the parameter of the specific multicast VLAN Syntax config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete member_port lt portlist gt source_port lt portlist gt untag_source_port lt portlist gt tag_member_port lt portlist gt state enable disable replace_source_ip lt ipaddrs gt remap_ priority lt value 0 7 gt none replace_priority 1 Description This command allows you to add a untagged member port a tagged member port a untagged source port and a tagged source port to the port list The untagged member port and the untagged source port will automatically become the untagged members of the multicast VLAN the tagged member port and the tagged source port will automatically become the tagged members of the multicast VLAN To change the port list the Switch will ad
60. 0 0 OFF Interim state during line detection Enabled Critical 1000 User defined 0 0 0 0 OFF Interim state during line detection Enabled Low 7000 User defined 0 0 0 0 OFF Interim state during line detection CTRL Quit J amp F A Next Page i Previous Page f Refresh 449 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual PPPOE Circuit ID INSERTION COMMANDS The PPPOE Circuit ID Insertion commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state enable disable Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state Purpose Used to configure the pppoe circuit id insertion state on the Switch Syntax config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state enable disable Description When the setting is enabled the system will insert the circuit ID tag to the received PPPoE discover request and also the request packet if the tag is absent While enabled it will remove the circuit ID tag from the received PPPoE offer and session confirmation packet The circuit ID will contain the following information Client MAC address switch IP address and port number The setting is disabled by default Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To
61. 07 36 Command config arpentry 10 48 74 12 00 50 BA 00 07 36 Success DES 3528 5 delete arpentry Purpose Used to delete a static entry into the ARP table Syntax delete arpentry lt ipaddrs gt all Description This command is used to delete a static ARP entry made using the create arpentry command above by specifying either the IP address of the entry or all Specifying all clears the Switch s ARP table Parameters lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the end node or station all Deletes all ARP entries Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example Usage To delete an entry of IP address 10 48 74 121 from the ARP table DES 3528 5 delete arpentry 10 48 74 121 Command delete arpentry 10 48 74 121 Success DES 3528 5 294 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config arp_aging time Purpose Used to configure the age out timer for ARP table entries on the Switch Syntax config arp_aging time lt sec 30 3932100 gt 0 Description This command sets the maximum amount of time in seconds that an ARP entry can remain in the Switch s ARP table without being accessed before it is dropped from the table Parameters time lt sec 30 3932100 gt 0 The ARP age out time in seconds The value may be set in the range of 0 or 30 to 3932100 seconds with a default setting of 1200 seconds Restrictions Only Admi
62. 0x0 Oxffffffff gt Specifies that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID and the mask options behind the IP header packet_content_mask Allows users to examine up to 4 specified offset_chunk within a packet at one time and specifies that the Switch will mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified as follows packet_content_mask offset_chunk_1 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_2 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_3 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_4 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt With this advanced unique Packet Content Mask also known as Packet Content Access Control List ACL D Link xStack switch family can effectively mitigate some network attacks like the common ARP Spoofing attack that is wide spread today This is the reason why Packet Content ACL is able to inspect any specified content of a packet in different protocol layers profile_id lt value 1 14 gt Sets the relative priority for the profile Priority is set relative to other profiles where the lowest profile ID has the highest priority The user may enter a profile ID number between 1 14 yet remember only 14 access profiles can be created on the Switch profile_name Specifies the name of the profile The maximum length is 32 characters IPV6 Denotes that IPv6 packets will be examined by the Switch for forwarding or filtering based on the rules conf
63. 1 1 1 for VID 1 201 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 create igmp_snooping static_group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 Command create igmp_snooping static_group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 Success DES 3528 show igmp_snooping static_group Purpose Used to display a IGMP Snooping multicast group static member port Syntax show igmp_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipv6addr gt Description This command is used to display a IGMP Snooping multicast group static member port Parameters vlan The name of the VLAN on which the router port resides vianid The ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides joaddr Specifies the multicast group IP address for Layer 3 switch Restrictions None Example usage To display all the IGMP snooping static groups DES 3528 5 show igmp snooping static _group VLAN ID Name IP Address Static Member Ports 1 Default 239 1 1 1 Total Entries DES 3528 5 delete igmp_snooping static_group Purpose Used to delete the current IGMP snooping static group on the Switch Syntax delete igmp_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipaddr gt Description This command is used to delete an igmp snooping static group and it will not affect the IGMP snooping dynamic member ports of a group Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the V
64. 1 28 Forbidden Ports VID 100 VLAN Name VLAN Type Dynamic Advertisement Enabled Member Ports 8 Static Ports Current Tagged Ports 8 Current Untagged Ports Static Tagged Ports Static Untagged Ports Forbidden Ports Total Static VLAN Entries 1 Total GVRP VLAN Entries 1 DES 3528 5 DES 3528 5 show vlan ports 1 4 Command show vlan ports 1 4 Untagged Tagged Dynamic Forbidden 125 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show port_vlan Purpose Used to display the ports VLAN attibutes on the Switch Syntax show port_vlan lt portlist gt Description This command displays the GVRP status for a port list on the Switch Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports to be displayed If no parameter specified system will display all ports GVRP information Restrictions None Example usage To display GVRP port status DES 3528 5 show port_vlan 1 10 Command show port_vlan 1 10 Ingress Checking Acceptable Frame Type Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled FuoOANTA UB WD O PRPRPRPRPRPPP PP HJ O ct w H FA m ct K H M n create dot1v_protocol_group Purpose Used to create a protocol group for protocol VLAN function Syntax create dot1v_protocol_ group group_id lt id 1 16 gt grou
65. 10 10 1 Command config dhcp pool netbios_name_server accounting 10 10 10 1 config dhcp pool netbios_node_type Purpose Used to specify the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client Syntax config dhcp pool netbios_node_type lt pool_name 12 gt broadcast peer_to_peer mixed hybrid Description The NetBIOS node type for Microsoft DHCP clients can be one of four settings broadcast peer to peer mixed or hybrid This command is used to configure NetBIOS over a TCP IP device By default NetBIOS node type is broadcast Parameters lt pool name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool lt node type gt Specifies the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the NetBIOS node type DES 3528 5 config dhcp pool netbios_node_type accounting hybrid Command config dhcp pool netbios_node_type accounting hybrid Success 477 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config dhcp pool default_router Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to specify the IP address of the default router for a DHCP client Up to three IP addresses can be specified in one command line config dhcp pool default_router lt pool_ name 12 gt lt ipaddrs gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt After a DHCP client has booted the client
66. 100 high high threshold that Specifies the percent of queue space utilized By default the value is 80 The range is 0 to 100 drop_rate low probabilistic drop rate if above the low threshold By default the value is 1 high probabilistic drop rate if above the high threshold By default the value is 1 drop_green disable probabilistic drop red colored packets if the queue depth is above the low threshold and probabilistic drop yellow colored packets if the queue depth is above the high threshold By default if the option is not specified the setting is disable enable probabilistic drop yellow and red colored packets if the queue depth is above the low threshold and probabilistic drop green colored packets if the queue depth is above the high threshold E NOTE There are 8 drop rates lj 100 6 25 3 125 1 5625 0 78125 0 390625 0 1953125 8 0 09765625 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command NO oR WD 398 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure sred DES 3528 5 config sred all all threshold low 64 high 80 drop_rate low 8 high 8 drop_green disable Command config sred all all threshold low 64 high 80 drop_rate low 8 high 8 drop_green disable Success DES 3528 5 show sred Purpose Used to display the simple RED configure parameter Syntax show sred l
67. 10000 Milliseconds NNI BPDU Address dotlid DES 3528 5 enable vian_ trunk Purpose Used to enable the VLAN trunk function Syntax enable vian_trunk Description This command enables the VLAN trunk function When enabled the VLAN trunk ports shall be able to forward all tagged frames with any VID Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the VLAN trunk DES 3528 5 enable vlan trunk Command enable vlan trunk Success DES 3528 5 disable vian_ trunk Purpose Used to disable the VLAN trunk function Syntax disable vian_ trunk Description This command disables the VLAN trunk function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the VLAN trunk DES 3528 5 disable vlan trunk Command disable vlan trunk Success DES 3528 5 132 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config vian_trunk ports Purpose Used to configure a port as a VLAN trunk port Syntax config vian_trunk ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable Description This command is used to configure a port as a VLAN trunk port When a port is configured as a VLAN trunk port all tagged frames shall be able to pass through this port Parameters lt portlist gt Specify a range of ports to be configured enable
68. 15 clock daemon 4 security authorization messages 16 local use 0 local 5 messages generated internally by 17 local use 1 local1 syslog 18 local use 2 local2 6 line printer subsystem 19 local use 3 local3 7 network news subsystem 20 local use 4 local4 8 UUCP subsystem 21 local use 5 local5 9 clock daemon 22 local use 6 local6 10 security authorization messages 23 local use 7 local7 11 FTP daemon 71 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create syslog host Restrictions Example usage local0 Specifies that local use 0 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 16 from the list above local1 Specifies that local use 1 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 17 from the list above local2 Specifies that local use 2 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 18 from the list above local3 Specifies that local use 3 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 19 from the list above local4 Specifies that local use 4 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 20 from the list above local5 Specifies that local use 5 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 21 from the list above local6 Specifies that local use 6 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 22 fr
69. 255 0 Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 142 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config vlan_precedence ports Purpose Use to configure VLAN classification precedence Syntax config vlan_precedence ports lt portlist gt mac_based_vlan subnet_vlan Description This command is used to configure VLAN classification precedence on each port You can specify MAC based VLAN classification or subnet based VLAN classification If a port s VLAN classification is set to MAC based VLAN precedence and a packet matches both MAC based VLAN and subnet based VLAN entry the packet will be processed based on MAC based VLAN entry If a port s VLAN classification is set to subnet based VLAN precedence and a packet matches both MAC based and subnet based VLAN entries the packet will be processed based on subnet based VLAN entry Parameters lt portlist gt Specify a range of ports to be configured mac_based_vlan Specifies to precede subnet based VLAN classification subnet_vlan Specifies to precede MAC based VLAN classification Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure subnet based VLAN classification precedence on port 1 DES 3528 5 config vlan_precedence ports 1 subnet_vlan Command config vlan_precedence ports 1 subnet_vlan Success DES 3528 5 show vlan_precedence ports Purpose Use to display VL
70. 32 gt vianid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt This command is used to display mac_based_access_ control local database mac Display mac_based_access_ control local database by this MAC address vlan Display mac_based_access_control local database by this VLAN name vianid Display mac_based_access_control local database by this VLAN id None To display mac based access control local 426 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show mac based access control local Command show mac based access control local MAC Address VID 00 00 00 00 00 01 1 00 00 00 00 00 02 123 00 00 00 00 00 03 123 00 00 00 00 00 04 1 Total Entries 4 DES 3528 5 To display mac based access control local by mac address DES 3528 5 show mac based access control local mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 Command show mac _ based access control local mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 01 Total Entries 1 To display mac based access control local by vlan DES 3528 5 show mac based access control local vlan default Command show mac _ based access _ control local vlan default MAC Address 00 00 00 00 00 01 1 00 00 00 00 00 04 1 Total Entries 2 DES 3528 5 show mac_based_ access _ control auth_state Purpose Used to display mac_based_access_control authenticated state setting Syntax show mac_based_access_control auth_state ports lt portlist gt
71. 34 224 19 162 200 Multicast Addresses customer 224 19 62 34 224 19 162 200 DES 3528 5 config max_mcast_group Purpose Used to configure the maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join Syntax config max_mcast_group ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt max_group lt value 1 1024 gt infinite action drop replace 1 Description This command configures the maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join Parameters lt portlist gt A range of ports to config the max_mcast_group lt vidlist gt A range of VLAN IDs to config the max_mcast_group max_group Specifies the maximum number of the multicast groups The range is from 7 to 1024 or infinite Infinite is the default setting action Specifies the action to handle the newly learned group when the register is full drop The newly learned group will be dropped replace The newly learned group will replace the eldest group in the register table Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the maximum number of multicast groups DES 3528 5 config max_mcast_group ports 1 3 max_group 100 Command config max_mcast_group ports 1 3 max_group 100 Success DES 3528 5 169 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show max_mcast_group Purpose Used to display the max number of multica
72. 5 disable voice vlan Command disable voice vlan Success DES 3528 5 config voice_vlan priority Purpose Used to configure voice VLAN priority Syntax config voice_vlan priority lt int 0 7 gt Description This command is used to configure voice VLAN priority The voice VLAN priority will be the priority associated with the voice VLAN traffic so as to distinguish the QoS of the voice traffic from data traffic Parameters lt int 0 7 gt Specifies the priority of the voice VLAN It ranges from 0 to 7 The default setting is 5 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the voice VLAN priority to 6 DES 3528 5 config voice_vlan priority 6 Command config voice_vlan priority 6 Success DES 3528 5 135 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config voice_vlan oui Purpose Used to configure the user defined OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier of Voice device for voice VLAN Syntax config voice_vlan oui add lt macaddr gt lt macmask gt description lt desc 32 gt delete lt macaddr gt lt macmask gt Description This command is used to configure the user defined OUI for voice traffic The OUI is used to identify the voice traffic There are a number of pre defined OUls The user can further define the user defined OUls However the user defined OUI cannot be the same as pre defined O
73. 5 show snmp view Command show snmp view Vacm View Table Settings View Type ReadView Included WriteView Included NotifyView oP Included restricted s336 1 2 1 Included restricted s36 44261 Included restricted 3 6 1 6 3 2 Included restricted 3 6 1 6 3 Sibi Included restricted 3 6 1 6 3 Po oe Included CommunityView Included CommunityView 30Gb 6 Excluded CommunityView 3 Ocbe Ou Included Total Entries 11 DES 3528 5 create snmp community Purpose Used to create an SNMP community string to define the relationship between the SNMP manager and an agent The community string acts like a password to permit access to the agent on the Switch One or more of the following characteristics can be associated with the community string An Access List of IP addresses of SNMP managers that are permitted to use the community string to gain access to the Switch s SNMP agent An MIB view that defines the subset of all MIB objects that will be accessible to the SNMP community read_write or read_only level permission for the MIB objects accessible to the SNMP community Syntax create snmp community lt community_ string 32 gt view lt view_name 32 gt read_ only read_ write Description This command is used to create an SNMP community string and to assign access limiting characteristics to this community string Parameters lt community_ string 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to ide
74. 6 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 22 from the list above local7 Specifies that local use 7 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 23 from the list above udp_port lt udp_port_number gt Specifies the UDP port number that the syslog protocol will use to send messages to the remote host state enable disable Allows the sending of syslog messages to the remote host specified above to be enabled and disabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure a Syslog host DES 3528 5 config syslog host 1 severity all Command config syslog host 1 severity all Success DES 3528 5 Example usage To configure a syslog host for all hosts DES 3528 5 config syslog host all severity all Command config syslog host all severity all Success DES 3528 5 74 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete syslog host Purpose Used to remove a syslog host that has been previously configured from the Switch Syntax delete syslog host lt index 1 4 gt all Description This command is used to remove a syslog host that has been previously configured from the Switch Parameters lt index 1 4 gt Specifies that the command will be applied to an index of hosts There are four available indexes numbered 1 through 4 all
75. 6A A5 2C 00 05 5D 9A FE 6D 00 05 5D DB BA 7C 00 05 5D ED 84 52 00 05 5D ED 84 7B q Quit n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All config multicast vlan_filtering_mode Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure the the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANSs config multicast vlan_filtering_mode vlanid lt vidlist gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt all forward_all_ groups forward_unregistered_groups filter_unregistered_groups The command configures the multicast packet filtering mode for VLANs Vianid_list Specifies a range of VLANs to be configured The filtering mode can be any of the following forward_all_groups All multicast groups will be forwarded based on VLAN forward_unregistered_groups The registered group will be forwarded based on the register table The unregister group will be forwarded based on VLAN filter_unregistered_groups The registered group will be forwarded based on the register table The unregister group will be filtered Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure the multicast packet filtering mode for vlans DES 3528 5 config multicast vlan_filtering_mode vlan 200 300 forward_all_groups Command Success DES 3528 5 config multicast vlan_filtering_mode vlan 200 300 forward_all_groups 98 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual
76. 802 1x guest_vlan Trinity Command delete 802 1x guest_vlan Trinity Success DES 3528 5 config radius add Purpose Used to configure the settings the Switch will use to communicate with a RADIUS server Syntax config radius add lt server_index 1 3 gt lt server_ip gt key lt passwd 32 gt default auth_port lt udp_port_number 1 65535 gt acct_port lt udp_port_number 1 65535 gt timeout lt int 1 255 gt retransmit lt int 1 255 gt 1 Description This command is used to configure the settings the Switch will use to communicate with a RADIUS server Parameters lt server_index 1 3 gt Assigns a number to the current set of RADIUS server settings Up to three groups of RADIUS server settings can be entered on the Switch lt server_ip gt The IP address of the RADIUS server key Specifies that a password and encryption key will be used between the Switch and the RADIUS server lt passwd 32 gt The shared secret key used by the RADIUS server and the Switch Up to 32 characters can be used default Uses the default UDP port number in the auth_port acct_port timeout and retransmit parameters auth_port lt udpo_port_number 1 65535 gt The UDP port number for authentication requests The default is 1812 acct_port lt udpo_port_number 1 65535 gt The UDP port number for accounting requests The default is 7873 timeout lt int 1 255 gt The time in second for waiting for a server r
77. Allows users to specify the display of link aggregation by the algorithm in use by that group Restrictions None Example usage To display Link Aggregation configuration 148 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show link_aggregation Command show link_aggregation Link Aggregation Algorithm mac_source_dest 1 LACP Master Port e Member Port 1 8 Active Port 7 Status Enabled Flooding Port 7 Total Entries DES 3528 5 config lacp_ports Purpose Used to configure settings for LACP compliant ports Syntax config lacp_ports lt portlist gt mode active passive Description This command is used to configure ports that have been previously designated as LACP ports see create link_aggregation Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured mode Select the mode to determine if LACP ports will process LACP control frames e active Active LACP ports are capable of processing and sending LACP control frames This allows LACP compliant devices to negotiate the aggregated link so the group may be changed dynamically as needs require In order to utilize the ability to change an aggregated port group that is to add or subtract ports from the group at least one of the participating devices must designate LACP ports as active Both devices must support LACP passive LACP ports that are designated as pa
78. DES 3528 5 config authen parameter response _ timeout 60 Command config authen parameter response_timeout 60 Success DES 3528 5 config authen parameter attempt Purpose Used to configure the maximum number of times the Switch will accept authentication attempts Syntax config authen parameter attempt lt int 1 255 gt Description This command will configure the maximum number of times the Switch will accept authentication attempts Users failing to be authenticated after the set amount of attempts will be denied access to the Switch and will be locked out of further authentication attempts Command line interface users will have to wait 60 seconds before another authentication attempt Telnet users will be disconnected from the Switch Parameters parameter attempt lt int 1 255 gt Set the maximum number of attempts the user may try to become authenticated by the Switch before being locked out The default setting is 3 Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 325 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To set the maximum number of authentication attempts at 5 DES 3528 5 config authen parameter attempt 5 Command config authen parameter attempt 5 Success DES 3528 5 show authen parameter Purpose Used to display the authentication parameters currently configured on the Switch Syntax show authen parameter Descr
79. DHCP relay configuration Restrictions None Example usage To show the DHCP relay configuration DES 3528 5 show dhcp relay Command show dhcp_relay DHCP Bootp Relay Status Disabled DHCP Bootp Hops Count Limit 4 DHCP Bootp Relay Time Threshold 0 Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 State Disabled Client Identifier Option 61 State Disabled Relay Agent Information Option 82 State Disabled Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check Disabled Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy Replace Relay Agent Information Option 82 Remote ID 00 21 91 AF EA 00 Interface Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4 Example usage To show a single IP destination of the DHCP relay configuration DES 3528 5 show dhcp_relay ipif System Command show dhcp _ relay ipif System DHCP Bootp Relay Status Disabled DHCP Bootp Hops Count Limit 4 DHCP Bootp Relay Time Threshold 0 Vendor Class Identifier Option 60 State Disabled Client Identifier Option 61 State Disabled Relay Agent Information Option 82 State Disabled Relay Agent Information Option 82 Check Disabled Relay Agent Information Option 82 Policy Replace Relay Agent Information Option 82 Remote ID 00 21 91 AF EA 00 Interface Server 1 Server 2 Server 3 Server 4 212 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable dhcp_relay Purpose Used to enable the DHCP BOOTP relay function on the Switch Syntax enable
80. For example 19 42 30 Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Manually configured system time and date settings are overridden if SNTP support is enabled To manually set system time and date settings DES 3528 5 config time 30jun2003 16 30 30 Command config time 30jun2003 16 30 30 Success DES 3528 5 config time_zone Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to determine the time zone used in order to adjust the system clock config time_zone operator hour lt gmt_hour 0 13 gt min lt minute 0 59 gt This command adjusts system clock settings according to the time zone Time zone settings will adjust SNTP information accordingly operator Choose to add or subtract time to adjust for time zone relative to GMT hour Select the number of hours different from GMT min Select the number of minutes difference added or subtracted to adjust the time zone Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure time zone settings 290 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config time_zone operator hour 2 min 30 Command config time_zone operator hour 2 min 30 Success DES 3528 5 config dst Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to enable and configure time adjustments to allow for the use of Daylight
81. MD5 or SHA Authentication is based on the HMAC MD5 or HMAC SHA algorithms AuthNoPriv MD5 DES or SHA DES Authentication is based on the HMAC MD5 or HMAC SHA algorithms AuthPriv DES 56 bit encryption is added based on the CBC DES DES 56 standard The network management commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create snmp user lt user_name 32 gt lt groupname 32 gt encrypted by password auth md5 lt auth_password 8 16 gt sha lt auth_password 8 205 priv none des lt priv_password 8 16 gt by_key auth md5 lt auth_key 32 32 gt sha lt auth_key 40 40 gt priv none des lt priv_key 32 32 gt fsrowsompuser S S Ee create snmp group lt groupname 32 gt v1 v2c v3 noauth_nopriv auth_nopriv auth_priv read_view lt view_name 32 gt write _view lt view_name 32 gt notify_view lt view_name 32 gt 1 delete snmp group lt groupname 32 gt show snmp groups show snmp groups groups create snmp host lt ipaddr gt v1 v2c v3 noauth_nopriv auth_nopriv auth_priv lt auth_string 32 gt 37 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Command show snmp host Parameters feabesmpras wesmoen res owore S ooo EO sd Ee C C dE Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create snmp user Purpos
82. Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage This config 802 1p map 402 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config 802 1lp map 1 8 1lp_color 1 to red Command config 802 1p map 1 8 1p_color 1 to red Success DES 3528 5 show 802 1p map Purpose Used to display the 1p to color mapping Syntax show 802 1p map 1p_color lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the 1p to color mapping Parameters portlist A range of ports to show Restrictions None Example usage This show 802 1p map DES 3528 5 show 802 1p map lp color Command show 802 1p map l1p_color 802 1p to Color Mapping entry All 403 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual MLD SNOOPING COMMAND LIST The MLD Snooping Commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all state enable disable fast_done enable disable report_suppression enable disable 1 vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all query_interval lt sec 1 65535 gt max_response_time lt sec 1 25 gt robustness variable lt value 1 255 gt last_ o _query_interval lt sec 1 25 gt state enable disab
83. Querier 10 24 73 21 0 secs Enable Enable Disable No Limitation 3 Enable Disable 260 Used to display the currently configured router ports on the Switch show router_ports vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all static dynamic This command will display the router ports currently configured on the Switch lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the router port resides lt vidlist gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured static Displays router ports that have been statically configured dynamic Displays router ports that have been dynamically configured forbidden Displays router ports that are forbidden Restrictions None Example usage To display the router ports 197 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show router_ports all Command show router_ports all VLAN Name default Static Router Port gt 1 10 Dynamic Router Port Router IP Forbidden Router Port Total Entries 1 198 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show igmp_snooping group Purpose Used to display the current IGMP snooping configuration on the Switch Syntax show igmp_ snooping group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt lt ipaddr gt data_driven Description This command will displa
84. Savings Time DST config dst disable repeating s_week lt start_week 1 4 last gt s_day lt start_day sun sat gt s mth lt start_mth 1 12 gt s_ time start_time hh mms gt e_week lt end_week 1 4 last gt e_day lt end_day sun sat gt e_mth lt end_mth 1 12 gt e_time lt end_time hh mm gt offset 30 60 90 120 annual s_date start_date 1 31 gt s_ mth lt start_mth 1 12 gt s_ time lt start_time hh mms gt e_date lt end_date 1 31 gt e mth lt end_mth 1 12 gt e_time lt end_time hh mms offset 30 60 90 120 DST can be enabled and configured using this command When enabled this will adjust the system clock to comply with any DST requirement DST adjustment effects system time for both manually configured time and time set using SNTP service disable Disable the DST seasonal time adjustment for the Switch repeating Using repeating mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Repeating mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified using a formula For example specify to begin DST on Saturday during the second week of April and end DST on Sunday during the last week of October annual Using annual mode will enable DST seasonal time adjustment Annual mode requires that the DST beginning and ending date be specified concisely For example specify to begin DST on April 3 and end DST on October 14 s_week Configure the week of the month in which DST begins
85. Source Address in the Ethernet frame will be PC A s MAC address Since an ARP request is sent via a broadcast the Destination address is in the format of an Ethernet broadcast FF FF FF FF FF FF 512 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Destination Source address Ether type ARP FCS address a i l i i l i i S Table 2 Ethernet frame format When the switch receives the frame it will check the Source Address in the Ethernet frame s header If the address is not in its Forwarding Table the switch will learn PC A s MAC and the associated port into its Forwarding Table OANE UE LAT ME le Porti 00 20 5C 01 11 11 In addition when the switch receives the broadcast ARP request it will flood the frame to all ports except the source port port 1 see Figure 2 et Who is 10 10 10 2 i 00 20 5C 01 33 33 00 20 50 01 11 11 10 10 10 3 10 10 10 1 00 20 5C 01 44 44 00 20 5C 01 22 22 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 2 Figure 2 When the switch floods the frame of ARP requests to the network all PCs will receive and examine the frame but only PC B will reply to the query as the destination IP address of PC B matches see Figure 3 i re 00 20 5C 01 33 33 10 10 10 3 Target a 00 20 50 01 44 44 lam 10 10 10 2 00 20 50 01 22 22 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 2 Figure 3 513 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethern
86. Spanning Tree Protocol 802 1D STP 802 1w Rapid STP and 802 1s MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol or MSTP is a standard defined by the IEEE community that allows multiple VLANs to be mapped to a single spanning tree instance which will provide multiple pathways across the network Therefore these MSTP configurations will balance the traffic load preventing wide scale disruptions when a single spanning tree instance fails This will allow for faster convergences of new topologies for the failed instance Frames designated for these VLANs will be processed quickly and completely throughout interconnected bridges utilizing either of the three spanning tree protocols STP RSTP or MSTP This protocol will also tag BDPU packets so receiving devices can distinguish spanning tree instances spanning tree regions and the VLANs associated with them These instances will be classified by an instance_id MSTP will connect multiple spanning trees with a Common and Internal Spanning Tree CIST The CIST will automatically determine each MSTP region its maximum possible extent and will appear as one virtual bridge that runs a single spanning tree Consequentially frames assigned to different VLANs will follow different data routes within administratively established regions on the network continuing to allow simple and full processing of frames regardless of administrative errors in defining VLANs and their respective spanning trees Each switch utilizing the MS
87. Specifies that the command will be applied to all hosts Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a previously configured syslog host DES 3528 5 delete syslog host 4 Command delete syslog host 4 Success DES 3528 5 show syslog host Purpose Used to display the syslog hosts currently configured on the Switch Syntax show syslog host lt index 1 4 gt Description This command is used to display the syslog hosts that are currently configured on the Switch Parameters lt index 1 4 gt Specifies that the command will be applied to an index of hosts There are four available indexes numbered 1 through 4 Restrictions None Example usage To show Syslog host information 75 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show syslog host Command show syslog host Syslog Global State Disabled Host Id Host IP Address Severity Facility UDP port Status Localo Disabled 10 40 2 3 Localo 514 Disabled 10 21 13 1 LocalO 514 Disabled Total Entries 3 DES 3528 5 config log_save_timing Purpose Used to configure the method to save log Syntax config log_save_timing time_interval lt min 1 65535 gt on_demand log_trigger Description This command is used to set the method to save log Parameters time_interval save log to flash every xxx minutes if no log happen in this period
88. Syntax create jwac user lt username 15 gt vlan lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command creates JWAC users into the local DB When local is chosen during configuring jwac RADIUS protocol the local DB will be used Parameters lt username 15 gt The user name to be created The max length of the username is 15 characters lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Target VLAN ID for authenticated host which uses this user account to pass authentication Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a JWAC user DES 3528 5 create jwac user twatanabe Command create jwac user twatanabe Enter a case sensitive new password Enter the new password again for confirmation Success DES 3528 5 362 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config jwac user Purpose Used to update local user DB Syntax config jwac user lt username 15 gt vlan lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command updates the local user DB Only the created user can be configured Parameters lt username 15 gt The user name to be created The max length of the username is 15 characters lt vianid 1 4094 gt Target VLAN ID for authenticated host which uses this user account to pass authentication Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure a JWAC user
89. The multicast packets will be forwarded to router ports If the data driven learning table is full the multicast packets will be forwarded according to the multicast filtering mode learned later the entry will become an ordinary MLD snooping entry That lp NOTE If a data driven group is created and MLD member ports are is the ageing out mechanism will follow the ordinary MLD snooping entry Parameters vian_name lt vilan_name gt The name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping data driven learning is to be configured Vianid lt vidlist gt The VID of the VLAN for which MLD snooping data driven learning is to be configured state enable disable Allows users to enable or disable MLD snooping data driven learning for the specified VLAN aged_out enable disable Allows users to enable or disable the aged_out time of the MLD Snooping data driven learning for the specified VLAN expiry_time lt second gt Allows users to set the time that an MLD Snooping data driven learning group will expire for the specified VLAN Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable data driven learning on VLAN default DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping data_driven_learning vlan_name default state enable aged_out enable expiry time 270 Command config mld_snooping data_driven_learning vlan_name default state enable aged_out enable expiry time 270 Success DES 3528 5
90. The system capability will indicate whether the device provides repeater bridge or router function and whether the provided functions are currently enabled The default state is disabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage Example To configure exclude the system name TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports DES 3528 5 config lldp ports all basic_tlvs system_name enable Command config lldp ports all basic_tlvs system_name enable Success DES 3528 5 376 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config llidp dot1_tlv_pvid Purpose Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of IEEE 802 1 Organizationally port VLAN ID TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements Syntax config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all dot1_tlv_pvid enable disable Description This TLV optional data type determines whether the IEEE 802 1 organizationally defined port VLAN TLV transmission is allowed on a given LLDP transmission capable port Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured all Use this parameter to set all ports in the system dot1_tlv_pvid This TLV optional data type determines whether the IEEE 802 1 organizationally defined port VLAN ID TLV transmission is allowed on a given LLDP transmission capable port The default state is disab
91. This command allows users to disable SSH on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage example To disable SSH DES 3528 5 disable ssh Command disable ssh Success DES 3528 5 config ssh authmode Purpose Used to configure the SSH authentication mode setting Syntax config ssh authmode password publickey hostbased enable disable Description This command will allow users to configure the SSH authentication mode for users attempting to access the Switch Parameters password This parameter may be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a locally configured password for authentication on the Switch publickey This parameter may be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a publickey configuration set on a SSH server for authentication hostbased This parameter may be chosen if the administrator wishes to use a host computer for authentication This parameter is intended for Linux users requiring SSH authentication techniques and the host computer is running the Linux operating system with a SSH program previously installed enable disable This allows users to enable or disable SSH authentication on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the SSH authentication mode by password DES 3528 5 config ssh authmode password enabl
92. This command is used to view the SSL certificate file information currently implemented on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view certificate file information on the Switch DES 3528 5 show ssl certificate Command show ssl certificate Loaded with RSA Certificate DES 3528 5 download ssl certificate Purpose Used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch Syntax download ssl certificate lt ipaddr gt certfilename lt path_filename 64 gt keyfilename lt path_filename 64 gt Description This command is used to download a certificate file for the SSL function on the Switch from a TFTP server The certificate file is a data record used for authenticating devices on the network It contains information about the owner keys for authentication and digital signatures Both the server and the client must have consistent certificate files for optimal use of the SSL function The Switch only supports certificate files with der file extensions Parameters lt ijpadar gt Enter the IP address of the TFTP server certfilename lt path_filename 64 gt Enter the path and the filename of the certificate file users wish to download keyfilename lt path_filename 64 gt Enter the path and the filename of the key exchange file users wish to download path_filename Private key file path respect to tftp server root path and input characters max to 64 octets Res
93. Used to reset the Switch to the factory default settings Syntax reset config system force_agree Description This command is used to restore the Switch s configuration to the default settings assigned from the factory Parameters contig f the keyword config is specified all of the factory default settings are restored on the Switch including the IP address user accounts and the switch history log The Switch will not save or reboot system If the keyword system is specified all of the factory default settings are restored on the Switch The Switch will save and reboot after the settings are changed to default Rebooting will clear all entries in the Forwarding Data Base force_agree When force_agree is specified the reset command will be executed immediatedly without further confirmation If no parameter is specified the Switch s current IP address user accounts and the switch history log are not changed All other parameters are restored to the factory default settings The Switch will not save or reboot e NOTE The serial port baud rate will not be changed by the reset command It ly will not be restored to the factory default setting Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To restore all of the Switch s parameters to their default values DES 3528 5 reset config Command reset config Are users sure to proceed with system reset y n
94. VLAN and enable or disable the VLAN advertisement config vlan lt vian_name 32 gt add tagged untagged forbidden delete lt portlist gt advertisement enable disable 1 This command allows the user to add ports to the port list of a previously configured VLAN and enable or disable the VLAN advertisement The user can specify the additional ports as tagging untagging or forbidden The default is to assign the ports as untagging lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN to which to add ports add Entering the add parameter will add ports to the VLAN There are three types of ports to add e tagged Specifies the additional ports as tagged e untagged Specifies the additional ports as untagged e forbidden Specifies the additional ports as forbidden delete Deletes ports from the specified VLAN lt portlist gt A port or range of ports to add to or delete from the specified VLAN advertisement enable disable Enables or disables GVRP on the specified VLAN Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To add 4 through 8 as tagged ports to the VLAN v1 121 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config vlan vl add tagged 4 8 Command config vlan vl add tagged 4 8 Success DES 3528 5 To delete ports from a VLAN DES 3528 5 config vlan vl delete 6 8 Command config vlan v1 delet
95. WE ORE OAES ore a ae aes oo 100 Configuration Init saeia ei oh Bove inde day a aS he OS _ Figure 1 2 Boot screen The Switch s MAC address can also be found in the Web management program on the Switch Information Basic Settings window on the Configuration menu The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web based manager The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface CLI over the console serial port as follows 1 Starting at the command line prompt enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress XXX XXX XXX XXx yyy yyy yyy yyy Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the y s represent the corresponding subnet mask 2 Alternatively users can enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx xxx xxx xxx z Where the x s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch s Telnet or Web based management agent DES 3528 5 config ipif System ipaddress 10 24 73 21 8 Command config ipif System ipaddress 10 24 73 21 8 Success DES 3528 5
96. a network Parameters joaddr The IP address of the DHCP server to be filtered macaddr The MAC address of the DHCP client state Enable Disable the DHCP filter state ports lt portlist gt The port number to which the DHCP filter will be applied Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Enabling the DHCP filter will create one access profile and create one access rule per port UDP port 67 Addition of a DHCP filter permit entry will create one access profile and create one access rule DA client MAC address SA source IP address and UDP port 67 Example usage To add an entry from the DHCP server client filter list in the switch s database DES 3528 5 config filter dhcp _server add permit server_ip 10 1 1 1 client_mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 port 1 26 Command config filter dhcp_server add permit server_ip 10 1 1 1 client_mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 port 1 26 Success DES 3528 5 To configure the DHCP filter state DES 3528 5 config filter dhcp _server ports 1 10 state enable Command config filter dhcp server ports 1 10 state enable Success DES 3528 5 show filter dhcp server Purpose Used to display current DHCP server client filter list created on the switch Syntax Show filter dhcp_server Description This command is used to display DHCP server client filter list created on the switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator users can issue this command
97. address In this case the system knows that somebody is using an IP address that is in conflict with the system In order to reclaim the correct host of this IP address the system can send out the gratuitous ARP request packet for this duplicate IP address Parameters enable Enable sending of gratuitous ARP when a duplicate IP is detected disable Disable sending of gratuitous ARP when a duplicate IP is detected Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example Usage To enable send a gratuitous ARP request when a duplicate IP is detected DES 3528 5 config gratuitous_arp send duplicate _ip detected enable Command config gratuitous_arp send duplicate_ip_ detected enable Success DES 3528 5 298 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config gratuitous_arp learning Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to enable disable the learning of ARP entries in the ARP cache based on the received gratuitous ARP packets config gratuitous_arp learning enable disable The command is used to enable disable updating the ARP cache based on the received gratuitous ARP packets The gratuitous ARP packet is sent by a source IP address that is identical to the IP that the packet is queries for Note that with the gratuitous ARP learning the system will not learn new entry but only do the
98. address_binding trap_log will enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IMPB When disabled the Switch will not send trap log messages Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable address binding trap log on the Switch DES 3528 5 disable address_binding trap_log Command disable address_ binding trap_log Success DES 3528 5 159 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual debug address_binding Purpose Used to configure the address binding debugging feature on the Switch Syntax debug address_binding event dhcp all Description This command is used to configure the IPMB debugging feature The debugging feature is disabled by default Parameters event The Switch will print out the debug messages when an IMPB module receives ARP IP packets dhcp The Switch will print out the debug messages when the IMPB module receives the DHCP packets all The Switch will print out all debugging messages Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To open the debug event DES 3528 5 debug address _ binding event Command debug address_binding event Success DES 3528 5 no debug address_binding Purpose Used to disable IMPB debugging on the Switch Syntax no debug address_binding Description This command is used to d
99. again for confirmation Success DES 3528 5 delete 802 1x user Purpose Used to delete 802 1X user Syntax delete 802 1x user lt username 15 gt Description This command deletes specified user Parameters lt username 15 gt Specifies deleting user name Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete user test DES 3528 5 delete 802 1x user test Command delete 802 1x user test Success DES 3528 5 show 802 1xX user Purpose Used to show 802 1X user Syntax show 802 1x user Description This command displays the 802 1X user account information Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the 802 1 X user information 223 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show 802 1x user Command show 802 1x user Current Accounts Username Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 config 802 1x auth_protocol Purpose Used to cofig the 802 1X auth protocol Syntax config 802 1x auth_protocol local radius_eap Description This command configures the 802 1X auth protocol Parameters local Specifies the auth protocol as local radius_eap Specifies the auth protocol as RADIUS EAP Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config the 802 1X RADIUS EAP DES 3528 5 config 802 1x auth_protocol radius_eap Command
100. and sent to the Target port rx Allows the mirroring of only packets received by flowing into the port or ports in the port list tx Allows the mirroring of only packets sent to flowing out of the port or ports in the port list both Mirrors all the packets received or sent by the port or ports in the port list Restrictions The Target port cannot be listed as a source port Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add the mirroring ports DES 3528 5 config mirror port 1 add source ports 2 5 both Command config mirror port 1 add source ports 2 5 both Success DES 3528 5 116 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To delete the mirroring ports DES 3528 5 config mirror port 1 delete source port 2 4 both Command config mirror 1 delete source 2 4 both Success DES 3528 5 enable mirror Purpose Used to enable a previously entered port mirroring configuration Syntax enable mirror Description This command combined with the disable mirror command below allows the user to enter a port mirroring configuration into the Switch and then turn the port mirroring on and off without having to modify the port mirroring configuration Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable mirroring configurations
101. authentication method DES 3528 5 config admin local_enable Command config admin local_enable Enter the old password Enter the case sensitive new password Enter the new password again for confirmation Success DES 3528 5 327 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual SSH COMMANDS The steps required to use the Secure Shell SSH protocol for secure communication between a remote PC the SSH Client and the Switch the SSH Server are as follows Create a user account with admin level access using the create account admin lt username gt lt password gt command This is identical to creating any other admin lever user account on the Switch including specifying a password This password is used to login to the Switch once secure communication has been established using the SSH protocol Configure the user account to use a specified authorization method to identify users that are allowed to establish SSH connections with the Switch using the config ssh authmode command There are three choices as to the method SSH will use to authorize the user and they are password publickey and hostbased Configure the encryption algorithm that SSH will use to encrypt and decrypt messages sent between the SSH Client and the SSH Server Finally enable SSH on the Switch using the enable ssh command After following the above steps users can configure an SSH Client on the rem
102. authentication request when the TACACS server does not respond This field is inoperable for the tacacs protocol Key Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS server only Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To view authentication server hosts currently set on the Switch 321 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show authen server host Command show authen server host IP Address Protocol Port Timeout Retransmit Key 10 53 13 94 TACACS Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 create authen server_group Purpose Used to create a user defined authentication server group Syntax create authen server_group lt string 15 gt Description This command will create an authentication server group A server group is a technique used to group TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server hosts into user defined categories for authentication using method lists The user may add up to eight authentication server hosts to this group using the config authen server_group command Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the newly created server group Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create the server group group_1 DES 3528 5 create authen server_group group_1 Command create auth
103. bandwidth control configuration on the Switch on a port by port basis Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be viewed Restrictions None Example usage To display port bandwidth control table 105 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show bandwidth control 1 10 Command show bandwidth control 1 10 Bandwidth Control Table Port RX Rate TX Rate Effective RX Effective TX Kbit sec Kbit sec Kbit sec Kbit sec ow OANA A WD EF _ O DES 3528 5 No Limit Limit Limit Limit Limit Limit Limit Limit Limit Limit config cos bandwidth_control Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to configure per port or flow bandwidth control For per flow bandwidth control it can be based on the assigned CoS queue config cos bandwidth_control ports lt portlist gt all lt cos_id_list 0 6 gt min_rate no_limit lt value 64 1024000 gt max_rate no_limit lt value 64 1024000 gt 1 This command is used to set per port or flow bandwidth control For per flow bandwidth control it can be based on the assigned CoS queue Mini rate specifies the minimal quaranteed bandwidth Specify no limit for the mini rate means no quaranteed bandwidth Max rate speficies the max rate limitatoin When it is specified packet transmitted from the queue will not exceed the specified max rate limitation even
104. bandwidth_control ports 1 10 2 min_rate 100 max_ rate 200 Command config cos bandwidth_control ports 1 10 2 min_rate 100 max_rate 200 The setting values are not a multiple of 64 closest values 128 and 192 are chosen Success DES 3528 5 show cos bandwidth_control Purpose Used to display the per port per cos queue bandwidth control setting Syntax show cos bandwidth_control lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the per port per cos queue bandwidth control setting Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be viewed Restrictions None Example usage To display port per cos bandwidth control table DES 3528 5 show cos bandwidth_control 10 Command show cos bandwidth control 10 Class Bandwidth Control Table On Port 10 Min Rate Kbit sec Max Rate Kbit sec No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit No Limit DES 3528 5 107 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config scheduling Purpose Used to configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each COS queue Syntax config scheduling ports lt portlist gt all lt class_id 0 6 gt strict weight lt value 1 127 gt Description The Switch contains eight hardware priority queues Incoming packets must be mapped to one of these eight queues This command is used to specify
105. been enabled as an 802 1X Guest VLAN 802 1X Guest VLAN clients are those who have not been authorized for 802 1X or they haven t yet installed the necessary 802 1X software yet would still like limited access rights on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions This VLAN must have already been previously created using the create vlan command Only one VLAN can be set as the 802 1X Guest VLAN Example usage To show 802 1X Guest VLAN DES 3528 5 show 802 1x guest_vlan Command show 802 1x guest_vlan Trinity Enable Guest VLAN Ports 5 8 Success DES 3528 5 233 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete 802 1x guest_vlian Purpose Used to delete a 802 1X Guest VLAN Syntax delete 802 1x guest_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command is used to delete an 802 1X Guest VLAN 802 1X Guest VLAN clients are those who have not been authorized for 802 1X or they haven t yet installed the necessary 802 1X software yet would still like limited access rights on the Switch Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt Enter the VLAN name of the 802 1X Guest VLAN to be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command This VLAN must have already been previously created using the create vlan command Only one VLAN can be set as the 802 1X Guest VLAN Example usage To delete a previously created 802 1X Guest VLAN DES 3528 5 delete
106. between requests for updated SNTP information The polling interval ranges from 30 to 99 999 seconds Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command SNTP service must be enabled for this command to function enable snip Example usage To configure SNTP settings DES 3528 5 config sntp primary 10 1 1 1 secondary 10 1 1 2 poll interval 30 Command config sntp primary 10 1 1 1 secondary 10 1 1 2 poll interval 30 Success DES 3528 5 288 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show snip Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the SNTP information show sntp This command will display SNTP settings information including the source IP address time and poll interval None None To display SNTP configuration information DES 3528 5 show sntp Command show sntp Current Time Source System Clock SNTP Disabled SNTP Primary Server o LO bs deed SNTP Secondary Server AOy eke Z SNTP Poll Interval 30 sec DES 3528 5 enable sntp Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to enable SNTP server support enable sntp This command enables SNTP support SNTP service must be separately configured see config sntp Enabling and configuring SNTP support will override any manually configured system time settings None O
107. brief Display the information in brief mode normal Display the information in normal mode This is the default display mode detailed Display the information in detailed mode Restrictions None Usage Example To display outbound LLDP advertisements for port 1 2 382 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show lldp local_ports 1 2 Command show lldp local_ports 1 2 ID Subtype ID Description PVID PPVID Entries Count VLAN Name Entries Count Protocol Identity Entries Count MAC PHY Configuration Status See Detail Link Aggregation See Detail Port ID Subtype Port ID Port Description RMON Port 1 on Unit 1 Port PVID or tae Management Address Count Be dae q Quit n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All show lldp remote_ports Purpose Used to display the information learned from the neighbor Syntax show lidp remote_ports lt portlist gt mode brief normal detailed Description This command displays the information learned from the neighbor parameters Due to a memory limitation only 32 VLAN Name entries and 10 Management Address entries can be received Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured mode Choose from three options brief Display the information in brief mode normal Display the information in normal mode This is the default display mode detailed Display the informa
108. by option 60 nor option 61 then per IPIF configured servers will be used to determine the relay servers Parameters enable Enables the fuction disable Disables the fuction Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage 213 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To configure DHCP relay option 60 state DES 3528 5 config dhcp relay option_60 state enable Command config dhcp_relay option_60 state enable Success DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_60 add Purpose This command is used to add a entry for dhcp_relay option_60 Syntax config dhcp_relay option_60 add string lt mutiword 255 gt relay lt ipaddr gt exact match partial match Description This command configures the option 60 relay rules Note that different strings can be specified with the same relay server and the same string can be specified with multiple relay servers The system will relay the packet to all the matching servers Parameters exact match The option 60 string in the packet must fully match the specified string partial match The option 60 string in the packet only need partial match with the specified string string The specified string ipaddress Specify a relay server IP address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure a new dhcp relay with
109. can issue this command 420 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure MAC based AC password DES 3528 5 config mac_based_access_control password switch Command config mac_based_access_control password switch Success DES 3528 5 config mac_based_access_control method Purpose Use to configure the MAC based AC authenticating method Syntax config mac_based_access_control method local radius Description This command is used to specify to authenticate via local database or via RADIUS server Parameters local Specify to authenticate via local database radius Specify to authenticate via RADIUS server Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure mac based access control authenticating method DES 3528 5 config mac_based_access_control method local Command config mac_based_access_control method local Success DES 3528 5 config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports Purpose Use to configure the MAC based AC guest VLAN membership Syntax Config mac_based_access_control guest_vlan ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to put the specified port in guest VLAN mode For those ports that are not contained in the port list they are in non guest VLAN mode For detailed information about operation of guest VLAN mode refer to the description for config ma
110. command is used to change the command prompt Parameters ee 16 The command prompt can be changed by entering a new name of no more that 16 characters username The command prompt will be changed to the login username default The command prompt will reset to factory default command prompt Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Other restrictions include e If the reset command is executed the modified command prompt will remain modified However the reset config reset system command will reset the command prompt to the original factory banner Example usage To modify the command prompt to AtYourService DES 3528 5 config command_prompt AtYourService Command config command_prompt AtYourService Success AtYourService admin5 22 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config greeting message Purpose Used to configure the login banner greeting message Syntax config greeting message default Description This command is used to modify the login banner greeting message Parameters default f the user enters default to the modify banner command then the banner will be reset to the original factory banner To open the Banner Editor click enter after typing the config greeting_message command Type the information to be displayed on the banner by using the commands described on the Banner E
111. current IGMP snooping static group information on the Switch Syntax create igmp_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipaddr gt Description This command allows you to create an igmp snooping static group Member ports can be added to the static group The static member and the dynamic member port form the member ports of a group The static group will only take effect when IGMP snooping is enabled on the VLAN For those static member ports the device needs to emulate the IGMP protocol operation to the querier and forward the traffic destined to the multicast group to the member ports For a layer 3 device the device is also responsible to route the packet destined for this specific group to static member ports The static member port will only affect V2 IGMP operation The Reserved IP multicast address 224 0 0 X must be excluded from the configured group The VLAN must be created first before a static group can be created Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to create IGMP snooping static group information lt vidlist gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to create IGMP snooping static group information lt jpaddr gt The static group address for which to create IGMP snooping static group information for Layer 3 switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a static group 226
112. database commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table lt vian_name 32 gt lt macadadr gt add delete lt portlist gt show fdb port lt port gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt mac_address lt macaddr gt static drop aging_time config multicast vlanid lt vidlist gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt all forward_all_ groups vian_filtering_ mode forward_unregistered_groups filter_unregistered_groups show multicast vlanid lt vidlist gt vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vian_filtering_ mode Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create fdb Purpose Used to create a static entry to the unicast MAC address forwarding table database Syntax create fdb lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vidlist gt lt macaddr gt port lt port gt Description This command will make an entry into the Switch s unicast MAC address forwarding database Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides Vianid lt vidlist gt The list of VLANs by VLAN ID lt macaddr gt The MAC address that will be added to the forwarding table port lt port gt The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address The Switch will always forward traffic to the specified device through this port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command
113. delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1 Command delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan v1 Success DES 3528 5 enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to enable the multicast VLAN function Syntax enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Description This command controls the multicast VLAN function The ISM VLAN will take effect when IGMP snooping multicast VLAN is enabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable IGMP snoop multicast VLAN DES 3528 5 enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Command enable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Success DES 3528 5 178 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to disable the multicast VLAN function Syntax disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Description This command is used to disable the IGMP snooping multicast VLAN function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable IGMP snoop multicast VLAN DES 3528 5 disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Command disable igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Success DES 3528 5 show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to show the information of multicast VLAN Syntax show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command allo
114. delete mac based access control local mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 Command delete mac based access control local mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 Success DES 3528 5 To delete the local database entry by vlan name DES 3528 5 delete mac based access control local vlan default Command delete mac based access control local vlan default Success DES 3528 5 425 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show mac_based_access_control Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display mac_based_access_control setting show mac_based_access_ control ports lt portlist gt This command is used to display mac_based_access_ control settings ports Display mac_based_access_control port state None To display mac based access control settings DES 3528 5 show mac_based_access_control ports 1 7 Command show mac_based_access_control ports 1 1 1 7 State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled DES 3528 5 Aging Time Block Time Auth Mode Max User mins secs Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based show mac_based_access_control_local Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display mac_based_access_control local database show mac_based_access_control_local mac lt macaddr gt vlan lt vlan_name
115. dhcp_relay Description This command is used to enable the DHCP BOOTP relay function on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable DHCP relay DES 3528 5 enable dhcp_relay Command enable dhcp_relay Success DES 3528 5 disable dhcp_relay Purpose Used to disable the DHCP BOOTP relay function on the Switch Syntax disable dhcp_relay Description This command is used to disable the DHCP BOOTP relay function on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable DHCP relay DES 3528 5 disable dhcp_relay Command disable dhcp_ relay Success DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_60 state Purpose This command is used to configure DHCP relay agent information option 60 state of the Switch Used to config dhcp_relay opton_60 state Syntax config dhcp_relay option_60 state enable disable Description This command decides whether DHCP relay will process the DHCP option 60 or not When enabled if packets do not have option 60 then the relay servers cannot be determined based on option 60 Because the priority of option 60 and option 61 is higher than per IPIF configured servers if the relay servers are determined based on option 60 or option 61 then per IPIF configured servers will be ignored If the relay servers are determined neither
116. display real time port and CPU utilization statistics show utilization cpu ports lt portlist gt This command will display the real time port and CPU utilization statistics for the Switch cou Entering this parameter will display the current cpu utilization of the Switch ports Entering this parameter will display the current port utilization of the Switch lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be displayed None To display the port utilization statistics 67 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show utilization ports Command show utilization ports TX sec RX sec Util Port TX sec RX sec Util O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O e O O O O O e O O O O O O O O O O O O O O e O O O O O CTRL C Pi Quit SJJ fi Next Page i Previous Page ff Refresh To display the current CPU utilization DES 3528 5 show utilization cpu Command show utilization cpu CPU utilization Five seconds 15 One minute 25 Five minutes 143 DES 3528 5 clear counters Purpose Used to clear the Switch s statistics counters Syntax clear counters ports lt portlist gt Description This command will clear the counters used by the Switch to compile statistics Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be displayed Restrictions Only A
117. don t save on_demand save log to flash whenever user type save log or save all This is also the default log_trigger save log to flash whenever log arrives Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure log_save_timing DES 3528 5 config log_save_timing on_demand Command config log_save_timing on_demand Success DES 3528 5 show log_save_timing Purpose Used to show the timing method to save log Syntax show log_save_timing Description This command is used to show method to save log Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show log_save_timing 76 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show log _save_timing Command show log_save_timing Saving Log Method On_demand show attack_log Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to show dangerous log messages show attack_log unit lt unit_id 1 8 gt index lt value_list gt This command is used to show content of dangerous log messages unit Specifies the unit of which the attack_log will be show if it is not specified it refers to the master unit value_list X Y The show log command will display the dangerous log messages between the log number of X and Y For example show dangerous log index 1 5 will display the dangerous log messages from 1 t
118. e lt Start_week 1 4 last gt The number of the week during the month in which DST begins where 1 is the first week 2 is the second week and so on last is the last week of the month e_ week Configure the week of the month in which DST ends e lt end_week 1 4 last gt The number of the week during the month in which DST ends where 1 Is the first week 2 is the second week and so on last is the last week of the month Ss day Configure the day of the week in which DST begins e lt Start_day sun sat gt The day of the week in which DST begins expressed using a three character abbreviation Sun mon tue wed thu fri sat e day Configure the day of the week in which DST ends e lt end_day sun sat gt The day of the week in which DST ends expressed using a three character abbreviation Sun mon tue wed thu fri sat s_mth Configure the month in which DST begins e lt Start_mth 1 12 gt The month to begin DST expressed as a number e_mth Configure the month in which DST ends e lt end_mth 1 12 gt The month to end DST expressed as a number s_time Configure the time of day to begin DST e lt Start_time hh mm gt Time is expressed using a 24 hour clock in hours and minutes 291 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config dst e_ time Configure the time of day to end DST e lt end_time hh mm gt Time is expressed
119. for which you want to view MLD snooping forwarding table information If no parameter is specified the system will display all current MLD snooping forwarding table entries Vianid The ID of the VLAN for which you want to view MLD snooping forwarding table information If no parameter is specified the system will display all current MLD snooping forwarding table Restrictions None 412 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the MLD snooping rate limit DES 3528 5 show mld_snooping forwarding Command show mld_snooping forwarding VLAN Name Source IP Source IP Multicast Group 2 8 Port Member Total Entries DES 3528 5 default gt 2004 1 gt FF1E 1 H 2T default gt 2004 2 gt FF1E 1 a es default gt 2004 2 FF1E 2 create mld_snooping static_group Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to configure a MLD Snooping multicast static group create mid_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipv6addr gt This command is used to create a mld snooping static group Member ports can be added to the static group The static member and the dynamic member port form the member ports of a group The static group will only take effect when MLD snooping is enabled on the VLAN For those static member ports the device needs to emula
120. frame function on the Switch Syntax enable jumbo_frame Description This command will allow ethernet frames larger than 1536 bytes to be processed by the Switch The maximum size of the jumbo frame may not exceed 9220 Bytes tagged Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enabled the jambo frame DES 3528 5 enable jumbo_frame Command enable jumbo_frame The maximum size of jumbo frame is 9216 bytes Success DES 3528 5 28 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable jumbo_frame Purpose Used to disable the jumbo frame function on the Switch Syntax disable jumbo_ frame Description This command will disable the jumbo frame function on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the jumbo frame DES 3528 5 disable jumbo_frame Command disable jumbo_frame Success DES 3528 5 show jumbo_frame Purpose Used to show the status of the jumbo frame function on the Switch Syntax show jumbo_ frame Description This command will show the status of the jumbo frame function on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the jumbo frame status currently configured on the Switch DES 3528 5 show jumbo_frame Command show jumbo_frame Jumbo Frame Sta
121. frame type specified Depending on the frame type the octet string will have one of the following values The form of the input is 0x0 to Oxffff For ethernet ll this is a 16 bit 2 octet hex value Example lpv4 is 800 ipv6 is 86dd ARP is 806 and so on For IEEE802 3 SNAP this is this is a 16 bit 2 octet hex value Example lpv4 is 800 ipv6 is 86dd ARP is 806 and so on For IEEE802 3 LLC this is the 2 octet IEEE 802 2 Link Service Access Point LSAP pair first octet for Destination Service Access Point DSAP and second octet for Source Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add a protocol IPv6 to protocol group 1 DES 3528 5 config dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 add protocol Ethernet_2 86DD Command config dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 add protocol Ethernet_2 86DD Success DES 3528 5 delete dotiv_protocol_group Purpose Used to delete a protocol group Syntax delete dot1iv_protocol_group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name 32 gt all Description This command deletes a protocol group Parameters group_id Specifies the group ID to be deleted group_name The name of the protocol group The maximum length is 32 characters Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete protocol group 1 DES 3528 5 delete dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 Command del
122. group data_driven To view the groups learnt by data driven only Restrictions None Example usage To show MLD snooping group on the switch 409 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show mld_snooping group Command show mld_snooping group Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports UP Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports UP Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports UP Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports Router Ports UP Time Expiry Time Filter Mode DES 3528 5 2004 2 FFI1E 3 default 1 1 2 127 120 INCLUDE 2004 2 FFI1E 2 default 1 3 320 120 gt EXCLUDE NULL FF1E 5 default 1 4 5 130 120 gt EXCLUDE NULL FF1E 5 default 1 24 1335 120 EXCLUDE show mid_snooping mrouter_ports Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to display the currently configured router ports on the switch show mid_snooping mrouter_ports vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all static dynamic forbidden This command displays the currently configured router ports on the switch vlan_name The name of the VLAN for which you want to view the MLD snooping configuration static Displays router ports that have been statically configured dynamic Displ
123. gt The user can set a percentage value of the rising CPU utilization which will trigger the Safeguard Engine function Once the CPU utilization rises to this percentage the Safeguard Engine mechanism will initiate falling lt value 20 100 gt The user can set a percentage value of the falling CPU utilization which will trigger the Safeguard Engine function to cease Once the CPU utilization falls to this percentage the Safeguard Engine mechanism will shut down trap_log enable disable Choose whether to enable or disable the sending of messages to the device s SNMP agent and switch log once the Safeguard Engine has been activated by a high CPU utilization rate mode strict fuzzy Used to select the type of Safeguard Engine to be activated by the Switch when the CPU utilization reaches a high rate The user may select 264 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config safeguard_engine Strict If selected this function will stop accepting all ARP packets not intended for the Switch and will stop receiving all unnecessary broadcast IP packets until the storm has subsided fuzzy f selected this function will instruct the Switch to minimize the IP and ARP traffic flow to the CPU by dynamically allotting an even bandwidth to all traffic flows Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure t
124. gt DES 3528 5 Figure 2 4 Using the Up Arrow to Re enter a Command In the above example the command config account was entered without the required parameter lt username gt the CLI returned the Next possible completions lt username gt prompt The up arrow cursor control key was pressed to re enter the previous xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual command config account at the command prompt Now the appropriate username can be entered and the config account command re executed All commands in the CLI function in this way In addition the syntax of the help prompts are the same as presented in this manual angle brackets lt gt indicate a numerical value or character string braces indicate optional parameters or a choice of parameters and brackets indicate required parameters If a command is entered that is unrecognized by the CLI the top level commands will be displayed under the Available commands prompt DES 3528 5 the Available commands cable diag cfm clear config create debug delete disable download enable login logout no ping reboot reconfig reset save set show telnet upload DES 3528 5 Figure 2 5 The Next Available Commands Prompt The top level commands consist of commands such as show or config Most of these commands require one or more parameters to narrow the top level command This is equivalent to show what or config what Where the
125. gt fobpdu enable disable nni_bpdu_addr dot1d dottad 1 Description This command is used to setup the Spanning Tree Protocol STP for the entire Switch All commands here will be implemented for the STP version that is currently set on the Switch Parameters maxage lt value 6 40 gt This value may be set to ensure that old information does not endlessly circulate through redundant paths in the network preventing the effective propagation of the new information Set by the Root Bridge this value will aid in determining that the Switch has spanning tree configuration values consistent with other devices on the bridged LAN If the value ages out and a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge the Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge The user may choose a time between 6 and 40 seconds The default value is 20 maxhops lt value 6 40 gt The number of hops between devices in a spanning tree region before the BPDU bridge protocol data unit packet sent by the Switch will be discarded Each switch on the hop count will reduce the hop count by one until the value reaches zero The Switch will then discard the BDPU packet and the information held for the port will age out The user may set a hop count from 6 to 40 The default is 20 hellotime lt value 1 2
126. gt offset_chunk_2 lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_3 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_4 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 ipv6 class lt value 0 255 gt flowlabel lt hex 0x0 Oxfffff gt tcp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt udp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt 1 source_ipv6 lt ipv6addr gt destination_ipv6 lt ipv6addr gt 1 port lt portlist gt all vlan based vlan_name lt vian_name gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt permit priority lt value 0 7 gt replace_priority rx_rate no_limit lt value 1 15624 gt replace_dscp_with lt value 0 635 replace_tos_precedence_with lt value 0 7 gt counter enable disable mirror deny time_range lt range_name 32 gt delete access_id lt value 1 128 gt show access _profile profile_id lt value 1 14 gt profile name lt name 1 32 gt enable cpu_interface_filtering disable cpu_interface_filtering create Cpu profile_id lt value 1 5 gt ethernet vlan source_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt access_profile destination_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt 802 1p ethernet_type 1 ip vlan Source_ip_ mask lt netmask gt destination_ip mask lt netmask gt dscp icmp type code igmp type tcp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt flag_mask all urg ack psh
127. igmp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field within each packet type lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to packets that have this IGMP type value tcp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Transmission Control Protocol TCP field within each packet e src_port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this TCP source port in their TCP header e dst port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this TCP destination port in their TCP header urg TCP control flag urgent ack TCP control flag acknowledgement psh TCP control flag push rst TCP control flag reset syn TCP control flag synchronize fin TCP control flag finish udp Specifies that the Switch will examine the User Datagram Protocol UDP field in each packet src_port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this UDP source port in their header dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this UDP destination port in their header protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the Switch will examine the protocol field in each packet and if this field contains the value entered here apply the following rules user_define lt hex 0x0 Oxfffffff g
128. is used to diable JWAC function None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To disable JWAC 352 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 disable jwac Command disable jwac Success DES 3528 5 enable jwac redirect Purpose Used to enable JWAC redirect function Syntax enable jwac redirect Description This command is for the unauthenticated host to be redirected to the Quarantine Server when it tries to access a random URL or JWAC login page in the Switch Parameters None Restrictions When enabling redirect to quarantine server a quarantine server must be configured first Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable JWAC redirect DES 3528 5 enable jwac redirect Command enable jwac redirect Success DES 3528 5 disable jwac redirect Purpose Used to disable JWAC redirect function Syntax disable jwac redirect Description This command only allows an unauthenticated host access to the quarantine server and the JWAC login page all other web access will be denied Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable JWAC redirect DES 3528 5 disable jwac redirect Command disable jwac redirect Success DES 3528 5 353 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fas
129. lt ipaddr gt password publickey Description This command allows users to configure the SSH user authentication method Parameters lt username 15 gt Enter a username of no more than 15 characters to identify the SSH user authmode Specifies the authentication mode of the SSH user wishing to log on to the Switch The administrator may choose between hostbased This parameter should be chosen if the user wishes to use a remote SSH server for authentication purposes Choosing this parameter requires the user to input the following information to identify the SSH user e hostname lt domain_name gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters identifying the remote SSH user hostname_IP lt domain_name gt lt ipaddr gt Enter the hostname and the corresponding IP address of the SSH user password This parameter should be chosen to use an administrator defined password for authentication publickey This parameter should be chosen to use the publickey on a SSH server for authentication Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the SSH user 331 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config ssh user Trinity authmode password Command config ssh user Trinity authmode password Success DES 3528 show ssh user authmode Purpose Used to display the SSH user setting Synt
130. lt value 0 255000 gt The upper threshold at which the specified traffic control is switched on The lt value gt is the number of broadcast multicast unicast packets in packets per second pps received by the Switch that will trigger the storm traffic control measures The default setting is 131072 time_interval The Interval will set the time between Multicast and Broadcast packet counts sent from the Switch s chip to the Traffic Control function These packet counts are the determining factor in deciding when incoming packets exceed the Threshold value value 5 30 The Interval may be set between 5 and 30 seconds with the default setting of 5 seconds countdown The countdown timer is set to determine the amount of time in minutes that the Switch will wait before shutting down the port that is experiencing a traffic storm The Switch will shutdown the port only if the traffic level exceeds the previously configured threshold all the time during this countdown period This parameter is only useful for ports configured as shutdown in the action field of this command and therefore will not operate for Hardware based Traffic Control implementations e value 0 0 is the default setting for this field and O will denote that the port will never shutdown value 5 30 Select a time from 5 to 30 minutes that the Switch will wait before shutting down Once this time expires and the port is still experiencing packet storms the port w
131. maximum of 4 offset_chunks Furthermore only one single profile of Packet Content ACL can be supported per switch In other words up to 16 bytes of total offset_chunks can be applied to each profile and a switch Therefore careful consideration is needed for planning the configuration of the valuable offset_chunks In Table 6 you will notice that the Offset_ChunkO starts from 127 and ends at the 2 byte It can also be found that the offset_chunk is scratched from 1 but not zero 517 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Offset Offset Chunk7 Chunks Pos fo nfs e a ie e o Table 6 Chunk and Packet offset indicates a completed ARP packet contained in the Ethernet frame which is the pattern for the calculation of packet offset Ethernet Header ARP Destination Source address Ethernet H W type Protocol Protocol Operation Sender protocol Target type type address address protocol length address 6 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte l byte 1 byte 2 byte 6 byte 4 byte 4 byte 010203040506 10806 OaSa5a5a 10 90 90 90 Table 7 A completed ARP packet contained in Ethernet frame 518 Siep Siep2 Siep3 Siep4 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create access profile profile id 1 profile name 1 ethernet source mac FFE FFE FE FF FF FF ethernet type config access profile profile id 1 ad
132. messages 12 NTP subsystem 1 user level messages 13 log audit 2 mail system 14 log alert 3 system daemons 15 clock daemon 4 security authorization messages 16 local use 0 local0 5 messages generated internally by 17 local use 1 local1 syslog 18 local use 2 local2 6 line printer subsystem 19 local use 3 local3 7 network news subsystem 20 local use 4 local4 8 UUCP subsystem 21 local use 5 local5 9 clock daemon 22 local use 6 local6 10 security authorization messages 23 local use 7 local7 11 FTP daemon 73 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config syslog host local0 Specifies that local use 0 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 16 from the list above local1 Specifies that local use 1 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 17 from the list above local2 Specifies that local use 2 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 18 from the list above local3 Specifies that local use 3 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 19 from the list above local4 Specifies that local use 4 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 20 from the list above local5 Specifies that local use 5 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 21 from the list above local6 Specifies that local use
133. not assign to DHCP client to be deleted Syntax delete dhcp excluded_address begin_address lt ipaddr gt end_address lt ipaddr gt all Description The DHCP server assumes that all IP addresses in a DHCP pool subnet are available for assigning to DHCP clients This command is used to specify the IP address that the DHCP server should not assign to clients to be deleted Parameters lt ipaddr gt Specifies the beginning and end of the IP address range Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the IP address that the DHCP server should not assign to clients DES 3528 5 delete dhcp excluded address begin_address 10 10 10 1 end address 10 10 10 10 Command delete dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10 10 10 1 end_address 10 10 10 10 473 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show dhcp excluded_address Purpose Used to display the groups of IP addresses which are excluded from the legal assigned IP address Syntax show dhcp excluded_address Description This command shows the groups of IP addresses which are excluded from the legal assigned IP address Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the DHCP excluded addresses DES 3528 5 show dhcp excluded address Command show dhcp excluded address Index Begin A
134. on the Switch Only server hosts utilizing the TACACS protocol may be added to this group radius Use this parameter to utilize the built in RADIUS server protocol on the Switch Only server hosts utilizing the RADIUS protocol may be added to this group lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the previously created server group This group may add any combination of server hosts to it regardless of protocol add delete Enter the correct parameter to add or delete a server host from a server group server_host lt ipaddr gt Enter the IP address of the previously configured server host to add or delete protocol Enter the protocol utilized by the server host There are three options tacacs Use this parameter to define the protocol if the server host is using the TACACS authentication protocol xtacacs Use this parameter to define the protocol if the server host is using the XTACACS authentication protocol tacacs Use this parameter to define the protocol if the server host is using the TACACS authentication protocol radius Use this parameter to define the protocol if the server host is using the RADIUS authentication protocol Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To add an authentication host to server group group_1 DES 3528 5 config authen server_group group_1l add server_host 10 1 1 121 protocol
135. on the Switch by specifying which time range in a day and which days in a week are covered in the time range Note that the specified time range is based on SNTP time or configured time If this time is not available then the time range will not be met Parameters range_name Specifies the name of the time range settings start_time Specifies the starting time in a day 24 hr time For example 19 00 means 7PM 19 is also acceptable start_time must be smaller than end_time end_time Specifies the ending time in a day 24 hr time weekdays Specify the list of days contained in the time range Use a dash to define a period of days Use a comma to separate specific days For example mon fri Monday to Friday sun mon fri Sunday Monday and Friday delete Deletes a time range profile When a time_range profile has been associated with ACL entries the delete of this time_range profile will fail Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config time range 261 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual 5 config time_range 1 3_new hours start_time 11 21 20 end time 11 44 40 mon fri config time_range 1 3_new hours start_time 11 21 20 end_time 11 44 40 mon fri show time_range Purpose Used to display current access list table Syntax show time_range Description This command displays current time range
136. on the criteria defined in the CPU access profile time_range Specifies the time range profile that has been associated with the ACL entries delete access_id lt value 1 100 gt Use this to remove a previously created access rule ina profile ID Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure CPU access list entry DES 3528 5 config cpu access _ profile profile_id 5 add access_id 1 ip vlan default source_ip 20 2 2 3 destination_ip 10 1 1 252 dscp 3 icmp type 11 code 32 port 1 deny Command config cpu access_profile profile_id 10 add access_id 1 ip vlan default source_ip 20 2 2 3 destination_ip 10 1 1 252 dscp 3 icmp type 11 code 32 port 1 deny Success DES 3528 5 show cpu access_profile Purpose Used to view the CPU access profile entry currently set in the Switch Syntax show cpu access_profile profile_id lt value 1 5 gt Description This command is used view the current CPU interface filtering entries set on the Switch Parameters profile_id lt value 1 5 gt Enter an integer between 7 and 5 that is used to identify the CPU access profile to be deleted with this command This value is assigned to the access profile when it is created with the create cpu access_profile command Restrictions None Example usage To show the CPU filtering state on the Switch DES 3528 5 show cpu access _ profile Command show cpu access _ profile CPU Int
137. on the host address MAC addresses approved for init can then be specified portlist Specifies a range of ports to be displayed all Specifies all of ports to be displayed mac_address Host address of client Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To initialize the authentication state machine of some or all DES 3528 5 config 802 1x init port_based ports all Command config 802 1x init port_based ports all Success DES 3528 5 231 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config 802 1x reauth Purpose Used to configure the 802 1X re authentication feature of the Switch Syntax config 802 1x reauth port_based ports lt portlist gt all mac_based ports lt portlist gt all mac_address lt macaddrs gt Description This command is used to re authenticate a previously authenticated device based on port number Parameters port_based This instructs the Switch to re authorize 802 1X functions based only on the port number Ports approved for re authorization can then be specified mac_based This instructs the Switch to re authorize 802 1X functions based only on the host address MAC addresses approved for re authorization can then be specified ports lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be re authorized all Specifies all of the ports on the Switch mac_addre
138. option 60 DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_60 add string abc relay 10 90 90 11 exact match Command config dhcp_relay option_60 add string abc relay 10 90 90 11 exact match Success DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_60 default Purpose This command is used to configure dhcp_ relay option _60 default relay servers Syntax config dhcp_relay option_60 default relay lt ipaddr gt mode relay drop Description When there are no matching servers found for the DHCP client request packet based on option 60 string the relay servers will be determined by the default relay server settings On the other hand if the drop option is specified the packet with no matching rules found will be dropped without further actions If the setting states relay then the packet will be processed further based on option 61 The final relay servers will be the union of option 60 default relay servers and the relay servers determined by option 61 Parameters ipaddress The specified ipaadress for dhcp_relay forward Specifies a relay server IP for the packet that has mathcing option 60 rules drop Specify to drop the packet that has no matching option 60 rules relay The packet will be relayed based on the relay rules Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the DHCP relay default option 60 214 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch
139. optional external RPS will take over all the power immediately and automatically Power Consumption DES 3528 Max 20 5 watts DES 3528DC Max 18 38 watts DES 3552 Max 33 1 watts DES 3528P Max 505 1 watts Operating Temperature 0 45 C Storage Temperature 40 70 C Operation Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing Storage Relative Humidity 5 95 non condensing DES 3528 DES 3528DC 441 W x 210 D x 44 H mm DES 3552 DES 3528P 441 W x 310 D x 44 H mm Weight DES 3528 2 51kg 5 53lbs 510 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Physical and Environmental DES 3528DC 2 52kg 5 55lbs DES 3552 4 09kg 9 01lbs DES 3528P 5 42kg 11 94lbs CE Class A FCC Class A C Tick VCCI Class A CB Report UL Performance Transmission Method Store and forward Packet Buffer 1 MB per device Packet Filtering Forwarding Rate 14 881 pps 10M port 148 810 pps 100M port 1 488 100 pps 1 Gbps port MAC Address Learning Automatic update Supports 16K MAC address Priority Queues 8 Priority Queues per port Forwarding Table Age Time Max age 10 1000000 seconds Default 300 S11 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Appendix B MITIGATING ARP SPOOFING ATTACKS VIA PACKET CONTENT ACL Address Resolution Protocol ARP is the standard method for finding a host s hardware address MAC address
140. port configuration for advertisement options Syntax show Ildp ports lt portlist gt Description This command displays the LLDP per port configuration for advertisement options Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured Restrictions None Example usage To display the LLDP per port TLV option configuration 381 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show lldp ports 1 Command show lldp ports 1 Port ID Admin Status TX and RX Notification Status Disabled Advertised TLVs Option Port Description Disabled System Name Disabled System Description Disabled System Capabilities Disabled Enabled Management Address None Port VLAN ID Disabled Enabled Port_and Protocol_VLAN_ID None Enabled VLAN Name None Enabled Protocol Identity None MAC PHY Configuration Status Disabled Link Aggregation Disabled Maximum Frame Size Disabled CTRL C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All show llidp local_ports Purpose Used to display the per port information currently available for populating outbound LLDP advertisements Syntax show lIldp local_ports lt portlist gt mode brief normal detailed Description This command displays the per port information currently available for populating outbound LLDP advertisements Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured
141. port will enter the stop learning state after 500 illegal MAC entries and will not allow additional MAC entries both legal or illegal to be learned on this port In the stop learning state the port will also automatically purge all blocked MAC entries on this port Traffic from legal MAC entries are still forwarded Entering 0 means no limit has been set and the port will keep learning illegal MAC addresses lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of pors to be configured all Specifies all ports on the switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable port address_binding state DES 3528 5 config address_binding ip_mac ports 1 state enable Command config address_binding ip_mac ports 1 state enable Success DES 3528 5 To enable port address_binding state and set mode to acl 155 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config address_binding ip_mac ports 1 state enable mode acl Command config address_binding ip _mac ports 1 state enable mode acl Success DES 3528 5 To enable port 1 address_binding state and set stop_learning_threshold to 60 DES 3528 5 config address_binding ip_mac ports 1 state enable stop_learning threshold 60 Command config address_binding ip_mac ports 1 state enable stop_learning threshold 60 Success DES 3528 5 show address_binding P
142. ports Syntax show voice_vian voice_device ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to show voice devices that are connected to the ports Parameters lt portlist gt A range of port to display If not specified all voice vian enabled ports will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the Voice devices that connected to the ports 1 1 1 5 DES 3528 5 show voice vlan voice _device port 1 1 1 5 Command show voice vlan voice_device ports 1 1 1 5 Start Time Voice Device Last Activity Time 00 E 0 BB 00 00 01 00 E 0 BB 00 00 02 00 E 0 BB 00 00 03 00 03 6B 00 00 01 00 E0 75 00 00 02 00 01 E3 01 02 03 2008 10 6 2008 10 6 2008 10 6 2008 10 6 2008 10 6 2008 10 6 2008 10 6 2008 10 6 2008 10 6 2008 10 6 2008 10 6 2008 10 6 Total Entries 6 DES 3528 5 140 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual SUBNET BASED VLAN COMMANDS The subnet based VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create subnet_vlan network lt network_address gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt priority lt value 0 7 gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create subnet_vian network Purpose Used to create a subnet based VLAN entry Syntax create subnet_vian network lt network_
143. protocol group configured This assignment can be removed by using delete protocol group option When priority is not specified in the command the port default prority will be the priority for those untagged packets classified by the protocol VLAN Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports to apply this command eroup_id The id of protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols group_name The name of the protocol group The maximum length is 32 characters vlan Vlan that is to be associated with this protocol group on this port vian_id Specifies the VLAN ID priority Specifies the priority to be associated with the packet which has been classified to the specified VLAN by the protocol Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage The example is to assign VLAN marketing 1 for untaged ipv6 packet ingress from port 3 To configure the group ID 1 on port 3 to be associated with VLAN marketing 1 128 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config port dotlv ports 3 add protocol_group group_id 1 vlan marketing_1 Command config port dotilv ports 3 add protocol_group group_id 1 vlan marketing_1 Success DES 3528 5 show port dot1iv Purpose Used to display the VLAN to be associated with untagged packet ingressed from a port based on the protocol group Syntax show port dot1
144. retransmit lt int 1 255 gt 1 Description This command is used to configure the Switch s RADIUS settings Parameters lt server_index 1 3 gt Assigns a number to the current set of RADIUS server settings Up to three groups of RADIUS server settings can be entered on the Switch ipaddress lt server_io gt The IP address of the RADIUS server key Specifies that a password and encryption key will be used between the Switch and the RADIUS server e lt passwd 32 gt The shared secret key used by the RADIUS server and the Switch Up to 32 characters can be used auth_port lt udpo_port_number 1 65535 gt The UDP port number for authentication requests The default is 1812 acct_port lt udpo_port_ number 1 65535 gt The UDP port number for accounting requests The default is 7873 timeout lt int 1 255 gt The time in second for waiting for a server reply Default value is 5 seconds retransmit lt int 1 255 gt The count for re transmit Default value is 2 Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 235 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure the RADIUS settings DES 3528 5 config radius 1 ipaddress 10 48 74 121 key dlink_default Command config radius 1 ipaddress 10 48 74 121 key dlink_default Success DES 3528 5 show radius Purpose Used to display the current RADIUS configurations on
145. show authen application create authen lt string ua server_group config authen tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius lt string 15 gt add delete server_host lt ipaddr gt server_group protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius delete authen lt string 15 gt server_group show authen server_group lt string 15 gt create authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius port lt int 1 65535 gt key lt key_string 254 gt none timeout lt int 1 255 gt retransmit lt int 1 255 gt config authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius port lt int 1 65535 gt key lt key_ string 254 gt none timeout lt int 1 255 gt retransmit lt int 1 255 gt 1 delete authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius show authen server_host config authen parameter lt int 0 255 gt response_timeout config authen parameter lt int 1 255 gt attempt show authen parameter enable admin ee config adminlocalenable Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 308 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable authen_policy Purpose Used to enable system access authentication policy Syntax enable authen_policy Description This command will enable an administrator defined authentication policy for users trying to access the Switch
146. state is both trap and log log Specifies the log state The default state is both trap and log none Specifies that events will not be logged or trapped for both cases attack_detected Specifies events will be logged or trapped when a BPDU attack is detected attack_cleared Specifies that events will be logged or trapped when the BPDU attack is cleared both Specifies that events will be logged or trapped for both cases Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 458 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure the BPDU Attack Protection trap state as both for the entire switch DES 3528 5 config bpdu_protection trap both Command config bpdu_protection trap both Success DES 3528 5 enable bpdu_protection Purpose Used to enable BPDU Attack Protection globally Syntax enable bpdu_protection Description This command allows the BPDU Attack Protection to be globally enabled on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the BPDU Attack Protection function globally for the entire switch DES 3528 5 enable bpdu_protection Command enable bpdu_protection disable bpdu_protection Purpose Used to disable BPDU Attack Protection globally Syntax disable bpdu_protection Description This command allow
147. string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the SNMP community string dlink DES 3528 5 delete snmp community dlink Command delete snmp community dlink Success DES 3528 5 show snmp community Purpose Used to display SNMP community strings configured on the Switch Syntax show snmp community lt community_string 32 gt Description This command is used to display SNMP community strings that are configured on the Switch Parameters lt community_string 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent Restrictions None Example usage To display the currently entered SNMP community strings 43 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show snmp community show snmp community SNMP Community Table View Name Access Right ReadView read_write CommunityView read _write CommunityView read_only Total Entries 3 DES 3528 5 config snmp enginelD Purpose Used to configure a name for the SNMP engine on the Switch Syntax config snmp enginelD lt snmp_enginelD 10 64 gt Description This command configures a name
148. tacacst Command config authen server_group group_1 add server_host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs t Success DES 3528 5 323 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete authen server_group Purpose Used to delete a user defined authentication server group Syntax delete authen server_group lt string 15 gt Description This command will delete an authentication server group Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the previously created server group to be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the server group group_1 DES 3528 5 delete server_group group_1l Command delete server_group group_1 Success DES 3528 5 show authen server_group Purpose Used to view authentication server groups on the Switch Syntax show authen server_group lt string 15 gt Description This command will display authentication server groups currently configured on the Switch This command will display the following fields Group Name The name of the server group currently configured on the Switch including built in groups and user defined groups IP Address The IP address of the server host Protocol The authentication protocol used by the server host Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the prev
149. the CPU access profile to be created with this command Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a CPU access profile DES 3528 5 create cpu access _ profile profile_id 1 ip vlan source_ip mask 20 0 0 0 destination_ip mask 10 0 0 0 dscp icmp type code Command create cpu access_profile profile_id 1 ip vlan source_ip_ mask 20 0 0 0 destination_ip mask 10 0 0 0 dscp icmp type code Success DES 3528 5 delete cpu access_profile Purpose Used to delete a previously created CPU access profile Syntax delete cpu access_profile profile_id lt value 1 5 all Description This command is used to delete a previously created CPU access profile Parameters profile_id lt value 1 5 gt Enter an integer between 1 and 5 that is used to identify the CPU access profile to be deleted with this command This value is assigned to the access profile when it is created with the create cpu access_profile command all This will delete all previously configured cpu access_profiles Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 254 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To delete the CPU access profile with a profile ID of 1 DES 3528 5 delete cpu access _ profile profile_id 1 Command delete cpu access_profile profile_id 1 Success DES 3528 5 confi
150. the Switch Syntax show radius Description This command is used to display the current RADIUS configurations on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display RADIUS settings on the Switch DES 3528 5 show radius Command show radius Index IP Address Auth Port Acct Port Timeout Retransmit 172 18 211 40 1812 172 18 211 71 1812 172 18 211 108 1812 Total Entries DES 3528 5 show auth_statistics Purpose Used to display authenticator statistics information Syntax show auth_statistics ports lt portlist gt all Description This command displays authenticator statistics information Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured all All ports Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To display authenticator statistics information from port 1 236 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show auth_statistics ports 1 Command show auth_statistics ports 1 Port number EapolFramesRx EapolFramesTx EapolStartFramesRx EapolRegqIiIdFramesTx EapolLogoffFramesRx EapolReqFramesTx EapolRespIdFramesRx EapolRespFramesRx InvalidEapolFramesRx EapLengthErrorFramesRx 0 6 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LastEapolFrameVersion LastEapolFrameSource 00 00 00 00 00 00 DES 3528 5 show auth_diagnostics Purpose Used to display authentic
151. the aging time is time out the host will be moved back to unauthenticated state block_time If a host fails to pass the authentication the next authentication will not started within block_time unless the user clear the entry state manually max_user max number of authenticated clients on per port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config port state DES 3528 5 config mac_based_access_control ports 1 8 state enable Command config mac_based_access_control ports 1 8 state enable Success DES 3528 5 To config port mode DES 3528 5 config mac_based_access_control ports 1 8 mode port_based Command config mac_based_access_control ports 1 8 mode port_based Success DES 3528 5 422 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create mac_based_ access control Purpose Used to create the guest_vian Syntax create mac_based_access_control guest_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt guest_vianid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command is used to create the guest VLAN Parameters guest_vian If the MAC address has failed the authentication the port will be assigned to this vian guest_vianid If the MAC address has failed the authentication the port will be assigned to this vian Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage T
152. the boot up configuration ID increment Allows the download of a partial switch configuration file This allows a file to be downloaded that will change only the switch parameters explicitly stated in the configuration file All other switch parameters will remain unchanged Restrictions The TFTP server must be on the same IP subnet as the Switch Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage 56 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To download a configuration file DES 3528 5 download cfg_fromTFTP 10 48 74 121 c cfg setting txt Command download cfg_fromTFTP 10 48 74 121 c cfg setting txt Connecting to SCrVer iui eee ed eee us Done Download configuration Done DES 3528 5 DES 3528 5 DES 3528 5 DES 3528 Configuration DES 3528 5 DES 3528 5 Firmware Build 2 00 B033 DES 3528 5 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved DES 3526 544 2 gt DES 3528 5 DES 3528 5 DES 3528 5 BASIC DES 3528 5 DES 3528 5 config serial_port baud_rate 115200 auto_logout 10 minutes Command config serial_port baud_rate 115200 auto_logout 10_minutes The download configuration command will initiate the loading of the various settings in the order listed in the configuration file When the file ha
153. the corresponding VLAN name of the port to delete mac_address lt macaddr gt Enter the corresponding MAC address previously learned by the port to delete port lt port gt Enter the port number which has learned the previously entered MAC address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a port security entry DES 3528 5 delete port_security_entry vlan_name default mac_address 00 01 30 10 2C C7 port 6 Command delete port_security_entry vlan_name default mac_address 00 01 30 10 2C C7 port 6 Success DES 3528 5 clear port_security_enitry Purpose Used to clear MAC address entries learned from a specified port for the port security function Syntax clear port_security_entry port lt portlist gt Description This command is used to clear MAC address entries which were learned by the Switch by a specified port This command only relates to the port security function Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or port range to clear Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear a port security entry by port DES 3528 5 clear port_security entry port 6 Command clear port_security entry port 6 Success DES 3528 5 31 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show port_security Purpose Used to display the current port
154. the rotation mechanism regarding how packets in these eight hardware priotiry queues are being handled and emptied The Switch s default if the config scheduling command is not used or if the config scheduling command is entered with weight parameters set to 0 is to empty the 7 hardware priority queues in order from the highest priority queue hardware queue 6 to the lowest priority queue hardware queue 0 Each hardware queue will transmit all of the packets in its buffer before allowing the next lower priority queue to transmit its packets When the lowest hardware priority queue has finished transmitting all of its packets the highest hardware priority queue can again transmit any packets it may have received The weight parameter allows the user to specify the maximum number of packets a given hardware priority queue can transmit before allowing the next lower hardware priority queue to begin transmitting its packets A value between 0 and 127 can be specified For example if a value of 3 is specified then the highest hardware priority queue number 6 will be allowed to transmit 3 packets then the next lower hardware priority queue number 5 will be allowed to transmit 3 packets and so on until all of the queues have transmitted 3 packets The process will then repeat Parameters lt class_id 0 6 gt Specifies which of the seven hardware priority queues that the config scheduling command will apply to The seven hardware p
155. this command Example usage To create sflow flow_sampler DES 3528 5 create sflow flow_sampler ports all analyzer _server_id 1 rate 10 maxheadersize 100 Command create sflow flow_sampler ports all analyzer_server_id 1 rate 10 maxheadersize 100 Success DES 3528 5 config sflow flow_sampler Purpose Used to configure the sflow flow_sampler parameters Syntax config sflow flow_sampler ports lt portlist gt all rate lt value 0 655355 maxheadersize lt value 18 256 gt 1 Description This command configures the sflow flow_sampler parameters If the user wants to change the analyzer_server_id he needs to delete the flow_sampler and creates a new one Parameters ports Specifies the list of ports to be configured rate The sampling rate for packet sampling The configured rate value multiplied by 256 is the actual rate For example if the rate is 20 the actual rate is 5120 As a result one packet will be sampled from every 5120 packets If set to 0 the sampler is disabled If the rate is not specified its default value is 0 maxheadersize The maximum number of leading bytes in the packet which has been sampled that will be encapsulated and forwarded to the server If not specified the default value is 128 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure sflow flow_sampler 281 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2
156. this command Example usage To configure IGMP snooping multicast VLAN forward DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched enable Command config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched enable Success DES 3528 5 180 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to create an IGMP multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Syntax create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt Description This command is used to create an IGMP multicast VLAN group profile on the switch The profile name used for IGMP snooping must be unique Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the IGMP multicast VLAN group profile name max length is 32 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create an IGMP multicast VLAN group profile g1 DES 3528 5 create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl Command create igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl Success DES 3528 5 181 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to configure an IGMP snooping multicast group profile on the Switch and to add or delete multicast address for the profile Syntax config igmp_snooping multicast_vla
157. this command Usernames can be between 1 and 15 characters Passwords can be between 0 and 15 characters Example usage To create an administrator level user account with the username dlink DES 3528 5 create account admin dlink Command create account admin dlink Enter a case sensitive new password Enter the new password again for confirmation Success DES 3528 5 NOTICE In case of lost passwords or password corruption please refer to the D Link website and the White Paper entitled Password Recovery Procedure which will guide you through the steps necessary to resolve this issue config account Purpose Used to configure user accounts Syntax config account lt username gt encrypt plain_text sha_1 lt password gt Description When the password information is not specified in the command the system will prompt the user to input the password interactively For this case the user can only input the plain text password If the password is present in the command the user can select to input the password in the plain text form or in the encrypted form The encryption algorithm is based on SHA I Parameters lt username gt Name of the account The account must already be defined plain_text Select to specify the password in plain text form sha_1 Select to specify the password in the SHA I enacrpted form password The password for the user account The length
158. this destination MAC address 802 1p lt value 0 7 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets with this 802 1p priority value ethernet_type lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets with this hexadecimal 802 1Q Ethernet type value in the packet header 249 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config access_profile ip Specifies that the Switch will look into the IP fields in each packet vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Specifies that the access profile will only apply to this VLAN vian_id lt value 1 4094 gt Specifies that the access prfile will only apply to this VLAN ID Source_ip lt ipaddr gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only packets with this source IP address destination_ip lt ipaddr gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only packets with this destination IP address dscp lt value 0 63 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this value in their Type of Service DiffServ code point DSCP field in their IP packet header icmp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field within each packet type lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to this ICMP type value code lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to this ICMP code value
159. though there is still available bandwidth The specification of mini rate and max rate are effective regardless whether the queue is operated in the strict mode or in the wrr mode lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured lt cos_id_list 0 6 gt Specifies a priority queue min_rate Specifies one of the parameters below no_ imit or lt value 64 1024000 gt that will be applied to the minimum rate at which the above specified class will be allowed to receive packets no_limit Specifies that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the above specified class lt value 64 1024000 gt Specifies the packet limit in Kops that the above ports will be receive at least max_rate Specifies one of the parameters below no_ imit or lt value 64 1024000 gt that will be applied to the maximum rate at which the above specified class will be allowed to receive packets no_limit Specifies that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the above specified class lt value 64 1024000 gt Specifies the packet limit in Kops that the above ports will be received at most 106 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config cos bandwidth_control Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure CoS bandwidth control DES 3528 5 config cos
160. through the Switch s serial port Telnet or the Web based management agent The Command Line Interface CLI can be used to configure and manage the Switch via the serial port or Telnet interfaces The DES 3528 52 Layer 2 stackable Fast Ethernet Switch Series are members of the D Link xStack family Ranging from 10 100Mbps edge switches to core gigabit switches the xStack switch family has been future proof designed to provide a stacking architecture with fault tolerance flexibility port density robust security and maximum throughput with a user friendly management interface for the networking professional This manual provides a reference for all of the commands contained in the CLI for the xStack DES 3528 DES 3528P DES 3528DC and DES 3552 series of switches Configuration and management of the Switch via the Web based management agent is discussed in the User s Guide e a NOTE For the remainder of this manual all versions of the DES 3528 DES 3528P DES 3528DC and DES 3552 switches will be referred to as simply the Switch or the DES 3528 52 Series Accessing the Switch via the Serial Port The Switch s serial port s default settings are as follows e 115200 baud e no parity e 68 data bits e 1 stop bit A computer running a terminal emulation program capable of emulating a VT 100 terminal and a serial port configured as above is then connected to the Switch s serial port via an RS 232 DB 9 cable With the ser
161. to specify all ports dying_gasp An unrecoverable local failure condition has occurred critical_event An unspecified critical event has occurred notify_state Specifies to enable or disable the event notification The default state is enable Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure dying_gasp event for port 1 DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports 1 critical_link_event dying_gasp notify state enable Command config ethernet_oam ports 1 critical_link_event dying_gasp notify _state enable Success DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports remote_loopback Purpose Used to start or stop Ethernet OAM remote loop back Syntax config ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all remote_loopback start stop Description This command is used to start or stop the remote peer to enter the Ethernet OAM remote loop back mode To start the remote peer to enter the remote loop back mode you must ensure the port is in active mode and the OAM connection is established If the local client is already in remote loop back mode then it cannot apply this command Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured Use all to specify all ports remote_loopback If start is specified it will request the peer to change to the remote loop back mode If stop is specified it will request the peer to change to the normal operation mode Restr
162. to the switch where the sniffer is attached The first switch is also named the source switch To make the RSPAN work for the source switch the RSPAN VLAN source setting must be configured For the intermediate and the last switch the RSPAN VLAN redirect setting must be configured i NOTE RSPAN VLAN mirroring only works when RSPAN is enabled an ET RSPAN VLAN has been configured with source ports and mirror is enabled RSPAN redirect function will work when RSPAN is enabled and f at least one RSPAN VLAN has been configured with redirect ports Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable RSPAN DES 3528 5 enable rspan Command enable rspan Success DES 3528 5 391 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable rspan Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to disable RSPAN disable rspan This command controls the RSPAN function None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To disable RSPAN DES 3528 5 disable rspan Command disable rspan Success DES 3528 5 create rspan vian Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to create an RSPAN VLAN create rspan vlan vlan_name lt vlan_names gt vilan_id lt value 1 4094 gt This command is used to create
163. update on the ARP table based on the received gratuitous ARP packet By default the state is disabled enable Enable learning of ARP entry based on the received gratuitous ARP packet disable Disable learning of ARP entry based on the received gratuitous ARP packet Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To enable learning of ARP entry based on the received gratuitous ARP packet DES 3528 5 config gratuitous_arp learning enable Command config gratuitous_arp learning enable Success DES 3528 5 enable gratuitous_arp trap amp log Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to enable gratuitous ARP trap and log state enable gratuitous_arp ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt trap log 1 The command is used to enable gratuitous ARP trap and log state The switch can trap and log the IP conflict event to inform the administrator By default trap is disabled and event log is disabled ipif lt ipif name 12 gt The name of the IP interface the end node or station for which the ARP table entry was made resides on trap log Select gratuitous ARP trap and or log state Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To enable system interface s gratuitous ARP log and trap DES 3528 5 enable gratuitous_arp System trap log Command enable gratuitous_arp System trap log Success DES 3528 5 299 xSt
164. users can issue this command Usage Example To configure exclude the VLAN name TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports DES 3528 5 config lldp ports all dot1l_tlv_vlan_name vlanid 1 3 enable Command config lldp ports all dot1l_tlv_vlan_name vlanid 1 3 enable Success DES 3528 5 config lldp dot1_tliv_protocol_identity Purpose Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of IEEE 802 1 Organizationally protocol identity TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements Syntax config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all dot1_tlv_ protocol_identity all eapol lacp gvrp stp 1 enable disable Description This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System s Protocol Identity instance will be transmitted on the port The Protocol Identity TLV provides a way for stations to advertise protocols that are important to the operation of the network Such as Spanning Tree Protocol the Link Aggregation Control Protocol and numerous vendor proprietary variations are responsible for maintaining the topology and connectivity of the network If EAPOL GVRP STP including MSTP and LACP protocol identity is enabled on this port and it is enabled to be advertised then this protocol identity will be advertised Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured all Use this parameter to set all ports in the system dot1_
165. using a 24 hour clock in hours and minutes Ss date Configure the specific date day of the month to begin DST e lt Start_date 1 31 gt The start date is expressed numerically e date Configure the specific date day of the month to begin DST e lt end_date 1 31 gt The end date is expressed numerically offset 30 60 90 120 Indicates number of minutes to add or to subtract during the summertime The possible offset times are 30 60 90 120 The default value is 60 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure daylight savings time on the Switch DES 3528 5 config dst repeating s_week 2 s_day tue s_mth 4 s_ time 15 00 e week 2 e day wed e_ mth 10 e time 15 30 offset 30 Command config dst repeating s_week 2 s_day tue s_mth 4 s_time 15 00 e _week 2 e day wed e_mth 10 e time 15 30 offset 30 Success DES 3528 5 Purpose Used to display the current time settings and status Syntax show time Description This command displays system time and date configuration as well as display current system time Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the time currently set on the Switch s System clock DES 3528 5 show time Command show time Current Time Source System Clock 11 Mar 2000 17 41 32 11 Mar 2000 22 10 22 GMT 00 00 Disabled Offset In Minutes 60 Repeating From Apr ist Sun 00 00 To Oct l
166. value 1 2 gt migrate yes no edge true false auto p2p true false auto state enable disable restricted_role true false restricted_tcn true false fbpdu enable disable 1 Description This command is used to create and configure STP for a group of ports Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports to be configured externalCost This defines a metric that indicates the relative cost of forwarding packets to the specified port list Port cost can be set automatically or as a metric value The default value Is auto auto Setting this parameter for the external cost will automatically set the speed for forwarding packets to the specified port s in the list for optimal efficiency Default port cost 100Mbps port 200000 Gigabit port 20000 lt value 1 200000000 gt Define a value between 1 and 200000000 to determine the external cost The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets hellotime lt value 1 2 gt The time interval between transmission of configuration messages by the designated port to other devices on the bridged LAN thus stating that the Switch is still functioning The user may choose a time between 1 and 2seconds The default is 2 seconds migrate yes no Setting this parameter as yes will set the ports to send out BDPU packets to other bridges requesting information on their STP se
167. when only its IP address is known This protocol is vulnerable because it can spoof the IP and MAC information in the ARP packets to attack a LAN known as ARP spoofing This document is intended to introduce ARP protocol ARP spoofing attacks and the counter measure brought by D Link s switches to counter the ARP spoofing attack e How Address Resolution Protocol works In the process of ARP PC A will firstly issue an ARP request to query PC B s MAC address The network structure is shown in Figure 1 Who is 10 10 10 27 A Sender 00 70 5 C0 1 33 33 seal 00 70 5C 01 11 11 10 10 10 3 10 10 10 1 D B Target O0 20 5C 01 44 44 00 20 5C 01 22 22 10 10 10 4 10 10 10 7 Figure 1 In the mean time PC A s MAC address will be written into the Sender H W Address and its IP address will be written into the Sender Protocol Address in ARP payload As PC B s MAC address is unknown the Target H W Address will be OO 00 00 00 00 00 while PC B s IP address will be written into the Target Protocol Address shown in Table 1 H W Protocol Protocol Operation Sender Sender Target Target type type address address H W address protocol H W address protocol length address address ARP request 00 20 5C 01 11 11 10 10 10 1 O0 00 00 00 00 00 10 10 10 2 Table 1 ARP Payload The ARP request will be encapsulated into Ethernet frame and sent out As can be seen in Table 2 the
168. will be cleared all Specifies all the ports whose WAC state will be cleared authenticated Specifies to delete the host in this state authenticating Specifies to delete the host in this state blocked Specifies to delete the host in this state Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear the WAC authenticated state DES 3528 5 clear wac auth_state ports 1 5 Command clear wac auth_state ports 1 5 Success DES 3528 5 445 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual PoE COMMANDS The PoE commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config poe system units lt unitlist gt all oower_limit lt value 37 370 gt power_disconnect_method deny_next_port deny_low_priority_port 1 config poe ports all lt portlist gt state enable disable time_range lt range_name 32 gt clear_time_range priority critical high low power_limit class 0 class_1 class 2 class 3 user define lt value 1000 35000 gt 1 show poe system units lt unitlist gt show poe ports lt portlist gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config poe system Purpose Used to configure the parameters for the POE system wise function Syntax config poe system un
169. with the profile ID of 1 to filter frames on port 7 that have IP addresses in the range between 10 42 73 0 to 10 42 73 255 DES 3528 5 config access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip source_ip 10 42 73 1 port 7 deny config access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip source_ip 10 42 73 1 port 7 deny 251 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual NOTE Address Resolution Protocol ARP is the standard for finding a host s hardware address MAC Address However ARP is vulnerable as it can be easily spoofed and utilized to attack a LAN known as ARP spoofing attack For a more detailed explaination on how ARP protocol works and how to employ D Link s advanced unique Packet Content ACL to prevent an ARP spoofing attack please see Appendix B at the end of this manual show access_profile Purpose Used to display the currently configured access profiles on the Switch Syntax show access_profile profile_id lt value 1 14 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Description This command is used to display the currently configured access profiles Parameters profile_id lt value 1 14 gt Specify the profile id to display only the access rules configuration for a single profile ID The user may enter a profile ID number between 1 and 14 yet remember only 14 access profiles can be created on the Switch profile _name lt name 1 32 gt Specifies the name of the profile
170. 0 0 0 0 2 284 0 0 0 4 292 3 578 0 0 0 0 578 4 578 0 0 0 0 578 5 578 0 0 0 0 578 6 578 0 0 0 0 578 clear cfm pkt_cnt Purpose Used to clear the CFM packet RX TX counters Syntax clear cfm pkt_cnt ports lt portlist gt rx tx rx tx ccm Description This command clears CFM packet counters Parameters ports Specifies which ports counter to show If not specified all ports will be shown rx tx Shows RX or TX packet counter If none is specified both of them are shown ccm Shows the CCM transmission state Restrictions None Example usage To clear the CFM packet RX TX counters 503 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 clear cfm pkt_cnt ports 2 rx Command clear cfm pkt_cnt ports 2 rx Success DES 3528 config cfm mp _Itr_all Purpose Used to configure the CFM mp linktrace on the switch Syntax config cfm mp _Itr_all enable disable Description This command configures the CFM mp linktrace on the switch Parameters enable Used to enable the CFM mp linktrace disable Used to disable the CFM mp linktrace Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure CFM mp linktrace DES 3528 5 config cfm mp_ltr_all enable Command config cfm mp_ltr_all enable Success DES 3528 5 show cfm mp _Itr_all Purpose Used to display the CFM mp linktrace settings o
171. 0 Oxffff gt flag_mask all urg ack psh rst syn fin 1 udp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt protocol_id_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt user_define_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 packet_content_mask offset 0 15 lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset 16 31 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset 32 47 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff offset 48 63 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset 64 79 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 ipv6 class flowlabel source_ipv6_mask lt ipv6masks gt destination_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt 1 This command is used to create an access profile used only for CPU Interface Filtering Masks can be entered that will be combined with the values the Switch finds in the specified frame header fields Specific values for the rules are entered using the create cpu access _profile command below ethernet Specifies that the Switch will examine the layer 2 part of each packet header e vilan Specifies that the Switch will examine the VLAN part of each packet header e sourc
172. 1 vlan default Success DES 3528 5 395 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete mac_based_ vlan Purpose Used to delete the static MAC based VLAN entry Syntax delete mac_based_vian mac_address lt macaddr gt vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vianid 1 4094 gt Description This command is used to delete a database entry If the MAC address and VLAN is not specified all static entries associated with the port will be removed Parameters mac_address The MAC address vlan The VLAN to be associated with the MAC address vianid Specifies the VLAN by VLAN ID Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a static MAC based VLAN entry DES 3528 5 delete mac based vlan mac address 00 00 00 00 00 01 vlan default Command delete mac based vlan mac mac address 00 00 00 00 00 01 vlan default Success DES 3528 5 show mac_based_ vlan Purpose Used to show the static or dynamic MAC based VLAN entry Syntax show mac_based_vian mac_address lt macaddrs vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vianid 1 4094 gt Description This command is used to display the static or dynamic MAC Based VLAN entry Parameters mac The MAC address vlan The VLAN to be associated with the MAC address vianid Specifies the VLAN by VLAN ID Restrictions None Example usage To display the stat
173. 10 20 3 4 show dhcp conflict_ip Purpose Used to display the IP address that has been identified as being in conflict Syntax show dhcp conflict_ip lt ipaddr gt Description The DHCP server will use PING packets to determine whether an IP address is in conflict with other hosts before binding it s IP The IP address which has been identified as in conflict will be moved to the conflict IP database The system will not attempt to bind the IP address to the conflict IP database unless the user clears it from the conflict IP database Parameters lt ipaddr gt The IP address to be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display entries in the DHCP conflict IP database DES 3528 5 show dhcp conflict_ip Command show dhcp conflict_ip IP Address Detection Method Detection Time Total Entries 0 DES 3528 5 485 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual CABLE DIAGNOSTIC COMMANDS The Cable Diagnostic commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters cable diagnostic cable diag ports lt portlist gt all Each command is listed in detail in the following sections cable diagnostic Purpose Used to diagnose the copper cable If there is an error on the cable it can determine the type of error and the position where the error occurred Linked This pair has been co
174. 2 all All IGMP multicast VLAN group profile will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the IGMP multicast VLAN group profile g1 DES 3528 5 delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl Command delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl Success DES 3528 5 182 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to show the information about an IGMP multicast VLAN group profile on the Switch show igmp_ snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt This command is used to show the information about an IGMP multicast VLAN group profile on the Switch lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the IGMP multicast VLAN profile name max length is 32 If not specified all IGMP multicast VLAN group profiles will be displayed Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To display the IGMP multicast VLAN group profile DES 3528 5 show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Command show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Total Entries Multicast Addresses 239 2 251259 25222 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan multicast_group Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions
175. 28 5 delete trusted host network 10 62 32 1 16 Command delete trusted host network 10 62 32 1 16 Success delete trusted_host all Purpose Used to delete all trusted host entries made using the create trusted_host ipaddr and create trusted_host network commands above Syntax delete trusted _host all Description This command is used to delete all trusted host entries made using the create trusted_host ipaddr and create trusted_host network commands above Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete all trusted host entries DES 3528 5 delete trusted host all Command delete trusted host all Success 51 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable snmp traps Purpose Used to enable SNMP trap support Syntax enable snmp traps Description This command is used to enable SNMP trap support on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable SNMP trap support on the Switch DES 3528 5 enable snmp traps Command enable snmp traps Success DES 3528 5 enable snmp authenticate_traps Purpose Used to enable SNMP authentication trap support Syntax enable snmp authenticate_traps Description This command is used to enable SNMP authentication trap support on the Switch Parameters None Res
176. 28 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show syslog Command show syslog Syslog Global State Enabled DES 3528 5 create syslog host Purpose Used to create a new syslog host Syntax create syslog host lt index 1 4 gt severity informational warning all facility local0 local local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7 udp_port lt udp_port_numbers ipaddress lt ipaddrs gt state enable disable Description This command is used to create a new syslog host Parameters lt index 1 4 gt Specifies that the command will be applied to an index of hosts There are four available indexes numbered 1 through 4 ipaddress lt ipaddr gt Specifies the IP address of the remote host where syslog messages will be sent severity Severity level indicator These are described in the following Bold font indicates that the corresponding severity level is currently supported on the Switch Numerical Severity Code 0 Emergency system is unusable 1 Alert action must be taken immediately 2 Critical critical conditions 3 Error error conditions 4 Warning warning conditions 5 Notice normal but significant condition 6 Informational informational messages 7 Debug debug level messages Numerical Facility Numerical Facility Code Code 0 kernel messages 12 NTP subsystem 1 user level messages 13 log audit 2 mail system 14 log alert 3 system daemons
177. 28 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete fdb Purpose Used to delete an entry to the Switch s forwarding database Syntax delete fdb lt vian_name 32 gt lt macaddr gt Description This command is used to delete a previous entry to the Switch s MAC address forwarding database Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides lt macaddr gt The MAC address that will be added to the forwarding table Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a permanent FDB entry DES 3528 5 delete fdb default 00 00 00 00 01 02 Command delete fdb default 00 00 00 00 01 02 Success DES 3528 5 To delete a multicast FDB entry DES 3528 5 delete fdb default 01 00 00 00 01 02 Command delete fdb default 01 00 00 00 01 02 Success DES 3528 5 clear fdb Purpose Used to clear the Switch s forwarding database of all dynamically learned MAC addresses Syntax clear fdb vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt port lt port gt all Description This command is used to clear dynamically learned entries to the Switch s forwarding database Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides port lt port gt The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address The Switch will always forward traffic to the specified device throug
178. 355 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor Purpose Used to disable JWAC quarantine server monitor Syntax disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor Description This command is used to disable JWAC quarantine server monitor Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable JWAC quarantine server monitor DES 3528 5 disable jwac quarantine _server_monitor Command disable jwac quarantine _server_monitor Success DES 3528 5 config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout Purpose Used to set Quarantine Server error timeout Syntax config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout lt sec 5 300 gt Description When the Quarantine Server monitor is enabled the JWAC Switch will periodically check if the Quarantine works okay If the Switch does not receive any response from Quarantine server during the configured error timeout the Switch then regards it as not working properly Parameters lt sec 5 300 gt To specify the error timeout interval Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure JWAC quarantine server error timeout DES 3528 5 config jwac quarantine _server_error_timeout 60 Command config jwac quarantine_server_error_timeout 60 Success DES 3528 5 356 xStack DES 3528 DES 35
179. 5 55 00 55 00 DES 3526 L2 Switch 1 03 B008 default Total Entries 2 DES 3528 5 To show the member information in summary DES 3528 5 show sim members Command show sim members Platform Firmware Device Name Capability j Version 00 01 02 03 04 00 DES 3528 L2 Switch 1 00 B008 00 55 55 00 55 00 DES 3528 L2 Switch 1 00 B008 default master Total Entries 2 DES 3528 5 To show other groups information in summary if group is specified 344 DES 3528 Command xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual 5 show sim group show sim group SIM Group Name default ID MAC Address Platform Firmware Device Name Capability j Version x1 00 01 02 03 04 00 DES 3528 L2 Switch 1 00 B008 Trinity 2 00 55 55 00 55 00 DES 3528 L2 Switch 1 00 B008 default master SIM Group Name SIM2 ID MAC Address Platform Firmware Device Name Capability j Version x1 00 01 02 03 04 00 DES 3528 L2 Switch 1 00 B008 2 00 55 55 00 55 00 DES 3528 L2 Switch 1 00 B008 default master DES 3528 5 Example usage To view SIM neighbors DES 3528 Command Neighbor 5 show sim neighbor show sim neighbor Info Table MAC Address 00 35 26 00 11 99 Commander 00 35 26 00 11 91 Member 00 35 26 00 11 90 Candidate Total Entries 3 DES 3528 reconfig Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions 5 Used to connect to a member switch thro
180. 5 show cfm md op_domain Command show cfm md op domain MD Level 2 MIP Creation Explicit SenderID TLV None DES 3528 5 496 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display cfm mepname DES 3528 5 show cfm mepname mep1 Command show cfm mepname mep1 Name mepl MEPID 1 Port 1 Direction inward CFM Port State enabled MAC Address XX XX XX XX XX XX MEP State enabled CCM State enabled PDU Priority 7 Fault Alarm Alarm Time Alarm Reset Time Highest Fault None Next LTM Trans ID 27 RX Out of Sequence CCMs 0 RX Cross connect CCMs 0 RX Error CCMs 0 RX Port Status CCMs 0 RX If Status CCMs 0 RX In order LBRs 0 TX CCMs 1234 TX LBMs 0 Remote MEP Status MEPID MAC Address Status RDI PortSt IfSt 2 XX XX XX OK Yes Blocked Up 3 XX XX XX IDLE No No No 4 XX XX XX OK No Up Down 8 XX XX XX START No Up Up 12 XX XX XX FAILED No Up Up 8 XX XX XX OK No Up Up DES 3528 5 show cfm fault Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions None Example usage To display cfm fault gt mac_status 2 second s 10 second s Used to show fault MEPs show cfm fault md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt 497 Detect Time 2009 01 01 2009 01 01 2009 01 01 2009 01 01 2009 01 01 2009 01 01 md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance domain name
181. 52 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config jwac redirect Purpose Used to configure redirect destination and delay time before an unauthenticated host is redirected to the Quarantine Server or the JWAC login web page Syntax config jwac redirect destination quarantine_server jwac_login_page delay_time lt value 0 10 gt 1 Description This command allows you to configure redirect destination and delay time before an unauthenticated host is redirected to the Quarantine Server or the JWAC login web page The unit of delay time is seconds 0 means no delaying the redirect Parameters destination To specify the destination which the unauthenticated host will be redirected to delay_time To specify the time interval after which the unauthenticated host will be redirected Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure JWAC redirect DES 3528 5 config jwac redirect destination jwac_login_page delay time 5 Command config jwac redirect_ destination jwac_login_page delay time 5 Success DES 3528 5 config jwac virtual_ip Purpose Used to configure JWAC virtual Paddress used to accept authentication requests from an unauthenticated host Syntax config jwac virtual_ip lt ipaddr gt Description The virtual IP of JWAC is used to accept authentication requests from unauthenticated hosts Only requests sent to this IP will get
182. 54 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config address_binding ip_mac ports packets it receives on that port with its IMPB entries If the IP MAC pair in the ARP packet does not match the IMPB white list the MAC address will be blocked and subsequent packets sent from this client will be dropped Parameters state Configures the address binding port state to enable or disable When the state is enabled the port will perform the binding check Strict This state provides a stricter method of control If the user selects this mode all packets are blocked by the Switch by default The Switch will compare all incoming ARP and IP Packets and attempt to match them against the IMPB white list If the IP MAC pair matches the white list entry the packets from that MAC address are unblocked If not the MAC address will stay blocked While the Strict state uses more CPU resources from checking every incoming ARP and IP packet it enforces better security and is thus the recommended setting The packet isn t found by the entry the MAC will be set to block Other packets will be dropped The default mode is strict if not specified loose This mode provides a looser way of control If the user selects loose mode the Switch will forward all packets by default However it will still inspect incoming ARP packets and compare them with the Switch s IMPB white list entries If the IP MAC pair of
183. 67295 The default value of the threshold is 1 error frame window Specifies the period of the error frame period event The period is specified by a number of received frames The range for this setting is 148 810 to 100 000 000 The default value is 1 488 100 frames notify_state Specifies to enable or disable the event notification The default state is enable Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the errored frame threshold to 10 and period to 1000000 for port 1 of unit 1 DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame_period threshold 10 window 1000000 notify state enable Command config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_frame_period threshold 10 window 1000000 notify state enable Success DES 3528 5 464 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config ethernet_oam ports critical link _event Purpose Used to configure Ethernet OAM critical link event Syntax config ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all critical_link_event dying _gasp critical_ event notify_state enable disable Description This command is used to configure the capability of Ethernet OAM critical link event If the capability for an event is disabled the port will never send out the corresponding critical link event Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured Use all
184. 8 5 config Ildp ports mgt addr Purpose Used to enable or disable port s specified for advertising indicated management address instance Syntax config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all mgt_addr ipv4 lt ipaddr gt enable disable Description This command specifies whether the system s IP address needs to be advertised from the specified port For layer 3 devices each managed address can be individually specified The management addresses that are added in the list will be advertised in the LLDP from the specified interface associated with each management address The interface for that management address will be also advertised in the if index Form Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured all Use this parameter to set all ports in the system ipv4 The IP address of IPv4 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage Example 375 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To enable ports 1 to 2 to manage address entry DES 3528 5 config lldp ports 1 2 mgt_addr ipv4 192 168 254 10 enable Command config config lldp ports 1 2 mgt_addr ipv4 192 168 254 10 enable Success DES 3528 5 config Mice om ports basic_tlvs Purpose Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more optional TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements Syntax config Ildp
185. 8 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show mld_snooping multicast_vlan mv1 Command show mld_snooping multicast_vlan mvl MLDM VLAN Global State Enabled VLAN Name VID Member Untagged Ports Tagged Member Ports Source Ports Untagged Source Ports Status Enabled Replace Source IP Remap Priority None Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 config mlid_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched Purpose Used to configure forwarding mode for MLD Multicast VLAN unmatched packet Syntax config mld_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched disable enable Description When the switch receives an MLD packet it will match the packet against the multicast profile to determine the MLD multicast VLAN to be associated with If the packet does not match any profiles the packet will be forwarded or dropped based on the setting By default the packet will be dropped Parameters enable The unmatched packet will be flooded on the VLAN disable The unmatched packet will be dropped Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set unmatched packet to be flooded on the VLAN DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched enable Command config mld_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched enable Success DES 3528 5 191 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual IG
186. 8 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create snmp host Purpose Used to create a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Syntax create snmp host lt ipaddrs v1 v2c v3 noauth_nopriv auth_nopriv auth_priv lt auth_string 32 gt Description This command creates a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Parameters lt ijpadadr gt The IP address of the remote management station that will serve as the SNMP host for the Switch v1 Specifies that SNMP version 1 will be used The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP version 1 is a network management protocol that provides a means to monitor and control network devices v2c Specifies that SNMP version 2c will be used The SNMP v2c supports both centralized and distributed network management strategies It includes improvements in the Structure of Management Information SMI and adds some security features v3 Specifies that the SNMP version 3 will be used SNMP v3 provides secure access to devices through a combination of authentication and encrypting packets over the network SNMP v3 adds e Message integrity ensures that packets have not been tampered with during transit Authentication determines if an SNMP message is from a valid source Encryption scrambles the contents of messages to prevent it being viewed by an unauthorized source noauth_nopriv Specifi
187. 8 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable mac_based_access control Purpose Used to enable MAC based Access Control Syntax enable mac_based_access_control Description This command will enable the MAC based AC function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable MAC based AC function DES 3528 5 enable mac based access control Command enable mac based access control Success DES 3528 5 disable mac_based_ access _ control Purpose Used to disable MAC based AC Syntax disable mac_based_ access _ control Description This command will disable the MAC based AC function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable MAC based AC function DES 3528 5 disable mac based access control Command disable mac based access _ control Success DES 3528 5 config mac_based_ access _ control password Purpose Used to configure the password of the MAC based AC Syntax config mac_based_access_control password lt passwd 16 gt Description This command will set the password that will be used for authentication via RADIUS server Parameters lt passwd 16 gt In RADIUS mode the switch communicate with RADIUS server use the password The maximum length of the key is 16 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users
188. 9 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config jwac switch_http_port Purpose Used to configure the TCP port which the JWAC Switch listens to Syntax config jwac switch_http_port lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt http https Description This command allows you to configure the TCP port which the JWAC Switch listens to This port number is used in the second stage of the authentication PC user will connect the page on the switch to input the user name and password If not specified the default port number is 80 If no protocol specified the protocol is HTTP Parameters lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt A TCP port which the JWAC Switch listens to and uses to finish the authenticating process http To specify the JWAC runs HTTP protocol on this TCP port httos To specify the JWAC runs HTTPS protocol on this TCP port Restrictions The HTTP cannot run at TCP port 443 and the HTTPS cannot run at TCP port 80 Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure JWAC switch_http_port DES 3528 5 config jwac switch_http_port 8888 http Command config jwac switch_http_port 8888 http Success DES 3528 5 360 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config jwac ports Purpose Used to configure port state of JWAC Syntax config jwac ports lt portlist gt all state enable di
189. 9 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config wac ports Purpose Used to configure WAC port level settings on the Switch Syntax config wac ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable aging_time infinite lt min 1 1440 gt idle_time infinite lt min 1 1440 gt block_time lt sec 0 300 gt 1 Description This command is used to configure WAC port level settings on the Switch Parameters state Specifies to enable disable WAC state aging_time A time period during which an authenticated host will be kept in authenticated state infinite indicates the authenticated host on the port will not ageout The default value is 24 hours idle_time A time period after which an authenticated host will be moved to an un authenticated state if there is no traffic during that period infinite indicates the host will not be removed from the authenticated state due to the idle of traffic The default value is infinite block_time If a host fails to pass the authentication it will be blocked for this period of time before it can be re authenticated The default value is 60 seconds Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure port WAC state DES 3528 5 config wac ports 1 8 state enable Command config wac ports 1 1 1 8 state enable Success DES 3528 5 config wac switch_http_p
190. AN classification precedence Syntax show vlan_precedence ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display VLAN classification precedence Parameters lt portlist gt Specify a port or a range of ports to be configured Restrictions None Example usage To display the subnet based VLAN classification precedence DES 3528 5 show vlan_precedence ports 1 Command show vlan_precedence ports 1 VLAN Precedence 143 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual ASYMMETRIC VLAN COMMANDS The asymmetric VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table enable asymmeticwan o sable asymmevie wan O show asymmeticvan PO Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable asymmetric_vian Purpose Used to enable the asymmetric VLAN function on the Switch Syntax enable asymmetric_vlan Description This command enables the asymmetric VLAN function on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable asymmetric VLANs DES 3528 5 enable asymmetric_vlan Command enable asymmetric _vlan Success DES 3528 5 disable asymmetric_vlan Purpose Used to disable the asymmetric VLAN function on the Switch Syntax disable asymmetric_vlian Description This command disables the asy
191. Administrator level users can issue this command 337 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To set the SSL cachetimeout for 7200 seconds DES 3528 5 config ssl cachetimeout 7200 Command config ssl cachetimeout 7200 Success DES 3528 5 show ssl cachetimeout Purpose Used to show the SSL cache timeout Syntax show ssl cachetimeout Description This command allows the user to view the SSL cache timeout currently implemented on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view the SSL cache timeout on the Switch DES 3528 5 show ssl cachetimeout Command show ssl cachetimeout Cache timeout is 600 second s DES 3528 5 show ssl Purpose Used to view the SSL status and the certificate file status on the Switch Syntax show ssl Description This command is used to view the SSL status on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view the SSL status on the Switch DES 3528 5 show ssl Command show ssl SSL status Enabled RSA WITH RC4 128 MD5 Enabled RSA WITH 3DES_EDE CBC SHA Enabled DHE DSS WITH 3DES_EDE CBC SHA Enabled RSA EXPORT WITH RC4 40 MD5 Enabled DES 3528 5 338 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show ssl certificate Purpose Used to view the SSL certificate file status on the Switch Syntax show ssl certificate Description
192. After the packet flow has stabilized the rate will initially increase by 25 and then return to a normal packet flow NOTICE When the Safeguard Engine is enabled the Switch will allot bandwidth to various traffic a flows ARP IP using the FFP Fast Filter Processor metering table to control the CPU utilization and st traffic This may limit the speed of routing traffic over the network The Safeguard Engine commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config safeguard_engine state enable disable utilization rising lt value 20 100 gt falling lt value 20 100 gt trap_log enable disable mode strict fuzzy 1 Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config safeguard_engine Purpose Used to configure ARP storm control for system Syntax config safeguard_engine state enable disable utilization rising lt value 20 100 gt falling lt value 20 100 gt trap_log enable disable mode strict fuzzy 1 Description This command is used to configure Safeguard Engine to minimize the effects of an ARP storm Parameters state enable disable Select the running state of the Safeguard Engine function as enable or disable utilization Select this option to trigger the Safeguard Engine function to enable based on the following determinates rising lt value 20 100
193. CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config dhcp relay option_60 default mode drop Command config dhcp_relay option_60 default mode drop Success DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_60 delete Purpose This command is used to delete dhcp_ relay option _60 entry Syntax config dhcp_relay option_60 delete string lt mutiword 255 gt relay lt ipaddr gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt all default lt ipaddr gt Description This command can delete the entry specifed by user When all is specified all rules excluding the default rules are deleted Parameters string Deletes all the entries whose string is equal to the string specified if the IP address is not specified relay lt ipaddr gt Deletes one entry whose string and IP address are equal to the string and IP address specified by the user ipaddress Deletes any entry whose IP address is equal to the specified IP address default Deletes any defaut relay IP address if ipaddress is not specified Default lt ipaddr gt Deletes all default relay ipaddress if IP address is not specified Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the DHCP relay option 60 DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_60 delete all Command config dhcp_relay option_60 delete all Success DES 3528 5 show dhcp_relay option_60 Purpose This command is used to show dhcp_relay option_60 entry Syntax show d
194. Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table feabews C config wac authorization radius enable disable local enable disable 1 network config wac clear_default_redirpath config wac lt string 128 gt default_redirpath config wac method local radius config wac ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable aging_time infinite ha 1 1440 gt idle_time infinite lt min 1 1440 gt block_time lt sec 0 300 gt 1 config wac lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt http https switch_http_port eS sowed Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable wac Purpose Used to enable the Web based access control function Syntax enable wac Description This command will enable the WAC function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the WAC function 436 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 enable wac Command enable wac Success DES 3528 5 disable wac Purpose Used to disable the Web based access control function Syntax disable wac Description This command will disable the WAC function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the WAC function DES
195. D LIST nnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnna 404 MAC BASED ACCESS CONTROL COMMANDS LIST nnnnssnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 419 MULTIPLE AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS 2 ccccssecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeees 430 WEB BASED ACCESS CONTROL COMMANDS cecccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaseeeeenseeseneneeeenaaes 436 POE COMMANDS eca al 446 PPPOE CIRCUIT ID INSERTION COMMANDSG 0 cccsecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeeenseeees 450 DNS RELAY COMMANDS rennend adada aa 451 POLICY ROUTE COMMANDS scssi a E 454 BPDU ATTACK PROTECTION COMMANDS 00 ccctecccceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeneeeseeaneees 457 ETHERNET OAM COMMANDS sisson aa a aR a 461 DHCP SERVER GCGOMMANDS ctii a es 472 CABLE DIAGNOSTIC COMMANDS asssnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn mnnn 486 CONNECTIVITY FAULT MANAGEMENT COMMANDS 200 cccccsecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeseees 488 COMMAND FISD TORY GIS Tasrisnennnn sentences ienteceniestecaneesiesaneestistaneeson 905 TECHINIGAL SPECIFICATIONS iascsesiccsscecccasciesccsaniecacssedccecetedassentwsaccsnavaaseceseiearascesntaonscantecssese 509 MITIGATING ARP SPOOFING ATTACKS VIA PACKET CONTENT ACL ccceeeseeseees PASSWORD RECOVERY PROCEDURE xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual INTRODUCTION The Switch can be managed
196. D Link Building Networks for People RELEASE 2 0 Table of Contents INTRODUC THON cisiiooni ca tetes ian decceeeeteces icc bec ecee died etcetiet indeed aa 1 USING THE CONSOLE Cbd saci wtis sicec tase aise satciaicer a anew AEE EE 3 COMMAND SYNTAX craic seca sees sacs soc sats ca da case eter edeandeerac iaai 7 BASIC SWITCH COMMANDS visissiscocessteccessstecosssececisssecessienedacseectdacsvecesuncvecensecesenndeecwasstecensssvecesess 9 MODIFY BANNER AND PROMPT COMMANDS 0 cssccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneneeeeeeeenseeees 22 SWITCH PORT COMMANDS cron 25 PORT SECURITY COMMANDS ccctectcscvccaticeuiectoectdccticcvdsaticcuiestiecsseetiecsicoticsedeebiconiecticevieciiseeiess 30 STACKING COMMANDS titeieteccerceceeveccteieteceerectecnrccebas aeaa E EES dai 34 NETWORK MANAGEMENT SNMP COMMANDS 0 ccccccteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeseneneeeeeeneeesons 37 VV CRU TILEY COMMANDS raiser E a 56 NETWORK MONITORING COMMANDS sssnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnne 65 MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL MSTP COMMANDG ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 80 FORWARDING DATABASE COMMANDS assnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm nnne 93 TRAFFIC CONTROL COMMANDS isaissiisiccasaticcevece sncevatas aa iaasvncctpectekssascietesnnteedevacctetsuancusssussaees 100 QOS COMMANDS csse aaaea Eaa eaa 104 PORT MIRRORING COMMANDS assnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
197. DES 3528 5 show stack_information Purpose Used to display the stack information table Syntax show stack_information Description This command display stack information Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage example To display stack information DES 3528 5 show stack information Command show stack information Duplex_Chain Prio Prom Runtime H W Exist rity version version version DES 3528 Exist 20 00 00 00 00 01 96 1 00 B007 2 00 B025 A2 DES 3528P Exist 32 00 01 03 04 04 04 1 00 B007 2 00 B025 Al DES 3528P NOT_EXIST NOT_EXIST NOT_EXIST NOT_EXIST NOT_EXIST DES 3528 5 35 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config stacking mode Purpose Used to configure the stacking mode Syntax config stacking mode disable enable Description This command will enable or disable the stacking mode for the switch When enabled the last two ports on the rear of the switch will be enabled for stacking Parameters enable disable Use these parameters to enable or disable the stacking mode for the switch Once this command is executed it will cause the switch to reboot Before configuring the stacking mode of a switch to disable status the switch must be physically removed from the stacking swtitches Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command
198. Delay 15 Max Hops 20 TX Hold Count 3 Forwarding BPDU Enabled NNI BPDU Address dotlad DES 3528 5 Status 3 STP enabled for MSTP DES 3528 5 show stp Command show stp STP Bridge Global Settings STP Status Enabled STP Version MSTP Max Age 20 Forward Delay gt 15 Max Hops 20 TX Hold Count 7S Forwarding BPDU Enabled NNI BPDU Address dotlad DES 3528 5 89 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show stp ports Purpose Used to display the Switch s current STP ports configuration Syntax show stp ports lt portlist gt Description This command displays the STP ports settings for a specified port or group of ports one port at a time Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be viewed Information for a single port is displayed If no ports are specified the STP information for port 1 will be displayed Users may use the Space bar p and n keys to view information for the remaining ports Restrictions None Example usage To show STP ports information for port 1 STP enabled on Switch DES 3528 5 show stp ports Command show stp ports MSTP Port Information Port Index 1 Hello Time 2 2 Port STP Enabled External PathCost Auto 200000 Edge Port False No P2P Auto Yes Port RestrictedRole False Port RestrictedTCN False Port Forward BPDU Enabled 7 MSTI Designated Bridge Internal PathCo
199. Description This command is used to delete an option 61 rule Parameters mac_address The entry with the specified MAC address will be deleted string The entry with the specified string will be deleted all All rules excluding the default rule will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the DHCP relay option 61 rules DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_61 delete mac_address 00 11 22 33 44 55 Command config dhcp_relay option_61 delete mac_address 00 11 22 33 44 55 Success DES 3528 5 show dhcp_relay option_61 Purpose This command displays DHCP relay option 61 Syntax show dhcp_relay option_61 Description This command displays DHCP relay option 61 Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the DHCP relay option 61 DES 3528 5 show dhcp relay option_61 Command show dhcp_relay option_61 Default Relay Rule Drop Type Relay Rule 00 01 22 33 44 55 MAC Address Total Entries DES 3528 5 218 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config dhcp_local_relay vlan Purpose Used to enable or disable DHCP local relay function to the vlan Syntax config dhcp_local_relay vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt state enable disable Description This command is used to enable or disable the DHCP local relay function for a specified vlan DHCP option 82 will also be
200. Enabled 172 18 202 1 32 172 18 202 0 24 10 1 1 0 24 Update Server 365 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show jwac auth_ state ports Purpose Used to display information of JWAC client host Syntax show jwac auth_state ports lt portlist gt Description This command allows you to show the information of JWAC client host If port 1 is in host based mode 1 mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 is authenticated without VLAN assigned may be the specified target VLAN does not exist or the target VLAN has not been specified the ID of RX VLAN will be displayed RX VLAN ID is 4004 in this example 2 mac 00 00 00 00 00 02 is authenticated with target VLAN assigned the ID of target VLAN will be displayed target VLAN ID is 1234 in this example 3 mac 00 00 00 00 00 03 failed to pass authentication the VID field will be shown as indicating that packets with SA 00 00 00 00 00 03 will be droped no matter which VLAN these packets are from 4 mac 00 00 00 00 00 04 attempts to start authentication the VID field will be shown as until authentication completed If port 2 is in port based mode 1 mac 00 00 00 00 00 10 is the mac which made port 2 pass authentication mac address with P in the end indicats that this authentication is from a port in port based mode If port 3 is in port based mode 1 mac 00 00 00 00 00 20 attempts to start authentication mac ad
201. Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config sflow flow_sampler ports all rate 10 maxheadersize 100 Command config sflow flow_sampler ports all rate 10 maxheadersize 100 Success DES 3528 delete sflow flow_sampler Purpose Used to delete the sflow flow_sampler Syntax delete sflow flow_sampler ports lt portlist gt all Description This command is used to delete the sflow flow_sampler that has been configured for the specified port Parameters ports Specifies the list of ports to be configured Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete all the sflow flow_sampler DES 3528 5 delete sflow flow_sampler ports all Command delete sflow flow_sampler ports all Success DES 3528 5 show sflow flow_sampler Purpose Used to show the sflow flow_sampler information of ports which have been created Syntax show sflow flow_sampler Description This command is used to show the sFlow flow_sampler which has been configured for ports The actual value rate is 256 times the displayed rate value There are two types of rates ConfigRate is configed by the user In order to limit the number of packets sent to the CPU when the rate of traffic to the CPU is high the sampling rate will be decreased This is specified as the active rate Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the sflow flow_sampler DES 3528 5 show sflow f
202. IP address below lt ipaddr gt The DHCP server IP address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete an IP destination from the DHCP relay table DES 3528 5 config dhcp relay delete ipif System 10 58 44 6 Command config dhcp_relay delete ipif System 10 58 44 6 Success DES 3528 5 209 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config dhcp_relay option_82 state Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure the state of DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the switch config dhcp_relay option_82 state enable disable This command is used to configure the state of DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the switch enable When this field is toggled to Enabled the relay agent will insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP server and client When the relay agent receives the DHCP request it adds the option 82 information and the IP address of the relay agent if the relay agent is configured to the packet Once the option 82 information has been added to the packet it is sent on to the DHCP server When the DHCP server receives the packet if the server is capable of option 82 it can implement policies like restricting the number of IP addresses that can be assigned to a single remote ID or circuit ID
203. LAN for which to delete IGMP snooping static group information lt vidlist gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to delete IGMP snooping static group information lt jpaddr gt The static group address for which to delete IGMP snooping static group information for Layer 3 switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a static group 226 1 1 1 on VID 1 202 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 delete igmp_snooping static_group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 Command delete igmp_snooping static_group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 Success DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping static_group Purpose Used to configure the current IGMP snooping static group on the Switch Syntax config igmp_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipaddr gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command is used to add or delete a member port list of a specified static group Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to configure IGMP snooping static group information lt vidlist gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to configure IGMP snooping static group information lt jpaddr gt The static group address for which to configure IGMP snooping static group information for Layer 3 switch add delete lt portlist gt Portlist to add
204. MAC Address Lease Time secs Port Status 10 62 58 35 00 0B 5D 05 34 0B 35964 Active 10 33 53 82 00 20 c3 56 b2 ef 2590 Inactive Total entries DES 3528 5 To display the address_binding DHCP snooping max_entry on specified ports DES 3528 5 show address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1 12 Command show address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1 12 Port Max Entry ow OA A UO FF WD EF DES 3528 config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports Purpose Used to specify the maximum number of entries which can be dynamically learned DHCP snooping by the specified ports Syntax config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports lt portlist gt all limit lt value 1 50 gt no_limit Description This command is used to specify the maximum number of DHCP snooping entries on specified ports By default the per port maximum entry has no limit Parameters portlist Specifies the list of ports to be configured for the DHCP snooping maximum learned entry limit Specifies the maximum number Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 163 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To set the maximum number of entries that ports 1 3 can learn to 10 DES 3528 5 config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1 3 limit 10 Command config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports 1 3 limit 10 Success
205. MP SNOOPING COMMANDS The IGMP Snooping commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the ae table Command Parameters sss i sSSS config igmp_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all state enable disable fast_leave enable disable report_suppression enable disable 1 vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vidlist gt all query_interval lt sec 1 65535 gt max_response_time lt sec 1 25 gt robustness_variable lt value 1 255 gt config igmp_snooping querier last_member_query_interval lt sec 1 25 gt state enable disable version lt value 1 3 gt 1 fembeomp snooping fT fssabeiompsrooprg fT show igmp_ snooping group a lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt lt ipaddr gt data_driven show router_ports vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all static dynamic forbidden show igmp_ snooping ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt rate_limit config igmp_snooping ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt value 1 1000 gt no_limit rate_limit show igmp_ snooping vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vianid lt vidlist gt forwarding create igmp_ snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipaddr gt static_group show igmp_ snooping vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipad
206. N The binding profile will affect the group joined to the multicast VLAN Syntax config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete profile_name lt profile_name 1 32 gt Description After binding a profile to a multicast VLAN when a multicast group attempt to join this multicast VLAN member port the group cannot join this multicast VLAN if the group does not belong to the range of binding profile lj NOTE Multiple profiles can be added to a multicast VLAN gf Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters add Used to associate a profile to a multicast VLAN delete Used to de associate a profile from a multicast VLAN lt profile_name 32 gt The name of the MLD multicast VLAN group profile to be associated or de associated to the specified multicast VLAN Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To associate an MLD multicast VLAN group profile g1 to MLD multicast VLAN mv1 DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group mvl add profile_name gl Command config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group mvl add profile _name gl Success DES 3528 5 show mid_snooping multicast_vlan_group Purpose Used to display the multicast group profiles configured for the specified MLD multicast VLAN Syntax show mid_snoop
207. O Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create cfm md Purpose Used to create a maintenance domain Syntax create cfm md lt string 22 gt level lt int 0 7 gt Description Different maintenance domains should have different names Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name level Specifies the maintenance domain level Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a cfm maintenance domain DES 3528 5 create cfm md op_domain level 2 Command create cfm md op_domain level 2 Success DES 3528 5 config cfm md Purpose Used to configure parameters of a maintenance domain Syntax config cfm md lt string 22 gt mip none auto explicit sender_id none chassis manage chassis_manage 1 Description Creation of MIPs on a MA is useful for tracing the link MIP by MIP It also allows the user to perform loop back from MEP to an MIP Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name mip Specifies and controls the creation of MIPs none Specifies that MIPs will not be created This is the default value auto MIPs can always be created on any ports in this MD if that port is not configured with a MEP of this MD For the intermediate switch in a MA the setting must be auto in order for the MIPs to be created on this device explicit MIPs can be created on any ports in this MD only
208. OAM mode passive or active 4 Maximum OAMPDU size The largest OAMPDU that the OAM entity supports OAM entities exchange maximum OAMPDU sizes and negotiate to use the smaller of the two maximum OAMPDU sizes between the peers 5 OAM configuration revision The configuration revision of the OAM entity as reflected in 466 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show ethernet_oam ports status Parameters Restrictions Example usage the latest OAMPDU sent by the OAM entity The config revision is used by OAM entities to indicate that configuration changes have occurred which might require the peer OAM entity to re evaluate whether OAM peering is allowed OAM mode change 6 OAM Functions Supported The OAM functions supported on this port These functions include Unidirectional It indicates that the OAM entity supports the transmission of OAMPDUs on links that are operating in unidirectional mode traffic flowing in one direction only Loopback It indicates that the OAM entity can initiate and respond to loop back commands Link Monitoring It indicates that the OAM entity can send and receive Event Notification OAMPDUs Variable It indicates that the OAM entity can send and receive variable requests to monitor the attribute value as described in the IEEE 802 3 Clause 30 MIB At present only loop back and link monitoring are supported portlist Specifies a range of por
209. P MAC Port Binding Setting window All others will be discarded The function is port based meaning a user can enable or disable the function on the individual port To configure the ACL mode the user must first set up IP MAC Port binding using the create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress command to create an entry Then the user must enable the mode by entering the config address_binding ports lt portlist gt mode acl command NOTE When configuring the ACL mode function of the IP MAC Port Binding function please pay close attention to previously set ACL entries Since the ACL mode is enabled it adds the last available access profile ID to the ACL table and the first ACL mode entry takes precedence over later entries This may render some user defined ACL parameters inoperable due to the overlapping of settings combined with the ACL entry priority defined by profile ID For more information on ACL settings please refer to Access Control List ACL Commands section in this manual NOTE Once ACL profiles have been created by the Switch through the IP MAC Port Binding function the user cannot modify delete or add ACL rules to these ACL mode access profile entries Any attempt to modify delete or add ACL rules will result in a configuration error as seen in the previous figure NOTE When downloading configuration files to the Switch be aware of the ACL configurations loaded as compared to the ACL mode access profile entries
210. Permit DES 3528 5 delete authen enable method list name Permit Command delete authen enable method list name Permit Success DES 3528 5 show authen_enable Purpose Used to display the method list of authentication methods for promoting normal user level privileges to Administrator level privileges on the Switch Syntax show authen_enable default method_list_name lt string 15 gt all Description This command is used to display a user defined method list of authentication methods for promoting user level privileges to Administrator level privileges Parameters default Entering this parameter will display the default method list for users attempting to gain access to Administrator level privileges on the Switch method_list_name lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the given method list the user wishes to view all Entering this parameter will display all the authentication login methods currently configured on the Switch The window will display the following parameters Method List Name The name of a previously configured method list name Priority Defines which order the method list protocols will be queried for authentication when a user attempts to log on to the Switch Priority ranges from 1 highest to 4 lowest Method Name Defines which security protocols are implemented per method list name Comment Defines the type of Method User
211. Purpose Used to config wac default redirect path Syntax config wac default_redirpath lt string 128 gt Description If the default redirect path is configured the user will be redirected to the default redirect path after successful authentication When the string is cleared the client will not be redirected to another URL after successful authentication Parameters lt string 128 gt The URL that the client will be redirected to after successful authentication The redirected path is cleared by default Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the WAC default redirect path DES 3528 5 config wac default_redirpath http 2 3 2 3 Command config wac default_redirpath http 2 3 2 3 Success DES 3528 5 config wac method Purpose Used to configure the global parameter of the web authentication Syntax config wac method local radius Description This command configures the global parameter for Web authentication Parameters method Specifies the authenticated method local The authentication will be done via the local database radius The authentication will be done via the RADIUS server Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the authentication method DES 3528 5 config wac method radius Command config wac method radius Success DES 3528 5 43
212. RFC standards If the mode is enabled the packets will be discarded That means the packets will not be sent to the CPU and will not be propagated Command Parameters config cpu_filter 13_ control_pkt lt portlist gt dvmrp pim igmp_query 1 all state enable disable show cpu_filter 18_control_pkt lt portlist gt ports Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config cpu_filter l3_control_pkt Purpose Used to discard the I3 control packets sent to CPU from specific ports Syntax config cpu_filter I3_ control_pkt lt portlist gt dvmrp pim igmp_query 1 all state enable disable Description This command is used to discard the 13 control packets sent to CPU from specific ports Parameters portlist Specifies the port list to filter control packet dvmrp Speficies that the filtered L3 control protocol as DVMRP pim Speficies that the filtered L3 control protocol as PIM igmp_query Speficies that the filtered L3 control protocol as IGMP query state Enable or disable the filtering function Default is disable Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To filter DVMRP and PIM in port 1 26 DES 3528 5 config filter control_packet 1 26 dvmrp pim state enable Command config filter control_packet 1 26 dvmrp pim state enable Success DES 3528 5 show cpu_filter I3_control_pkt ports Purpose Used to di
213. S DES 3528 5 config sim commander Command config sim commander Success DES 3528 5 To update the name of a group DES 3528 5 config sim commander group_name Trinity Command config sim commander group_name Trinity Success DES 3528 5 download sim_ms Purpose Used to download firmware or configuration file to an indicated device Syntax download sim_ms firmware_from_tftp configuration_from_tftp lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename gt members lt mslist 1 32 gt all Description This command will download a firmware file or configuration file to a specified device from a TFTP server Parameters firmware_from_tftp Specify this parameter to download firmware to members of a SIM group configuration_from_tfto Specify this parameter to download a switch configuration to members of a SIM group lt paddr gt Enter the IP address of the TFTP server lt path_filename gt Enter the path and the filename of the firmware or switch on the TFTP server members Enter this parameter to specify the members to which the user prefers to download firmware or switch configuration files The user may specify a member or members by adding one of the following lt msilist gt Enter a value or values to specify which members of the SIM group will receive the firmware or switch configuration _ all Add this parameter to specify all members of the SIM group will receive the fi
214. S 3528 5 config flow_meter Purpose Used to configure packet flow based metering based on an access profile and rule 258 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config flow_meter Syntax Description Parameters config flow_meter profile_id lt value 1 14 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt access_id lt value 1 128 gt tr_tcm cir lt value 0 15624 gt cbs lt value 0 16384 gt pir lt value 0 15624 gt pbs lt value 0 16384 gt sr_tcm cir lt value 0 15624 gt cbs lt value 0 16384 gt ebs lt value 0 16384 gt conform permit replace_dscp lt value 0 63 gt counter enable disable exceed permit replace_dscp lt value 0 63 gt counter enable disable drop violate permit replace_dscp lt value 0 63 gt counter enable disable drop delete This command is used to configure the flow based metering function The metering function supports three modes single rate two color single rate three color and two rate three color The access rule must be created before the parameters in this command is configured For the single rate two color mode users may set the preferred bandwidth for this rule in Kbps and once the bandwidth has been exceeded overflow packets will be either dropped or set to a drop precedence depending on the configuration The drop precedence will be used by RED With RED the packet with higher drop precedence will be dropped
215. S 3528 5 enable hol_prevention Command enable hol_prevention Success DES 3528 5 114 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable hol_ prevention Purpose Used to disable HOL prevention Syntax disable hol_ prevention Description This command is used to disable the HOL prevention function on the switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable HOL prevention DES 3528 5 disable hol _ prevention Command disable hol_prevention Success DES 3528 5 show hol_prevention Purpose Used to show the HOL prevention state Syntax show hol_prevention Description This command displays the HOL prevention state Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display HOL prevention DES 3528 5 show hol_prevention Command show hol_prevention Device HOL Prevention State Enabled DES 3528 5 115 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual PORT MIRRORING COMMANDS The port mirroring commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config mirror port lt port gt add delete source ports lt portlist gt rx tx both enable mirror SS disable mirror OO Aa a Each command is listed in detail in the following s
216. S 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual NOTE For detailed information regarding Log entries that will appear in this window please refer to Appendix C at the back of the xStack DES 3528 Layer 2 Stackable Fast Ethernet Managed Switch User Manual TELI ESEL Purpose Used to enable the system log to be sent to a remote host Syntax enable syslog Description This command enables the system log to be sent to a remote host Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To the Syslog function on the Switch DES 3528 5 enable syslog Command enable syslog Success DES 3528 5 disable syslog Purpose Used to disable the system log to be sent to a remote host Syntax disable syslog Description This command disables the system log to be sent to a remote host Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the syslog function on the Switch DES 3528 5 disable syslog Command disable syslog Success DES 3528 5 show syslog Purpose Used to display the syslog protocol status as enabled or disabled Syntax show syslog Description This command displays the syslog status as enabled or disabled Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the current status of the syslog function 70 xStack DES 35
217. Switch configuration is loaded the Switch will automatically logout the server The configuration settings will be saved automatically and become the active configuration Upon booting up the autoconfig process is initiated the console screen will appear similar to the example below The configuration settings will be loaded in normal order 61 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 2 00 B033 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved DES 3528 5 DES 3528 5 DES 3528 5 download configuration 10 41 44 44 c cfg setting txt Command download configuration 10 41 44 44 c cfg setting txt Connecting to S rver cide eecaba dade ea ek Done Download configuration Done The very end of the autoconfig process including the logout appears like this DES 3528 5 disable authen_policy Command disable authen_policy Success DES 3528 5 End of configuration file for DES 3528 Saving configurations and logs to NV RAM Done KkKKKKKkkKKKK Logout kkkkkkkkkk NOTE With autoconfig enabled the Switch ipif settings now define the Switch as a DHCP client Use the show switch command to display the new IP settings status disable autoconfig Purpose Use to deactivate autoconfiguration from DHCP Syntax disable autoconfig Description This command is used t
218. Syntax show loopdetect ports all lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the current per port loop back detection settings on the switch Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports for the loop back detection all Specifies all ports for the loop back detection Restrictions None Example usage To show loop detect ports DES 3528 5 show loopdetect ports 1 3 Command show loopdetect ports 1 3 Port lLoopdetect State Loop Status Enabled Normal Enabled Loop Enabled Normal DES 3528 5 276 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual TRAFFIC SEGMENTATION COMMANDS Traffic segmentation allows users to further sub divide VLANs into smaller groups of ports that will help to reduce traffic on the VLAN The VLAN rules take precedence and then the traffic segmentation rules are applied Command Parameters config traffic_segmentation lt portlist gt all forward_list null all lt portlist gt show tratfic_segmentation lt portlist gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config traffic_segmentation Purpose Used to configure traffic segmentation on the Switch Syntax config traffic_segmentation lt portlist gt all forward_list null all lt portlist gt Description This command is used to configure traffic segmentation on the Switch Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range
219. TP on a network will have a single MSTP configuration that will have the following three attributes a A configuration name defined by an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters defined in the config stp mst_config_id command as name lt string gt b A configuration revision number named here as a revision_level and c A 4096 element table defined here as a vid_range which will associate each of the possible 4096 VLANs supported by the Switch for a given instance To utilize the MSTP function on the Switch three steps need to be taken a The Switch must be set to the MSTP setting config stp version b The correct spanning tree priority for the MSTP instance must be entered config stp priority c VLANs that will be shared must be added to the MSTP Instance ID config stp instance_id The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table fewiewp C config stp maxage lt value 6 40 gt maxhops lt value 6 40 gt hellotime lt value 1 2 gt forwarddelay lt value 4 30 gt txholdcount lt value 1 10 gt fopdu enable disable nni_bpdu_addr dotid dot1ad 1 config stp ports lt portlist gt externalCost auto lt value 1 200000000 gt hellotime lt value 1 2 gt migrate yes no edge true false auto p2p true false auto state enable disable restricted_role true fal
220. The maximum length is 32 characters Restrictions None Example usage To display all of the currently configured access profiles on the Switch DES 3528 5 show access_profile Command show access_profile Access Profile Table Total Unused Rule Entries 1773 Total Used Rule Entries 19 Access Profile ID 5 Source MAC Destination MAC 802 1P Ethernet Type 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 02 IGMP MLD Snoop FB Quit W Next Page imypya Next Entry Al All create cpu access_profile Purpose Used to create an access profile specifically for CPU Interface Filtering on the Switch and to define which parts of each incoming frame s header the Switch will examine Masks can be entered that will be combined with the values the Switch finds in the specified frame header fields Specific values for the rules are entered using the create cpu access_profile 232 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create cpu access profile Syntax Description Parameters command below create cpu access _profile profile_id lt value 1 5 gt ethernet vlan source_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt destination _mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt 802 1p ethernet_type 1 ip vlan source_ip mask lt netmasks destination_ip_ mask lt netmasks gt dscp icmp type code igmp type tcp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x
221. Then the DHCP server echoes the option 82 field in the DHCP reply The DHCP server unicasts the reply to the back to the relay agent if the request was relayed to the server by the relay agent The switch verifies that it originally inserted the option 82 data Finally the relay agent removes the option 82 field and forwards the packet to the switch port that connects to the DHCP client that sent the DHCP request disable If the field is toggled to disable the relay agent will not insert and remove DHCP relay information option 82 field in messages between DHCP servers and clients and the check and policy settings will have no effect Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure DHCP relay option 82 state DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_82 state enable Command config dhcp_relay option_82 state enable config dhcp_relay option_82 check Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure the checking mechanism of DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the switch config dhcp_relay option_82 check enable disable This command is used to configure the checking mechanism of DHCP BOOTP relay agent information option 82 of the switch enable When the field is toggled to enable the relay agent will check the validity of the packet s option 82 field If the switch receives a packet that contains the option 82 field from a DHCP client th
222. UI Parameters add Adds a user defined OUI for a voice device vendor delete Deletes a user defined OUI for a voice device vendor lt macaddr gt Specifies the user difined OUI MAC address lt macmask gt Specifies the user difined OUI MAC address mask lt desc 32 gt Specifies the descriptions for the user defined OUI Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add a user defined OUI of Voice device DES 3528 5 config voice_vlan oui add 00 0A 0B 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 Command config voice_vlan oui add 00 0A 0OB 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 Success DES 3528 5 config voice_vlan ports state Purpose Used to enable or disable the voice VLAN function on ports Syntax config voice_vlian ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable Description This command is used to enable disable the voice VLAN function on ports Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports to configure all Specifies to configure all ports state Specifies the voice VLAN function state on ports e enable Enables the voice VLAN function state on ports e disable Disables the voice VLAN function state on ports Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config voice VLAN portlist 4 6 enable DES 3528 5 config voice_vlan ports 4 6 state enable Command config voice_vlan ports 4 6 state enable
223. Usage example To disable the stacking mode DES 3528 5 config stacking mode disable Command config stacking mode disable Change Box bootmode may cause devices work restart still continue y n y show stacking mode Purpose Used to view the current stacking mode Syntax show stacking mode Description This command will display whether the current stacking mode is enabled or disabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Usage example To view the current stacking mode DES 3528 5 show stacking mode Command show stacking mode Stacking mode Enabled DES 3528 5 36 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual NETWORK MANAGEMENT SNMP COMMANDS The Switch supports the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP versions 1 2c and 3 Users can specify which version of the SNMP users want to use to monitor and control the Switch The three versions of SNMP vary in the level of security provided between the management station and the network device The following table lists the security features of the three SNMP versions SNMP Authentication Method Description Version Community String Community String is used for authentication NoAuthNoPriv Community String String Community String is used for authentication NoAuthNoPriv Username Username is used for authentication NoAuthNoPriv AuthNoPriv or AuthPriv
224. When enabled the device will check the method list and choose a technique for user authentication upon login Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the system access authentication policy DES 3528 5 enable authen_policy Command enable authen_policy Success DES 3528 5 disable authen_policy Purpose Used to disable system access authentication policy Syntax disable authen_policy Description This command will disable the administrator defined authentication policy for users trying to access the Switch When disabled the Switch will access the local user account database for username and password verification In addition the Switch will now accept the local enable password as the authentication for normal users attempting to access administrator level privileges Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the system access authentication policy DES 3528 5 disable authen_policy Command disable authen_policy Success DES 3528 5 show authen_ policy Purpose Used to display the system access authentication policy status on the Switch Syntax show authen_policy Description This command will show the current status of the access authentication policy on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the system access authen
225. XTACACS and TACACS do not support the enable function the user must create a special account on the server host which has the username enable and a password configured by the administrator that will support the enable function This function becomes inoperable when the authentication policy is disabled Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To enable administrator privileges on the Switch 326 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 enable admin Password x x xx DES 3528 5 config admin local_enable Purpose Used to configure the local enable password for administrator level privileges Syntax config admin local_enable Description This command will configure the locally enabled password for the enable admin command When a user chooses the local_enable method to promote user level privileges to administrator privileges he or she will be prompted to enter the password configured here that is set locally on the Switch Parameters lt password 15 gt After entering this command the user will be prompted to enter the old password then a new password in an alphanumeric string of no more than 15 characters and finally prompted to enter the new password again for confirmation See the example below Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the password for the local_enable
226. _bpdu_addr dot1d dot1ad This command is to configure the NNI port sent BPDU destination address to 802 1ad address 0180c200000D or 802 1d address 0180c2000021 When the Q in Q is enabled NNI port sent BPDU destination address will set to dotiad The user can configure the NNI port send BPDU destination address to dotid The default is dot1d None Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the STP BPDU destination address as dot ad on the Switch DES 3528 5 config stp nni_bpdu_addr dotlad Command config stp nni_bpdu_addr dotlad Success DES 3528 5 show stp mst_config_id Used to display the MSTP configuration identification Purpose Syntax show stp mst_config_id Description This command displays the Switch s current MSTP configuration identification Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the MSTP configuration identification currently set on the Switch 91 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show stp mst_config_id Command show stp mst_config_ id Current MST Configuration Identification Configuration Name 00 53 13 1A 33 24 Revision Level 0 Vid list 92 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual FORWARDING DATABASE COMMANDS The layer 2 forwarding
227. _mask lt hex 0x0 0xffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the source port e dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the destination port e flag mask all urg ack psh rst syn fin Enter the appropriate flag _mask parameter All incoming packets have TCP port numbers contained in them as the forwarding criterion These numbers have flag bits associated with them which are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may deny packets by denying certain flag bits within the packets The user may choose between all urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn Synchronize and fin finish e udp Specifies that the switch will examine each frame s User Datagram Protocol 253 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create cpu access_profile Parameters UDP field e src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 0xffff gt Specifies a UDP port mask for the source port e dst_port_mask lt hex O0x0 Oxffff gt Specifies a UDP port mask for the destination port protocol_id_mask lt hex 0x0 0xffffffff gt Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s Protocol ID field using the hex form entered here e user_define_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt Specifies that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID and the mask options behind the IP header packet_content_mask Specifies that the Switch will ma
228. _tftp log _to_tftp lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename gt members lt mslist gt all Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable sim Purpose Used to enable Single IP Management SIM on the Switch Syntax enable sim Description This command will enable SIM globally on the Switch SIM features and functions will not function properly unless this function is enabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 34 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To enable SIM on the Switch DES 3528 5 enable sim Command enable sim Success DES 3528 5 disable sim Purpose Used to disable Single IP Management SIM on the Switch Syntax disable sim Description This command will disable SIM globally on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable SIM on the Switch DES 3528 5 disable sim Command disable sim Success DES 3528 5 342 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show sim Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to view the current information regarding the SIM group on the Switch show sim candidates lt candidate_id 1 100 gt members lt member_id 1 32 gt group comm
229. a in this case when a logical AND operation between an IP address specified in the next step and the ip_source_mask match The default for an access profile on the Switch is to permit traffic flow To restrict traffic users must use the deny parameter Now that an access profile has been created you must add the criteria the Switch will use to decide if a given frame should be forwarded or filtered Here we want to filter any packets that have an IP source address between 10 42 73 0 and 10 42 73 255 config access_profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ip source_ip 10 42 73 1 port 1 deny Here we use the profile_id 1 which was specified when the access profile was created The add parameter instructs the Switch to add the criteria that follows to the list of rules that are associated with access profile 1 For each rule entered into the access profile you can assign an access_id that both identifies the rule and establishes a priority within the list of rules A lower access_id gives the rule a higher priority In case of a conflict in the rules entered for an access profile the rule with the highest priority lowest access_id will take precedence The ip parameter instructs the Switch that this new rule will be applied to the IP addresses contained within each frame s header source_ip tells the Switch that this rule will apply to the source IP addresses in each frame s header Finally the IP address 10 42 73 1 will be combined with the so
230. a lt string 22 gt direction inward outward port lt port gt Different MEP in the same MA must have different MEP ID MD name MA name and MEP ID together can identify a MEP Different MEP on the same device must have a different MEP name Before an MEP is created its MEPID should be configured in MA s MEPID list mep Specifies the MEP name It s unique among all MEPs configured on the device mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID It should be configured in MA s MEPID list md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name direction Specifies the MEP direction inward Specifies the inward facing up MEP outware Specifies the outward facing down MEP port Specifies the port number This port should be a member of the MA s associated VLAN Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 491 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To create a cfm MEP DES 3528 5 create cfm mep mepl mepid 1 md op_domain ma opl direction inward port 2 Command create cfm mep mepi mepid 1 md op_domain ma op direction inward port 2 Success DES 3528 5 config cfm mep Purpose Used to configure parameters of a MEP Syntax config cfm mep mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt state enable disable ccm enable
231. a correct response This IP does not respond to ARP requests or ICMP packets Do not set this IP as the same subnet of the client PC and do not set its IP to the same as another device otherwise the client PC cannot access the device Parameters lt paddr gt To specify the IP address of the virtual IP Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure JWAC virtual IP DES 3528 5 config jwac virtual_ip 1 1 1 1 Command config jwac virtual_ip 1 1 1 1 Success DES 3528 5 357 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config jwac quarantine_server_url Purpose Used to configure JWAC Quarantine Server URL Syntax config jwac quarantine_server_url lt string 128 gt Description This command allows you to configure the URL of the Quarantine Server If the redirect is enabled and the redirect destination is the Quarantine Server when an HTTP request from unauthenticated host not to the Quarantine Server reaches the JWAC Switch the Switch will handle this HTTP packet and send back a message to the host to make it access the Quarantine Server with the configured URL When the PC connects to the specified URL the quarantine server will request the PC user to input the user name and password to do authentication Parameters lt string 128 gt To specify the entire URL of authentication page on Quarantine Server Restr
232. a packet is not found in the white list the Switch will block the MAC address A major benefit of Loose state is that it uses less CPU resources because the Switch only checks incoming ARP packets However it also means that Loose state cannot block users who send only unicast IP packets An example of this is that a malicious user can perform DoS attacks by statically configuring the ARP table on their PC In this case the Switch cannot block such attacks because the PC will not send out ARP packets allow_zeroip Specifies whether to allow ARP packets with Source IP address 0 0 0 0 When enabled on a port all ARP packets with a source IP address of 0 0 0 0 is forwarded when set to disable they are blocked forward_dhcppkt By default the Switch will forward all DHCP packets However if the port state is set to Strict all DHCP packets will be dropped In that case enable forward_dhcppkt so that the port will forward DHCP packets even under Sirict state Enabling this feature also ensures that DHCP snooping works properly mode select to port to use ARP mode or ACL mode When a port is under ACL mode the switch will create ACL access entry corresponding to the entries of this port If the port mode changes to ARP all the ACL access entries will be deleted automatically The default mode of the port is ARP mode stop_learning_threshold lt value 0 500 gt Enter a stop learning threshold between 0 and 500 Entering 500 means the
233. able disable version lt value 1 3 gt 1 This command configures IGMP snooping querier lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping querier is to be configured lt vidlist gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured guery_interval Specifies the amount of time in seconds between general query transmissions the default setting is 125 seconds max_response_time The maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members The default setting is 70 seconds robustness_variable Provides fine tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet The value of the robustness variable is used in calculating the following IGMP message intervals e Group member interval Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides there are no more members of a group on a network This interval is calculated as follows robustness variable x query interval 1 x query response interval Other querier present interval Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that is the querier This interval is calculated as follows robustness variable x query interval 0 5 x query response interval Last member query count Number of group specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local members of a group The default number is the value of the robustness variable e By de
234. access_control_local mac Purpose Used to config the local database entry Syntax config mac_based_access_control_local mac lt macaddr gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command is used to modify a database entry Parameters mac The MAC address that access accept by local mode vlan If the MAC address is authorized the port will be assigbed to this vlan vlanid lf the MAC address is authorized the port will be assigbed to this vlan Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure a local database entry DES 3528 5 config mac_based_access_control_local mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 vlan default Command config mac_based_access_control_local mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 vlan default Success DES 3528 5 delete mac_based_access_control_local Purpose Used to delete the local database entry Syntax delete mac_based_access_control_local mac lt macaddr gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command is used to delete a database entry Parameters mac Deletes the database entry by this MAC address vlan Deletes the database entry by this VLAN name vianid Deletes the database entry by this VLAN id Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the local database entry by mac address DES 3528 5
235. accounting 10 10 10 1 hardware address 00 80 C8 02 02 02 type Ethernet Command create dhcp pool manual_binding accounting 10 10 10 1 hardware address 00 80 C8 02 02 02 type Ethernet delete dhcp pool manual_binding Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to specify the distinct identification of the client in dotted hexadecimal notation or hardware address to delete delete dhcp pool manual_binding lt pool_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt all An address binding is a mapping between the IP address and MAC address of a client The delete dhcp pool manual_binding command can be used to delete the manual binding entries lt pool name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool lt ipaddr gt Specifies the IP address which will be deleted all Specifies that all IP addresses will be deleted Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete manual binding entries 481 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 delete dhcp pool manual_binding accounting 10 10 10 1 Command delete dhcp pool manual_binding accounting 10 10 10 1 clear dhcp binding Purpose Used to clear all the dynamic binding entries for a pool or all pools Syntax clear dhcp binding lt pool_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt all all Description This command clears a specific pool s binding entries or all binding entries in
236. accounting service Command show accounting service Accounting Service Enabled Enabled Enabled 242 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual ACCESS CONTROL LIST ACL COMMANDS The Switch implements Access Control Lists that enable the Switch to deny network access to specific devices or device groups based on IP settings and MAC address Access profiles allows establishment of a criteria to determine whether or not the Switch will forward packets based on the information contained in each packet s header These criteria can be specified on a VLAN by VLAN basis Creating an access profile is divided into two basic parts First an access profile must be created using the create access_profile command For example if you want to deny all traffic to the subnet 10 42 73 0 to 10 42 73 255 you must first create an access profile that instructs the Switch to examine all of the relevant fields of each frame CREATE ACCESS PROFILE PROFILE_ID 1 PROFILE_NAME 1 IP SOURCE_IP_MASK 255 255 255 0 Here we have created an access profile that will examine the IP field of each frame received by the Switch Each source IP address the Switch finds will be combined with the source_ip_mask with a logical AND operation The profile _id parameter is used to give the access profile an identification number in this case 1 The deny parameter instructs the Switch to filter any frames that meet the criteri
237. ack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable gratuitous_arp trap amp log Purpose Used to disable gratuitous ARP trap and log state Syntax disable gratuitous_arp ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt trap log 1 Description This command is used to disable gratuitous ARP trap and log state When the trap and log are disabled the switch won t trap and log IP conflict events to inform the administrator Parameters ipif lt ipif name 12 gt The name of the IP interface the end node or station for which the ARP table entry was made resides on trap log Select gratuitous ARP trap and or log state Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example Usage To disable the system interface s gratuitous ARP log and trap DES 3528 5 disable gratuitous_arp System trap log Command disable gratuitous_arp System trap log Success DES 3528 5 config gratuitous_arp send periodically Purpose Used to configure the interval for periodical sending of gratuitous ARP request packet Syntax config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt interval lt value 0 65535 gt Description The command is used to configure the interval for the periodic sending of gratuitous ARP request packets By default the interval is O Parameters lt ipif_ name 12 gt The name of the Layer 3 interface lt value 0 65535 gt Periodically send gratu
238. address Ethernet H W type Protocol H W Protocol address type type address address length length 6 byte 6 byte 2 byte 2 byte 2 byte 1 byte 1 byte FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 20 5C 01 11 11 806 Table 5 Gratuitous ARP Operation Sender H W address 2 byte 6 byte ARP reply 00 20 5C 01 11 11 Sender protocol address 4 byte 10 10 10 254 Target H W address 6 byte 00 20 5C O1 11 11 A common DoS attack today can be done by associating a nonexistent or specified MAC address to the IP address of the network s default gateway The malicious attacker only needs to broadcast ONE Gratuitous ARP to the network claiming it is the gateway so that the whole network operation will be turned down as all packets to the Internet will be directed to the wrong node Target protocol address 4 byte 10 10 10 254 Likewise the attacker can either choose to forward the traffic to the actual default gateway passive sniffing or modify the data before forwarding it man in the middle attack The hacker cheats the victim s PC to think that it is a router and cheats the router to think it is the victim As can be seen in Figure 5 all traffic will be then sniffed by the hacker but the users will not notice anything happening Liser A uses this Attacker MAC MAC address Attacker Kian in the middle Figure 5 516 Broadcasting spoofed MAC address xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Seri
239. address drop Specify to drop the packet Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the DHCP relay option 61 DES 3528 5 config dhcp relay option_61 add mac_address 00 01 22 33 44 55 drop Command config dhcp_relay option_61 add mac_address 00 01 22 33 44 55 drop Success DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_61 default Purpose Used to determine the default action for option 61 Syntax config dhcp_relay option_61 default relay lt ipaddr gt drop Description This command is used to determine the rule to process those packets that have no option 61 matching rules The default default rule is drop Parameters relay Specifies to relay the packet that has no option 61 matching rules to an IP address drop Specifies to drop the packet that has no option 61 matching rules Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the DHCP relay option 61 default DES 3528 5 config dhcp relay option_61 default drop Command config dhcp_relay option_61 default drop Success DES 3528 5 217 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config dhcp_relay option_61 delete Purpose This command is used to delete an option 61 rule Syntax config dhcp_relay option_61 delete mac_address lt macaddr gt string lt desc_long 255 gt all
240. address gt vlan lt vilan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt priority lt value 0 7 gt Description This command is used to create a subnet based VLAN entry A subnet based VLAN entry is an IP subnet based VLAN classification rule If an untagged or priority tagged IP packet enters a switch port its source IP address will be compared with the subnet based VLAN entries If the source IP matcesh the subnet entry the packet will be classified to the VLANdefined for this subnet Parameters network Specifies an lpv4 network address The format is ipaddress prefix length vlan The VLAN to be associated with the subnet You can specify a VLAN name or VLAN ID The VLAN must be existed static VLAN priority Specifies the priority to be associated with the subnet It ranges from 0 to 7 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage This example shows how to create a subnet based VLAN entry DES 3528 5 create subnet_vlan network 172 168 1 1 24 vlan default priority 2 Command create subnet_vlan network 172 168 1 1 24 vlan default priority 2 Success DES 3528 5 141 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete subnet_vlian Purpose Use this command to delete subnet based VLAN entry Syntax delete subnet_vian network lt network_address gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all Descr
241. age To add a member DES 3528 5 config sim group add 2 Command config sim group add 2 Please wait for ACK SIM Config Success Success DES 3528 5 To delete a member DES 3528 5 config sim delete 1 Command config sim delete 1 Please wait for ACK SIM Config Success DES 3528 5 346 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config sim Purpose Used to configure role parameters for the SIM protocol on the Switch Syntax config sim commander group_name lt groupname 64 gt candidate dp_interval lt 30 90 gt hold_time lt sec 100 255 gt Description This command is used to configure parameters of switches of the SIM Parameters commander Use this parameter to configure the commander switch CS for the following parameters group_name lt groupname 64 gt Used to update the name of the group Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 64 characters to rename the SIM group dp_interval lt 30 90 gt The user may set the discovery protocol interval in seconds that the Switch will send out discovery packets Returning information to the CS will include information about other switches connected to it Ex MS CaS The user may set the dp_interval from 30 to 90 seconds hold time lt sec 100 300 gt Using this parameter the user may set the time in seconds the CS will hold information sent to it from other switches
242. ake care of the aging out of the entry Fora data driven entry the entry can be specified so that it doesnt ageout or ageout by the aged timer When data driven learning is enabled and data driven table is not full the multicast filtering mode for all VLANs will be ignored If the data driven learning table is full the multicast traffic will be forwarded based on the setting of multicast filtering mode a NOTE If a data driven group is created by the multicast traffic and the same IGMP group joins from a member ports later then the data driven fe group will become an ordinary IGMP snooping group en vian_name lt vlan_name gt The name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping data driven learning is to be configured Vianid lt vidlist gt The VID of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping data driven learning is to be configured state enable disable Allows users to enable or disable IGMP snooping data driven learning for the specified VLAN aged_out enable disable Allows users to enable or disable the aged_out time of the IGMP Snooping data driven learning for the specified VLAN expiry_time lt second gt Allows users to set the time that an IGMP Snooping data driven learning group will expire for the specified VLAN Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To enable data driven learning on VLAN default DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning vlan_name default sta
243. al_ relay Success DES 3528 5 show dhcp_local_relay Purpose Used to display the current DHCP local relay configuration Syntax show dhcp_local_relay Description This command is used to display the current DHCP local relay configuration Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the local dhcp relay status DES 3528 5 show dhcp_local_relay Command show dhcp_local_ relay DHCP BOOTP Local Relay Status Disabled DHCP BOOTP Local Relay VID List gt d DES 3528 5 220 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual 802 1X COMMANDS INCLUDING GUEST VLANs The Switch implements the server side of the IEEE 802 1 X Port based and Host based Network Access Control This mechanism is intended to allow only authorized users or other network devices access to network resources by establishing criteria for each port on the Switch that a user or network device must meet before allowing that port to forward or receive frames C C Ci E OP config 802 1x authorization network enable disable radius show 802 1x auth_state auth_configuration ports lt portlist gt contig 802 1x capability ports lt portlist gt all authenticator none config 802 1x max_users lt value 1 448 gt no_limit config 802 1x auth_parameter ports lt portlist gt all default direction both in port_control force _unauth auto force_auth q
244. all MEPs configured on the device mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID It should be configured in MA s MEPID list md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete cfm mep DES 3528 5 delete cfm mep mepname mep1 Command delete cfm mep mepname mepi Success DES 3528 5 delete cfm ma Purpose Used to delete a created maintenance association Syntax delete cfm ma lt string 22 gt md lt string 22 gt Description All MEPs created in the maintenance association will be deleted automatically Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a cfm ma 493 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 delete cfm ma opl md 3 Command delete cfm ma opl md 3 Success DES 3528 5 delete cfm md Purpose Used to delete a created maintenance domain Syntax delete cfm md lt string 22 gt Description All MEPs and maintenance associations created in the maintenance domain will be deleted automatically Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command E
245. all pools laa 1 NOTE This command will not clear the dynamic binding entry which matches a manual binding entry f Parameters lt pool name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear a dynamic binding entry in pool accounting DES 3528 5 clear dhcp binding all Command clear dhcp binding all show dhcp binding Purpose Used to display the current binding entry information Syntax show dhcp binding lt pool_name 12 gt Description This command displays the current binding entry information Parameters lt pool name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool Restrictions None Example usage To display dynamic binding entries DES 3528 5 show dhcp binding accounting Command show dhcp binding accounting Hardware Address Type Status Lifetime accounting 192 168 0 1 00 08 C8 08 13 88 Ethernet Manual 86400 Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 482 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show dhcp pool manual_binding Purpose Used to display the configured manual binding entries Syntax show dhcp pool manual binding lt pool_name 12 gt Description This command displays the configured manual binding entries Parameters lt pool name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool Restrictions None Example usage To display the c
246. ample usage To enable JWAC udp_filtering 354 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 enable jwac udp_filtering Command enable jwac udp_filtering Success DES 3528 5 disable jwac udp filtering function Purpose Used to disable JWAC UDP filtering function Syntax disable jwac udp filtering Description This command is used to disable JWAC UDP filtering function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable JWAC udp_filtering DES 3528 5 disable jwac udp filtering Command disable jwac udp_filtering Success DES 3528 5 enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor Purpose Used to enable JWAC quarantine server monitor Syntax enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor Description This command is for the JWAC switch to monitor the quarantine server ensuring that the server is okay If the Switch does not detect any quarantine server it will redirect all unauthenticated HTTP accesses to the JWAC Login Page when the redirect is enabled and the destination is configured as quarantine server Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable JWAC quarantine server monitor DES 3528 5 enable jwac quarantine _server_monitor Command enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor Success DES 3528 5
247. an issue this command Enabling the NetBIOS filter will create one access profile and three access rules per port UDP port number 137 and 138 and TCP port 139 Example usage To configure the NetBIOS state DES 3528 5 config filter netbios 1 10 state enable Command config filter netbios 1 10 state enable Success DES 3528 5 show filter netbios Purpose Used to display the switch settings to filter NetBIOS packets from specified ports Syntax show filter netbios Description This command will display the switch settings to filter NetBIOS packets from the specified ports Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the extensive NetBIOS filter status DES 3528 5 show filter netbios Command show filter netbios Enabled Ports 1 3 DES 3528 5 269 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config filter extensive_netbios Purpose Used to configure the switch to filter 802 3 frame NetBIOS packets from specified ports Syntax config filter extensive_netbios lt portlist gt all state enable disable Description This command will configure the switch to filter 802 3 frame NetBIOS packets from the specified ports Parameters lt portlist gt The list of port numbers to which the NetBIOS filter will be applied state enable disable Used to enable disable the NetBIOS filter on
248. ander_mac lt macaddrs gt neighbor This command will display the current information regarding the SIM group on the Switch including the following SIM Version Displays the current Single IP Management version on the Switch Firmware Version Displays the current Firmware version on the Switch Device Name Displays the user defined device name on the Switch MAC Address Displays the MAC Address of the Switch Capabilities Displays the type of switch be it Layer 2 L2 or Layer 3 L3 Platform Switch Description including name and model number SIM State Displays the current Single IP Management State of the Switch whether it be enabled or disabled Role State Displays the current role the Switch is taking including Commander Member or Candidate A Stand alone switch will always have the commander role Discovery Interval Time in seconds the Switch will send discovery packets out over the network Hold time Displays the time in seconds the Switch will hold discovery results before dropping it or utilizing it candidates lt candidate_id 1 100 gt Entering this parameter will display information concerning candidates of the SIM group To view a specific candidate include that candidate s ID number listed from 1 to 100 members lt member_id 1 32 gt Entering this parameter will display information concerning members of the SIM group To view a specific member include that m
249. annot be deleted lt ipif name 12 gt The name of the deleted IP interface all All IPIF except the System IPIF will be deleted Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete an IP interface DES 3528 5 delete ipif if2 Command delete ipif if2 Success DES 3528 5 enable ipif Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to enable the admin state for an interface enable ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt all This command enables the state for an IPIF When the state is enabled the IPv4 processing will be started When the IPv4 address is configured on the IPIF lt ipif_ name 12 gt The name of the IP interface all All the interface Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To enable the admin state of one interface DES 3528 5 enable ipif System Command enable ipif System Success DES 3528 5 disable ipif Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to disable the admin state for an interface disable ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt all This command disables the state for an ipif lt ipif name 12 gt The name of the IP interface all Specifies all interfaces Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 173 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To disable the admin sta
250. any dot1x_impb impb_jwac 1 This command is used to configure the authorization mode and authentication method on ports If Multiple authentication mode is none This port is doing the single authentication The port will be operated based on the auth mode configured by the single authentication module s command If Multiple authentication mode is not none The port is doing the multiple authentication The port will be operated based on the auth mode configured by the multiple authentication command The enable disable settings of individual authentication willl always take effect Suppose that the Multiple authentication method of a port is set to any but MAC is disabled JWAC and 802 1X are enabled then the user must pass either JWAC or 802 1X method Suppose that the Multiple authentication method of a port is set to impb_jwac but JWAC is disabled and IMPB is enabled then the authentication result will be the result of IMPB authentication portlist Specifies the ports to be configured auth_mode Choose between Port based or Host based Port based If one of the attached hosts passes the authentication process all hosts on the same port will be granted access to the network If the user fails the authorization process this port will keep trying the next authentication Host based Every user can be authenticated individually multi_authen_methods Specifies the method for multiple authentication none Specifies tha
251. arrow to review previous commands Shifts the cursor to the next field to the left Multiple Page Display Control Keys pd Oeste prevouspage OOOO a Stes he depay ofremaiing pages when mune pages aretobedeplayed O fa Dias te remaining pages witout pausing beween pagos xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual BASIC SWITCH COMMANDS The basic switch commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table lt username gt encrypt plain_text sha_1 lt password gt show account enable password encryption disable password encryption show session AO show swith SO config serial_port fbaud_rate 9600 19200 115200 auto_logout never 2_minutes 5_minutes Ti minutes A 15_minutes 1 enable clipaging ea e e Ce Ce OOOO C feo id OOS Each command is listed in detail in the following sections xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create account Purpose Used to create user accounts Syntax create account admin operator user lt username 15 gt Description This command is used to create user accounts that consist of a username of 1 to 15 characters and a password of 0 to 15 characters Up to 8 user accounts can be created Parameters admin operator user lt username 15 gt Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue
252. assword Parameters lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the trusted host to be created lt network_address gt P address and netmask of the trusted host to be created Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create the trusted host 49 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 create trusted host 10 62 32 1 Command create trusted host 10 62 32 1 Success create trusted _host network Purpose Used to create the trusted host Syntax create trusted_host network lt network_address gt Description This command is used to create the trusted host Parameters lt network_address gt P address and netmask of the trusted host to be created Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create the trusted host network DES 3528 5 create trusted host network 10 62 32 1 16 Command create trusted host network 10 62 32 1 16 Success show trusted_host Purpose Used to display a list of trusted hosts entered on the Switch using the create trusted_host command above Syntax show trusted_host Description This command a list of trusted hosts entered on the Switch using the create trusted_host command above Parameters lt network_address gt the network address to show Restrictions None Example Usage To display the list of tru
253. ast Sun 00 00 Annual From 29 Apr 00 00 To 12 Oct 00 00 DES 3528 5 292 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual ARP AND GRATUITOUS ARP COMMANDS The ARP commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create arpentry lt ipaddr gt lt macaddr gt config arpentry lt ipaddr gt lt macaddr gt delete arpentry lt ipaddr gt all show arpentry ipif lt ipif_ name 12 gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt static config arp_aging time lt sec 30 3932100 gt 0 clear arptable Lh O O config arp_spoofing_prevention add gateway_ip lt ipaddr gt gateway _mac lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all delete gateway_ip lt ipaddr gt config gratuitous_arp send ipif_status_up enable disable config gratuitous_arp send enable disable dup_ip_detected config gratuitous_arp learning enable disable enable gratuitous_arp ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt trap log 1 disable gratuitous_arp ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt trap log 1 config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt interval lt value 0 65535 gt show gratuitous _arp ipif lt ipif_ name 12 gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create arpeniry Purpose Used to make a static entry into the ARP table Syntax create arpentry lt ipaddr gt lt macaddr gt Desc
254. ate enable disable Description This command is used to configure loop back detection on the switch Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports for the loop back detection state enable disable Allows the loop back detection to be disabled and enabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the loop detect state to enable DES 3528 5 config loopdetect ports 1 5 state enable Command config loopdetect ports 1 5 state enable Success DES 3528 5 config loopdetect trap Purpose Used to configure trap modes Syntax config loopdetect trap none loop_detected loop_cleared both Description This command is used to configure trap modes Parameters none Trap will not be sent for both cases loop_detected Trap is sent when the loop condition is detected loop_cleared Trap is sent when the loop condition is cleared both Trap will be sent in both cases Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config loop trap both DES 3528 5 config loopdetect trap both Command config loopdetect trap both Success DES 3528 5 enable loopdetect Purpose Used to globally enable loop back detection on the switch Syntax enable loopdetect Description This command is used to globally enable loop back detection on the switch Parameters None Restrictions O
255. ategories these categories are NOT precisely the same as the parameters of the same name see below e Information Events classified as information are basic events occurring on the Switch that are not deemed as problematic such as enabling or disabling various functions on the Switch e Warning Events classified as warning are problematic events that are not critical to the overall function of the Switch but do require attention such as unsuccessful downloads or uploads and failed logins e Critical Events classified as critical are fatal exceptions occurring on the Switch such as hardware failures or spoofing attacks Parameters Choose one of the following to identify where severity messages are to be sent e trap Entering this parameter will define which events occurring on the Switch will be sent to a SNMP agent for analysis e log Entering this parameter will define which events occurring on the Switch will be sent to the Switch s log for analysis e al Entering this parameter will define which events occurring on the Switch will be sent to a SNMP agent and the Switch s log for analysis Choose one of the following to identify what level of severity warnings are to be sent to the destination entered above critical Entering this parameter along with the proper destination stated above will instruct the Switch to send only critical events to the Switch s log or SNMP agent warning Entering
256. ator diagnostics information Syntax show auth_ diagnostics ports lt portlist gt all Description This command displays authenticator diagnostics information Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured all All ports Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To display authenticator diagnostics information from port 1 237 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show auth_diagnostics ports 1 Command show auth_diagnostics ports 1 Port number EntersConnecting EapLogoffswhileConnecting EntersAuthenticating SuccessWhileAuthenticating TimeoutsWhileAuthenticating FailWhileAuthenticating ReauthswWhileAuthenticating EapStartsWhileAuthenticating EapLogoffWwhileAuthenticating ReauthswWhileAuthenticated EapStartsWhileAuthenticated EapLogoffwhileAuthenticated BackendResponses BackendAccessChallenges BackendOtherRequestsToSupplicant BackendNonNakResponsesFromSupplicant BackendAuthSuccesses BackendAuthFails O O O O O O O O O O O O O OOOO DES 3528 5 show auth_session_statistics Purpose Used to display authenticator session statistics information Syntax show auth_session_statistics ports lt portlist gt all Description This command displays authenticator session statistics information Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured all All port
257. automatically added Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN to be enabled by DHCP local relay State Enable or disable the DHCP local relay for a specified VLAN Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable DHCP local relay for the default VLAN DES 3528 5 config dhcp _local_relay vlan default state enable Command config dhcp_local_ relay vlan default state enable Success DES 3528 5 enable dhcp_local_relay Purpose Used to enable the DHCP local relay function on the Switch Syntax enable dhcp_local_relay Description This command is used to enable the DHCP local relay function on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the DHCP local relay function DES 3528 5 enable dhcp_local_relay Command enable dhcp_local_relay Success DES 3528 5 disable dhcp_local_relay Purpose Used to disable the DHCP local relay function on the Switch Syntax disable dhcp_local_relay Description This command is used to disable the DHCP local relay function on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the DHCP local relay function 219 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 disable dhcp_local_relay Command disable dhcp _loc
258. ax show ssh user authmode Description This command allows users to display the current SSH user setting Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the SSH user DES 3528 5 show ssh user authmode Command show ssh user authmode Current Accounts Username AuthMode HostName Host IP Password Total Entries DES 3528 5 NOTE To configure the SSH user the administrator must create a user account on the Switch For information concerning configuring a user account please see the section of this manual entitled Basic Switch Commands and then the command create account 332 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config ssh algorithm Purpose Used to configure the SSH algorithm Syntax config ssh algorithm 3DES AES128 AES192 AES256 arcfour blowfish cast128 twofish128 twofish192 twofish256 MD5 SHA1 RSA DSA enable disable Description This command allows users to configure the desired type of SSH algorithm used for authentication encryption Parameters 3DES This parameter will enable or disable the Triple _Data Encryption Standard encryption algorithm AES128 This parameter will enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES128 encryption algorithm AES192 This parameter will enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES192 encryption alg
259. ax users is 448 by default Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure 802 1x max users DES 3528 5 config 802 1x max users 200 Command config 802 1x max users 200 Success DES 3528 5 229 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config 802 1x auth_parameter Purpose Used to configure the parameters that control the operation of the authenticator associated with a port Syntax config 802 1x auth_parameter ports lt portlist gt all default direction both in port_control force_unauth auto force_auth quiet_period lt sec 0 65535 gt tx_period lt sec 1 65535 gt supp_ timeout lt sec 1 65535 gt server_timeout lt sec 1 65535 gt max_req lt value 1 10 gt reauth_period lt sec 1 65535 gt max_users lt value 1 448 gt no_limit enable_reauth enable disable 1 Description This command configures the parameters that control the operation of the authenticator associated with a port Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be displayed all Specifies all of ports to be displayed default Sets all parameter to be default value direction Sets the direction of access control both For bidirectional access control in For unidirectional access control port_control You can force a specific port to be unconditionally authorized or unauthorized
260. ays router ports that have been dynamically configured forbidden Displays forbidden router ports that have been statically configured If no parameter specified the system will display all currently configured router ports on the switch None 410 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the router ports on the switch DES 3528 5 show mld_snooping mrouter_ports all Command show mld_snooping mrouter_ports all VLAN Name default Static Router Port T1 Dynamic Router Port Router IP Forbidden Router Port VLAN Name Static Router Port Dynamic Router Port Router IP Forbidden Router Port Total Entries 2 DES 3528 5 config mid_snooping rate_limit Purpose Used to configure the MLD snooping rate limite on ports Syntax config mld_snooping rate_limit ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt value 1 1000 gt no_limit Description This command configures the MLD snooping rate limite on ports Parameters ports A port number or a range of ports for you to configure the MLD snooping rate limited vianid The ID of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured rate_limit Configures the rate of MLD control packet that the switch can process ona specific port The rate is specified in packet per second The packet that exceeds the limited rate will be dropped The default setting is no_ imit Restrictions Onl
261. begins sending packets to its default router The IP address of the default router should be on the same subnet as the client If the default_router is not specified the default router information will not be provided to the client If this command is entered twice in the same pool the second command will overwrite the first command lt pool name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool lt paddr gt Specifies the IP address of the default router Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure the default router DES 3528 5 config dhcp pool default_router accounting 10 10 10 1 Command config dhcp pool default_router accounting 10 10 10 1 config dhcp pool lease Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to specify the duration of the lease config dhcp pool lease lt pool_name 12 gt lt day 0 365 gt lt hour 0 23 gt lt minute 0 59 gt infinite By default each IP address assigned by a DHCP server comes with a one day lease which is the amount of time that the address is valid lt pool_name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool lt day 0 365 gt Specifies the days of lease lt hour 0 23 gt Specifies the hours of the lease lt minute 0 59 gt Specifies the minutes of the lease infinite Specifies that the lease will be infinite Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To co
262. bios config firmware image_id config flow_meter config greeting_message config gvrp timer config igmp_snooping config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group config igmp_snooping querier config ipif q Quit n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All To display the parameters for a specific command 506 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config stp Command config stp Command config stp Usage maxage lt value 6 40 gt maxhops lt value 6 40 gt hellotime lt value 1 2 gt forwar ddelay lt value 4 30 gt txholdcount lt value 1 10 gt fbpdu enable disable nni_bpdu_add r dotid dotlad Description Used to update the STP Global Configuration config stp instance_id config stp mst_config_id config stp mst_ports config stp ports config stp priority config stp version DES 3528 5 config command_history Purpose Used to configure the command history Syntax config command_history lt value 1 40 gt Description This command is used to configure the command history Parameters lt value 1 40 gt The number of previously executed commands maintained in the buffer Up to 40 of the latest executed commands may be viewed Restrictions None Example usage To configure the command history DES 3528 5 config command_history 20 Command config command_history 20 Success DES 3528 5 show com
263. ble is full the system will stop learning the new data driven groups Traffic for the new groups will be dropped Parameters lt value 1 1024 gt The max number of groups that can be learned by data driven Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the max number of groups that can be learned by data driven DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_ entry 100 Command config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 100 Success DES 3528 5 205 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure the data driven learing of an IGMP snooping group config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning all vian_name lt vlan_name gt vlanid lt vidlist gt state enable disable aged_out enable disable expiry_time lt sec 1 65535 gt 1 This command is used to configure the data driven learning of an IGMP snooping group When data driven learning is enabled for the VLAN the switch receives the IP multicast traffic on this VLAN and an IGMP snooping group will be created The learning of an entry is not activated by IGMP membership registration but by the multicast traffic For an ordinary IGMP snooping entry the IGMP protocol will t
264. c_address lt macaddr gt static drop aging_time This command will display the current contents of the Switch s forwarding database port lt port gt The port number corresponding to the MAC destination address The Switch will always forward traffic to the specified device through this port lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides vlanid lt vidlist gt The list of VLANs by VLAN ID lt macaddr gt The MAC address that is present in the forwarding database table static Displays the static MAC address entries drop Displays the drop MAC address entries aging_time Displays the aging time for the MAC address forwarding database None To display unicast MAC address table 97 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show fdb Command show fdb Unicast MAC Address Aging Time VID VLAN Name MAC Address 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 default default default default default default default default default default default default default default default default default default 00 00 5E 00 01 5F 00 00 81 00 00 01 00 00 81 9A F2 F4 00 00 E2 2F 44 EC 00 01 23 55 1A 28 00 01 6C CE 62 E0 00 02 A5 FD 66 97 00 03 09 18 10 01 00 03 9D 73 32 F0 00 03 B3 00 09 E9 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 05 5D 04 D6 A4 00 05 5D 25 45 61 00 05 5D
265. c_based_ vian mac address lt macaddr gt vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vianid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt delete mac_based_vlan mac_address lt macaddr gt vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt show mac_based_vlan mac_address lt macaddr gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create mac_based_vlian Purpose Used to create a static MAC based VLAN entry Syntax create mac_based_ vlan mac_address lt macaddrs gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vianid 1 4094 gt Description This command only needs to be supported by the model which supports MAC based VLAN The user can use this command to create a static MAC based VLAN entry When a MAC based VLAN entry is created for a user the traffic from this user will be able to be serviced under the specified VLAN regardless of the authentiucation function operated on this port There is a global limitation of the maximum entries supported for the static MAC based entry Parameters mac_address The MAC address vlan The VLAN to be associated with the MAC address vianid Specifies the VLAN by VLAN ID Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a MAC based VLAN entry DES 3528 5 create mac based vlan mac address 00 00 00 00 00 01 vlan default Command create mac based vlan mac address 00 00 00 00 00 0
266. c_based_access_control authorization network local disable Success DES 3528 5 config mac_based_ access _ control max_users Purpose Used to configure the maximum number of authorized clients Syntax config mac_based_access_control max_users lt value 1 1000 gt no_limit Description The setting is a global limitation on the maximum number of users that can be learned via MAC based AC In addition to the global limitation the per port maximum number of users is also limited It is specified by config config mac_based_access_control ports max_users Parameters value 1 4000 Specifies to set the max number of authorized clients on the whole device no_limit Specifies to not limit the system s maximum number of users The default is 128 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the MAC based AC maximum number of users DES 3528 5 config mac_based_access_control max_users 126 Command config mac_based_access_control max_users 126 Success DES 3528 5 429 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual MULTIPLE AUTHENTICATION COMMANDS The Multiple Authentication commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create authentication vlan lt vilan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vianid 1 4094 gt guest_vlan dele
267. c_based_access_control port command Parameters lt portlist gt When the guest VLAN is configured for a port successfully the port will make the VLAN assignment based on the assigned VLAN and remove it from the guestvlan If the user authentication fails the user will stay in the guestvlan mode Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create MAC based AC guest VLAN DES 3528 5 create mac_based_access_control_ guest vlan default Command create mac_based_access_control_ guest vlan default Success DES 3528 5 421 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config mac_based_access_control ports Purpose Used to configure the parameter of the MAC based AC Syntax config mac_based_access_control ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable mode port_based host_based aging_time infinite lt min 1 1440 gt block_time infinite lt sec 1 300 gt max_users lt value 1 1000 gt no_limit 1 Description This command allows you to configure MAC based AC setting When the MAC based AC is enabled for a port and the guest VLAN function for this port is disabled the user attached to this port will not forward any packets unless the user passes authentication The user that does not pass authentication will not be serviced by the switch If the user passes authentication the user will be able to
268. cate page Syntax show jwac authenticate page element Description This command can disaplay the element of the customize authenticate page Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To disaplay element of authenticate page 369 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show jwac authenticate page element Command show jwac authenticate_page element Current Page Japanese Version English page element Page Title Login Window Title User Name Title Password Title Login Out Window Title Japanese page element Page Title Login Windown Title User Name Title Password Title Login Out Windown Title DES 3528 5 Authentication Login User Name Password Logout from the network mA LAN RREO 774 VY 1 F ID DATS mA LAN REO 7 7 7 h 370 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual LLDP COMMANDS The LLDP commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table feabee OOS fssvensp contig Ildp ports lt portlist gt all basic_tlvs all port_description system_name system_description system_capabilities 1 enable disable config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all dot1_tlv_pvid enable disable contig Ildp ports lt portlist gt all dot1_tlv_protocol_vid vlan all lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt v
269. cess DES 3528 5 show Ildp Purpose Used to display the Switch s general LLDP configuration status Syntax show lidp Description This command displays the switch s general LLDP configuration status Parameters None Restrictions None Usage Example To display the LLDP system level configuration status DES 3552 5 show lldp Command show lldp LLDP System Information Chassis ID Subtype MAC Address Chassis ID 00 80 C2 11 22 00 System Name System Description Fast Ethernet Switch System Capabilities Repeater Bridge LLDP Configurations LLDP Status Disabled LLDP Forward Status Disabled Message Tx Interval Message Tx Hold Multiplier ReInit Delay Tx Delay Notification Interval DES 3552 5 380 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show llidp mgt_addr Purpose Used to display the LLDP management address information Syntax show Ildp mgt_addr ipv4 lt ipaddr gt Description This command displays the LLDP management address information Parameters jov4 The IP address of IPv4 Restrictions None Example usage To display management address information 1 DES 3528 5 show lldp mgt_addr ipv4 10 24 73 21 Command show lldp mgt_addr ipv4 10 24 73 21 Address 1 Address 10 24 73 21 IF type Unknown OID 1 3 6 1 4 1 171 10 105 1 Advertising Ports DES 3528 5 show Ildp ports Purpose Used to display the LLDP per
270. ch Only Administrator level users can issue this command To configure the user defined method list Permit with authentication methods TACACS XTACACS and local DES 3528 5 config authen_enable method_list_name Trinity method tacacs xtacacs local Command config authen_enable method_list_name Trinity method tacacs xtacacs local Success DES 3528 5 Example usage To configure the default method list with authentication methods XTACACS TACACS and local in that order DES 3528 5 config authen_enable default method xtacacs tacacs local Command config authen_enable default method xtacacs tacacs local Success DES 3528 5 315 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete authen_enable method_list_name Purpose Used to delete a user defined method list of authentication methods for promoting normal user level privileges to Administrator level privileges on the Switch Syntax delete authen_enable method_list_name lt string 15 gt Description This command is used to delete a user defined method list of authentication methods for promoting user level privileges to Administrator level privileges Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the given enable method list to delete Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the user defined method list
271. cifies the action when packet is in green color permit Permit the packet replace_dscp Change the dscp of the packet counter Specify the counter This is optional The default is disable exceed Specifies the action when packet is in yellow color permit Permit the packet replace_dscp Change the dscp of packet drop Drop the packet counter Specify the counter This is optional The default is disable violate Specifies the action when packet is in red color Permit Permit the packet replace_dscp Change the dscp of packet counter Specifies the counter This is optional The default is disable drop Drop the packet The resource may be limited such that counter cannot be turned on The counter will be cleared when the function is disabled delete Delete the specified flow_meter Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the ACL flow meter on the Switch 5 config flow_meter profile _ id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm cir 1000 cbs 200 pir 2000 exceed permit replace _dscp 21 violate drop config flow_meter profile_id 1 access_id 1 tr_tcm cir 1000 cbs 200 pir 2000 exceed permit replace _dscp 21 violate drop show flow_meter Purpose Used to view the current state of ACL flow meter on the Switch Syntax show flow_meter profile_id lt value 1 14 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt acce
272. cify the domain name for the client if the server allocates the address for the client from this pool Syntax config dhcp pool domain_name lt pool_name 12 gt lt domain_name 64 gt Description The domain name configured here will be used as the default domain name by the client By default the domain name is empty If the domain name is empty the domain name information will not be provided to the client Parameters lt pool name 12 gt Spcifies the name of the pool lt domain name 64 gt Specifies the domain name of the client Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the domain name option of the DHCP pool DES 3528 5 config dhcp pool domain_name accounting 10 10 10 0 24 Command config dhcp pool domain name accounting 10 10 10 0 24 config dhcp pool dns_server Purpose Used to specify the IP address of a DNS server that is available to a DHCP client Up to three IP addresses can be specified in one command line Syntax config dhcp pool dns_server lt pool_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt Description If a DNS server is not specified the DNS server information will not be provided to the client If this command is entered twice in the same pool the second command will overwrite the first command Parameters lt pool name 12 gt Spcifies the name of the pool lt ipaddr gt Specifies the IP address o
273. cket on the previously specified port replace_dscp_with lt value 0 63 gt Allows users to specify a new value to be written to the DSCP field of an incoming packet on the previously specified port replace_tos_precedence_with lt value 0 7 gt Specifies the packets that match the access profile and that tos precedence values will be changed by the switch rx_rate Specifies that one of the parameters below no_ imit or lt value 1 15624 gt will be applied to the rate at which the above specified ports will be allowed to receive packets e no_limit Specifies that there will be no limit on the rate of packets received by the above specified ports e lt value 1 15624 gt Specifies the packet limit in 64Kbps that the above ports will be allowed to receive deny Specifies the rule will deny access for incoming packets on the previously specified port mirror Specifies the packets that match the access profile copies it and sends the copied one to the mirror port time_range Specifies the time_range profile that has been associated with the ACL entries delete access_id lt value 1 128 gt Use this to remove a previously created access rule of a profile ID For information on number of rules that can be created for a given port lease see the introduction to this chapter Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the access profile
274. ckets will be logged This command is used to suppress the logging of DHCP server that continues to send illegal DHCP packets The same illegal DHCP server IP address detected will be logged only once within the duration Parameters illegal _server_log suppress_duration 1min 5min 30min if the same illegal DHCP server IP address is detected it will be logged one time only within the duration The log can be suppressed by one minute 5 minutes or 30 minutes The default value is 5 minutes Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the illegal _server_log_suppress_duration 268 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config filter dhcp_server illegal _server_log_suppress_duration 30min Command config filter dhcp_server illegal _server_log_suppress_duration 30min Success DES 3528 5 config filter netbios Purpose Used to configure the switch to filter NetBIOS packets from specified ports Syntax config filter netbios lt portlist gt all state enable disable Description This command will configure the switch to filter NetBIOS packets from the specified ports Parameters lt portlist gt The list of port numbers to which the NetBIOS filter will be applied state enable disable Used to enable disable the NetBIOS filter on the switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users c
275. col is 23 Restrictions None Example usage Telnet to the remote Switch DES 3528 5 telnet 172 18 168 12 tcp _port 50 Command telnet 172 18 168 12 tcp _ port 50 Connecting to server please wait DES 3552 Gigabit Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 1 03 B009 Copyright C 2008 D Link Corporation All rights reserved enable telnet Purpose Used to enable communication with and management of the Switch using the Telnet protocol Syntax enable telnet lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt Description This command is used to enable the Telnet protocol on the Switch The user can specify the TCP or UDP port number the Switch will use to listen for Telnet requests Parameters lt tco_port_number 1 65535 gt The TCP port number TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535 The well known TCP port for the Telnet protocol is 23 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable Telnet and configure port number DES 3528 5 enable telnet 23 Command enable telnet 23 Success DES 3528 5 i xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable telnet Purpose Used to disable the Telnet protocol on the Switch Syntax disable telnet Description This command is used to disable the Telnet protocol on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level user
276. config 802 1x auth_protocol radius_eap Success DES 3528 5 config 802 1x auth_ failover Purpose Used to configure 802 1x auth_failover Syntax config 802 1x auth_failover enable disable Description When the authentication failover is disabled and Radius servers are unreachable the authentication will fail When the authentication failover is enabled and Radius servers authentication are unreachable the local database will be used to do the authentication The state is disabled by default Parameters enable Enables the authentication database fail over disable Disables the authentication database fail over Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To config the 802 1 X auth_failover 224 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config 802 1x auth_failover enable Command config 802 1x auth_failover enable Success config 802 1x fwd_pdu system Purpose Used to configure the forwarding of EAPOL PDU when 802 1X is disabled Syntax config 802 1x fwd_pdu system enable disable Description This is a global setting to control the forwarding of EAPOL PDU When 802 1X functionality is disabled globally or for a port if 802 1X fwd_pdu is enabled both globally and for the port a received EAPOL packet on the port will be flooded in the same VLAN to those ports with 802 1X fwd_pdu enabled and 802 1X disabled gl
277. config jwac port 1 9 state enable Command config jwac port 1 9 state enable Success DES 3528 5 361 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config jwac radius_protocol Purpose Used to configure radius protocol used by JWAC Syntax config jwac radius_protocol local pap chap ms_chap ms_chapv2 eap_md5 Description This command allows you to specify the RADIUS protocol used by JWAC to complete RADIUS authentication Parameters local JWAC Switch uses local user DB to complete the authentication pap JWAC Switch uses PAP to communicate with the RADIUS server chap JWAC Switch uses CHAP to communicate with the RADIUS server ms_chap JWAC Switch uses MS CHAP to communicate with the RADIUS server ms_chapv2 JWAC Switch uses MS CHAPv2 to communicate with RADIUS server eap_md5 JWAC Switch uses EAP MD5 to communicate with the RADIUS server Restrictions JWAC share other RADIUS configuration with 802 1X when using this command to set the RADIUS protocol you must make sure the RADIUS server added by the config radius command supports the protocol Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure JWAC radius_protocol DES 3528 5 config jwac radius_protocol ms_chapv2 Command config jwac radius_protocol ms_chapv2 Success DES 3528 5 create jwac user Purpose Used to create JWAC user into local DB
278. configure the pppoe circuit_id_insertion state DES 3528 5 config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state enable Command config pppoe circuit_id_insertion state enable Success DES 3528 5 show pppoe circuit_id_insertion Purpose Used to display the current status of the PPPoE circuit id insertion on the Switch Syntax show pppoe circuit_id_insertion Description None Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the pppoe circuit_id_insertion state DES 3528 5 show pppoe circuit_id insertion Command show pppoe circuit_id_ insertion Status Enabled DES 3528 5 450 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DNS RELAY COMMANDS The DNS Relay commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config dnsr primary secondary nameserver lt ipaddr gt add delete static lt domain_name 32 gt lt ipaddr gt enable dnsr cache static disable dnsr cache static Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config dnsr Purpose Used to add or delete a static entry in the DNS resolution table Syntax config dnsr primary secondary nameserver lt ipaddr gt add delete static lt domain_name 32 gt lt ipaddr gt Description This command is used to add or
279. cp map lt portlist gt all dscp_ priority lt dscp _list gt to lt priority 0 7 gt dscp_dscp lt dscp _list gt to lt dscp 0 63 gt dscp_color lt dscp_list gt to green red yellow The mapping of DSCP to COS will be used to determine the priority of the packet which will be then used to determine the scheduling queue when the port is in DSCP trust state The mapping of dscp to color will be used to determine the initial color of the packet when the policing function of the packet is color aware and the packet is DSCP trusted The DSCP to DSCP mapping is used in the swap of DSCP of the packet when the packet is ingressed to the port The remaining processing of the packet will be based on the new DSCP By default the DSCP is mapped to the same DSCP portlist Specifies ports to be configured dscp_priority Specifies a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific priority priority Specifies the result priority of mapping The default mapping are wowo le s e s 6 7 dsco_dscp Specifies a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific dscp dscp Specifies the result DSCP of mapping dscp_color Specifies a list of DSCP value to be mapped to a specific color color Specifies the result color of mapping Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 401 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage This c
280. cription Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to describe a selected port interface clear description To clear the description mdix auto normal cross MDIX mode can be specified as auto normal or cross If set to normal state the port is in MDIX mode and can be connected to a port on an end node such as a server or PC using a straight through cable If set to cross state the port is in MDI mode and can be connected to a port on another switch or hub that uses MDI X ports 25 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config ports through a straight through cable If set to auto state the ports can be connected to any connections by using straight through or cross over cable The ports make the necessary adjustments to accommodate either cable for correct operation Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the speed of ports 1 3 of unit 1 to be 10 Mbps full duplex learning enabled state enabled and flow control enabled DES 3528 5 config ports 1 3 speed 10_full learning enable state enable flow_control config ports 1 3 speed 10_full learning enable state enable flow_control show ports Purpose Used to display the current configuration of a range of ports Syntax show ports lt portlist gt description err_disabled details Description This command is used to disp
281. d if it is not specified it refers to the master unit lt path_filename 64 gt Specifies the location of the Switch configuration file on the TFTP server This file will be replaced by the uploaded file from the Switch Restrictions The TFTP server must be on the same IP subnet as the Switch Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To upload a configuration file 60 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 upload cfg_toTFTP 10 48 74 121 c cfg log txt Command upload cfg_toTFTP 10 48 74 121 c cfg log txt Connecting to server Upload configuration DES 3528 5 enable autoconfig Purpose Used to activate the autoconfiguration function for the Switch This will load a previously saved configuration file for current use Syntax enable autoconfig Description This command is used to enable autoconfig When autoconfig is enabled on the Switch the DHCP reply will contain a configuration file and path name It will then request the file from the TFTP server specified in the reply When autoconfig is enabled the ipif settings will automatically become DHCP client Parameters None Restrictions When autoconfig is enabled the Switch becomes a DHCP client automatically Same as config ipif System dhcp The DHCP server must have the TFTP server IP address and configuration file name and be configured to deliver this informati
282. d information for all ports will be displayed None To display statistics information of port 1 DES 3528 5 show lldp statistics ports 1 show lldp statistics ports 1 Command LLDPStatsTxPortFramesTotal LLDPStatsRxPortFramesDiscardedTotal LLDPStatsRxPortFramesErrors LLDPStatsRxPortFramesTotal LLDPStatsRxPortTLVsDiscardedTotal LLDPStatsRxPortTLVsUnrecognizedTotal LLDPStatsRxPortAgeoutsTotal DES 3528 5 384 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Q iIN Q COMMANDS The Q in Q commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table jenabiegng asea O o swa S O Er te OO config qing ports lt portlist gt all role uni nni missdrop enable disable outer_tpid lt hex 0x1 Oxffff gt use_inner_priority enable disable vian_preservation enable disable add_inner_tag lt hex 0x1 Oxffff gt disable 1 show ging ports lt portlist gt config qing inner_tpid qing inner_tpid config qing inner_tpid lt hex 0x1 Oxffff gt L lt hex Oxt OxffffS Oxffff gt create lt portlist gt all cvid lt vidlist gt add replace svid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt priority lt value 0 7 gt vlan_translation ports delete lt portlist gt all cvid lt vidlist gt vlan_translation ports show ports lt portlist gt vlan_translation Each command is listed in detail in th
283. d DSCP Different DSCP may have different probability to be dropped in the later stage tr_tcm Specifies the two rate three color mode cir lt value 0 15624 gt Specify the committed information rate The unit is 64Kbps That is to say 1 means 64Kbps cbs lt value 0 16384 gt Specify the committed burst size 1 The unit is Kbyte That is to say 1 means 1Kbyte 2 This parameter is an optional parameter The default value is 4 1024 3 The max set value is 16 1024 pir lt value 0 15624 gt Specify the peak information rate The unit is 64Kbps That is to say 1 means 64Kbps pbs lt value 0 16384 gt Specify the peak burst size 1 The unit is Kbyte That is to say 1 means 1Kbyte 2 This parameter is an optional parameter The default value is 4 1024 3 The max set value is 16 1024 sr_tcm Specifies the single rate three color mode cir lt value 0 15624 gt Specify the committed information rate The unit is 64Kbps That is to say 1 means 64Kbps cbs lt value 0 16384 gt Specify the committed burst size 1 The unit is Kbyte That is to say 1 means 1Kbyte 2 The max set value is 16 1024 259 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config flow_meter ebs lt value 0 16384 gt Specify the excess burst size 1 The unit is Kbyte That is to say 1 means 1 Kbyte 2 The max set value is 16 1024 conform Spe
284. d access id 1 ethernet source mac 01 02 05 0405 06 ethernet type Ux 06 port 1 27 permit create access profile profile id 2 profile name 2 packet content mask offset_chunk 1 3 UxUUUUFFFF Ethernet Type 2 byte offset chunk 2 7 OxUU0UPFFFR mdarP First 2 byte offset_chunk 3 6 UWxFFFRUOUU mdrP Last 2 byte config access profile profile id 2 add access idl packet content offset chunk 1 Ox00000806 Ethernet Type 2 byte ARP Ox000 Ao fy SdeIP First 2 byte 10 90 Ox5SA5A 0000 SdrIP Last 2 byte 90 90 offset chunk 2 offset chunk 4 port 1 27 deny Create access profile 1 To match Ethernet Type and Source WLAC address Configure access profile 1 Ordy ifthe gateways ARP packet that contains the correct source WAC inthe Ethernet frame can pass through the switch Create access profile 2 The first Chunk starts from Chunk 3 mask for Ethernet Type Blue in Table 6 13 amp 14 bytes The second Chunk starts from Chunk 7 mask for nerder IP First 4 byte in ARP packet Green in Table 6 29 amp 30 bytes The third Chunk starts from Chunk mask for nerder IP Last 2 byte in ARP packet Brown in Table 6 315 3201 bytes Configure access profile 2 The rest of the ARP packets whose Sender IP claim they are the gateway s IP will be dropped 519 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Appendix C PASSWORD RECOVERY PROCEDURE This section describe
285. d or delete the port list that user entered and update the previous port list The member port list and source port list cannot overlap However the member port of one multicast VLAN can overlap with another multicast VLAN Before configuring the multicast VLAN member port by using this command the multicast VLAN must be created first Parameters lt vian_name32 gt The name of the VLAN to be created Each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters member_port Adds a range of member ports to the multicast VLAN They will become the untagged member port of the IGMP multicast VLAN source_port Adds a range of source ports to the multicast VLAN untag_source_port Adds a range of untagged source ports to the multicast VLAN tag_member_port Specifies the tagged member port of the IGMP multicast VLAN state enable or disable multicast VLAN for the chosen VLAN replace_source_ip With the IGMP snooping function the IGMP report packet sent by the host will be forwarded to the source port Before the forwarding of the packet the source IP address in the join packet needs to be replaced by this IPv4 address remap_priority Associates the remap priority value 0 to 7 with the data traffic and is forwarded on the multicast VLAN If none is specified the packet s original priority will be used The default setting is none Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this comma
286. ddr lt macaddr gt Description This command allows you to delete JWAC host Parameters ports To specify the port range to delete host on them authenticated To specify the state of host to delete authenticating To specify the state of host to delete blocked To specify the state of host to delete lt macadar gt To delete a specified host with this MAC Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a JWAC host DES 3528 5 clear jwac auth_state ports all blocked Command clear jwac auth_state ports all blocked Success DES 3528 5 364 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show jwac Purpose Used to display the configuration of JWAC Syntax show jwac Description This command allows you to show all the configuration of JWAC Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display JWAC configuration DES 3528 5 show jwac Command show jwac State Enabled Ports Virtual IP Switch HTTP Port UDP Filtering Forcible Logout Redirect State Redirect Delay Time Redirect Destination Quarantine Server QO Server Monitor Q Srv Error Timeout RADIUS Auth Protocol Authentication Failover RADIUS Authorization Local Authorization Disabled 0 0 0 0 80 HTTP Enabled Enabled Enabled 1 Seconds Quarantine Server Disabled 30 Seconds PAP Disabled Enabled
287. ddr gt client_mac lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all delete permit server_ip lt ipaddr gt client_mac lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable show filter dhop_server re contig filter dhcp_server trap_log enable disable illegal_server_log_suppress_duration Show filter netbios Show filter extensive_netbios Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 266 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config filter dhcp_server Purpose DHCP server packets except those that have been IP client MAC bound will be filtered This command is used to configure the state of the function for filtering of DHCP server packet and to add delete the DHCP server client binding entry Syntax add permit server_ip lt ipaddr gt client_mac lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all delete permit server_ip lt ipaddr gt client_mac lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable Description This command has two purposes to filter all DHCP server packets on the specified port s and to allow some DHCP server packets to be forwarded if they are on the pre defined server IP address MAC address binding list Thus the DHCP server can be restricted to service a specified DHCP client This is useful when there are two or more DHCP servers present on
288. ddress End Address 10 10 10 1 10 10 10 10 Total Entries 1 create dhcp pool Purpose Used to create a DHCP pool Syntax create dhcp pool lt pool name 12 gt Description A DHCP pool is created by specifying a name After you create a DHCP pool use other DHCP pool configuration commands to configure parameters for the pool The maximum number of pools that can be configured is 4 Parameters lt pool name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create DHCP pool entry DES 3528 5 create dhcp pool accounting Command create dhcp pool accounting delete dhcp pool Purpose Used to delete a DHCP pool entry Syntax delete dhcp pool lt pool name 12 gt all Description This command is used to delete a previously created DHCP pool entry Parameters lt pool name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 474 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To delete a DHCP pool entry DES 3528 5 delete dhcp pool accounting Command delete dhcp pool accounting Success DES 3528 5 config dhcp pool network _addr Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to specify the network for the DHCP pool config dhcp pool network_addr lt po
289. default Success DES 3528 5 317 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show authen application Purpose Used to display authentication methods for the various applications on the Switch Syntax show authen application Description This command will display all of the authentication method lists login enable administrator privileges for Switch configuration applications console telnet SSH web currently configured on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the login and enable method list for all applications on the Switch DES 3528 5 show authen application Command show authen application Application Login Method List Enable Method List Console default default Telnet Trinity default SSH default default HTTP default default DES 3528 5 318 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create authen server_host Purpose Used to create an authentication server host Syntax create authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius port lt int 1 65535 gt key lt key_string 254 gt none timeout lt int 1 255 gt retransmit lt 1 255 gt Description This command will create an authentication server host for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security protocols on the Switch When a user attempts to access the Switch with authenticatio
290. defined Group refers to server groups defined by the user Built in Group refers to the TACACS XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS security protocols which are permanently set in the Switch Keyword refers to authentication using a technique INSTEAD of TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS which are local authentication through the local_enable password on the Switch and none no authentication necessary to access any function on the Switch Restrictions Example usage To display all method lists for promoting user level privileges to administrator level privileges 316 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show authen_enable all Command show authen_enable all Method List Name Priority Method Name Comment tacacs t Built in Group tacacs Built in Group Darren User defined Group local Keyword default tacacs Built in Group local Keyword Total Entries DES 3528 5 config authen application Purpose Used to configure various applications on the Switch for authentication using a previously configured method list Syntax config authen application console telnet ssh http all login enable default method_list_name lt string 15 gt Description This command is used to configure Switch configuration applications console telnet ssh web for login at the user level and at the administration level authen _enable utilizing a previously configured method list
291. delete a static entry in the DNS resolution table Parameters primary When both primary and secondaty server exist the primary server will be used secondary When the primary server does not exist the secondary server will be used nameserver lt ipaddr gt Specifies the IP address of primary or secondary name server lt domain_name 32 gt lt ipaddr gt Specifies the name of the server and IP address of the corresponding in DNS Static Table in DNS server Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the DNS relay DES 3528 5 config dnsr primary nameserver 192 168 1 1 Command config dnsr primary nameserver 192 168 1 1 Success DES 3528 5 enable dnsr Purpose Used to enable DNS relay function Syntax enable dnsr cache static Description This command is used to enable DNS relay function Parameters cache The buffer cache which records the name of the server and IP address of the corresponding static The DNS Static Table in DNS server with the name of the server and the corresponding IP address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage 451 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To enable the DNS relay DES 3528 5 enable dnsr cache Command enable dnsr cache disable dnsr Purpose Used to disable DNS relay function Syntax disabl
292. delete mcast_filter_profile profile_id lt value 1 24 gt all config mcast_filter_profile show mcast_filter_profile profile_id lt value 1 24 gt profile name lt name 1 32 gt config limited_multicast_addr ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete profile_id lt value 1 24 gt profile name lt name 1 32 gt access permit deny 1 show limited_multicast_addr ports lt portlist gt vianid lt vidlist gt config max_mcast_group ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt max_group lt value 1 1024 gt infinite action drop replace 1 show max_mcast_group ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create mcast_filter_profile profile_id Purpose Used to create a multicast address profile Syntax create mcast_filter_profile profile_id lt value 1 24 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Description This command configures a multicast address profile Mutliple ranges of multicast addresses can be defined in the profile Parameters profile_id ID of the profile The range is 7 to 24 lt name 1 32 gt Provides a meaningful description for the profile Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a multicast filter profile DES 3528 5 create mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 profile_name MOD Command create mcast_filter_profile
293. disable pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt fault_alarm all mac_status remote_ccm error_ccm xcon_ccm none alarm_time lt centiseconds 250 1000 gt alarm_reset_time lt centiseconds 250 1000 gt 1 Description An MEP may generate 5 types of Fault Alarms as shown below by their priorities from high to low Cross connect CCM Received priority 5 Error CCM Received priority 4 Some Remote MEP Down priority 3 Some Remote MEP MAC Status Error priority 2 Some Remote MEP Defect Indication priority 1 If multiple types of faults occurr on a MEP only the fault of the highest priority will be alarmed Parameters mepname Specifies the MEP name It s unique among all MEPs configured on the device mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID It should be configured in MA s MEPID list md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name state Specifies the MEP administrative state enable MEP is enabled disable MEP is disabled This is the default value ccm Specifies the CCM transmission state enable CCM transmission enabled disable CCM transmission disabled This is the default value pdu_priority Specifies the 802 1p priority to be set in CCMs and LTMs messages transmitted by the MEP The default value is 7 fault_alarm Control types of fault alarms sent by the MEP all Specifies that all types of fault alarms will be sent mac_status Only Fault Alar
294. ditor Quit without save Ctrl C Save and quit Ctrl W Move cursor Left Right Up Down Delete line Ctrl D Erase all setting Ctrl X Reload original setting Ctrl L Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Other restrictions include e lf the reset command is executed the modified banner will remain modified However the reset config reset system command will reset the modified banner to the original factory banner The capacity of the banner is 6 80 6 Lines and 80 characters per line Ctrl W will only save the modified banner in the DRAM Users need to type the save command to save it into FLASH Only valid in threshold level Example usage To modify the banner DES 3528 5 config greeting_message Command config greeting_message Greeting Messages Editor DES 3528 Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 2 00 B031 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved lt Function Key gt lt Control Key gt Ctrl C Quit without save left right Ctrl W Save and quit up down Move cursor Ctrl D Delete line Ctr1l xX Erase all setting Ctr1l L Reload original setting 23 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show greeting message Purpose Used to view the currently configured greeting message configured on the Switch Syntax show greeting message Description This command
295. dministrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear the counters 68 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 clear counters ports 2 9 Command clear counters ports 2 9 Success DES 3528 5 clear log Purpose Used to clear the Switch s history log Syntax clear log Description This command will clear the Switch s history log Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear the log information DES 3528 5 clear log Command clear log Success DES 3528 5 Purpose Used to display the Switch s history log Syntax show log index lt value_list gt Description This command will display the contents of the Switch s history log Parameters index lt value_list gt This parameter specifies the range of log index to show For example show log index 1 5 will display the history log from 1 to 5 If no parameter is specified all history log entries will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the Switch s history log DES 3528 5 show log index 1 5 Command show log index 1 5 Successful login through Console Username Anonymous System started up Port 1 link up 100Mbps FULL duplex Spanning Tree Protocol is disabled Configuration saved to flash Username Anonymous 69 xStack DE
296. dr gt Sstatic_group delete igmp_snooping vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipaddr gt static_group config igmp_snooping vlan lt vilan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipaddr gt add delete lt portlist gt static_group show igmp_snooping statistic vlan lt vilan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt counter clear igmp_snooping statistic counter config igmp_snooping lt value 1 1024 gt data_driven_learning max_learned_entry config igmp_ snooping data_driven_learning all vian_name lt vlan_names gt vianid lt vidlist gt state enable le aged_out enable disable expiry_time lt sec 1 65535 gt 1 clear igmp_snooping all vlan_name lt vlan_name gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipaddr gt data_driven_group 192 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config igmp_snooping Purpose Used to configure IGMP snooping on the Switch Syntax config igmp_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all state enable disable fast_leave enable disable report_suppression enable disable 1 Description This command allows the user to configure IGMP snooping on the Switch Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured lt vidl
297. dress with P in the end indicats the port based mode authentication 2 mac 00 00 00 00 00 21 failed to pass authentication mac address with P in the end indicats the port based mode authentication NOTE In port based mode the VLAN ID field is displayed in the same way as host based mode Parameters port A port range to show the information of client host Restrictions None Example usage To display a JWAC host DES 3528 5 show jwac auth_state ports 5 Command show jwac auth_state ports 5 Port MAC Address VLAN ID Assigned Aging Time Idle Time Priority Block Time 00 05 5D 10 5A 6F Authenticating Total Authenticating Hosts Total Authenticated Hosts Total Blocked Hosts DES 3528 5 366 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show jwac ports Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display port configuration of JWAC show jwac ports lt portlist gt The show jwac port command allows you to display port configuration of JWAC lt portlist gt To specify a port range to show the configuration of JWAC None To display JWAC ports DES 3528 5 show jwac ports 1 3 Command show jwac ports 1 3 State Disabled Disabled Disabled DES 3528 5 Aging Time Idle Time Block Time Auth Mode Minutes Minutes Seconds Infinite Host based Infinite Host based Infinite Host based co
298. ds Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage Example To change the notification interval to 10 seconds DES 3528 5 config lldp notification_interval 10 Command config lldp notification_interval 10 Success DES 3528 5 config lldp ports notification Purpose Used to configure each port for sending notification to configured SNMP trap receiver s Syntax config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all notification enable disable Description This command is used to enable or disable each port for sending changes notification to configured SNMP trap receiver s if an LLDP data change is detected in an advertisement received on the port from an LLDP neighbor The definition of change includes new available information information timeout information update And the changed type includes any data update insert remove Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured all Use this parameter to set all ports in the system notification Enables or disables the SNMP trap notification of LLDP data changes detected on advertisements received from neighbor devices The default notification state is disabled 374 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config lldp ports notification Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To change th
299. e Example usage To do the cable diagnostic on ports 1 7 on the Switch 486 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 cable_diag ports 1 7 Command cable diag ports 1 7 Perform Cable Diagnostics 1 7 Status Result Length M 487 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual CONNECTIVITY FAULT MANAGEMENT COMMANDS The Connectivity Fault Management commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters lt string 22 gt level lt int 0 7 gt contig cfm md lt string 22 gt mip none auto explicit sender_id none chassis manage chassis_manage 1 lt string 22 gt md lt string 22 gt config cfm ma lt string 22 gt md lt string 22 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt mip none auto explicit defer sender_id none chassis manage chassis_ manage defer ccm_interval po 100ms 1sec 10sec 1min 10min mepid_list add delete lt mepid_list gt 1 create cfm mep lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt direction outward port lt port gt config cfm mep mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt state enable disable ccm enable disable pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt fault_alarm all mac_
300. e Command config ssh authmode password enable Success DES 3528 5 329 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show ssh authmode Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the SSH authentication mode setting show ssh authmode This command will allow users to display the current SSH authentication set on the Switch None None To view the current authentication mode set on the Switch DES 3528 5 show ssh authmode Command show ssh authmode The SSH Authmode Password Publickey Hostbased DES 3528 5 Enabled Enabled Enabled config ssh server Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Usage example Used to configure the SSH server config ssh server maxsession lt int 1 8 gt contimeout lt sec 120 600 gt authfail lt int 2 20 gt rekey 10min 30min 60min never port lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt 1 This command allows users to configure the SSH server maxsession lt int 1 8 gt Allows the user to set the number of users that may simultaneously access the Switch The default setting is 8 contimeout lt sec 120 600 gt Allows the user to set the connection timeout The user may set a time between 120 and 600 seconds The default is 120 seconds authfail lt int 2 20 gt Allows the administrator to set the maximum number of attempts
301. e Syntax Description Parameters Used to create a new SNMP user and adds the user to an SNMP group that is also created by this command create snmp user lt user_name 32 gt lt groupname 32 gt encrypted by password auth md5 lt auth_password 8 16 gt sha lt auth_password 8 20 gt priv none des lt priv_password 8 16 gt by_key auth md5 lt auth_key 32 32 gt sha lt auth_key 40 40 gt priv none des lt priv_key 32 32 gt This command creates a new SNMP user and adds the user to an SNMP group that is also created by this command SNMP ensures Message integrity Ensures that packets have not been tampered with during transit Authentication Determines if an SNMP message is from a valid source Encryption Scrambles the contents of messages to prevent it from being viewed by an unauthorized source lt user_name 32 gt An alphanumeric name of up to 32 characters that will identify the new SNMP user lt groupname 32 gt An alphanumeric name of up to 32 characters that will identify the SNMP group the new SNMP user will be associated with encrypted Allows the user to choose a type of authorization for authentication using SNMP The user may choose by password Requires the SNMP user to enter a password for authentication and privacy The password is defined by specifying the auth_password below This method is recommended by_key Requires the SNMP user to enter a encryption key
302. e To set mode auto to voice VLAN ports 3 5 DES 3528 5 config voice_vlan ports 3 5 mode auto Command config voice_vlan ports 3 5 mode auto Success DES 3528 5 config voice_vlan aging time Purpose Used to config voice VLAN aging time Syntax config voice_vlan aging_time lt min 1 65535 gt Description This command is used to set the aging time of the voice VLAN The aging time is used to remove a port from voice VLAN if the port is an dynamic VLAN member When the last voice device stops sending traffic and the MAC address of this voice device is aged out the voice VLAN aging timer will be started The port will be removed from the voice VLAN after the voice VLAN timer expires If the voice traffic resume before the aging timer expires the aging timer will be reset Parameters aging_time Specifies the aging time It ranges from 1 to 65535 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set 60 minutes as the aging time of voice VLAN DES 3528 5 config voice_vlan aging _time 60 Command config voice_vlan aging_time 60 Success DES 3528 5 137 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config voice_vlan trap_log Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to config trap log state for voice VLAN config voice_vlan trap_log enable disable This command is used to con
303. e all All multicast address profiles will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a multicast filter profile DES 3528 5 delete mcast_filter_profile profile_id 3 Command delete mcast_filter_profile profile _ id 3 Success DES 3528 5 delete mcast_filter_profile profile name Purpose Used to delete a multicast profile name Syntax delete mcast_filter_profile profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Description This command deletes a multicast profile Parameters profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Name of the profile Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 166 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To delete a multicast filter profile profile name DES 3528 5 delete mcast_filter_profile profile_name 123 Command delete mcast_filter_profile profile_name 123 Success DES 3528 5 show mcast _filter_profile Purpose Used to display the defined multicast address profiles Syntax show mcast_filter_profile profile_id lt value 1 24 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Description This command displays the defined multicast address profiles Parameters profile_id D of the profile if not specified all profiles will be displayed profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Name of the profile if not specified all profiles will be displayed
304. e lt value 0 255 gt tcp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt urg ack psh rst syn fin udp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt user_define lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 packet_content offset_chunk_1 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_2 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_3 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_4 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 ipv6 class lt value 0 255 gt flowlabel lt hex 0x0 Oxfffff gt tcp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt udp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt 1 source_ipv6 lt ipv6addr gt destination_ipv6 lt ipv6addr gt 1 port lt portlist gt all vian_based vlan_name lt vlan_name gt vian_id lt value 1 4094 gt permit priority lt value 0 7 gt replace_priority rx_rate no_limit lt value 1 15624 gt replace_dscp_with lt value 0 63 gt replace_tos_precedence_with lt value 0 7 gt counter enable disable mirror deny time_range lt range_name 32 gt delete access id lt value 1 128 gt This command is used to configure an access profile on the Switch and to enter specific values that will be combined using a logical AND operational method with masks entered with the create access_profile command above protile_id lt value 1 14 gt Enter an integer u
305. e 1 32 gt add delete lt mcastv6_address list gt This command configures an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch and can add or delete multicast addresses for the profile lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the MLD multicast VLAN group profile name max length is 32 add delete Add or delete MLD multicast address list to or from this multicast VLAN group profile lt mcastv6_address_list gt Specifies the MLD multicast addresses to be configured It can be a continuous single multicast addresses such as FF12 1 FF12 3 FF12 8 or a multicast address range such as FF12 1 FF12 12 or both of them such as FF12 1 FF12 18 FF12 20 Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To add 225 1 1 1 to 226 1 1 1 to MLD multicast VLAN group profile g1 DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl add FF12 1 FF12 2 Command config mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl add FF12 1 FF12 2 Success DES 3528 5 186 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete mid_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to delete an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Syntax delete mid_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt all Description This command deletes an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies
306. e 15 offset_16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31 offset_32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 offset_48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 offset_64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to 256 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config cpu access_profile byte 79 IPV6 Denotes that IPv6 packets will be examined by the Switch for forwarding or filtering based on the rules configured in the config access_ profile command for IPv6 e class Entering this parameter will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service TOS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 flowlabel Entering this parameter will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non default quality of service or real time service packets source_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the source IPv6 address destination_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the destination IPv6 address permit deny Specifies that the packets forwarded to the CPU will either be permitted or denied based
307. e 32 gt Enter a name for the VLAN Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config vlan vlanid on the switch DES 3528 5 config vlan vlanid 5 add tagged 7 advertisement enable name RG Command config vlan vlanid 5 add tagged 7 advertisement enable name RG Success DES 3528 5 122 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config port_vlan Purpose Used to set the ingress checking status and the sending and receiving GVRP information Syntax config port_vlan lt portlist gt all gvrp_state enable disable ingress _checking enable disable acceptable_frame tagged_only admit_all pvid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt 1 Description This command is used to configure the Group VLAN Registration Protocol on the Switch Ingress checking the sending and receiving of GVRP information and the Port VLAN ID PVID can be configured Parameters lt portlist gt A port or range of ports for which users want to enable GVRP for all Specifies all of the ports on the Switch state enable disable Enables or disables GVRP for the ports specified in the port list ingress_checking enable disable Enables or disables ingress checking for the specified port list acceptable_frame tagged_only admit_all This parameter states the frame type that will be accepted by the Switch for this function tagg
308. e 6 8 Success DES 3528 5 config vlan vlanid Purpose Used to add additional ports to a previously configured VLAN and enable or disable the VLAN advertisement Syntax config vlan vlanid lt vidlist gt add tagged untagged forbidden delete lt portlist gt advertisement enable disable name lt vlan_name 32 gt 1 Description This command allows you to add or delete ports of the port list of previously configured VLAN s You can specify the additional ports as being tagged untagged or forbidden The same port is allowed to be an untagged member port of multiple VLAN s You can also specify if the VLAN will join GVRP or not with the advertisement parameter The name parameter allows you to specify the name of the VLAN that needs to be modified Parameters lt vidlist gt Specifies a range of multiple VLAN IDs to be configured tagged Specifies the additional ports as tagged untagged Specifies the additional ports as untagged forbidden Specifies the additional ports as forbidden lt portlist gt A range of ports to add to or delete from the VLAN advertisement Entering the advertisement parameter specifies if the VLAN should join GVRP or not There are two parameters enable Specifies that the VLAN should join GVRP Disable Specifies that the VLAN should not join GVRP name Entering the name parameter specifies the name of the VLAN to be modified lt vian_nam
309. e Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table ww OOS oS wam www disable repeating s_week lt start_week 1 4 last gt s_day lt start_day sun sat gt s_mth lt start_mth 1 12 gt s_time lt start_time hh mm gt e_ week lt end_week 1 4 last gt e_day lt end_day sun sat gt e_mth lt end_mth 1 12 gt e time lt end_time hh mm gt offset 30 60 90 120 annual s_date lt start_date 1 31 gt s_ mth lt start_mth 1 12 gt s_ time lt start_time hh mm gt e_date lt end_date 1 31 gt e mth lt end_mth 1 12 gt e time lt end_time hh mms gt offset 30 60 90 120 swm OS SSS Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config dst config sntp Purpose Used to setup SNTP service Syntax config sntp primary lt ipaddr gt secondary lt ipaddr gt poll interval lt int 30 99999 gt 1 Description This command is used to configure SNTP service from an SNTP server SNTP must be enabled for this command to function See enable sntp Parameters primary This is the primary server from which the SNTP information will be taken lt paddr gt The IP address of the primary server secondary This is the secondary server the SNTP information will be taken from in the event the primary server is unavailable lt ipaddr gt The IP address for the secondary server poll interval lt int 30 99999 gt This is the interval
310. e SNMP notification state of ports 1 to 5 to enable DES 3528 5 config lldp ports 1 5 notification enable Command config lldp ports 1 5 notification enable Success DES 3528 5 config Mice om ports admin_status Purpose Used to configure per port transmit and receive modes Syntax config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all admin_status tx_only rx_only tx_and_rx disable Description This command is used to control which ports participate in LLDP traffic and whether the participating ports allow LLDP traffic in only one direction or in both directions Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured all Use this parameter to set all ports in the system admin_status tx_only Configure the specified port s to transmit LLDP packets but block inbound LLDP packets from neighbor devices rx_only Configure the specified port s to receive LLDP packets from neighbors but block outbound packets to neighbors tx_and_rx Configure the specified port s to both transmit and receive LLDP packets disable Disable LLDP packet transmit and receive on the specified port s The default per port state is tx_and_rx Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure ports to 5 to transmit and receive DES 3528 5 config lldp ports 1 5 admin_status rx_and tx Command config lldp ports 1 5 admin_status rx_and_tx Success DES 352
311. e all ciphersuites To utilize a particular ciphersuite the user must eliminate other ciphersuites by using the disable ssl command along with the appropriate ciphersuites NOTE Enabling the SSL function on the Switch will disable the port for the web manager port 80 To log on to the web based manager the entry of the URL must begin with https ex https 10 90 90 90 336 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable ssl Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to disable the SSL function on the Switch disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with RC4 128 MD5 RSA with 3DES EDE CBC SHA DHE DSS with 3DES EDE CBC _SHA RSA_ EXPORT with RC4 40 MD5 This command will disable SSL on the Switch and can be used to disable any one or combination of listed ciphersuites on the Switch ciphersuite A security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session The user may choose any combination of the following RSA_with_RC4_128 MD5 This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128 bit keys and the MD5 Hash Algorithm RSA with 3DES_EDE CBC_SHA This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA This ciphersuite combines the DSA Dif
312. e at a time Enter one page at a time Space or view all a The configuration settings are listed by category in the following order 1 Basic serial port Telnet and web 28 PPPoE management status 29 MAC address table notification 2 storm control 20 STP 3 loop detect 31 BPDU protection 4 SIM 32 safeguard 5 syslog 33 SSH 6 Qos 34 SNTP 7 port mirroring 235 LACP 8 traffic segmentation 36 IP 9 SSL 37 WAC 10 port 38 CFM 11 SFLOW 39 JWAC 12 OAM 40 LLDP 13 port lock 41 IGMP snooping 14 SNMPv3 42 MBA 15 management SNMP traps RMON 43 MLD vlan 16 vlan 44 multicast 17 Q in Q 45 multicast authentication 18 RSPAN 46 igmp snooping 19 802 1x 47 mld snooping 20 ACL 48 access authentication control 21 POE TACACS etc 22 FDB forwarding data base 49 ARP 23 address binding 50 route 24 net bios 51 dns relay 25 dhcp server screening 52 dhcp server 26 SRED 53 dhcp relay 2 7 ARP spoofing prevention current_config Entering this parameter will display configurations entered without being saved to NVRAM contig_in_NVRAM Entering this parameter will display configurations entered and saved to NVRAM information Entering this parameter will display the global information for the configuration settings Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To view the current configuration settings 59 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Swi
313. e authentication 2 mac 00 00 00 00 00 21 failed to pass authentication mac address with P in the end indicats the port based mode authentication NOTE In port based mode the VLAN ID field is displayed in the same way as host based mode Parameters ports Specifies the list of ports whose WAC state will be displayed Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the WAC authentication state DES 3528 5 show wac auth_state ports 1 3 Command show wac auth_state ports 1 3 Port MAC Address VLAN ID Assigned Aging Time Idle Time Priority Block Time 00 00 00 00 00 01 Authenticated 4004 Infinite 00 00 00 00 00 02 Authenticated 1234 Infinite 00 00 00 00 00 03 Blocked 00 00 00 00 00 04 Authenticating 00 00 00 00 00 10 P Authenticated 1234 00 00 00 00 00 20 P Authenticating 00 00 00 00 00 21 P Blocked Total Authenticating Hosts 2 Total Authenticated Hosts 3 Total Blocked Hosts 2 DES 3528 5 442 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create wac user Purpose Used to create user account for web based access control Syntax create wac user lt username 15 gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command allows you to create account for web base access control This user account is independent with login user acoount Parameters username
314. e dnsr cache static Description This command is used to disable DNS relay function Parameters cache The buffer cache which records the name of the server and IP address of the corresponding static The DNS Static Table in DNS server with the name of the server and IP address of the corresponding Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the DNS relay DES 3528 5 disable dnsr cache Command disable dnsr cache show dnsr Purpose Used to display the current DNS relay static table Syntax show dnsr static Description This command is used to display the current DNS relay static table Parameters static The DNS Static Table in DNS server with the name of the server and IP address Restrictions None Example usage To display the DNS relay 452 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show dnsr Command show dnsr DNSR Status Enabled Primary Name Server gt 192 168 1 1 Secondary Name Server 0 0 0 0 DNSR Cache Status Enabled DNSR Static Table Status Disabled DNS Relay Static Table IP Address tt cn alphanetworks com 192 168 1 1 Total Entries 1 453 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual POLICY ROUTE COMMANDS The Policy Route commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters
315. e following sections enable qinq Purpose Used to enable Q in Q mode Syntax enable qinq Description This command enables Q in Q mode When enable Q in Q all network port roles will be NNI port and their outer TPID will be set to 88a8 All existed static VLAN will run as SP VLAN All dynamically learned L2 address will be cleared All dynamically registered VLAN entries will be cleared GVRP will be disabled If you need to run GVRP on the Switch you shall enable GVRP manually In Q in Q mode SP VLAN GVRP Address 01 80 C2 00 00 0D will be used by GVRP protocol The default setting of Q in Q is disabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable Q in Q DES 3528 5 enable qinq Command enable qinq Success DES 3528 5 385 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable qinq Purpose Used to disable the Q in Q mode Syntax disable qinq Description This command disables the Q in Q mode All dynamically learned L2 address will be cleared All dynamically registered VLAN entries will be cleared GVRP will disable If you need to run GVRP on the switch you shall enable GVRP manually All existed SP VLAN will run as static 1Q VLAN Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable Q in Q DES 3528 5 di
316. e lack of spanning tree connectivity It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network influencing the spanning tree active topology possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator restricted_tcn true false f true causes the Port not to propagate received topology change notifications and topology changes to other Ports This parameter should be fa se by default If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after changes in a spanning trees active topology as a result of persistent incorrectly learned station location information It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the network causing address flushing in that region possibly because those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or MAC_ Operational for the attached LANs transitions frequently p2p true false auto true indicates a point to point P2P shared link P2P ports are similar to edge ports however they are restricted in that a P2P port must operate in full duplex Like edge ports P2P ports transition to a forwarding state rapidly thus benefiting from RSTP A p2p value of false indicates that the port cannot have p2p status Auto allows the port to have p2p status whenever possible and operate as if the p2p status were true If the port cannot maintain this status for example if the port is forced to half duplex opera
317. e of the specified RADIUS accounting service Syntax config accounting service network shell system state enable disable Description This command is used to enable or disable the specified RADIUS accounting service Parameters network Accounting service for 802 1X port access control By default the service is disabled shell Accounting service for shell events When user login or logout the switch via the console Telnet or SSH and when timeout occurs accounting information will be collected and sent to RADIUS server By default the service is disabled system Accounting service for system events reset reboot By default the service is disabled enable Enable the specified accounting service disable Disable the specified accounting service Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command 241 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure the accounting service DES 3528 5 config accounting service shell state enable Command config accounting service shell state enable Success DES 3528 5 show accounting service Purpose Used to show the RADIUS accounting services status Syntax show accounting service Description This command is used to show the state for radius accounting service Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show accounting service DES 3528 5 show
318. e port configuration for a STP instance_id If a loop occurs the MSTP function will use the port priority to select an interface to put into the forwarding state Set a higher priority value for interfaces to be selected for forwarding first In instances where the priority value is identical the MSTP function will implement the lowest MAC address into the forwarding state and other interfaces will be blocked Remember that lower priority values mean higher priorities for forwarding packets Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured instance_id lt value 0 15 gt Enter a numerical value between 0 and 15 to identify the instance_id previously configured on the Switch An entry of 0 will denote the CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree internalCost This parameter is set to represent the relative cost of forwarding packets to specified ports when an interface is selected within a STP instance The default setting is auto There are two options auto Selecting this parameter for the internalCost will set quickest route automatically and optimally for an interface The default value is derived from the media speed of the interface value 1 200000000 Selecting this parameter with a value in the range of 1 200000000 will set the quickest route when a loop occurs A lower interna Cost represents a quicker transmission priority lt value 0 240 gt Enter a value between 0 and 240 to set t
319. e sent severity Severity level indicator These are described in the following Bold font indicates that the corresponding severity level is currently supported on the Switch Numerical Severity Code T2 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config syslog host 0 Emergency system is unusable Alert action must be taken immediately Critical critical conditions Error error conditions Warning warning conditions Notice normal but significant condition Informational informational messages Debug debug level messages NO oP WD informational Specifies that informational messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 6 from the list above warning Specifies that warning messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 4 from the list above all Specifies that all of the currently supported syslog messages that are generated by the Switch will be sent to the remote host facility Some of the operating system daemons and processes have been assigned Facility values Processes and daemons that have not been explicitly assigned a Facility may use any of the local use facilities or they may use the user level Facility Those Facilities that have been designated are shown in the following Bold font indicates the facility values the Switch currently supports Numerical Facility Numerical Facility Code Code 0 kernel
320. e switch drops the packet because it is invalid In packets received from DHCP servers the relay agent will drop invalid messages disable When the field is toggled to disable the relay agent will not check the validity of the packet s option 82 field Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure DHCP relay option 82 check 210 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config dhcp relay option_82 check enable Command config dhcp_relay option_82 check enable Success DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_82 policy Purpose Used to configure the reforwarding policy of relay agent information option 82 of the Switch Syntax config dhcp_relay option_82 policy replace drop keep Description This command is used to configure the reforwarding policy of DHCP relay agent information option 82 of the switch Parameters replace The option 82 field will be replaced if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client drop The packet will be dropped if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client keep The option 82 field will be retained if the option 82 field already exists in the packet received from the DHCP client Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure DHCP relay option 82 po
321. e with a profile ID of 1 247 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 delete access_profile profile_id 1 Command delete access_profile profile_id 1 Success DES 3528 5 248 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config access_profile Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to configure an access profile on the Switch and to define specific values that will be used to by the Switch to determine if a given packet should be forwarded or filtered Masks entered using the create access_profile command will be combined using a logical AND operational method with the values the Switch finds in the specified frame header fields Specific values for the rules are entered using the config access_ profile command below config access _profile profile_id lt value 1 14 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt add access _id auto_assign lt value 1 128 gt ethernet vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt source_mac lt macaddr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt destination_mac lt macaddr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt 802 1p lt value 0 7 gt ethernet_type lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt 1 ip vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt source_ip lt ipaddrs destination_ip lt ipaddr gt dscp lt value 0 63 gt icmp type lt value 0 255 gt code lt value 0 255 gt igmp typ
322. e_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt Specifies to examine the source MAC address mask e destination_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt Specifies to examine the destination MAC address mask e 802 1p Specifies that the Switch will examine the 802 1p priority value in the frame s header e ethernet_type Specifies that the Switch will examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header ip Specifies that the switch will examine the IP address in each frame s header e vlan Specifies a VLAN mask e source_ip_ mask lt netmask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the source IP address e destination_ip_mask lt netmask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the destination IP address e dscp Specifies that the Switch will examine the DiffServ Code Point DSCP field in each frame s header e icmp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header e type Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s ICMP Type field e code Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s ICMP Code field e igmp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field e type Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s IGMP Type field e tcp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s Transmission Control Protocol TCP field e src_port
323. eate snmp view dlinkview 1 3 6 view_type included create snmp view dlinkview 1 3 6 view_type included delete snmp view Purpose Used to remove an SNMP view entry previously created on the Switch Syntax delete snmp view lt view_name 32 gt all lt oid gt Description This command is used to remove an SNMP view previously created on the Switch Parameters lt view_name 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that identifies the SNMP view to be deleted all Specifies that all of the SNMP views on the Switch will be deleted lt oid gt The object ID that identifies an object tree MIB tree that will be deleted from the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a previously configured SNMP view from the Switch DES 3528 5 delete snmp view dlinkview all Command delete snmp view dlinkview all Success DES 3528 5 show snmp view Purpose Used to display an SNMP view previously created on the Switch Syntax show snmp view lt view_name 32 gt Description This command displays an SNMP view previously created on the Switch Parameters lt view_name 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that identifies the SNMP view that will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display SNMP view configuration 41 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528
324. ections config mirror port Purpose Used to configure a mirror port source port pair on the Switch Traffic from any source port to a target port can be mirrored for real time analysis A logic analyzer or an RMON probe can then be attached to study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely obtrusive manner Syntax config mirror port lt port gt add delete source ports lt portlist gt rx tx both Description This command allows a range of ports to have all of their traffic also sent to a designated port where a network sniffer or other device can monitor the network traffic In addition users can specify that only traffic received by or sent by one or both is mirrored to the Target port Parameters lt port gt This specifies the Target port the port where mirrored packets will be received The target port must be configured in the same VLAN and must be operating at the same speed as the source port If the target port is operating at a lower speed the source port will be forced to drop its operating speed to match that of the target port add delete Specifies if the user wishes to add or delete ports to be mirrored that are specified in the source ports parameter source ports The port or ports being mirrored This cannot include the Target port lt portlist gt This specifies a port or range of ports that will be mirrored That is the range of ports in which all traffic will be copied
325. ecurity for the listed ports max_learning_addr lt max_lock_no 0 64 gt Use this to limit the number of MAC addresses dynamically listed in the FDB for the ports lock_address_mode Permanent DeleteOnTimout DeleteOnReset Indicates the method of locking addresses The user has three choices Permanent The locked addresses will not age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnTimeout The locked addresses will age out after the aging timer expires DeleteOnReset The locked addresses will not age out until the Switch has been reset Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the port security DES 3528 5 config port_security ports 1 5 admin_state enable max_learning_addr 5 lock_address_mode DeleteOnReset Command config port_security ports 1 5 admin_state enable max_learning_addr 5 lock_address_mode DeleteOnReset Success DES 3528 5 30 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete port_security_entry Purpose Used to delete a port security entry by MAC address port number and VLAN ID Syntax delete port_security_entry vlan name lt vlan_name 32 gt mac_address lt macaddr gt port lt port gt Description This command is used to delete a single previously learned port security entry by port VLAN name and MAC address Parameters vlan name lt vian_name 32 gt Enter
326. ed When the authorization is enabled for WAC s local the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted Parameters radius f enabled the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled The default state is enabled local lf specified to enable the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled The default state is enabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure WAC authorization from the local database DES 3528 5 config wac authorization network local disable Command config wac authorization network local disable Success DES 3528 5 config wac clear_default_redirpath Purpose Used to clear the WAC default redirect path Syntax config wac clear_default_redirpath Description When the string is cleared the client will not be redirected to another URL after successful authentication Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the WAC clear default redirect path DES 3528 5 config wac clear_default_redirpath Command config wac clear_default_redirpath Success DES 3528 5 438 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config wac default_redirpath
327. ed here will be attached to BPDU packets as an identifier for the MSTP region to which it belongs Switches having the same revision_level and name will be considered as part of the same MSTP region Parameters revision_level lt int 0 65535 gt Enter a number between 0 and 65535 to identify the MSTP region This value along with the name will identify the MSTP region configured on the Switch The default setting is 0 name lt string gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters to uniquely identify the MSTP region on the Switch This name along with the revision _level value will identify the MSTP region configured on the Switch If no name is entered the default name will be the MAC address of the device Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the MSTP region of the Switch with revision_level 10 and the name Trinity 87 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config stp mst_config_id revision_level 10 name Trinity Command config stp mst_config_id revision_level 10 name Trinity Success DES 3528 5 config stp mst_ports Purpose Used to update the port configuration for a MSTP instance Syntax config stp mst_ports lt portlist gt instance_id lt value 0 15 gt internalCost auto lt value 1 2000000005 priority lt value 0 240 gt 1 Description This command will update th
328. ed_only implies that only VLAN tagged frames will be accepted while admit_all implies tagged and untagged frames will be accepted by the Switch pvid lt vilanid 1 4094 gt Specifies the default VLAN associated with the port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the ingress checking status the sending and receiving GVRP information DES 3528 5 config port_vlan 1 4 gvrp_state enable ingress_checking enable acceptable frame tagged_only pvid 2 Command config gvrp 1 4 state enable ingress_checking enable acceptable frame tagged_only pvid 2 Success DES 3528 5 enable gvrp Purpose Used to enable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP Syntax enable gvrp Description This command along with disable gvrp below is used to enable and disable GVRP on the Switch without changing the GVRP configuration on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP DES 3528 5 enable gvrp Command enable gvrp Success DES 3528 5 123 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable gvrp Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to disable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP disable gvrp This command a
329. ember s id number listed from 1 to 32 group commander_mac lt macadadr gt Entering this parameter will display information concerning the SIM group To view a specific group include the commander s MAC address of the group neighbor Entering this parameter will display neighboring devices of the Switch A SIM neighbor is defined as a switch that is physically connected to the Switch but is not part of the SIM group This screen will produce the following results Port Displays the physical port number of the commander switch where the uplink to the neighbor switch is located MAC Address Displays the MAC Address of the neighbor switch Role Displays the role CS CaS MS of the neighbor switch None To show the SIM information in detail 343 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show sim Command show sim SIM Version VER 1 61 Firmware Version 1 03 B008 Device Name MAC Address 0O0 21 91 AF EA 00 Capabilities L2 Platform DES 3528 L2 Switch SIM State Disabled Role State Candidate Discovery Interval 30 sec Hold Time 100 sec DES 3528 5 To show the candidate information in summary 1f the candidate ID is specified DES 3528 5 show sim candidates Command show sim candidates ID MAC Address Platform Firmware Device Name Capability j Version 00 01 02 03 04 00 DES 3526 L2 Switch 1 03 B008 2 00 5
330. ember Ports 4 Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 show authentication ports Purpose Used to display authentication settings on port s Syntax show authentication ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the authentication method and authorization mode on ports Parameters portlist Displays multiple authentication on specific port s Restrictions None Example usage To display authentication settings for all ports DES 3528 5 show authentication ports Command show authentication ports Methods Authorized Mode Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based Host_based SIN is Next Page IHH Next Entry amp All 433 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable authorization network Purpose Used to enable authorization on the Switch Syntax enable authorization network Description This command is used to enable the authorization network When the authorization for network is enabled whether the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted will depend on the individual module s setting Authorization for the network is enabled by default Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this comma
331. en server_group group_1 Success DES 3528 5 322 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config authen server_group Purpose Used to configure a user defined authentication server group Syntax config authen server_group tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius lt string 15 gt add delete server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius Description This command will configure an authentication server group A server group is a technique used to group TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server hosts into user defined categories for authentication using method lists The user may define the type of server group by protocol or by previously defined server group Up to eight authentication server hosts may be added to any particular group Parameters server_group The user may define the group by protocol groups built into the Switch TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS or by a user defined group previously created using the create authen server_group command tacacs Use this parameter to utilize the built in TACACS server protocol on the Switch Only server hosts utilizing the TACACS protocol may be added to this group xtacacs Use this parameter to utilize the built in XTACACS server protocol on the Switch Only server hosts utilizing the XTACACS protocol may be added to this group tacacs Use this parameter to utilize the built in TACACS server protocol
332. enable clipaging Command enable clipaging Success DES 3528 5 disable clipaging Purpose Used to disable the pausing of the console screen scrolling at the end of each page when a command displays more than one screen of information Syntax disable clipaging Description This command is used to disable the pausing of the console screen at the end of each page when a command would display more than one screen of information Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable pausing of the screen display when show command output reaches the end of the page DES 3528 5 disable clipaging Command disable clipaging Success DES 3528 5 16 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual telnet Purpose Used to login the remote device system through the network Syntax telnet lt ipaddr gt tcp_port lt value 0 65535 gt Description This command is used when the manager want to manage the device system which isn t on local So can use this command to login in the remote system which is located on other side If connect successful some actions can be done as local Parameters lt ipaddr gt The network ip address This is the destination which wants to login lt value 0 65535 gt The TCP port number TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535 The well known TCP port for the Telnet proto
333. eply Default value is 5 seconds retransmit lt int 1 255 gt The count for re transmit Default value is 2 Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the RADIUS server communication settings 234 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config radius add 1 10 48 74 121 key dlink default Command config radius add 1 10 48 74 121 key dlink default Success DES 3528 5 config radius delete Purpose Used to delete a previously entered RADIUS server configuration Syntax config radius delete lt server_index 1 3 gt Description This command is used to delete a previously entered RADIUS server configuration Parameters lt server_index 1 3 gt Assigns a number to the current set of RADIUS server settings Up to 3 groups of RADIUS server settings can be entered on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete previously configured RADIUS server communication settings DES 3528 5 config radius delete 1 Command config radius delete 1 Success DES 3528 5 config radius Purpose Used to configure the Switch s RADIUS settings Syntax config radius lt server_index 1 3 gt ipaddress lt server_ip gt key lt passwd 32 gt auth_port lt udp_port_number 1 65535 gt acct_port lt udp_port_number 1 65535 gt timeout lt int 1 255 gt
334. er As well as these four pre defined settings users can directly specify any value ranging from 1000 mW to 35000mW on port 1 8 and 1000mMW 15400mW on port 9 24 NOTE DES 3528P ports 1 8 can configure PoE up to 35W by configuring the PoE port user define value but ports 1 8 are only tested up to the 30W mode for the maximum power All ports can also support 802 3af 1000 15400mW 447 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config poe ports Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure PoE ports DES 3528P 5 config poe ports 1 4 state enable priority critical power_limit class_1l Command config poe ports 1 4 state enable priority critical power_limit class_1 Power limit has been set to 4000 Class 1 PD upper power limit 3 84W power loss on cable Success DES 3528P 5 config poe ports 5 state enable priority critical power_limit user_define config poe ports 5 state enable priority critical power_limit user_define Power limit has been set to 1000 Success DES 3528P 5 show poe system Purpose Used to display the settings and actual values of all PoE functions Syntax show poe system units lt unitlist gt Description This command displays the settings and actual values of all PoE functions Parameters units Specifies the units that will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To disp
335. er disable dhcp_server Purpose Used to disable the DHCP server function Syntax disable dhcp_server Description This command disables the DHCP server function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the dhcp_server DES 3528 5 disable dhcp_server Command disable dhcp server show dhcp_server Purpose Used to display the status of the DHCP server Syntax show dhcp_server Description This command displays the status of the DHCP server Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the dhcp_server 484 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show dhcp server Command show dhcp server DHCP Server Global State Disable Ping Packet Number 2 Ping Timeout 500 ms DES 3528 5 clear dhcp conflict_ip Purpose Used to clear an entry or all entries from the conflict IP database Syntax clear dhcp conflict_ip lt ipaddr gt all Description This command clears an entry or all entries from the conflict IP database Parameters lt ipaddr gt The IP address to be cleared all All IP addresses will be cleared Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear an IP address 10 20 3 4 from the conflict database DES 3528 5 clear dhcp conflict_ip 10 20 3 4 Command clear dhcp conflict_ip
336. er enable Command config mac_based_access_control auth_failover enable Success DES 3528 5 428 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config mac_based_access_control authorization network Purpose Used to enable or disable the accepting of authorized configuration Syntax config mac_based_access_control authorization network radius enable disable local enable disable 1 Description This command is used to enable or disable the accepting of authorized configuration When the authorization is enabled for MAC AC s radius the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled When the authorization is enabled for MAC AC s local the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted Parameters radius lf specified to enable the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled The default state is enabled local lf specified to enable the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled The default state is enabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the MAC based AC authorized network DES 3528 5 config mac_based_access_control authorization network local disable Command config ma
337. er will be encrypted read_view Specifies that the SNMP group being created can request SNMP messages write_view Specifies that the SNMP group being created has write privileges notify view Specifies that the SNMP group being created can receive SNMP trap messages generated by the Switch s SNMP agent lt view_name 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch Only Administrator level users can issue this command To create an SNMP group named sg1 DES 3528 5 create snmp group sgl v3 noauth_nopriv read view vl write_view vl notify view vl Create snmp group sgl v3 noauth_nopriv read view vl write_view vl notify view 45 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete snmp group Purpose Used to remove an SNMP group from the Switch Syntax delete snmp group lt groupname 32 gt Description This command is used to remove an SNMP group from the Switch Parameters lt groupname 32 gt An alphanumeric name of up to 32 characters that will identify the SNMP group the new SNMP user will be associated with Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the SNMP group named sg1 DES 3528 5 delete snmp group sgl Command delete snmp group sgl Success DES 3528 5 show
338. er_via_mdi maximum_frame_size enable disable Description Each Specific TLV in this extension can be enabled individually Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured all Use this parameter to set all ports in the system mac_phy_configuration_status This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit MAC PHY configuration status TLV This type indicates it is possible for two ends of an IEEE 802 3 link to be configured with different and or speed settings and still establish some limited network connectivity More precisely the information includes whether the port support the auto negotiation function whether the function is enabled the auto negotiated advertised capability and the operational MAU type The default state is disabled link_aggregation This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit Link Aggregation TLV This type indicates the current link aggregation status of IEEE 802 3 MACs More precisely the information should include whether the port is capable of doing link aggregation whether the port is aggregated in a aggregated link and the aggregated port ID The default state is disabled power_via_mdi This TLV optional data type indicates that the LLDP agent should transmit Power via MDI TLV Three IEEE 802 3 PMD implementations 10BASE T 100BASE TX and 1000BASE T allow power to be supplied over the link for co
339. erface Filtering State Disabled CPU Interface Access Profile Table Total Unused Rule Entries 499 Total Used Rule Entries ap i 257 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Access Profile ID Source IP Mask Dst IP Mask DSCP ICMP Type Code q Quit n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All enable cpu_interface_filtering Purpose Used to enable CPU interface filtering on the Switch Syntax enable cpu_interface_filtering Description This command is used in conjunction with the disable cpu_interface_filtering command below to enable and disable CPU interface filtering on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example Usage To enable CPU interface filtering DES 3528 5 enable cpu_interface_filtering Command enable cpu_interface_filtering Success DES 3528 5 disable cpu_interface_filtering Purpose Used to disable CPU interface filtering on the Switch Syntax disable cpu_interface_filtering Description This command is used in conjunction with the enable cpu_interface_filtering command above to enable and disable CPU interface filtering on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example Usage To disable CPU filtering DES 3528 5 disable cpu_interface_filtering Command disable cpu_interface_filtering Success DE
340. erion These numbers have flag bits associated with them which are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may deny packets by denying certain flag bits within the packets The user may choose between urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn synchronize and fin finish protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the Switch will examine the Protocol field in each packet and if this field contains the value entered here apply the following rules udp Specifies that the Switch will examine the User Datagram Protocol UDP field within each packet e src_port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this UDP source port in their header e dst port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this UDP destination port in their header protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the Switch will examine the protocol field in each packet and if this field contains the value entered here apply the following rules user_define_mask lt hex 0x0 0xffffffff gt Specifies that the rule applies to the IP protocol ID and the mask options behind the IP header packet_content_mask Specifies that the Switch will mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified as follows offset_0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 0 to byt
341. ernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config jwac authenticate_page lt Japanese english gt config jwac authentication_page japanese english default page_title lt desc 128 gt login _window_title element element lt desc 32 gt user_name_title lt desc 16 gt password_title lt desc 16 gt logout_window_title lt desc 32 gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable jwac Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to enable JWAC function enable jwac This command is used to enable JWAC function JWAC and WAC are mutual exclusive functions They cannot be enabled at the same time Using the JWAC function PC users need to pass two stages of authentication The first stage is to do the authentication with the Quarantine Server and the second stage is the authentication with the switch For the second stage the authentication is similar to WAC except that there is no port VLAN membership change by JWAC after a host passes authentication The RADIUS server will share the server configuration defined by the 802 1X command set None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To enable JWAC DES 3528 5 enable jwac Command enable jwac Success DES 3528 5 disable jwac Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to disable JWAC function disable jwac This command
342. ers ports Specifies the list of ports on which to clear the DHCP snooping entries Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear address binding DHCP snooping entries DES 3528 5 clear address binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports 1 3 Command clear address_binding dhcp_ snoop binding_entry ports 1 3 Success DES 3528 5 show address_binding dhcp_snoop Purpose Used to show DHCP snooping database Syntax show address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports lt portlist gt binding_entry port lt port gt Description This command is used to display DHCP snooping database Parameters max_entry Displays the max number of entries which can be learned by dhcp snooping on the specified ports binding_entry Displays the DHCP snooping entries on the specified port Restrictions None Example usage To display address binding DHCP snooping status DES 3528 5 show address_binding dhcp_snoop Command show address _ binding dhcp_snoop DHCP_Snoop Disabled DES 3528 5 To display address binding DHCP snooping entries NOTE Inactive indicated that the entry is currently inactive due to port link down 162 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show address binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry Command show address_binding dhcp snoop binding _ entry IP Address
343. es Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual e Prevent ARP spoofing via packet content ACL Concerning the common DoS attack today caused by the ARP spoofing D Link managed switch can effectively mitigate it via its unique Packet Content ACL For that reason the basic ACL can only filter ARP packets based on packet type VLAN ID Source and Destination MAC information there is a need for further inspections of ARP packets To prevent ARP spoofing attack we will demonstrate here using Packet Content ACL on DES 3528 to block the invalid ARP packets which contain fake gateway s MAC and IP binding IP 10 90 90 90 MAC 01 02 03 04 05 06 _ IP 10 90 90 100 MAC 00 00 00 00 CD EF M B a Fd CD EF lt OcOcOcOd0d0d s 10 90 90 90 is at OcOcOcOd0d0d IP 10 90 90 110 MAC 0c 0c 0c 0d 0d 0d Example topology Configuration The configuration logic is listed below 1 Only when the ARP matches the Source MAC address in Ethernet the Sender MAC address and Sender IP address in the ARP protocol can pass through the switch In this example it is the gateway s ARP 2 The switch will deny all other ARP packets which claim they are from the gateway s IP The design of Packet Content ACL on DES 3528 series enables users to inspect any offset_chunk An offset_chunk is a 4 byte block in a HEX format which is utilized to match the individual field in an Ethernet frame Each profile is allowed to contain up to a
344. es that the multicast packet that matches the addresses defined in the profiles will be permitted The default mode is permit deny Specifies that the multicast packet that matches the addresses defined in the profiles will be denied Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config port 1 3 to set the multicast address profile 2 DES 3528 5 config limited_multicast_addr ports 1 3 add profile _id 2 Command config limited_multicast_addr ports 1 3 add profile_id 2 Success DES 3528 5 show limited_multicast_addr Purpose Used to show per port Limited IP multicast address range Syntax show limited_multicast_addr ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt Description This command shows limited multicast address on a per port or per VID basis When the function is configured on a port or VLAN it limits the multicast groups that hosts can join through the operation of IGMP snooping function and layer 3 function Parameters lt portlist gt A range of ports to show the limited multicast address configuration Restrictions None Example usage To show a limited multicast address range 168 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show limited_multicast_addr ports 1 3 Command show limited_multicast_addr ports 1 3 Port Ei l Access Deny Profile ID Multicast Addresses customer 224 19 62
345. es that there will be no authorization and no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager auth_nopriv Specifies that authorization will be required but there will be no encryption of packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manager auth_priv Specifies that authorization will be required and that packets sent between the Switch and a remote SNMP manger will be encrypted lt auth_string 32 gt An alphanumeric string used to authorize a remote SNMP manager to access the Switch s SNMP agent Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create an SNMP host to receive SNMP messages DES 3528 5 create snmp host 10 48 74 100 v3 auth_priv public Command create snmp host 10 48 74 100 v3 auth_priv public Success DES 3528 5 delete snmp host Purpose Used to remove a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Syntax delete snmp host lt ipaddr gt Description This command deletes a recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Parameters lt paddr gt The IP address of a remote SNMP manager that will receive SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete an SNMP host entry 48 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 delete sn
346. estrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the SNMP authentication trap support DES 3528 5 disable snmp authenticate_traps Command disable snmp authenticate_traps Success DES 3528 5 53 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config snmp system_contact Purpose Used to enter the name of a contact person who is responsible for the Switch Syntax config snmp system_contact lt sw_contact gt Description This command is used to enter the name and or other information to identify a contact person who is responsible for the Switch A maximum of 255 character can be used Parameters lt sw_contact gt A maximum of 255 characters is allowed A NULL string is accepted if there is no contact Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the Switch contact to MIS Department IT DES 3528 5 config snmp system_contact MIS Department II Command config snmp system_contact MIS Department II Success DES 3528 5 config snmp system_location Purpose Used to enter a description of the location of the Switch Syntax config snmp system_location lt sw_location gt Description This command is used to enter a description of the location of the Switch A maximum of 255 characters can be used Parameters lt sw_location gt A maximum
347. et Switch CLI Reference Manual When PC B replies to the ARP request its MAC address will be written into Target H W Address in the ARP payload shown in Table 3 The ARP reply will be then encapsulated into the Ethernet frame again and sent back to the sender The ARP reply is in a form of Unicast communication H W Protocol Protocol Operation Sender Sender Target Target type type address address H W address protocol H W address protocol length address address Table 3 ARP Payload When PC B replies the query the Destination Address in the Ethernet frame will be changed to PC A s MAC address The Source Address will be changed to PC B s MAC address see Table 4 00 20 5C 01 11 11 00 20 5C 01 22 22 Table 4 a frame c The switch will also examine the Source Address of the Ethernet frame and find that the address is not in the Forwarding Table The switch will learn PC B s MAC and update its Forwarding Table Forwarding Table Port 00 20 5C 01 11 11 Port2 00 20 5C 01 22 22 514 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual e How AFP spoofing attacks a network ARP spoofing also known as ARP poisoning is a method to attack an Ethernet network which may allow an attacker to sniff data frames on a LAN modify the traffic or stop the traffic altogether known as a Denial of Service DoS attack The principle of ARP spoofing is to send t
348. ete dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 Success DES 3528 5 127 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show dot1v_protocol_group Purpose Used to display the protocols defined in a protocol group Syntax show dotiv_protocol_group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name 32 gt Description This command displaysthe protocols defined in protocol groups Parameters group_id Specifies the ID of the group to be displayed if group ID is not specified all configured protocol groups will be displayed group_name The name of the protocol group The maximum length is 32 characters Restrictions None Example usage To display the protocol group ID 1 DES 3528 5 show dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 Command show dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 Protocol Group ID Protocol Group Name Frame Type Protocol Value General Group EthernetII Total Entries DES 3528 5 config port dotiv Purpose Used to assign the VLAN for untagged packets which ingress from the portlist based on the protocol group configured Syntax config port dot1v ports lt portlist gt all add protocol_group group_id lt id gt group_name lt name 32 gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt id gt priority lt value 0 7 gt delete protocol_group group_id lt id 1 16 gt all Description This command assigns the VLAN for untagged packets which ingress from the portlist based on the
349. eters in the following table Command Parameters default lt ipaddr gt lt metric 1 65535 gt delete iproute default stowoute OOS Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create iproute Purpose Used to create IP route entries to the Switch s IP routing table Syntax create iproute default lt ipaddr gt lt metric 1 65535 gt Description This command is used to create a default static IP route entry to the Switch s IP routing table Parameters default Specifies to create an IP route entry lt ipaddr gt The gateway IP address for the next hop router lt metric 1 65535 gt Allows the entry of a routing protocol metric entry representing the number of routers between the Switch and the IP address above The default setting is 1 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add the default static address 10 48 74 121 with a metric setting of 1 to the routing table DES 3528 5 create iproute default 10 48 74 121 1 Command create iproute default 10 48 74 121 1 Success DES 3528 5 delete iproute Purpose Used to delete a default IP route entry from the Switch s IP routing table Syntax delete iproute default Description This command will delete an existing default entry from the Switch s IP routing table Parameters default Specifies to delete a default IP route entry Restrictions Only Admini
350. ethernet Specifies that the Switch will examine the layer 2 part of each packet header e vlan Specifies that the Switch will examine the VLAN part of each packet header e source_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt Specifies a MAC address mask for the source MAC address This mask is entered in a hexadecimal format destination_mac lt macmask 000000000000 fffffftfffff gt Specifies a MAC address mask for the destination MAC address 802 1p Specifies that the Switch will examine the 802 1p priority value in the frame s header ethernet_type Specifies that the Switch will examine the Ethernet type value in each frame s header 245 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create access profile ip Specifies that the Switch will examine the IP address in each frame s header vian Specifies a VLAN mask source_ip_ mask lt netmask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the source IP address destination_ip_ mask lt netmask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the destination IP address dscp Specifies that the Switch will examine the DiffServ Code Point DSCP field in each frame s header icmp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field in each frame s header e type Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s ICMP Type field e code Specifies that the Switch will examine eac
351. ew the Switch s MAC address table notification global settings DES 3528 5 show mac_notification Command show mac_notification Global MAC Notification Settings State Enabled Interval ar l History Size eck DES 3528 5 show mac_notification ports Purpose Used to display the Switch s MAC address table notification status settings Syntax show mac_ notification ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the Switch s MAC address table notification status settings Parameters lt portlist gt Specify a port or group of ports to be viewed Entering this command without the parameter will display the MAC notification table for all ports Restrictions None Example usage To display the MAC address table notification status settings for ports 1 7 DES 3528 5 show mac_notification ports 1 7 Command show mac_notification ports 1 7 Port MAC Address Table Notification State Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled CTRL C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh 306 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual ACCESS AUTHENTICATION CONTROL COMMANDS The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS commands allows secure access to the Switch using the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS protocols When a user logs in to the Switch or tries to access the administrator level privilege he or she is pro
352. ex 0x0 Oxffffffff offset_16 31 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff offset_32 47 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff offset_48 63 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_64 79 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 ipv6 class lt value 0 255 gt flowlabel lt hex 0x0 Oxfffff gt source_ipv6 lt ipv6addrs gt destination_ipv6 lt ipv6addr gt 1 port lt portlist gt all permit deny time_range lt range_name 32 gt delete access_id lt value 1 100 gt Description This command is used to configure a CPU access profile for CPU Interface Filtering and to enter specific values that will be combined using a logical AND operational method with masks entered with the config cpu access_profile command above Parameters profile_id lt value 1 5 gt Enter an integer used to identify the access profile that will be configured with this command This value is assigned to the access profile when it is created with the create cpu access_profile command The profile ID sets the relative priority for the profile and specifies an index number that will identify the access profile being created with this command Priority is set relative to
353. f listed ciphersuites on the Switch Entering this command without a parameter will enable the SSL status on the Switch Enabling SSL will disable the web manager on the Switch Parameters ciphersuite A security string that determines the exact cryptographic parameters specific encryption algorithms and key sizes to be used for an authentication session The user may choose any combination of the following RSA_with_RC4_128 MD5 This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 128 bit keys and the MD5 Hash Algorithm RSA with 3DES_ EDE_CBC_SHA This ciphersuite combines the RSA key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and the SHA Hash Algorithm DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA This ciphersuite combines the DSA Diffie Hellman key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and SHA Hash Algorithm RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40_MD5 This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 40 bit keys The ciphersuites are enabled by default on the Switch yet the SSL status is disabled by default Enabling SSL with a ciphersuite will not enable the SSL status on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable SSL on the Switch for all ciphersuites DES 3528 5 enable ssl Command enable ssl Note Web will be disabled if SSL is enabled Success DES 3528 5 NOTE Enabling SSL on the Switch will enabl
354. f the DNS server Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the DNS server s IP address DES 3528 5 config dhcp pool dns_server accounting 10 10 10 1 Command config dhcp pool dns_server accounting 10 10 10 1 476 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config dhcp pool netbios_name_server Purpose Used to specify the NetBIOS WINS server that is available to a Microsoft DHCP client Up to three IP addresses can be specified in one command line Syntax config dhcp pool netbios_name_server lt pool_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt Description Windows Internet Naming Service WINS is a name resolution service that Microsoft DHCP clients use to correlate host names to IP addresses within a general grouping of networks If the name of the netbios server is not specified the netbios name server information will not be provided to the client lf this commands are entered twice for the same pool the second command will overwrite the first command Parameters lt pool name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool lt paddr gt Specifies the IP address of the WINS server Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the WINS Server s IP address DES 3528 5 config dhcp pool netbios_name server accounting 10
355. fault the robustness variable is set to 2 You might want to increase this value if you expect a subnet to be lossy last_ member_query_interval The maximum amount of time between group specific query messages including those sent in response to leave group messages You might lower this interval to reduce the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the last member of a group state If the state is enable it allows the switch to be selected as a IGMP Querier sends IGMP query packets If the state is disabled then the switch cannot play the role as a querier Note that if the Layer 3 router connected to the switch provide only the IGMP proxy function but not provide the mutlicast routing function then this state must be configured as disabled Otherwise if the Layer 3 router is not selected as the querier it will not send the IGMP query packet Since it will not also send the multicast routing protocol packet the port will be timed out as a router port version The version of the IGMP Query sent by the switch Only Administrator or Operator level users can issue this command To configure the IGMP snooping querier DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping querier vlan default query_interval 125 state enable Command config igmp_snooping querier vlan default query interval 125 state enable 194 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config router_ports Purpose Used
356. fie Hellman key exchange CBC Block Cipher 3DES_EDE encryption and SHA Hash Algorithm RSA _ EXPORT with RC4_ 40 _MD5 This ciphersuite combines the RSA Export key exchange stream cipher RC4 encryption with 40 bit keys Only Administrator level users can issue this command To disable the SSL status on the Switch DES 3528 5 disable ssl Command disable ssl Success DES 3528 5 To disable ciphersuite RSA_EXPORT _with_RC4_40_MDS5 only DES 3528 5 disable ssl ciphersuite RSA EXPORT with_RC4 40 MD5 Command disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4 40 MD5 Success DES 3528 5 config ssl cachetimeout Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure the SSL cache timeout config ssl cachetimeout timeout lt value 60 86400 gt This command will set the time between a new key exchange between a client and a host using the SSL function A new SSL session is established every time the client and host go through a key exchange Specifying a longer timeout will allow the SSL session to reuse the master key on future connections with that particular host therefore speeding up the negotiation process timeout lt value 60 86400 gt Enter a timeout value between 60 and 86400 seconds to specify the total time an SSL key exchange ID stays valid before the SSL module will require a new full SSL negotiation for connection The default cache timeout is 600 seconds Only
357. fig flow_meter profile id lt value 1 14 gt profile _ name lt name 1 32 gt access_id lt value 1 128 gt tr_tcm cir lt value 0 15624 gt cbs lt value 0 16384 gt pir lt value 0 15624 gt pbs lt value 0 16384 gt sr_tcm cir lt value 0 15624 gt cbs lt value 0 16384 gt ebs lt value 0 16384 gt conform permit replace_dscp lt value 0 63 gt counter enable disable exceed permit replace_dscp lt value 0 63 gt counter enable disable drop violate permit replace_dscp lt value 0 63 gt counter enable disable drop delete show flow_meter profile_id lt value 1 14 gt profile _name lt name 1 32 gt access_id lt value1 128 gt config time_range lt range_name 32 gt hours start_time lt time hh mm ss gt end_time lt time hh mm ss gt weekdays lt daylist gt delete show current_config access _profile Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create access profile Purpose Used to create an access profile on the Switch and to define which parts of each incoming frame s header the Switch will examine Masks can be entered that will be combined with the values the Switch finds in the specified frame header fields Specific values for the rules are entered using the create access_ profile command below create access _ profile ethernet vlan source_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt destination _mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt
358. figure the trap log state for voice VLAN If there is a new voice device detected or a port join leave the voice VLAN dynamically and the trap log is enabled a trap log will be triggered enable Specifies to enable sending the issue of voice VLAN trap and log disable Specifies to disable sending the issue of voice VLAN trap and log Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To enable the trap state for voice VLAN DES 3528 5 config voice_vlan trap_log enable Command config voice_vlan trap_log enable Success DES 3528 5 show voice_vlan Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display voice VLAN global information show voice_vlian This command is used to display voice VLAN global information None None To display the voice VLAN global information when voice VLAN is enabled DES 3528 5 show voice vlan Command show voice vlan VoiveVLAN State VoiceVID VLAN Name Priority Aging Time Trap State Log State Member Ports Dynamic Ports DES 3528 5 Enabled 1 default 6 60 minutes Enabled Enabled 1 28 138 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show voice_vian oui Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage To display the OUI information of voice VLAN show voice_vlan oui None None DES 3528 5 show voice vla
359. flow counter_poller DES 3528 5 create sflow counter_poller ports 1 analyzer_server_id 2 interval 40 Command create sflow counter _poller ports 1 analyzer_server_id 2 interval 40 Success DES 3528 5 config sflow counter_poller Purpose Used to configure the sflow counter_poller parameters Syntax config sflow counter_poller ports lt portlist gt all interval disable lt sec 20 120 gt Description This command is used to config the sflow counter_poller parameters If the user wants the change the analyzer_server_id he needs to delete the counter_poller and create a new one Parameters ports Specifies the list of ports to be configured interval The maximum number of seconds between successive statistic counter information If set to disable the counter poller is disabled If an interval is not specified its default value is disable Restrictions Only Administrators and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the sflow counter_poller 283 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config sflow counter_poller ports 1 interval 40 Command config sflow counter_poller ports linterval 40 Success DES 3528 delete sflow counter_poller Purpose Used to delete the sflow counter_poller Syntax delete sflow counter_poller ports lt portlist gt all Description This command deletes the sflow counter_poller from the
360. fm ccm_fwd_mode hardware Success DES 3528 5 cfm loopback Purpose Used to show MEPs and MIPs created on a port Syntax cfm loopback lt macaddrs gt mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt num lt int 1 65535 gt length lt int 0 1500 gt pattern lt string 1500 gt pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt Description The MAC address represents that the destination MEP or MIP which can be reached by this MAC address The MEP represents the source MEP to initiate the loop back message You can press Ctrl C to exit loop back test Parameters lt macadadr gt Specifies the destination MAC address mepname Specifies the MEP name mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name num Specifies the number of LBMs to be sent The default value is 4 length Specifies the payload length of LBM to be sent The default is 0 pattern Specifies an arbitrary amount of data to be included in a Data TLV along with an indication of whether the Data TLV is to be included pdu_priority The 802 1p priority to be set in the transmitted LBMs If not specified it uses the same priority as CCMs and LTMs sent by the MA Restrictions None Example usage To configure cfm loop back 501 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 c
361. fm loopback 00 01 02 03 04 05 mep mepl Command cfm loopback 00 01 02 03 04 05 mep mep1 Request timed out Request timed out Reply from MPID 52 bytes xxx time xxxms Request timed out CFM loopback statistics for 00 01 02 03 04 05 Packets Sent 4 Received 1 Lost 3 75 loss DES 3528 5 Purpose Used to show CFM packet RX TX counters Syntax show cfm pkt_cnt ports lt portlist gt rx tx rx tx ccm Description CFM packet counters will be shown Parameters ports Specifies which ports counter to show If not specified all ports will be shown rx tx Shows RX or TX packet counter If none is specified both of them are shown ccm Shows the CCM transmission state Restrictions None Example usage The following example displays the statistics for CFM packets VidDrop The packets dropped due to invalid VID OpcoDrop The packets dropped due to unrecognized CFM opcode 502 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show cfm pkt_cnt Command show cfm pkt_cnt CFM RX Statistics Port CCM LBR LBM LTR LTM VidDrop OpcoDrop Sum 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 254 0 0 0 0 0 0 254 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 3 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total 254 3 0 0 0 0 0 257 CFM TX Statistics Port CCM LBR LBM LTR LTM Sum 1 0 0
362. for authentication and privacy The key is defined by specifying the key in hex form below This method is not recommended auth The user may also choose the type of authentication algorithms used to authenticate the snmp user The choices are md5 Specifies that the HMAC MD5 96 authentication level will be used md5 may be utilized by entering one of the following e lt auth password 8 16 gt An alphanumeric string of between 8 and 16 characters that will be used to authorize the agent to receive packets for the 38 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create snmp user Restrictions Example usage host lt auth_key 32 32 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of exactly 32 characters in hex form to define the key that will be used to authorize the agent to receive packets for the host sha Specifies that the HMAC SHA 96 authentication level will be used lt auth password 8 20 gt An alphanumeric string of between 8 and 20 characters that will be used to authorize the agent to receive packets for the host lt auth_key 40 40 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of exactly 40 characters in hex form to define the key that will be used to authorize the agent to receive packets for the host priv Adding the priv privacy parameter will allow for encryption in addition to the authentication algorithm for higher security The user may choose des Addin
363. for of password in plain text form and in encrypted form are different For the plain text form passwords must have a minimum of 0 character and can have a maximum of 15 characters For the encrypted form password the length is fixed to 35 bytes long The assword is case sensitive Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Usernames can be between 1 and 15 characters Passwords can be between 0 and 15 characters Example usage To configure the user password of dlink account 10 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config account dlink Command config account dlink Enter a old password Enter a case sensitive new password Enter the new password again for confirmation Success DES 3528 5 Purpose Used to display user accounts Syntax show account Description This command is used to display all user accounts created on the Switch Up to 8 user accounts can exist at one time Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the accounts that have been created DES 3528 5 show account Command show account Current Accounts Access Level Total Entries DES 3528 5 delete account Purpose Used to delete an existing user account Syntax delete account lt username gt Description This command is used to delete an existing entr
364. for the SNMP engine on the Switch Parameters lt config snmp_enginelD gt An alphanumeric string that will be used to identify the SNMP engine on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To give the SNMP agent on the Switch the name 0035636666 DES 3528 5 config snmp engineID 0035636666 Command config snmp engineID 0035636666 Success DES 3528 5 show snmp enginelD Purpose Used to display the identification of the SNMP engine on the Switch Syntax show snmp enginelD Description This command displays the identification of the SNMP engine on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the current name of the SNMP engine on the Switch DES 3528 5 show snmp engineID Command show snmp engineID SNMP Engine ID 0035636666 DES 3528 5 44 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create snmp group Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to create a new SNMP group or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views create snmp group lt groupname 32 gt v1 v2c v3 noauth_nopriv auth_nopriv auth_priv read_view lt view_name 32 gt write _view lt view_name 32 gt notify_view lt view_name 32 gt 1 This command creates a new SNMP group or a table that maps SNMP users to SNMP views lt groupname 32 gt
365. fore the C VLAN tag replace The action indicates to replace the C VLAN tag with the SP VLAN svid SP VLAN ID priority The priority of the s tag Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To create vlan translation rule which assign to add SP VALN 100 to C VLAN 1 10 on ports 1 4 and the priority is 4 DES 3528 5 create vlan_translation ports 1 4 cvid 10 add svid 100 priority 4 Command create vlan_translation ports 1 4 cvid 10 add svid 100 priority 4 Success DES 3528 5 delete vian_translation ports Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to delete pre created VLAN translation rules delete vian_translation ports lt portlist gt all cvid lt vidlist gt The command is used to delete pre created VLAN translation rules ports A range of ports which the rule will be deleted cvid Specify C VLAN range which the rules will be deleted If no specify the parameter all rules on the specified ports will be deleted Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete vlan translation rule on ports 1 4 389 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 delete vlan_translation ports 1 4 Command delete vlan_translation ports 1 4 Success DES 3528 5 show vlan_translation Purpose Used to show pre created C VLAN based SP VLAN assignment rules
366. forward traffic operated under the assigned VLAN configuration When the MAC based AC function is enabled for a port and the guest VLAN function for this port is enabled it will move from the original VLAN member port and become the member port of the guest_vian before the authentication process starts After the authentication if a valid VLAN is assigned by the RADIUS server then this port will be removed from the guest VLAN and become the member port of the assigned VLAN For guest VLAN mode if the MAC address is authorized but no VLAN information is assigned from the RADIUS Server or the VLAN assigned by RADIUS server is invalid e g the assigned VLAN is not existent this port MAC will be removed from the member port of the guest VLAN and become a member port of the original VLAN Parameters ports A range of ports enable or disable mac_based_access_control function state Specify whether MAC based AC function is enabled or disabled mode Either port_based or host_based Port_based means that all users connected to a port share the first authentication result Host_based means that each user can have its own authentication result If the Switch doesn t support MAC Based VLAN then the switch will not allow the option host_based for ports that are in guest vlan mode method Specify which authenticated method aging_time A time period during which an authenticated host will be kept in authenticated state When
367. g cpu access_profile Purpose Used to configure a CPU access profile used for CPU Interface Filtering and to define specific values that will be used to by the Switch to determine if a given packet should be forwarded or filtered Masks entered using the create cpu access_profile command will be combined using a logical and operational method with the values the Switch finds in the specified frame header fields Specific values for the rules are entered using the config cpu access_profile command below Syntax onfig cpu access_profile profile_id lt value 1 5 gt add access_id lt value 1 100 gt ethernet vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt source _mac lt macaddr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt destination_mac lt macaddr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt 802 1p lt value 0 7 gt ethernet_type lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt 1 ip vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt source_ip lt ipaddr gt destination_ip lt ipaddr gt dscp lt value 0 63 gt icmp type lt value 0 255 gt code lt value 0 255 gt igmp type lt value 0 255 gt tcp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt urg ack psh rst syn fin udp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt user_define lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 packet_content offset_0 15 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt h
368. g firmware image_id 1 boot_up Success DES 3528 show firmware information Purpose Used to display the firmware section information Syntax show firmware information Description This command is used to display the firmware section information Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the current firmware information on the Switch DES 3528 5 show firmware information Command show firmware information Version Size B Update Time 1 00 TO03 2103164 2000 01 02 01 21 21 10 90 90 11 R 1 03 B008 2317149 0 days 00 00 00 Serial Port Prom Unknown means boot up firmware R means firmware update through Serial Port RS232 T means firmware update through TELNET S means firmware update through SNMP W means firmware update through WEB SSH means firmware update through SSH SIM means firmware update through Single IP Management DES 3528 5 58 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the current or saved version of the configuration settings of the switch show config current_config config_in_nvram lt config_id 1 2 gt information This command is used to display all the configuration settings that are saved to NV RAM or display the configuration settings as they are currently configured Use the keyboard to list settings one lin
369. g mld_snooping multicast_vlan mvl add member_port 1 3 state enable Command config mld_snooping multicast_vlan mvl1 add member_port 1 3 state enable Success DES 3528 5 185 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to create an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch create mid_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt This command is used to create an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch The maximum supported number of multicast VLAN group profiles is project dependenet The profile name used for mld snooping must be unique lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the MLD multicast VLAN group profile name max length is 32 Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To create an MLD multicast VLAN group profile g1 DES 3528 5 create mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl Command create mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl Success DES 3528 5 config mlid_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch to add or delete multicast address for the profile config mid_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_nam
370. g the egress port for transmitting load sharing data This feature is only available using the address based load sharing algorithm Parameters mac_source Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC source address mac_destination Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC destination address mac_source_dest Indicates that the Switch should examine the MAC source and destination addresses ip_source Indicates that the Switch should examine the IP source address ip_destination Indicates that the Switch should examine the IP destination address jo_source_dest Indicates that the Switch should examine the IP source address and the destination address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure link aggregation algorithm for mac source dest DES 3528 5 config link_aggregation algorithm mac_source_dest Command config link_aggregation algorithm mac_source_dest Success DES 3528 5 show link_aggregation Purpose Used to display the current link aggregation configuration on the Switch Syntax show link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 8 gt algorithm Description This command will display the current link aggregation configuration of the Switch Parameters lt value 1 8 gt Specifies the group ID The Switch allows up to 8 link aggregation groups to be configured The group number identifies each of the groups algorithm
371. g this parameter will allow for a 56 bit encryption to be added using the DES 56 standard using lt priv_password 8 16 gt An alphanumeric string of between 8 and 16 characters that will be used to encrypt the contents of messages the host sends to the agent lt priv_key 32 32 gt Enter an alphanumeric key string of exactly 32 characters in hex form that will be used to encrypt the contents of messages the host sends to the agent none Adding this parameter will add no encryption Only Administrator level users can issue this command To create an SNMP user on the Switch delete snmp user Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to remove an SNMP user from an SNMP group and also to delete the associated SNMP group delete snmp user lt user_name 32 gt This command removes an SNMP user from its SNMP group and then deletes the associated SNMP group lt user_name 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that identifies the SNMP user that will be deleted Only Administrator level users can issue this command 39 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To delete a previously entered SNMP user on the Switch DES 3528 5 delete snmp user dlink Command delete snmp user dlink Success DES 3528 5 show snmp user Purpose Used to display information about each SNMP username in the SNMP group
372. gt The user may set the time interval between transmission of configuration messages by the root device thus stating that the Switch is still functioning A time between 7 and 2 seconds may be chosen with a default setting of 2 seconds ZN NOTE In MSTP the spanning tree is configured by port and therefore the hellotime must be set using the configure stp ports command for switches f utilizing the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol forwarddelay lt value 4 30 gt The maximum amount of time in seconds that the root device will wait before changing states The user may choose a time between 4 and 30 seconds The default is 15 seconds txholdcount lt value 1 10 gt The maximum number of BPDU Hello packets transmitted per interval Default value is 6 fbpdu enable disable Allows the forwarding of STP BPDU packets from other network devices when STP is disabled on the Switch The default is enable Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure STP with maxage 18 and maxhops of 15 DES 3528 5 config stp maxage 18 maxhops 15 Command config stp maxage 18 maxhops 15 Success DES 3528 5 83 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp ports Purpose Used to setup STP on the port level Syntax config stp ports lt portlist gt externalCost auto lt value 1 200000000 gt hellotime lt
373. h frame s ICMP Code field igmp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field type Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s IGMP Type field tco Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s Transmission Control Protocol TCP field src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 0xffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the source port dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the destination port flag_mask Enter the appropriate flag_mask parameter All incoming packets have TCP port numbers contained in them as the forwarding criterion These numbers have flag bits associated with them which are parts of a packet that determine what to do with the packet The user may deny packets by denying certain flag bits within the packets The user may choose between all urg urgent ack acknowledgement psh push rst reset syn synchronize and fin finish udp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s User Datagram Protocol UDP field src_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt Specifies a UDP port mask for the source port dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt Specifies a UDP port mask for the destination port protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the Switch will examine the protocol field in each packet and if this field contains the value entered here apply the following rules user_define_mask lt hex
374. h this port all Clears all dynamic entries to the Switch s forwarding database Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear all FDB dynamic entries DES 3528 5 clear fdb all Command clear fdb all Success DES 3528 5 96 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show multicast_fdb Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the contents of the Switch s multicast forwarding database show multicast_fdb vlan lt vilan_name 32 gt mac_address lt macaddr gt This command is used to display the current contents of the Switch s multicast MAC address forwarding database lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides lt macadadr gt The MAC address that is present in the forwarding database table None To display multicast MAC address table DES 3528 5 show multicast fdb vlan default Command show multicast fdb vlan default VLAN Name MAC Address Egress Ports Mode Total Entries DES 3528 5 show fdb Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage default gt 01 00 5E 00 00 00 1 5 Static Used to display the current unicast MAC address forwarding database show fdb port lt port gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ma
375. hardware queue lt class_id 0 6 gt The number of the Switch s hardware priority queue The Switch has seven hardware priority queues available They are numbered between 0 the lowest priority and 6 the highest priority Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure 802 1p user priority on the Switch DES 3528 5 config 802 1p user_priority ports 1 5 5 Command config 802 1p user_priority ports 1 5 5 Success DES 3528 5 111 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show 802 1p user_priority Purpose Used to display the current mapping between an incoming packet s 802 1p priority value and one of the Switch s eight hardware priority queues Syntax show 802 1p user_priority lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the current mapping of an incoming packet s 802 1p priority value to one of the Switch s seven hardware priority queues Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports to be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To show 802 1p user priority DES 3528 5 show 802 1p user_priority 1 2 Command show 802 1p user_priority 1 2 QOS Class of Traffic Port 1 Priority 0 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Priority 5 Priority 6 Priority 7 Port 2 Priority 0 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4 Priority 5 Priority 6 Prio
376. hcp_relay option_60 string lt mutiword 255 gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt default Description This command will display the dhcp_relay option_60 entry by the user specified Parameters ipaddress Shows the entry whose ipaddress is equal to the specified ipaddress default Shows the default behaviour of dhcp_relay option60 string Shows the entry whose string is equal to the string of a specified user Restrictions None Example usage To display the DHCP relay option 60 215 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show dhcp relay option_60 Command show dhcp_relay option_60 Default Processing Mode Drop Default Servers Matching Rules Match Type IP Address Exact Match 10 90 90 1 Total Entries DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_61 state Purpose This command is used to configure the DHCP relay option 61 state Syntax config dhcp_relay option_61 state enable disable Description This command decides whether DHCP relay will process the DHCP option 61 or not When enabled if packets do not have option 61 then the relay servers cannot be determined based on option 61 Because the priority of option 60 and option 61 is higher than per IPIF configured servers if the relay servers are determined based on option 60 or option 61 then per IPIF configured servers will be ignored If the relay servers are determined neither by option 60 nor opt
377. he Switch to a VT100 compatible terminal or a computer running an ordinary terminal emulator program e g the HyperTerminal program included with the Windows operating system using an RS 232C serial cable Your terminal parameters will need to be set to e WVT 100 compatible e 115200 baud e 8 data bits e No parity e One stop bit e No flow control Users can also access the same functions over a Telnet interface Once users have set an IP address for your Switch users can use a Telnet program in VT 100 compatible terminal mode to access and control the Switch All of the screens are identical whether accessed from the console port or from a Telnet interface After the Switch reboots and users have logged in the console looks like this DES 3528 Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 2 00 B033 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved UserName Figure 2 1 Initial Console screen after logging in Commands are entered at the command prompt DES 3528 5 There are a number of helpful features included in the CLI Entering the command will display a list of all of the top level commands xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual cable _ diag ports cfm linktrace cfm loopback clear clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding _ entry ports clear arptable clear attack_log clear cfm pkt_cnt clear counters clear dhcp binding clear dhc
378. he fake or spoofed ARP messages to an Ethernet network Generally the aim is to associate the attacker s or random MAC address with the IP address of another node such as the default gateway Any traffic meant for that IP address would be mistakenly re directed to the node specified by the attacker IP spoofing attack is caused by Gratuitous ARP that occurs when a host sends an ARP request to resolve its own IP address Figure 4 shows a hacker within a LAN to initiate ARP spoofing attack IF 10 10 10 3 BAC 00 20 5C 01 33 33 Router e TP 10 10 10 254 MAC 00 20 50 00 1 54 54 IP 160 10 10 253 IF 10 10 10 1 enne MAC 00 20 50 01 53 53 MAC 00 20 5C 01 11 11 Hacker TP 10 10 10 2 A wrong ARP entry spreads over the network to spoof all PCs MAC 00 20 5C 01 22 22 Figure 4 In the Gratuitous ARP packet the Sender protocol address and Target protocol address are filled with the same source IP address The Sender H W Address and Target H W address are filled with the same source MAC address The destination MAC address is the Ethernet broadcast address FF FF FF FF FF FF All nodes within the network will immediately update their own ARP table in accordance with the sender s MAC and IP address The format of Gratuitous ARP is shown in Table 5 515 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Ethernet Header MOSON Destination Source
379. he number of frame errors is equal to or greater than the specified threshold in a period and the event notification state is enabled it generates an error frame event to notify the remote OAM peer Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured Use all to specify all ports threshold Specifies the number of frame errors in the period that are required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated The range is from 0 to 4294967295 The default value of threshold is 1 frame error window The range is 1000 to 60000 ms The default value is 1000ms notify_state Specifies to enable or disable the event notification The default state is enable Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the error frame threshold to 2 and period to 1000 ms for port 1 DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error _ frame threshold 2 window 1000 notify state enable Command config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error _frame threshold 2 window 1000 notify state enable Success DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports link_monitor error_frame _seconds Purpose Used to configure Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frame seconds Syntax config ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all link _monitor error_frame_seconds threshold lt range 0 4294967295 gt window lt millisecond gt notify_state enable disable
380. he priority for the port interface A higher priority will designate the interface to forward packets first A lower number denotes a higher priority This value must be divisible by 16 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To designate ports 1 through 5 with instance id 2 to have an auto internalCost and a priority of 16 DES 3528 5 config stp mst_ports 1 5 instance_id 2 internalCost auto priority 16 Command config stp mst_ports 1 5 instance_id 2 internalCost auto priority 16 Success DES 3528 5 show stp Purpose Used to display the Switch s current STP configuration Syntax show stp Description This command displays the Switch s current STP configuration Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage 88 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To display the status of STP on the Switch Status 1 STP enabled with STP compatible version DES 3528 5 show stp Command show stp STP Bridge Global Settings STP Status Enabled STP Version STP Compatible Max Age 20 Hello Time D 2 Forward Delay eS Max Hops 20 TX Hold Count 3 Forwarding BPDU Enabled NNI BPDU Address dotlad DES 3528 5 Status 2 STP enabled for RSTP DES 3528 5 show stp Command show stp STP Bridge Global Settings STP Status Enabled STP Version RSTP Max Age 20 Hello Time 2 Forward
381. he safeguard engine for the Switch DES 3528 5 config safeguard_engine state enable utilization rising 45 Command config safeguard_engine state enable utilization rising 45 Success DES 3528 5 show safeguard_engine Purpose Used to display current Safeguard Engine settings Syntax show safeguard_engine Description This will list the current status and type of the Safeguard Engine settings currently configured Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the safeguard engine status DES 3528 5 show safeguard_engine Command show safeguard_engine Safeguard Engine State Disabled Safeguard Engine Current Status Normal Mode CPU Utilization Information Rising Threshold 30 Falling Threshold 20 Enabled Strict 265 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual FILTER COMMANDS DHCP SERVER NETBIOS DHCP Server Screening Settings This function allows you not only to restrict all DHCP Server packets but also to receive any specified DHCP server packets by any specified DHCP client It is useful when one or more than one DHCP servers are present on the network and both provide DHCP services to different distinct groups of clients It requires the support of ACL to enable the DHCP server filter function and it will create a deny rule with low priority to block the packets from the untrusted DHCP server Similarly the addition of a permitted DHCP ent
382. he user wishes to delete The user may choose one of the following tacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol xtacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol tacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol radius Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a user defined TACACS authentication server host DES 3528 5 delete authen server_host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs Command delete authen server_host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs Success DES 3528 5 show authen server_host Purpose Used to view a user defined authentication server host Syntax show authen server_host Description This command is used to view user defined authentication server hosts previously created on the Switch The following parameters are displayed IP Address The IP address of the authentication server host Protocol The protocol used by the server host Possible results will include TACACS XTACACS TACACS or RADIUS Port The virtual port number on the server host The default value is 49 Timeout The time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request Retransmit The value in the retransmit field denotes how many times the device will resend an
383. he xtacacs list the jocal_enable password set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user Successful authentication using any of these methods will give the user an Admin level privilege default The default method list for administration rights authentication as defined by the user The user may choose one or a combination of up to four 4 of the following authentication methods tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from the remote TACACS server hosts of the TACACS server group list xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from the remote XTACACS server hosts of the XTACACS server group list tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the 314 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config authen_enable Restrictions Example usage TACACS protocol from the remote TACACS server hosts of the TACACS server group list radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from the remote RADIUS server hosts of the RADIUS server group list server_group lt string 15 gt Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch local_enable Adding this parameter will requi
384. his parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the 310 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config authen_login TACACS protocol from the remote TACACS server hosts of the TACACS server group list xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from the remote XTACACS server hosts of the XTACACS server group list tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from the remote TACACS server hosts of the TACACS server group list radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from the remote RADIUS server hosts of the RADIUS server group list server_group lt string 15 gt Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch local Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch method_list_name Enter a previously implemented method list name defined by the user The user may add one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication methods to this method list tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS p
385. hold to 2 and period to 10000 ms for port 1 DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error _frame_seconds threshold 2 window 10000 notify state enable Command config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error _frame_seconds threshold 2 window 10000 notify state enable Success DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports link _monitor error_frame_period Purpose Used to configure the Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frame period Syntax config ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all link_monitor error_frame_period threshold lt range 0 4294967295 gt window lt millisecond gt notify_state enable disable 1 Description This command is used to configure ports Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frame period The link monitoring function provides a mechanism to detect and indicate link faults under a variety of conditions OAM monitors the statistics on the number of frame errors as well as the number of coding symbol errors When the number of error frames are equal to or greater than the specified threshold in a period and the event notification state is enabled it generates an error frame period event to notify the remote OAM Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured Use all to specify all ports threshold Specifies the number of error frame seconds in the period that are required to be equal to or greater than in order for the event to be generated The range is from 0 to 42949
386. ial port properly connected to a management computer the following screen should be visible If this screen does not appear try pressing Ctrl r to refresh the console screen DES 3528 Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 2 00 B033 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved UserName Figure 1 1 Initial CLI screen There is no initial username or password Just press the Enter key twice to display the CLI input cursor DES 3528 5 This is the command line where all commands are input xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Setting the Switch s IP Address Each Switch must be assigned its own IP Address which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP IP application for example BOOTP TFTP The Switch s default IP address is 10 90 90 90 Users can change the default Switch IP address to meet the specification of your networking address scheme The Switch is also assigned a unique MAC address by the factory This MAC address cannot be changed and can be found on the initial boot console screen shown below Boot Procedure v1 00 B007 Power On Self Test 2642556 sce eee he ORE eh eee LEO OE WES 100 MAC Address 00 21 91 AF EA 00 H W Version A2 Please wait loading V2 00 B033 Runtime image 100 UART INIG Sosoroh ardana eke Se See SS es Sek Se ee a et 100 Device Discovery 65k se 6 OWES GREE
387. ic or dynamic MAC based VLAN entry DES 3528 5 show mac based vlan Command show mac_based vlan MAC Address 00 80 e0 14 a7 57 Active Static 00 80 c2 33 c3 45 Inactive Static 00 80 c2 33 c3 45 Active Mac based Access Control 00 80 c2 33 c3 90 Active 802 1x 00 a2 44 17 32 98 Active JWAC Total Entries DES 3528 5 396 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual SIMPLE RED COMMANDS The Simple RED commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters enable sred fs disable sred fs config sred lt portlist gt all lt class_id 0 7 gt all threshold low lt value 0 100 gt high lt value 0 100 gt 1 drop_rate low lt value 1 8 gt high lt value 1 8 gt 1 drop green enable disable 1 contig dscp map lt portlist gt all dscp_ priority lt dscp _list gt to lt priority 0 7 gt dscp_dscp lt dscp _list gt to lt dscp 0 63 gt dscp_color lt dscp_list gt to green red yellow show dscp map lt portlist gt dscp_priotity dscp_dscp dscp_color dscp lt dscp_list gt config 802 1p map lt portlist gt all 1p color lt priority_list to green red yellow show 802 1p map lt portlist gt 1p_color Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable sred Purpose Used to enable the simple RED function Syntax e
388. ich it will encode and send back to the administrator 340 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual When a CS becomes a MS it automatically becomes a member of the first SNMP community include read write and read only to which the CS belongs However if a MS has its own IP address it can belong to SNMP communities to which other switches in the group including the CS do not belong The Upgrade to v1 6 To better improve SIM management the xStack DES 3528 switch has been upgraded to version 1 6 in this release Many improvements have been made including The Commander Switch CS now has the capability to automatically rediscover member switches that have left the SIM group either through a reboot or web malfunction This feature is accomplished through the use of Discover packets and Maintain packets that previously set SIM members will emit after a reboot Once a MS has had its MAC address and password saved to the CS s database if a reboot occurs in the MS the CS will keep this MS information in its database and when a MS has been rediscovered it will add the MS back into the SIM tree automatically No configuration will be necessary to rediscover these switches There are some instances where pre saved MS switches cannot be rediscovered For example if the Switch is still powered down if it has become the member of another group or if it has been configured to be a Commander Switch the
389. ictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure JWAC quarantine server URL DES 3528 5 config jwac quarantine _server_url http 10 90 90 88 authpage html Command config jwac quarantine _server_url http 10 90 90 88 authpage html Success DES 3528 5 NOTE If the quarantine server is linked to the JWAC enabled port on the switch it must be added to the static FDB correctly before it can work properly config jwac clear_quarantine_server_url Purpose Used to clear Quarantine Server configuration Syntax config jwac clear_quarantine_server_url Description This command will clear Quarantine Server configuration Parameters None Restrictions When JWAC is enabled and the redirect destination is the Quarantine Server the Quarantine Server cannot be cleared Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure JWAC clear quarantine server URL DES 3528 5 config jwac clear_quarantine_server_url Command config jwac clear_quarantine_server_url Success DES 3528 5 358 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config jwac update_server Purpose Used to configure the servers that PC may need to connect to in order to complete the JWAC authentication Syntax config jwac update_server add delete ipaddress lt network_address gt Description This command al
390. ictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To start remote loop back on port 1 DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports 1 remote_loopback stop Command config ethernet_oam ports 1 remote_loopback stop Success DES 3528 5 465 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config ethernet_oam ports received _remote_loopback Purpose Used to configure the method to process the received Ethernet OAM remote loop back command Syntax config ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all received_remote_loopback process ignore Description This command is used to configure the client to process or to ignore the received Ethernet OAM remote loop back command In remote loop back mode all user traffic will not be processed Ignoring received remote loop back command will prevent the port from entering remote loop back mode Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured Use all to specify all ports received_remote_loopback Specifies whether to process or to ignore the received Ethernet OAM remote loop back command The default method is ignore Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the method of processing the received remote loop back command as process on port 1 DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports 1 received_remote_loopback p
391. if the existing lower level has an MEP configured on that port and that port is not configured with an MEP of this MD sender_id Specifies and control the information to be advertised none Specifies that there is no information to be advertised This is the default value chassis Advertises the Chassis ID information manage Advertises the Management Address information chassis_manage Advertises both Management Address and Chassis ID information Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure cfm on a maintenance domain 489 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config cfm md op domain mip explicit Command config cfm md op_domain mip explicit Success DES 3528 create cfm ma Purpose Used to create a maintenance association Syntax create cfm ma lt string 22 gt md lt string 22 gt Description Different MAs in a MD must have different MA Names Different MAs in different MDs may have the same MA Name Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a cfm maintenance association DES 3528 5 create cfm ma opl md op_domain Command create cfm ma opl md op_domain Success DES 3528 5 config cfm
392. ification will be generated and sent when a packet storm has been detected and cleared by the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure notifications to be sent when a packet storm control has been detected and cleared by the Switch 102 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config traffic trap both Command config traffic trap both Success DES 3528 5 103 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual QoS COMMANDS The Switch supports 802 1p priority queuing The Switch has 8 priority queues These priority queues are numbered from 6 Class 6 the highest priority queue to 0 Class 0 the lowest priority queue The eight priority tags specified in IEEE 802 1p p0 to p7 are mapped to the Switch s priority queues as follows e Priority 0 is assigned to the Switch s Q2 queue e Priority 1 is assigned to the Switch s QO queue e Priority 2 is assigned to the Switch s Q1 queue e Priority 3 is assigned to the Switch s Q3 queue e Priority 4 is assigned to the Switch s Q4 queue e Priority 5 is assigned to the Switch s Q5 queue e Priority 6 is assigned to the Switch s Q6 queue e Priority 7 is assigned to the Switch s Q6 queue e Q7 is reserved for stacking function Priority scheduling is implemented by the priority q
393. igurations of some ports portlist Specifies a range of ports to be displayed None To display the 802 1X states 226 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show 802 1x auth_state ports 1 3 Command show 802 1x auth_state ports 1 3 Port MAC Address Assigned Priority 00 00 00 00 00 O1 Authenticated 4004 00 00 00 00 00 02 Authenticated 1234 00 00 00 00 00 04 Authenticating P Authenticated 1234 P Authenticating Total Authenticating Hosts Total Authenticated Hosts DES 3528 5 To display the 802 1X system level configurations DES 3528 5 show 802 1x Command show 802 1x 802 1X Enabled Authentication Mode Port _based Authentication Protocol Radius _EAP Authentication Failover Disabled Forward EAPOL PDU Enabled Max Users 448 RADIUS Authorization Disabled DES 3528 5 To display the 802 1X configurations 22 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show 802 1x auth_configuration ports 1 Command show 802 1x auth_configuration ports 1 AdminCr1lDir OpenCr1Dir Port Control QuietPeriod 60 sec TxPeriod 30 sec SuppTimeout 30 sec ServerTimeout 30 sec MaxReq 2 times ReAuthPeriod 3600 sec ReAuthenticate Enabled Forward EAPOL PDU On Port Disabled Max Users On Port 16 ei Quit hi Next Page i Previous Page f Ref
394. igured in the config access_ profile command for IPv6 e class Entering this parameter will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the 246 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create access profile Restrictions Example usage IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service TOS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 flowlabel Entering this parameter will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non default quality of service or real time service packets tco Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s Transmission Control Protocol TCP field src_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the source port dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the destination port udp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s User Datagram Protocol UDP field src_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the source port dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the destination port source_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the source IPv6 address destination _ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the destination IPv6 address
395. ill be placed in shutdown forever mode and can only be manually recovered using the config ports command mentioned previously in this manual Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure traffic control and enable broadcast storm control for ports 1 12 DES 3528 5 config traffic control 1 12 broadcast enable action shutdown threshold 1 countdown 10 time_interval 10 Command config traffic control 1 12 broadcast enable action shutdown threshold 1 countdown 10 time_interval 10 Success DES 3528 5 show traffic control Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display current traffic control settings show traffic control lt portlist gt This command displays the current storm traffic control configuration on the Switch lt portlist gt Used to specify port or list of ports for which to display traffic control settings The beginning and end of the port list range are separated by a dash None To display traffic control settings 101 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show traffic control Command Traffic Storm Control Trap Port Thres 16 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 131072 Broadcast Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Di
396. in server group and when a user tries to gain access to the Switch the Switch will ask the first server host for authentication If no authentication is made the second server host in the list will be queried and so on The built in server group can only have hosts that are running the specified protocol For example the TACACS server group can only have TACACS server hosts The administrator for the Switch may set up five different authentication techniques per user defined method list TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS local none for authentication These techniques will be listed in an order preferable and defined by the user for normal user authentication on the Switch and may contain up to eight authentication techniques When a user attempts to access the Switch the Switch will select the first technique listed for authentication If the first technique goes through its server hosts and no authentication is returned the Switch will then go to the next technique listed in the server group for authentication until the authentication has been verified or denied or the list is exhausted Please note that user granted access to the Switch will be granted normal user privileges on the Switch To gain access to admin level privileges the user must enter the enable admin command which is only available for logining in the Switch from the three versions of the TACACS server and then enter a password which was previously configured by the admi
397. in the following table Command Parameters config policy route name lt policyroute_name 32 gt acl profile_id lt value 1 14 gt access_id lt value 1 128 gt nexthop lt ipaddr gt state enable disable delete policy_route name lt policyroute_name 32 gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create policy _route name Purpose Used to add policy route rule Syntax create policy_route name lt policyroute_name 32 gt Description This command allows you to create policy route and define this rule name e The ACL rule that is linked to the policy route command could not be deleted via ACL command Parameters lt policyroute_name 32 gt Specifies the name of police rule Max length is 32 character Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a policy route DES 3528 5 create policy route name engineer Command create policy route name engineer Success DES 3528 5 454 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config policy _route Purpose Used to config policy route rule Syntax config policy _route name lt policyroute_name 32 gt acl profile_id lt value 1 14 gt access_id lt value 1 128 gt nexthop lt ipaddr gt state enable disable Description This command allows you to config the different fields for a policy route entry You can set the state of a policy route
398. ing multicast_vlan_group lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command is used to display the multicast group profiles configured for the specified MLD multicast VLAN Parameters vlan_name The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters If not specified all IPv6 multicast VLAN groups will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the multicast group profiles configured for an MLD multicast VLAN 188 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group VLAN ID Multicast Group Profiles delete mid_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to delete an MLD muticast VLAN delete mid_snooping multicat_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt This command allows you to delete an MLD multicast VLAN vlan_name The name of the multicast VLAN to be deleted Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete an MLD multicast VLAN DES 3528 5 delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan mv1 Command delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan mv1 Success DES 3528 5 enable mid_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to enable the MLD Multicast VLAN function enable mid_sn
399. ing_time infinite lt min 1 1440 gt block_time infinite lt sec 1 300 gt max_users lt value 1 1000 gt no_limit 1 create mac_based_access_control guest_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt guest_vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt delete mac_based_access_ control guest_vlan lt vilan_name 32 gt guest_vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt clear mac_based_access_control ports all portlist mac_addr lt macaddr gt auth_ state a mac_based_access_control_local lt macaddr gt vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt A mac_based_access_control_local lt macaddr gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt clear_vlan delete mac_based_access_control_local delete mac_based_access_control_local based_access_control_local mac lt macaddr gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt show mac_based_access_control ports lt portlist gt show mac_based_access_control_local mac lt macaddr gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vianid 1 4094 gt show mac_based_access_control ports lt portlist gt auth_ state config mac_based_access_conitrol enable disable auth failover config mac_based_access_ control radius enable disable local enable disable 1 authorization network config mac_based_access_control lt value 1 1000 gt no_limit max_users Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 419 xStack DES 352
400. ion Description The user account configuration information will be stored in the configuration file and can be applied to the system later If the password encryption is enabled the password will be in encrypted form When password encryption is disabled if the user specifies the password in plain text form the password will be in plan text form However if the user specifies the password in encrypted form or if the password has been converted to encrypted form by the last enable password encryption command the password will still be in the encrypted form It cannot be reverted to the plaintext Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable password encryption DES 3528 5 disable password encryption Command disable password encryption Success DES 3528 5 12 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show session Purpose Used to display a list of currently logged in users Syntax show session Description This command displays a list of all the users that are logged in at the time the command is issued Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the way that the users logged in DES 3528 5 show session Command show session 00 00 16 250 Serial Port Anonymous Total Entries 1 q Quit n Next Page p Previous Page Refresh Purpose Used to display general informat
401. ion 61 then per IPIF configured servers will be used to determine the relay servers Parameters enable Enables the fuction dhcp_relay use option_61 ruler to relay dhcp packet disable Disables the fuction dhcp_relay use option_61 ruler to relay dhcp packet Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the state of DHCP relay option 61 DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_61 state enable Command config dhcp_relay option_61 state enable Success DES 3528 5 216 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config dhcp_relay option_61 add Purpose This command is used to add a rule for dhcp_relay option_61 Syntax config dhcp_relay option_61 add mac_address lt macaddr gt string lt desc_long 255 gt relay lt ipaddr gt drop Description This command adds a rule to determine the relay server based on option 61 The matched rule can be based on either the MAC address or a user specified string Only one relay server can be specified for a MAC address or a string Both option 60 and option 61 can assign particular DHCP relay sever so they can altogether determine which relay server will be selected Parameters mac_address The client s client ID which is the hardware address of client string The clients client ID which is specified by administrator relay Specify to relay the packet to a IP
402. ion about the Switch Syntax show switch Description This command displays information about the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the Switch s information 13 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show switch Command Device Type MAC Address IP Address VLAN Name Subnet Mask Default Gateway Boot PROM Version Firmware Version Hardware Version Serial Number System Name System Location System Contact Spanning Tree GVRP IGMP Snooping MLD Snooping VLAN Trunk TELNET WEB SNMP SSL status show switch DES 3528 Fast Ethernet Switch 00 21 91 53 3E C8 10 24 73 21 Manual default 255 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Build 1 00 B007 Build 2 00 B031 A2 P1UQ28B000010 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled TCP 23 Enabled TCP 80 Disabled Disabled F ouit M Next Page YG Next Entry M all show device status Purpose Used to display the current Switch power status Syntax show device_status Description This command displays status of both the Switch s internal and external power Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the Switch s power status DES 3528 5 show device status Command show device status Internal Power External Power Side Fan Back Fan Active ei Quit h Next Page i Previous Page f Refresh 14
403. ion methods for user login Parameters default Entering this parameter will display the default method list for users logging on to the Switch method_list_name lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the given method list to view all Entering this parameter will display all the authentication login methods currently configured on the Switch The window will display the following parameters Method List Name The name of a previously configured method list name Priority Defines which order the method list protocols will be queried for authentication when a user attempts to log on to the Switch Priority ranges from 1 highest to 4 lowest Method Name Defines which security protocols are implemented per method list name Comment Defines the type of Method User defined Group refers to server group defined by the user Built in Group refers to the TACACS XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS security protocols which are permanently set in the Switch Keyword refers to authentication using a technique INSTEAD of TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS which are local authentication through the user account on the Switch and none no authentication necessary to access any function on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To view the authentication login method list named Trinity DES 3528 5 show authen_login method_list_
404. ion recovery_timer Purpose Used to configure the BPDU Attack Protection recovery timer Syntax config bpdu_ protection recovery_timer lt sec 60 1000000 gt infinite Description When a port enters under_attack state it can be disabled or blocked based on the configuration The state can be recovered manually or by the auto recovery mechanism This command is used to configure the auto recovery timer To manually recover the port the user needs to disable the port first and then enable the port Parameters recover_timer Specifies the recover_timer The default value of recovery timer is 60 infinite The port will not be auto recovered lt sec 60 1000000 gt The timer in seconds used by the auto recovery mechanism to recover the port The valid range is 60 to 1000000 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the BPDU Attack Protection recovery timer to 120 seconds for the entire switch DES 3528 5 config bpdu_protection recovery timer 120 Command config bpdu protection recovery _timer 120 config bpdu_protection Purpose Used to configure the trap or log state of BPDU Attack Protection Syntax config bpdu_protection trap log none attack_detected attack_cleared both Description This command is used to configure trap or log state for BPDU Attack Protection function Parameters trap Specifies the trap state The default
405. ion to non volatile RAM Syntax save config lt config_id 1 2 gt log all Description This command is used to enter the current switch configuration into non volatile RAM The saved switch configuration will be loaded into the Switch s memory each time the Switch is restarted Parameters config lt config_id 1 2 gt Specify to save current settings to configuration file 1 or 2 log Specify to save current Switch log to NV RAM all Specify to save all configuration settings If nothing is specified after save the Switch will save all Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To save the Switch s current configuration to non volatile RAM DES 3528 5 save Command save Saving all configurations to NV RAM DES 3528 5 reboot Purpose Used to restart the Switch Syntax Reboot force_agree Description This command is used to restart the Switch Parameters force_agree When force_agree is specified the reboot command will be executed immediatedly without further confirmation Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To restart the Switch DES 3528 5 reboot Command reboot Are you sure you want to proceed with the system reboot y n y Please wait the switch is rebooting 19 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose
406. iously created server group to be viewed Entering this command without the lt string gt parameter will display all authentication server groups on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To view authentication server groups currently set on the Switch 324 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show authen server_group Command show authen server_group Server Group mix_l Group Name IP Address Protocol TACACS TACACS radius pag Ee Ea RADIUS tacacs E R hs TACACS tacacs roe hae Ie TACACS xtacacs Sa Geet Eee XTACACS Total Entries DES 3528 5 config authen parameter response_timeout Purpose Used to configure the amount of time the Switch will wait for a user to enter authentication before timing out Syntax config authen parameter response_timeout lt int 0 255 gt Description This command will set the time the Switch will wait for a response of authentication from the user Parameters response_timeout lt int 0 255 gt Set the time in seconds the Switch will wait for a response of authentication from the user attempting to log in from the command line interface or telnet interface Zero means there won t be a time out The default value is 0 seconds Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the response timeout for 60 seconds
407. iption This command is used to delete subnet based VLAN entry Parameters network Specifies an lpv4 network address The format is ipaddress prefix length vlan The VLAN to be associated with the subnet You can specify a VLAN name or VLAN ID The VLAN must be existed static VLAN vianid Specifies a list of VLAN ID all Specifes to delete all subnet based VLAN entries Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a subnet based VLAN entry DES 3528 5 delete subnet vlan network 172 168 1 1 24 Command delete subnet vlan network 172 168 1 1 24 Success DES 3528 5 show subnet_vian Purpose Use to display subnet based VLAN information Syntax show subnet_vlian network lt network_address gt vlan lt vilan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt Description This command is used to display subnet based VLAN information If no parameter specifed the command will display all subnet based VLAN entries Parameters network Specifies an lpv4 network address The format is ipaddress prefix length vlan The VLAN to be associated with the subnet You can specify a VLAN name or VLAN ID The VLAN must be existed static VLAN vlanid Specifies a list of VLAN ID Restrictions None Example usage To display the subnet based VLAN DES 3528 5 show subnet vlan Command show subnet vlan IP Address Subnet mask Priority 172 168 1 0 255 255
408. iption This command will display the authentication parameters currently configured on the Switch including the response timeout and user authentication attempts This command will display the following fields Response timeout The configured time allotted for the Switch to wait for a response of authentication from the user attempting to log in from the command line interface or telnet interface User attempts The maximum number of attempts the user may try to become authenticated by the Switch before being locked out Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view the authentication parameters currently set on the Switch DES 3528 5 show authen parameter Command show authen parameter Response Timeout 30 seconds User Attempts vs DES 3528 5 enable admin Purpose Used to promote user level privileges to administrator level privileges Syntax enable admin Description This command is for users who have logged on to the Switch with the normal user privilege and can be switched to the admin privilege After logging on to the Switch users will have only user level privileges To gain access to administrator level privileges the user will enter this command and will have to enter an authentication password Possible authentication methods for this function include TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS user defined server groups local enable local account on the Switch or no authentication none Because
409. is to be configured query_interval Specifies the amount of time in seconds between general query transmissions The default setting is 125 seconds max_reponse_time The maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners The default setting is 10 seconds robustness_variable Provides fine tuning to allow for expected packet loss on a subnet The value of the robustness variable is used in calculating the following MLD message intervals group listener interval Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides there are no more listeners of a group on a network This interval is calculated as follows robustness variable query interval 1 query response interval other querier present interval Amount of time that must pass before a multicast router decides that there is no longer another multicast router that is the querier This interval is calculated as follows robustness variable query interval 0 5 query response interval last listener query count Number of group specific queries sent before the router assumes there are no local listeners of a group The default number is the value of the robustness variable By default the robustness variable is set to 2 You might want to increase this value if you expect a subnet to be lossy last_listener_query_interval The maximum amount of time between group specific query messages including those sent in response to done grou
410. is used to view the currently configured greeting message on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view the currently configured greeting message DES 3528 5 show greeting_message Command show greeting_message DES 3528 Fast Ethernet Switch Command Line Interface Firmware Build 2 00 B031 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved DES 3528 5 24 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual SWITCH PORT COMMANDS The switch port commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config ports lt portlist gt all medium_typef fiber copper speed auto 10_half 10 full 100_half 100_full 1000_full master slave flow_control enable disable learning enable disable state enable disable description lt desc 1 32 gt clear_description mdix auto normal cross 1 ce e owore SSS Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config ports Purpose Used to configure the Switch s port settings Syntax config ports lt portlist gt all medium_type fiber copper speed auto 10_half 10_full 100 half 100 full 1000 full master slave flow_control enable disable learning enable disable state enable disable description lt desc 1 325
411. isable IMPB debugging on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To close the debug DES 3528 5 no debug address_binding Command no debug address_binding Success DES 3528 5 160 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable address_binding dhcp_snoop Purpose Used to enable the DHCP snooping option for IMPB Syntax enable address_binding dhcp_snoop Description If DHCP snooping is enabled the Switch learns IP MAC pairs by snooping DHCP packets automatically and then saves them to the IP MAC Port Binding white list This enables a hassle free configuration because the administrator does not need to manually enter each IMPB entry A prerequisite for this is that the valid DHCP server s IP MAC pair must be configured on the Switch s IMPB while list first otherwise the DHCP server packets will be dropped DHCP snooping is generally considered to be more secure because it enforces all clients to acquire IP through the DHCP server Additionally it makes IP Information auditable because clients cannot manually configure their own IP address Each DHCP snooped entry is associated with a lease time When the lease time expires the expired entry will be removed from this port The auto learned binding entry can be moved from one port to another port if the DHCP snooping function has learned that the MAC add
412. isable the SNMP interface access function Syntax disable snmp Description This command is used to disable the SNMP function When the SNMP function is disabled the network manager will not be able to access SNMP MIB objects The device will not send traps or notifications to the network manager either Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable SNMP on the Switch DES 3528 5 disable snmp Command disable snmp Success DES 3528 5 55 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual SWITCH UTILITY COMMANDS The switch utility commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters download firmware_fromTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename 64 gt image_id lt int 1 2 gt unit all lt unitid 1 8 gt cfg_fromTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename 64 gt lt config_id 1 2 gt increment unit lt unit_id 1 8 gt image_id lt int 1 2 gt delete boot_up current_config config_in_nvram lt config_id 1 2 gt information upload cfg_toTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename 64 gt lt config_id 1 2 gt log_toTFIP lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename 64 gt attack_log tolTFITP lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename 64 gt unit lt unit_id 1 8 gt enable autoconfig OO show autocontig OO config c
413. ist gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured state enable disable Allows users to enable or disable IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN fast_leave enable disable Allows users to enable or disable IGMP snooping fast leave for the specified VLAN report_suppression enable disable Allows users to enable or disable IGMP snooping report suppression for the specified VLAN Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure IGMP snooping DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping vlan default state enable fast_leave enable report_suppression disable Command config igmp_snooping vlan default state enable fast_leave enable report_suppression disable Success DES 3528 5 193 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config igmp_snooping querier Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure the the time in seconds between general query transmissions the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from members and the permitted packet loss that guarantees IGMP snooping config igmp_snooping querier vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all query_interval lt sec 1 65535 gt max_response_time lt sec 1 25 gt robustness_variable lt value 1 255 gt last_member_query_interval lt sec 1 25 gt state en
414. ist name Permit Success DES 3528 5 config authen_enable Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to configure a user defined method list of authentication methods for promoting normal user level privileges to Administrator level privileges on the Switch config authen_enable default method_list_name lt string 15 gt method tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius server_group lt string 15 gt local_enable none 1 This command is used to promote users with normal level privileges to Administrator level privileges using authentication methods on the Switch Once a user acquires normal user level privileges on the Switch he or she must be authenticated by a method on the Switch to gain administrator privileges on the Switch which is defined by the Administrator A maximum of eight enable method lists can be implemented simultaneously on the Switch The sequence of methods implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of methods like tacacs xtacacs local_enable the Switch will send an authentication request to the first TACACS host in the server group If no verification is found the Switch will send an authentication request to the second TACACS host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed xtacacs If no authentication takes place using t
415. itch performs ARP Packet Inspection in which it checks the IP MAC pairs in ARP packets with the IMPB white list and denies unauthorized ones An advantage of ARP mode is that it does not consume any ACL rules on the Switch Nonetheless since the switch only checks ARP packets it cannot block unauthorized clients who do not send out ARP packets In ACL Mode a switch performs IP Packet Inspection in addition to ARP Packet Inspection ACL rules will be used to permit statically configured IMPB entries and deny other IP packets with the incorrect IP MAC pairs The distinct advantage of ACL Mode is that it ensures better security by checking both ARP Packets and IP Packets However doing so requires the use of ACL rules ACL Mode can be viewed as an enhanced version of ARP Mode because ARP Mode is enabled by default when ACL Mode is selected There are also two port states Strict and Loose and only one state can be selected per port If a port is set to Strict state all packets sent to the port are denied dropped by default The Switch will continuously compare all IP and ARP packets it receives on that port with its IMPB entries If the IP MAC pair in the packet matches the IMPB entry the MAC address will be unblocked and subsequent packets sent from this client will be forwarded On the other hand if a port is set to Loose state all packets entering the port are permitted forwarded by default The Switch will continuously compare all ARP 1
416. itous ARP interval time in seconds 0 means not to send gratuitous ARP periodically Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure gratuitous ARP interval to 5 for IPIF System DES 3528 5 config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif System interval 5 Command config gratuitous_arp send periodically ipif System interval 5 Success DES 3528 5 show gratuitous arp Purpose Used to display gratuitous ARP configuration Syntax show gratuitous_arp ipif lt ipif_name gt Description This command is used to display gratuitous ARP configuration Parameters lt ipif name 12 gt The interface name of the Layer 3 device Restrictions None 300 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display gratuitous ARP log and trap state DES 3528 5 show gratuitous_arp Command show gratuitous_arp Send on IPIF Status Up Disabled Send on Duplicate_IP_ Detected Disabled Gratuitous ARP Learning Disabled IP Interface Name System Gratuitous ARP Trap Disabled Gratuitous ARP Log Disabled Gratuitous ARP Periodical Send Interval 0 Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 301 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual ROUTING TABLE COMMANDS The routing table commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate param
417. its lt unitlist gt all power_limit lt value 37 370 gt power_disconnect_method deny_next_port deny_low_priority_port 1 Description This command is used to configure the parameters for the whole PoE system Parameters units Specifies the units that will be configured If no specified units all supported PoE units in the system will be configured power_limit Configure the power budget for the PoE system The range which can be specified is determined by the system Normally the minimum setting is 37 W and the maximum setting is 370 W The actual range will depend on power supply capabilities power_disconnect_method Configure the disconnection method that will be used when the power budget is running out When the system attempts to supply power to a new port if the power budget is insufficient to do this the PoE controller will initiate a port disconnection procedure to prevent overloading the power supply The controller uses one of the following two ways to perform the disconnection procedure deny_next_port the port with the highest port number will be denied regardless of its priority Note that if the disconnect_method is set to deny_next_port then the power provision will not utilize the system s maximum power There is a 19W safe margin That is when the system has only 19W remaining this power cannot be utilized deny_low_priority_port lf there are ports that have been supplied power but have a pri
418. l ETHERNET OAM COMMANDS The Ethernet OAM commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all mode active passive state enable disable link_monitor error_symbol threshold lt range 0 4294967295 gt window lt millisecond gt notify_state enable disable 1 error_frame threshold lt range 0 4294967295 gt window lt millisecond gt notify_state enable disable 1 error_frame_seconds threshold lt range 0 4294967295 gt window lt millisecond gt notify_state enable disable 1 error_frame_period threshold lt range 0 4294967295 gt window lt number gt notify_state enable disable 1 critical_link_event dying_gasp critical_ event notify_ state enable disable remote_loopback start stop received_remote_loopback process ignore show ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt status configuration statistics event_log index lt value_list gt clear ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all event_log statistics Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config ethernet_oam ports mode Purpose Used to configure Ethernet OAM mode Syntax config ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all mode active passive Description This command is used to configure ports Ethernet OAM to operate i
419. lanid_list gt enable disable config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all dot1_tlv_vlan_name vlan all lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vlanid_list gt enable disable config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all dot1_tlv_ protocol _identity all eapol lacp gvrp stp 1 enable disable config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all dot3_tlvs all mac_phy_configuration_status link aggregation power_via_mdi maximum_frame_size 1 enable disable wise S SSS lt portlist gt mode brief normal detailed sowas OOOO Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 371 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable lidp Purpose Used to enable LLDP operation on the Switch Syntax enable lidp Description This is a global control for the LLDP function When this function is enabled the switch can start to transmit LLDP packets and receive and process the LLDP packets The specific function of each port will depend on the per port LLDP setting For the advertisement of LLDP packets the switch announces the information to its neighbor through ports For the receiving of LLDP packets the switch will learn the information from the LLDP packets advertised from the neighbor in the neighbor table The default state for LLDP is disabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command
420. lay all PoE system settings DES 3528P 5 show poe system Command show poe system PoE System Information Power Limit 250 Watts Power Consumption O Watts Power Remained 250 Watts Power Disconnection Method Deny Low Priority Port If Power Disconnection Method is set to deny next port then the system can not utilize out of its maximum power capacity The maximum unused watt is 19W CTRL C ESC q Quit SPACE n Next Page p Previous Page r Refresh 448 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show poe ports Purpose Used to display the settings and actual values of the PoE ports Syntax show poe ports lt portlist gt Description This command displays the settings and actual values of the PoE ports Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a list of ports to be displayed If no parameter is specified the system will display the status for all ports Restrictions None Example usage To display all PoE ports DES 3528P 5 show poe ports 1 6 Command show poe ports 1 6 State Priority Power Limit mW Time_Range Class Power mW Voltage decivolt Current mA Status Enabled Critical 4000 Class 1 0 0 0 OFF Interim state during line detection Enabled Critical 4000 Class 1 0 0 0 0 OFF Interim state during line detection Enabled Critical 4000 Class 1 0 0 0 0 OFF Interim state during line detection Enabled Critical 4000 Class 1 0 0
421. lay the current configuration of a range of ports Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be displayed description Adding this parameter to the show ports command indicates that a previously entered port description will be included in the display err_disabled Use this to list disabled ports including connection status and reason for being disabled details Use this to show the detail information of ports Restrictions None Example usage To display the configuration of all ports on a switch 26 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show ports Command show ports State Enabled Auto Enabled Auto Enabled Auto Enabled Auto Enabled Auto Enabled Auto Enabled Auto Enabled Auto Enabled Auto Settings Speed Duplex FlowCtrl Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Connection Speed Duplex FlowCtrl ei Quit h Next Page i Previous Page Refresh Example usage To display the configuration of all ports on a standalone switch with description DES 3528 5 show ports description Command State Enabled Auto show ports description Settings Speed Duplex FlowCtrl Auto Disabled Description Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Description Enabled Auto Auto Disabled Description
422. ld is used by a source to xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config access_profile e tcp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s Transmission Control Protocol TCP field e src_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the source port e dst port mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the destination port e udp Specifies that the Switch will examine each frame s User Datagram Protocol UDP field e src_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the source port e dst port mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt Specifies a TCP port mask for the destination port e source_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the source IPv6 address destination_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the destination IPv6 address port lt portlist gt Specifies the port number on the Switch to permit deny or mirror access for the rule permit Specifies the rule permit access for incoming packets on the previously specified port priority lt value 0 7 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to packets that contain this value in their 802 1p priority field of their header for incoming packets on the previously specified port replace_priority Allows users to specify a new value to be written to the priority field of an incoming pa
423. le version lt value 1 2 gt 1 config mld_snooping vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete lt portlist gt mrouter_ports config mld_snooping vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete lt portlist gt mrouter_ports_ forbidden enable mid_snooping O O disablemid_snooping S show mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt show mld_snooping group vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt lt ipv addr gt data_driven show mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all static dynamic forbidden mrouter_ ports config mld_snooping ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt value 1 1000 gt no_limit rate_limit show mlid_ snooping ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt rate_limit show mid_ snooping vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vianid lt vidlist gt forwarding create mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vidlist gt lt ipv6addr gt static_group config mld_ snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipv6addr gt add delete lt portlist gt static_group delete mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vidlist gt lt ipv6addr gt Static_group show mld_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipv6addr gt static_group show mlid_snooping statistic vlan
424. led Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure exclude the VLAN nameTLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports DES 3528 5 config lldp ports all dotl_tlv_pvid enable Command config lldp ports all doti_tlv_pvid enable Success DES 3528 5 config Ildp dot1_tliv_protocol_vid Purpose Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of IEEE 802 1 Organizationally port and protocol VLAN ID TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements Syntax config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all dot1_tlv_protocol_ vid vlan all lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vlanid_list gt enable disable Description This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System s port and protocol VLAN ID instance will be transmitted on the port If a port is associated with multiple protocol VLANs those enabled port and protocol VLAN IDs will be advertised Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured all Use this parameter to set all ports in the system dot1_tlv_protocol_vid This TLV optional data type determines whether the IEEE 802 1 organizationally defined port and protocol VLAN ID TLV transmission is allowed on a given LLDP transmission capable port The default state is disabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command
425. lgorithm lp _source_dest show link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 8 gt algorithm config lacp_port lt portlist gt mode active passive show lacp_ port lt portlist gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create link_aggregation Purpose Used to create a link aggregation group on the Switch Syntax create link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 8 gt type lacp static Description This command will create a link aggregation group with a unique identifier Parameters lt Vvalue gt Specifies the group ID The Switch allows up to eight link aggregation groups to be configured The group number identifies each of the groups type Specify the type of link aggregation used for the group If the type is not specified the default type is static e _laco This designates the port group as LACP compliant LACP allows dynamic adjustment to the aggregated port group LACP compliant ports may be further configured see config lacop_ports LACP compliant must be connected to LACP compliant devices static This designates the aggregated port group as static Static port groups cannot be changed as easily as LACP compliant port groups since both linked devices must be manually configured if the configuration of the trunked group is changed If static link aggregation is used be sure that both ends of the connection are properly configured and that all ports have the same speed duplex settings
426. licy DES 3528 5 config dhcp _ relay option_82 policy replace Command config dhcp_relay option_82 policy replace Success DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id Purpose Used to configure the content in Remote ID suboption Syntax config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id default user_define lt desc 32 gt Description This command is used to configure the content in Remote ID suboption Parameters default Uses the Switch s system MAC address as the remote ID User_define lt desc 32 gt Uses user defined string as the remote ID Space is allowed in the string Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure DHCP relay option 82 remote ID DES 3528 5 config dhcp _relay option_82 remote_id user_define D Link L2 Switch Command config dhcp_relay option_82 remote_id user_define D Link L2 Switch Success DES 3528 5 211 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show dhcp_relay Purpose Used to display the current DHCP BOOTP relay configuration Syntax show dhcp _ relay ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt Description This command will display the current DHCP relay configuration for the Switch or if an IP interface name is specified the DHCP relay configuration for that IP interface Parameters ioif lt ipif_ name 12 gt The name of the IP interface for which to display the current
427. lient and host as they exchange keys in looking for a match and therefore authentication to be accepted to negotiate encryptions on the following level 2 Encryption The second part of the ciphersuite that includes the encryption used for encrypting the messages sent between client and host The Switch supports two types of cryptology algorithms e Stream Ciphers There are two types of stream ciphers on the Switch RC4 with 40 bit keys and RC4 with 128 bit keys These keys are used to encrypt messages and need to be consistent between client and host for optimal use e CBC Block Ciphers CBC refers to Cipher Block Chaining which means that a portion of the previously encrypted block of encrypted text is used in the encryption of the current block The Switch supports the 3DES_EDE encryption code defined by the Data Encryption Standard DES to create the encrypted text 3 Hash Algorithm This part of the ciphersuite allows the user to choose a message digest function which will determine a Message Authentication Code This Message Authentication Code will be encrypted with a sent message to provide integrity and prevent against replay attacks The Switch supports two hash algorithms MD5 Message Digest 5 and SHA Secure Hash Algorithm These three parameters are uniquely assembled in four choices on the Switch to create a three layered encryption code for secure communication between the server and the host The user may implement a
428. long with enable gvrp is used to enable and disable GVRP on the Switch without changing the GVRP configuration on the Switch None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To disable the Generic VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP DES 3528 5 disable gvrp Command disable gvrp Success DES 3528 5 show vlan Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the current VLAN configuration on the Switch show vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt This command displays summary information about each VLAN including the VLAN ID VLAN name the Tagging Untagging status and the Member Non member Forbidden status of each port that is a member of the VLAN lt vlan_name 32 gt The VLAN name of the VLAN for which to display a summary of settings lt vidlist gt Specifies a list of VLANs by VLAN ID lt portlist gt Specifies the port to be displayed None To display the Switch s current VLAN settings 124 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show vlan Command show vlan VLAN Trunk State Enabled VLAN Trunk Member Ports 1 5 VID o VLAN Name default VLAN Type Static Advertisement Enabled Member Ports 1 28 Static Ports 1 28 Current Tagged Ports Current Untagged Ports 1 28 Static Tagged Ports Static Untagged Ports
429. loopdetect recover_timer value 0 lt value 60 1000000 gt interval lt 1 32767 gt mode port based vlan based 1 Description This command is used to configure loop back detection on the switch Parameters recover_timer The time interval in seconds used by the Auto Recovery mechanism to decide how long to check if the loop status is gone The valid range is 60 to 1000000 Zero is a special value which means to disable the auto recovery mechanism The default value is 60 interval The time interval inseconds at which the remote device transmits all the CTP packets to detect the loop back event The default value is 70 with a valid range of 7 to 32767 mode In port based mode the port will be disabled during the loop detection In vian based mode the port cannot process VLAN packets destined for ports involved in detecting the loop Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the recover time to 0 and interval to 20 and VLAN based mode DES 3528 5 config loopdetect recover_timer 0 interval 20 mode vlan based Command config loopdetect recover_timer 0 interval 20 mode vlan based Success DES 3528 5 273 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config loopdetect ports Purpose Used to configure loop back detection on the switch Syntax config loopdetect ports lt portlist gt all st
430. low_sampler Command show sflow flow_sampler Port Analyzer Server ID Configured Rate Active Rate Max Header Size Total Entries 2 DES 3528 5 282 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create sflow counter_poller Purpose Used to create the counter poller for the sFlow function of the Switch Syntax create sflow counter_poller ports lt portlist gt all analyzer_server_id lt value 1 4 gt interval disable lt sec 20 120 gt Description This command is used to configure the settings for the Switch s counter poller This mechanism will take a poll of the IF counters of the Switch and package them with the other previously mentioned data into a datagram which will be sent to the sFlow Analyzer Server for examination Parameters ports Specifies the list of ports to be configured analyzer_server_id The analyzer_server_id is the id of a analyzer_ server interval Users may configure the Polling Interval here The Switch will take a poll of the IF counters every time this interval reaches 0 and this information will be included in the sFlow datagrams that will be sent to the sFlow Analyzer for examination Choosing the disabled parameter will disable the counter polling for this entry If interval is not specified its default value is disable Restrictions Only Administrators and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create the s
431. lowing sections config ipif Purpose Used to configure the IP interface Syntax config ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt ipaddress lt network_address gt vlan lt vilan_name 32 gt state enable disable proxy_arp enable disable local enable disable 1 bootp dhcp Description This command is used to configure the IP interface on the Switch Parameters lt ipif name 12 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 12 characters to identify this IP interface ipaddress lt network_address gt IP address and netmask of the IP interface to be created Users can specify the address and mask information using the traditional format for example 10 1 2 3 255 0 0 0 or in CIDR format 10 1 2 3 8 lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN corresponding to the System IP interface state enable disable Allows users to enable or disable the IP interface proxy_arp enable disable Allows users to enable or disable the proxy ARP function The default setting is Disabled local enable disable Controls whether the system provides the proxy reply for the ARP packets destined for IP address located in the same subnet as the received interface When proxy ARP is enabled for an interface the system will reply the ARP query destined for IP address located in a different IP subnet from the interface IP For ARP packets destined for IP address located in the same IP subnet as the interface IP the system will check
432. lows you to add or delete server network addresses to which the traffic from unauthenticated client hosts will not be blocked by the JWAC Switch Any servers the ActiveX needs to access to accomplish the authentication before the client passes the authentication should be added to the Switch with its IP address For example the client may need to access update microsoft com or some sites of the Anti Virus software companies to check whether the OS or Anti Virus software of the client is up to date and so IP addresses of update microsoft com and of Anti Virus software companies are needed to be added to the Switch Parameters add To add a network address to which the traffic will not be blocked You can add five network addresses at the most delete To delete a network address to which the traffic will not be blocked ipaddress To specify the network address to add or delete To set a specific IP address please use the format x x x x 32 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure JWAC update server DES 3528 5 config jwac other _server add ipaddress 10 90 90 109 24 Command config jwac other_server add ipaddress 10 90 90 109 24 Warning the real added update server is 10 90 90 0 24 Success DES 3528 5 NOTE If the update server is linked to the JWAC enabled port on the switch it must be added to the static FDB correctly before it can work properly 35
433. lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt counter clear mld_snooping statistic counter config mld_snooping all vian_name lt vlan_names gt vianid lt vidlist gt state enable disable data_driven_learning aged_out enable disable expiry_time lt sec 1 65535 gt 1 config mld_snooping querier config mld_snooping lt value 1 1024 gt data_driven_learning max_learned_entry 404 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters clear mld_snooping all vlan _name lt vlan_names gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipaddr gt all data_driven_group Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config mid_snooping Purpose Used to configure MLD snooping on the switch Syntax config mid_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all state enable disable fast_done enable disable report_suppression enable disable 1 Description This command configures MLD snooping on the switch If the MLD version is configured with a lower version the higher version s MLD Report Leave messages will be ignored Parameters vlan The name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured vlanid The ID of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured state Allows you to enable or disable the MLD snooping function for the chosen VLAN fast_done enable or di
434. ma Purpose Used to configure a maintenance association Syntax config cfm ma lt string 22 gt md lt string 22 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt mip none auto explicit defer sender_id none chassis manage chassis _manage defer ccm_interval 10ms 100ms 1sec 10sec 1min 10min mepid_list add delete lt mepid_list gt 1 Description The MEP list specified for a MA can be located in different devices MEPs must be created on ports of these devices explicitly An MEP will transmit CCM packets periodically across the MA The receiving MEP will verify these received CCM packets from other MEPs against this MEP list for the configuration integrity check Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name vianid Specifies the VLAN Identifier Different MAs must be associated with different VLANs mip Specifies the control creation of MIPs none No MIPs will be created auto MIPs can always be created on any ports in this MA if that port is not configured with an MEP of that MA explicit MIP can be created on any ports in this MA only if the next existent lower level has a MEP configured on that port and that port is not configured with a MEP of this MA defer Inherit the settings configured for the maintenance domain that this MA is associated with This is the default value sender_id Specifies and control the informa
435. mand create stp instance_id 2 Warning There is no VLAN mapping to this instance_id Success DES 3528 5 85 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp instance_id Purpose Used to add or delete VID to from an STP instance Syntax config stp instance_id lt value 1 15 gt add_vlan remove_vlan lt vidlist gt Description This command is used to map VIDs VLAN IDs to previously configured STP instances on the Switch by creating an instance_id A STP instance may have multiple members with the same MSTP configuration There is no limit to the number of STP regions in a network but each region only supports a maximum of 16 spanning tree instances one unchangeable default entry VIDs can belong to only one spanning tree instance at a time NOTE Switches in the same spanning tree region having the same STP instance_id must be mapped identically and have the same configuration revision_level number and the same name Parameters lt value 1 15 gt Enter a number between 1 and 15 to define the instance_id The Switch supports 16 STP instances with one unchangeable default instance ID set as 0 add_vlan Along with the vid_range lt vidlist gt parameter this command will add VIDs to the previously configured STP instance_id remove_vian Along with the vid_range lt vidlist gt parameter this command will remove VIDs to the previously configured STP instance_id
436. mand_history Purpose Used to display the command history Syntax show command _history Description This command will display the command history Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the command history 507 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show command history Command show command _ history show show vlan show command history DES 3528 5 508 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Appendix A TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS General Standards IEEE 802 3 NWay auto negotiation IEEE 802 3 10BASE T Ethernet IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX Fast Ethernet IEEE 802 3ab 1000BASE T Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1s Multiple Spanning Tree IEEE 802 1Q VLAN IEEE 802 1X Port Based Network Access Control IEEE 802 1p Priority Queues IEEE 802 3ad Link Aggregation Control IEEE 802 3x Full duplex Flow Control IEEE 802 3z Gibabit Ethernet SFP Mini GBIC IEEE 802 3af standard only for PoE Protocols CSMA CD Data Transfer Rates Half duplex Full duplex Ethernet 10 Mbps 20Mbps Fast Ethernet 100Mbps 200Mbps Gigabit Ethernet n a 2000Mbps Fiber Optic _ DEM 310GT 1000BASE LX DEM 311GT 1000BASE SX DEM 314GT 1000BASE LHX DEM 315GT 1000BASE ZX DEM 312GT2 1000BASE SX DEM 210 Single Mode 100BASE FX DEM 211 Multi M
437. ment miss packet port outer TPID use inner priority and enable disable add inner tag Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be displayed If no parameter specified system will display all ports information Restrictions None 387 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To show double tagging mode for ports 1 4 of unit 1 DES 3528 5 show ging ports 1 1 1 4 Command show qing ports 1 1 1 4 Missdrop Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Outer TPID 0x88A8 0x88A8 0x88A8 0x88A8 Use Inner Priority Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Add Inner Tag Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled config qinq inner _tpid Purpose Used to configure the system s inner TPID Syntax config ging inner_tpid lt hex 0x1 Oxffff gt Description The command is used to configure the inner TPID of the system The inner TPID is used to decide whether the ingress packet is c tagged Inner tag TPID is per system configurable This command is for projects that support per system TPID configuration For projects that support per port TPID configuration the config ging ports inner_tpid command should be supported Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the inner TPID in the system to 0x9100 DES 3528 5 config inner_TPID 0x9100 Success DES 3528 5
438. method list of authentication methods for users logging on to the Switch The sequence of methods implemented in this command will affect the authentication result For example if a user enters a sequence of methods like tacacs xtacacs local the Switch will send an authentication request to the first tacacs host in the server group If no response comes from the server host the Switch will send an authentication request to the second tacacs host in the server group and so on until the list is exhausted At that point the Switch will restart the same sequence with the following protocol listed xtacacs If no authentication takes place using the xtacacs list the local account database set in the Switch is used to authenticate the user When the local method is used the privilege level will be dependant on the local account privilege configured on the Switch Successful login using any of these methods will give the user a user privilege only If the user wishes to upgrade his or her status to the administrator level the user must implement the enable admin command followed by a previously configured password See the enable admin part of this section for more detailed information concerning the enable admin command Parameters default The default method list for access authentication as defined by the user The user may choose one or a combination of up to four of the following authentication methods tacacs Adding t
439. mmand allows you to configure Web based function user setting username The name of the user account to be changed vlan Authentication VLAN name clear_vian To clear the VLAN that is configured previously Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure the port state DES 3528 5 config wac user 123 vlan default Command config wac user 123 vlan default Success DES 3528 5 config wac virtual_ip Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure the WAC virtual ipaddress used to accept authentication requests from an unauthenticated host config wac virtual_ip lt ipaddr gt When the virtual IP is specified the TCP packet sent to the virtual IP will get a reply If the virtual IP is enabled TCP packets sent to the virtual IP or physical IPIF s IP address will both get the a reply When the virtual IP is set 0 0 0 0 the function of virtual IP is disabled By default the virtual IP is 0 0 0 0 The virtual IP will not respond to any ARP request or ICMP packets To make the function work properly the virtual IP should not be an existing IP address It also cannot be located on the existing subnet lt ipaddr gt Specifies the IP address of the virtual IP Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure the WAC virtual IP DES 3528 5 config wac virtual_ip 1 1 1 1 Command config wac vir
440. mmetric VLAN function on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable asymmetric VLANs DES 3528 5 disable asymmetric _vlan Command disable asymmetric_vlan Success DES 3528 5 144 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show asymmetric_vlian Purpose Used to view the asymmetric VLAN state on the Switch Syntax show asymmetric_vlan Description This command displays the asymmetric VLAN state on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the asymmetric VLAN state currently set on the Switch DES 3528 5 show asymmetric _vlan Command show asymmetric_vlan Asymmetric VLAN Enabled DES 3528 5 145 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS The link aggregation commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 8 gt type lacp static delete link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 8 gt config link_aggregation group_id lt value 1 8 gt master_port lt port gt ports lt portlist gt state enable disable 1 config link_aggregation mac_source mac_destination mac_source_dest ip source ip destination a
441. mp host 10 48 74 100 Command delete snmp host 10 48 74 100 Success DES 3528 5 show snmp host Purpose Used to display the recipient of SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Syntax show snmp host lt ipaddr gt Description This command is used to display the IP addresses and configuration information of remote SNMP managers that are designated as recipients of SNMP traps that are generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Parameters lt paddr gt The IP address of a remote SNMP manager that will receive SNMP traps generated by the Switch s SNMP agent Restrictions None Example usage To display the currently configured SNMP hosts on the Switch DES 3528 5 show snmp host Command show snmp host SNMP Host Table Host IP Address SNMP Version Community Name SNMPv3 User Name 10 48 76 23 private 10 48 74 100 authpriv public Total Entries DES 3528 5 create trusted host Purpose Used to create the trusted host Syntax create trusted_host lt ipaddr gt network lt network_address gt Description This command creates the trusted host The Switch allows users to specify up to four IP addresses that are allowed to manage the Switch via in band SNMP or TELNET based management software These IP addresses must be members of the Management VLAN If no IP addresses are specified then there is nothing to prevent any IP address from accessing the Switch provided the user knows the Username and P
442. mpted for a password If TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS authentication is enabled on the Switch it will contact a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify the user If the user is verified he or she is granted access to the Switch There are currently three versions of the TACACS security protocol each a separate entity The Switch s software supports the following versions of TACACS e TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Provides password checking and authentication and notification of user actions for security purposes utilizing via one or more centralized TACACS servers utilizing the UDP protocol for packet transmission e Extended TACACS XTACACS An extension of the TACACS protocol with the ability to provide more types of authentication requests and more types of response codes than TACACS This protocol also uses UDP to transmit packets e TACACS Terminal Access Controller Access Control System plus Provides detailed access control for authentication for network devices TACACS is facilitated through Authentication commands via one or more centralized servers The TACACS protocol encrypts all traffic between the Switch and the TACACS daemon using the TCP protocol to ensure reliable delivery The Switch also supports the RADIUS protocol for authentication using the Access Authentication Control commands RADIUS or Remote Authentication Dial In User Server also uses a remote server f
443. ms whose priority is equal to or higher than Some Remote MEP MAC Status Error will be sent remote_ccm Only Fault Alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than Some Remote MEP Down will be sent error_ccm Only Fault Alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than Error CCM Received will be sent xcon_ccm Only Fault Alarms whose priority is equal to or higher than Cross connect CCM Received will be sent none No fault alarm is sent This is the default value alarm_time The time that a defect must last before the fault alarm can be sent The default value is 2 seconds alarm_reset_time The timer must be clear of any alarm defects before the fault can be re 492 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config cfm mep alarmed The default value is 10 seconds Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the cfm mep DES 3528 5 config cfm mep mepid 1 md 1 ma 1 state enable ccm enable Command config cfm mep mepid 1 md 1 ma 1 state enable ccm enable Success DES 3528 5 delete cfm mep Purpose Used to delete a created MEP Syntax delete cfm mep mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt Description This command is used to delete a created MEP Parameters mepname Specifies the MEP name Its unique among
444. n vlan vlan_precedence voice vlan wac DES 3528 5 mef_ 12 protocols multicast_fdb port pppoe router_ports mirror packet port_security pvid rspan scheduling_mechanism sflow sred stacking syslog traffic trusted_host vlan translation sim ssh stp system_severity utilization vlan trunk Figure 2 6 Next possible completions Show Command In the above example all of the possible next parameters for the show command are displayed At the next command prompt the up arrow was used to re enter the show command followed by the account parameter The CLI then displays the user accounts configured on the Switch xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual COMMAND SYNTAX The following symbols are used to describe how command entries are made and values and arguments are specified in this manual The online help contained in the CLI and available through the console interface uses the same syntax E al NOTE All commands are case sensitive Be sure to disable Caps Lock or l any other unwanted function that changes text case lt angle brackets gt Purpose Encloses a variable or value that must be specified Syntax config ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt ipaddress lt network_address gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt state enable disable bootp dhcp Description In the above syntax example users must supply an IP interface name in the lt ipif name 12 g
445. n active or passive mode The following two actions are allowed by ports in active mode but disallowed by ports in passive mode Initiate OAM discovery and Start or stop remote loop back Ea at NOTE When a port is OAM enabled changing the OAM mode will cause l the OAM discovery to be re started Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured Use all to specify all ports mode Specifies to operate in either active mode or passive mode The default mode is active Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure port 1 to OAM mode to passive DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports 1 mode passive Command config ethernet_oam ports 1 mode passive Success DES 3528 5 461 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config ethernet_oam ports state Purpose Used to enable or disable Ethernet OAM Syntax config ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable Description This command used to enable or disable the port s Ethernet OAM function Enabling a port s OAM will cause the port to start OAM discovery If a port is active it initiates the discovery otherwise it reacts only to the discovery received from its peer Disabling a ports OAM will cause the port to send out a dying gasp event to the peer and then disconnect the established OAM link Parameters portlist
446. n oui Command OUI Address 00 01 E3 00 00 00 00 03 6B 00 00 00 00 09 6 00 00 00 00 0A 0B 00 00 00 00 OF E2 00 00 00 00 60 B9 00 00 00 00 D0 1E 00 00 00 00 E 0 75 00 00 00 00 E 0 BB 00 00 00 show voice vlan oui FF FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 FF FF FF 00 00 00 Used to display OUI information of the voice VLAN This command is used to display OUI information of the voice VLAN Description Siemens Cisco Avaya Huawei amp 3COM NEC amp Philips Pingtel Veritel 3COM Total Entries 9 DES 3528 5 show voice_vlan ports Purpose Used to display the mode and status of voice VLAN ports Syntax show voice_vlian ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the mode and status of voice VLAN ports Parameters lt portlist gt A range of port to display If not specified all ports information will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the voice VLAN information of ports 1 1 1 5 DES 3528 5 show voice _vlan ports 1 1 1 5 Command show voice _vlan ports 1 1 1 5 Status Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Manual Auto Auto DES 3528 5 139 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show voice_vian voice_device ports Purpose Used to show Voice devices that connected to the
447. n protocol enabled the Switch will send authentication packets to a remote TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host on a remote host The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host will then verify or deny the request and return the appropriate message to the Switch More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16 Parameters server_host lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the remote server host to add protocol The protocol used by the server host The user may choose one of the following tacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol xtacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol tacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol radius Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol port lt int 1 65535 gt Enter a number between 7 and 65535 to define the virtual port number of the authentication protocol on a server host The default port number is 49 for TACACS XTACACS TACACS servers and 1872 and 1813 for RADIUS servers but the user may set a unique port number for higher security key lt key_string 254 gt Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS or RADIUS server only Specify an aloha
448. n the switch Syntax show cfm mp lItr_all Description This command displays the CFM mp linktrace settings on the switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the CFM mp linktrace on the Switch DES 3528 5 show cfm mp_ltr_all Command show cfm mp_ltr_all All MPs reply LTRs Enabled DES 3528 5 504 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual COMMAND HISTORY LIST The Switch history commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table ee ee anu command_history a 1 40 gt show command _history OO Each command is listed in detail in the following sections Purpose Used to display all commands in the Command Line Interface CLI Syntax lt command gt Description This command will display all of the commands available through the Command Line Interface CLI Parameters lt command gt Entering the question mark with an appropriate command will list all the corresponding parameters for the specified command along with a brief description of the commands function and similar commands having the same words in the command Restrictions None Example usage To display all of the commands in the CLI DES 3528 5 2 clear clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding _ entry ports clear arptable clear attack_log clear counters clear fdb clear log clear por
449. n vlan Accounting Command create authentication guest_vlan vlan Accounting Success DES 3528 5 430 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete authentication guest_vian Purpose Used to delete a configured authentication Guest VLAN Syntax delete authentication guest_vian vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command will delete the guest VLAN settings but will not delete the static VLAN All ports which have an enabled guest VLAN will move to the original VLAN after the guest vlan has been deleted Parameters vian_name 32 Specifies the guest vlan by VLAN name vianid Specifies the guest vlan by VLAN ID Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete an authentication guest VLAN DES 3528 5 5 delete authentication guest_vlan vlan Accounting Command delete authentication guest_vlan vlan Accounting Success DES 3528 5 config authentication guest_vian Purpose Used to configure the security port s as a specific guest VLAN member Syntax config authentication guest_vian vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vilanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt add delete ports lt portlist gt all Description This command is used to assign or remove ports to from guest VLAN If Multiple authentication mode is none This port is doing the single authentication The port will o
450. n_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcast_address_list gt Description This command configures an IGMP multicast VLAN group profile on the Switch and can add or delete multicast addresses for the profile Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the IGMP multicast VLAN group profile name max length is 32 add delete Add or delete IGMP multicast address list to or from this multicast VLAN group profile lt mcast_address_list gt Specifies the IGMP multicast addresses to be configured It can be a continuous single multicast addresses such as 225 1 1 1 225 1 1 3 225 1 1 8 ora multicast address range such as 225 1 1 1 225 2 2 2 or both of them such as 225 1 1 1 225 1 1 18 225 1 1 20 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add IGMP multicast address or range to a profile DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl add 235 2 2 1 23 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl add 235 2 2 1 235 delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to delete an IGMP multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Syntax delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt all Description This command deletes an IGMP multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the IGMP multicast VLAN profile name max length is 3
451. nable sred Description This command is usded to enable the sRED function By default SRED is disabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable sred DES 3528 5 enable sred Command enable sred Success DES 3528 5 397 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable sred Purpose Used to disable the simple RED function Syntax disable sred Description This command is used to disable the SRED function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable sred DES 3528 5 disable sred Command disable sred Success DES 3528 5 config sred Purpose Used to config the simple RED paremeter Syntax config sred lt portlist gt all lt class_id 0 7 gt all threshold low lt value 0 100 gt high lt value 0 100 gt 1 drop_rate low lt value 1 8 gt high lt value 1 8 gt 1 drop_ green enable disable 1 Description This command is used to onfigure SRED threshold per port or per port per queue Parameters portlist A range of ports to config class_id This specifies which of the 8 hardware CoS queues the config sred command will apply to threshold low low threshold that Specifies the percent of space utilized By default the value is 60 The range is 0 to
452. name Trinity Command show authen_login method_list_name Trinity Method List Name Priority Method Name Comment tacacs t Built in Group tacacs Built in Group Darren User defined Group local Keyword 313 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create authen_enable method _list_name Used to create a user defined method list of authentication methods for promoting normal user level privileges to Administrator level privileges on the Switch Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage create authen_enable method_list_name lt string 15 gt This command is used to promote users with normal level privileges to Administrator level privileges using authentication methods on the Switch Once a user acquires normal user level privileges on the Switch he or she must be authenticated by a method on the Switch to gain administrator privileges on the Switch which is defined by the Administrator A maximum of eight enable method lists can be implemented on the Switch lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the given enable method list to create Only Administrator level users can issue this command To create a user defined method list named Permit for promoting user privileges to Administrator privileges DES 3528 5 create authen enable method list name Permit Command create authen enable method l
453. nd Example usage To configure an IGMP snoop multicast VLAN DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan vl add member_port 1 3 state enable Command config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan vl add member_port 1 3 state enable Success DES 3528 5 show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group Purpose Used to display the multicast groups configured for the specified multicast VLAN Syntax show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command is used to display the multicast groups configured for the specified multicast VLAN Parameters vlan_name The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters Restrictions None Example usage 177 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To display the multicast groups configured for a multicast VLAN DES 3528 5 show igmp snooping multicast_vlan_group vl Command show igmp_ snooping multicast_vlan_group vl delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to delete a muticast VLAN Syntax delete igmp_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command allows you to delete multicat_vlan Parameters vlan_name The name of the multicast VLAN to be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete an IGMP snoop multicast VLAN DES 3528 5
454. nd Example usage To enable the authorization network DES 3528 5 enable authorization network Command enable authorization network Success DES 3528 5 disable authorization network Purpose Used to disable authorization on the Switch Syntax disable authorization network Description This command is used to disable the authorization network When the authorization for network is disabled the authorization data assigned by the RADUIS server will not be accepted and take effect Authorization for the network is enabled by default Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the authorization network DES 3528 5 disable authorization network Command disable authorization network Success DES 3528 5 show authorization Purpose Used to show authorization status Syntax show authorization Description This command displays the current authorization status on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None 434 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To show authorization DES 3528 5 show authorization Command show authorization Authorization for Network Enabled DES 3528 5 435 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual WEB BASED ACCESS CONTROL COMMANDS The Web based Access Control commands in the
455. neeeeeeaeeeeeeaseeseenneees 266 C3 CPU FILTER COMMANDS vcc 271 LOOP BACK DETECTION COMMANDS occ cccteccccceeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeaseeseeaseeseenseees 273 TRAFFIC SEGMENTATION COMMANDS 2 0 eeeccceeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaseeseeaseeseeseeseneneees 277 SEE OW COMMANDS sson Ea aE Eea S 279 TIME AND SNIP COMMANDS viisina aaa Aa aaa a aaa Aa aa 288 ARP AND GRATUITOUS ARP COMMANDS snnassnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 293 ROUTING TABLE COMMANDS sssnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm nnmnnn nnmnnn 302 MAC NOTIFICATION COMMANDS wicseienacssesecscaveseescsvesenasswacenesawacennnetaceyacebadsvecnbasswecevageuenstace 304 ACCESS AUTHENTICATION CONTROL COMMANDS 0 cccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseees 307 SSM COMMANDS tsia Eaa Eara 328 SSL COMMAND S ssiececsacdesen tcc denesiecureacccctscaxdecssinedecssiaecscusicoussausecscdenvecsscasestuicecestarsenastnecensstnewssies 335 D LINK SINGLE IP MANAGEMENT COMMANDG 0 cccccccesteeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeneees 340 JVWAG COMMANDS cossirier iania aaea aiaa aa aapi ba aen 351 ELDE COMMAND S crou AE 371 C IN Q COMMANDS seue a Ea e a eS EEEE raS EPERE EErEE EEn Eas sii 385 ROP AN COMMANDS ssiri a a a aaa aaa aa e a aa e aeai 391 STATIC MAC BASED VLAN COMMANDS ccssssccssnssscnenssscccnsssencnnsseccnnsseceenessseonesssnsness 395 SIMPLE RED COMMANDS iisi is a 397 MLD SNOOPING COMMAN
456. nfig jwac authentication_page element Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to customize the authentication page config jwac authentication_page element japanese english default page_title lt desc 128 gt login_window_title lt desc 32 gt user_name_title lt desc 16 gt password title lt desc 16 gt logout_window_title lt desc 32 gt This command allows the administrator to customize the JWAC authentication page japanese Specifies that the page will change to Japanese english Specifies that the page will change to English default Specifies to reset the page element back to default page_title Specifies the title of the authentication page login_windown_title The login window title of the authentication page user_name_title Specifies the user name title of the authentication page password_title Specifies the password title of the authentication page logout_window_title The logout window title mapping of the authentication page Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure authentication page DES 3528 5 config jwac authentication page element japanese default Command config jwac authentication_page element japanese default Success DES 3528 5 367 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config jwac auth_failover Purpose Used t
457. nfigure the lease of a pool DES 3528 5 config dhcp pool lease accounting infinite Command config dhcp pool lease accounting infinite 478 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config dhcp pool boot_file Purpose Used to specify the name of the file that is used as a boot image Syntax config dhcp pool boot_file lt pool_name 12 gt lt file_name 64 gt Description The boot file is used to store the boot image for the client The boot image is generally the operating system the client uses to load If this command is entered twice for the same pool the second command will overwrite the first command If the boot file is not specified the boot file information will not be provided to the client Parameters lt pool_name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool lt file_name 64 gt Specifies the file name of the boot image Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the boot file DES 3528 5 config dhcp pool boot _file accounting boot had Command config dhcp pool boot_file accounting boot had config dhcp pool next_server Purpose Used to specify the next server to be used in the DHCP client boot process Syntax config dhcp pool next_server lt pool_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt Description The next server used by the DHCP client boot process is typically a TFTP server If the next server i
458. nformation for a MAC entry Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the MIPCCM database entries 498 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show cfm mipccm Command show cfm mipccm DES 3528 5 cfm linktrace Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage 00 01 02 03 04 05 00 01 02 03 04 05 Used to issue a CFM linktrack message cfm linktrace lt macaddr gt mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt ttl lt int 2 255 gt pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt This command is used to issue a CFM linktrack message lt macadadr gt Specifies the destination MAC address mepname Specifies the MEP name mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name tt Specifies the linktrace message TTL value The default value is 64 pdu_priority The 802 1p priority to be set in the transmitted LTM If not specified it uses the same priority as CCMs sent by the MA None To create a cfm linktrace DES 3528 5 cfm linktrace 00 01 02 03 04 05 mep mepl Command cfm linktrace 00 01 02 03 04 05 mep mep1 Transaction ID 26 Success DES 3528 5 show cfm linktrace Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to show linktrace
459. nformation is not specified it will not be provided to the client If this command is entered twice for the same pool the second command will overwrite the first command lt is allowed to specify next_server but not specify the boot file or specify the boot file but not specify the next_server Parameters lt pool_name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool lt ipaddr gt Specifies the IP address of the next server Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the next server DES 3528 5 config dhcp pool next_server accounting 192 169 0 1 Command config dhcp pool next_server accounting 192 169 0 1 Success DES 3528 5 479 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config dhcp ping_packets Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to specify the number of ping packets the DHCP server sends to an IP address before assigning this address to a requesting client config dhcp ping_packets lt number 0 10 gt By default the DHCP server pings a pool address twice before assigning the address to a DHCP client If the ping is unanswered the DHCP server assumes with a high probability that the address is not in use and assigns the address to the requesting client If the ping is answered the server will discard the current IP address and try another IP address
460. nistrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example Usage To configure ARP aging time DES 3528 5 config arp_aging time 30 Command config arp_aging time 30 Success DES 3528 5 show arpentry Purpose Used to display the ARP table Syntax show arpentry ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt ipaddress lt ipaddrs gt static Description This command is used to display the current contents of the Switch s ARP table Parameters ipif lt ipif_ name 12 gt The name of the IP interface the end node or station for which the ARP table entry was made resides on ipaddress lt ipaddr gt The network address corresponding to the IP interface name above Static Displays the static entries to the ARP table Restrictions None Example Usage To display the ARP table 295 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show arpentry Command show arpentry ARP Aging Time 1200 Interface 104 222 87 62 Be es 51 98 68 89 10 2 190 10 27 66 10 73 21 16 88 75 20 20 8 20 20 61 38 65 65 41 44 251 43 47 55 MAC Address FF FF FF FF FF FF 00 50 BA 70 E4 65 00 03 09 18 10 01 00 04 00 00 00 00 00 50 BA 66 77 56 00 E0 18 D4 63 1C 00 1D 60 E7 B5 CD 00 13 65 61 A0 00 00 0F 3D 84 A0 0C 00 80 C8 58 72 1B 00 1E 58 4F FE 60 00 1C F0 79 CA 13 00 17 31 ED E4 5D 00 00 81 9A F2 F4 00 50 BA DA 01 58 08 00 28 32 00 AC 00 07 E9 13 9B DC
461. nistrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable STP on the Switch DES 3528 5 disable stp Command disable stp Success DES 3528 5 81 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp version Purpose Used to globally set the version of STP on the Switch Syntax config stp version mstp rstp stp Description This command allows the user to choose the version of the spanning tree to be implemented on the Switch Parameters msto Selecting this parameter will set the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP globally on the Switch rsto Selecting this parameter will set the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP globally on the Switch stp Selecting this parameter will set the Spanning Tree Protocol STP globally on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the Switch globally for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol MSTP DES 3528 5 config stp version mstp Command config stp version mstp Success DES 3528 5 82 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp Purpose Used to setup STP RSTP and MSTP on the Switch Syntax config stp maxage lt value 6 40 gt maxhops lt value 6 40 gt hellotime lt value 1 2 gt forwarddelay lt value 4 30 gt txholdcount lt value 1 10
462. nistrator of the Switch w NOTE TACACS XTACACS and TACACS are separate entities and are not compatible The Switch and the server must be configured exactly the same using the same protocol For example if the Switch is set up for TACACS authentication so must be the host server The Access Authentication Control commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table 307 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters show authen_policy authen show authen_policy create authen_login lt string Se method_list_name config authen_login default method_list_name lt string 15 gt tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius server_group lt string 15 gt local none 1 delete authen_login lt string 15 gt method_list_name show authen_login default method_list_name lt string 15 gt all create authen_enable lt string 15 gt method_list_name config authen_enable default method_list_name lt string 15 gt method D xtacacs tacacs radius server_group lt string 15 gt local_enable none 1 delete authen_enable lt string 15 gt method_list_name show authen_enable default method_list_name lt string 15 gt all config authen application console telnet ssh http all login enable default method_list_name lt string esse show authen application authen
463. nly Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable loop back detection on the switch 274 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 enable loopdetect Command enable loopdetect Success DES 3528 5 disable loopdetect Purpose Used to globally disable loop back detection on the switch Syntax disable loopdetect Description This command is used to globally disable loop back detection on the switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable loop back detection on the switch DES 3528 5 disable loopdetect Command disable loopdetect Success DES 3528 5 show loopdetect Purpose Used to display the current loop back detection settings on the switch Syntax show loopdetect Description This command is used to display the current loop back detection settings on the switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show loop detect DES 3528 5 show loopdetect Command show loopdetect Global Settings Status Disabled Mode Port Based Interval 20 Recover Time 60 Trap Status None DES 3528 5 275 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show loopdetect ports Purpose Used to display the current per port loop back detection settings on the switch
464. nly Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command SNTP settings must be configured for SNTP to function config sntp To enable the SNTP function DES 3528 5 enable sntp Command enable sntp Success DES 3528 5 disable sntp Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to disable SNTP server support disable sntp This command disables SNTP support SNTP service must be separately configured see config sntp None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 289 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To disable SNTP support DES 3528 5 disable sntp Command disable sntp Success DES 3528 5 config time Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to manually configure system time and date settings config time lt date ddmmmyyyy gt lt time hh mm ss gt This command configures the system time and date settings These will be overridden if SNTP is configured and enabled date Express the date using two numerical characters for the day of the month three alphabetical characters for the name of the month and four numerical characters for the year For example 03aug2003 time Express the system time using the format hh mm ss that is two numerical characters each for the hour using a 24 hour clock the minute and second
465. nnected non powered systems The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to advertise and discover the MDI power support capabilities of the sending IEEE 802 3 LAN station The default state is disabled Note Not supported in the current release maximum_frame_size This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit Maximum frame size TLV The default state is disabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure exclude the MAC PHY configuration status TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports DES 3528 5 config lldp ports all dot3_tlvs mac_phy_configuration_status enable Command config lldp ports all dot3_tlvs mac_phy_ configuration_status enable Success DES 3528 5 379 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config lldp forward_message Purpose Used to configure the forwarding of LLDPDU packets when LLDP is disabled Syntax config Ildp forward_message enable disable Description When LLDP is disabled and LLDP forward_message is enabled the received LLDPDU packets will be forwarded The default state is disabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage Example To configure LLDP forward_message DES 3528 5 config lldp forward message enable Command config lldp forward_message enable Suc
466. nnected to partner network device and the link is up ShutDown This pair has been connected to another network device but the partner is power off Open This pair is left open Short This pair has been shorted between two lines of its own CrossTalk This pair has been shorted between two lines of different pairs No Cable There is no pair connected to the port This pair has been connected to another network device normally but other pair has error Unknown The last diagnosis do not obtain the cable status please try it again Syntax cable_diag ports lt portlist gt all Description When a port is in link up status the diagnostic will obtain the distance of the cable Since the status is link up the cable will not have any problem Since this diagnostic is for copper cable the port with fiber cable will be skipped from the diagnostic If the link is up the abnormal results won t be shown and the cable length item indicates the length of the cable If the link is down the reason may be that its partner has powered off or the port is disabled the abnormal results won t be shown and the cable length item shows the length of the cable If the link is down and there is some error in the cable the abnormal results will be shown but the cable length item won t be shown Parameters all Indicate all ports will be displayed lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be displayed Restrictions Non
467. nnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn nn 116 VLAN GCGOMMAND S ron a a aeaneeeatecetads 119 VOIGE VLAN COMMAND Siiscsisslicetaeshteespenccusiiesceenhenescentien ancien icete unicast 134 SUBNET BASED VLAN COMMANDS occ cctecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeeeaseeseeaaeeseeaseeseeaseeseneseeeenaaes 141 ASYMMETRIC VLAN COMMANDS asssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 144 LINK AGGREGATION COMMANDS 0 ccccetecccceee eee eeeeaseeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeeseaaseeseeaseeseeeseeseenneees 146 IP MAC PORT BINDING IMPB COMMANDS 00 ccscccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneseeseeeenseeseeeeneeeees 151 LIMITED IP MULTICAST ADDRESS iisccctccsicetteciscetiecicectiepieendiecicesthccbscntiuetaendtucicexthectannsnecssbes 165 BASIG IP COMMANDS sea a E E EEEa 171 MULTICAST VLAN COMMANDS snnnasnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnm nnmnnn nnmnnn 175 IGMP SNOOPING COMMANDS baticccess tect cesc tees coms beneseniteascenthenbsemetentseuatemeubashewbebwibeetesneteaudeweue 192 DACP RELAY COMMANDS sicrie a a eieiitaeeeaeies 208 802 1X COMMANDS INCLUDING GUEST VLANS sssnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 221 ACCESS CONTROL LIST ACL COMMANDS nnsssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 243 SAFEGUARD ENGINE COMMANDS cccsssecssnsssccsnnsscccnnssescnnssescnnssecennseeccenesesesnesseesness 264 FILTER COMMANDS DHCP SERVER NET BIOS ccecccceseeseeeeeeneeeeee
468. no limit Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure rate limitation DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping rate_limit ports 1 100 Command config igmp_snooping rate_limit ports 1 100 Success DES 3528 5 show igmp_snooping forwarding Purpose Used to display the current IGMP snooping forwarding information on the Switch 200 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show igmp_snooping forwarding Syntax show igmp_snooping forwarding vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt Description This command will display the current IGMP forwarding information on the Switch Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view IGMP snooping forwarding information If not specified all VLAN s IGMP snooping forwarding information will be displayed lt vidlist gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to view IGMP snooping forwarding information If not specified all VLAN s IGMP snooping forwarding information will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To view the current IGMP snooping forwarding information DES 3528 5 show igmp_snooping forwarding Command show igmp_ snooping forwarding VLAN Name default Source IP oe Multicast Group ae 413 eas lage Bape Port Member a Total Entries create igmp_snooping static_group Purpose Used to display the
469. ntax show mid_snooping statistic counter vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt Description This command displays the statistics counter for MLD protocol packets that are received by the switch since MLD Snooping is enabled Parameters vlan The name of the VLAN on which the router port resides vlanid The ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides ports Specifies a port number or a range of ports to be displayed Restrictions None 415 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display MLD Snooping statistic counter DES 3528 5 show mld_snooping statistic counter vlanid 1 Command show mld_snooping statistic counter vlanid 1 Total Groups 10 Receive Statistics Query MLD v1 Query MLD v2 Query Total Dropped By Rate Limitation Dropped By Multicast VLAN PPN ee Report amp Done MLD v1 Report 0 MLD v2 Report 10 MLD v1 Done A Total 21 Dropped By Rate Limitation 0 Dropped By Max Group Limitation 90 Dropped By Group Filter 0 Dropped By Multicast VLAN 1 Transmit Statistics Query MLD v1 Query MLD v2 Query s Total ae Report amp Done MLD v1 Report 0 MLD v2 Report 10 MLD v1 Done aoe Total gt 11 Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 clear mlid_snooping statistic counter Purpose Used to clear the current MLD snooping statistic on the Switch Syntax clear mld_snooping stati
470. ntify members of an SNMP community This string is used like a password to give remote SNMP managers access to MIB objects in the Switch s SNMP agent view lt view_name 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify the group of MIB objects that a remote SNMP manager is allowed to access on the Switch read_only Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created with this command can only read the contents of the MIBs on the Switch read_write Specifies that SNMP community members using the community string created with this command can read from and write to the contents of the MIBs on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create the SNMP community string dlink 42 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 create snmp community dlink view ReadView read write Command create snmp community dlink view ReadView read write Success DES 3528 5 delete snmp community Purpose Used to remove a specific SNMP community string from the Switch Syntax delete snmp community lt community_string 32 gt Description This command is used to remove a previously defined SNMP community string from the Switch Parameters lt community_string 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that is used to identify members of an SNMP community This
471. number 1 65535 gt maxdatagramsize lt value 300 1400 gt 1 Description This command configures the receiver information You can specify more than one collector with the same IP address if the UDP port numbers are unique Parameters timeout The length of time before the server is timed out When the analyzer_server times out all of the flow_samplers and counter_pollers associated with this analyzer_server will be deleted infinite indicates that analyzer_server never times out If not specified its default value is 400 collectoraddress The IP address of the analyzer_server If not specified the address will be 0 0 0 0 which means that the entry will be inactive collectorport The destination UDP port for sending the sFlow datagrams If not specified the default value is 6364 maxdatagramsize The maximum number of data bytes that can be packed in a single sample datagram If not specified the default value is 1400 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the sflow analyzer_server 285 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config sflow analyzer _server 2 collectoraddress 10 90 90 9 Command config sflow analyzer_server 2 collectoraddress 10 90 90 9 Success DES 3528 delete sflow analyzer_server Purpose Used to delete the analyzer_server Syntax delete sflow anal
472. numeric string up to 254 characters timeout lt int 1 255 gt Enter the time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request The default value is 5 seconds retransmit lt int 1 255 gt Enter the value in the retransmit field to change how many times the device will resend an authentication request when the server does not respond Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a TACACS authentication server host with port number 1234 a timeout value of 10 seconds and a retransmit count of 5 DES 3528 5 create authen server_host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs port 1234 timeout 10 retransmit 5 Command create authen server_host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs port 1234 timeout 10 retransmit 5 Success DES 3528 5 319 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config authen server_host Purpose Used to configure a user defined authentication server host Syntax config authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius port lt int 1 65535 gt key lt key_string 254 gt none timeout lt int 1 255 gt retransmit lt 1 255 gt 1 Description This command will configure a user defined authentication server host for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security protocols on the Switch When a user attempts to access the Switch with the authenticati
473. ny one or combination of the ciphersuites available yet different ciphersuites will affect the security level and the performance of the secured connection The information included in the ciphersuites is not included with the Switch and requires downloading from a third source in a file form called a certificate This function of the Switch cannot be executed without the presence and implementation of the certificate file and can be downloaded to the Switch by utilizing a TFTP server The Switch supports SSLv3 and TLSv1 Other versions of SSL may not be compatible with this Switch and may cause problems upon authentication and transfer of messages from client to host Command Parameters enable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with_RC4_128 MD5 RSA_with_3DES EDE CBC_SHA DHE_DSS_with_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA RSA_EXPORT_with_RC4_40 MD5 disable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with RC4_128 MD5 RSA_with 3DES EDE CBC_SHA DHE DSS with 3DES EDE CBC _SHA RSA EXPORT with RC4 40 MD5 C owsa OOOO stow ssicacheimeot Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 335 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable ssl Purpose Used to enable the SSL function on the Switch Syntax enable ssl ciphersuite RSA_with RC4_128 MD5 RSA_ with 3DES EDE CBC SHA DHE DSS with 3DES EDE CBC _ SHA RSA EXPORT with RC4 40 MD5 Description This command will enable SSL on the Switch by implementing any one or combination o
474. o 5 If no parameter specified all dangerous log entries will be displayed None To show dangerous messages on master DES 3528 5 show attack_log Command show attack_log 00000 days 01 25 43 Possible spoofing attack from 000d01002301 port 6 3 00000 days 01 25 43 Possible spoofing attack from 000d01002301 port 6 3 DES 3528 5 clear attack_log Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to clear the Switch s dangerous log clear attack_log unit lt unit_id 1 8 gt This command clears the Switch s dangerous log unit Specifies the unit of which the attack_log will be cleared if it is not specified it refers to the master unit Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To clear the master s dangerous log DES 3528 5 clear attack_log Command clear attack_log Success DES 3528 5 Ta xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config system_severity Purpose Used to configure system_ severity level of an alert required for log entry or trap message Syntax config system_severity trap log all critical warning information Description This command is used to configure the system_severity levels on the Switch When an event occurs on the Switch a message will be sent to the SNMP agent trap the Switch s log or both Events occurring on the Switch are separated into three main c
475. o create mac based access control guest vlan DES 3528 5 create mac_based_access_control guest_vlan default Command create mac_based_access_control guest_vlan default Success DES 3528 5 delete mac_based_ access _ control Purpose Used to delete the guest vian Syntax delete mac_based_access_control guest_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt guest_vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command is used to de assign the guest VLAN When the guest VLAN is de assgined the guest VLAN function is disabled Parameters guest_vlan Specifies the name of the guest_vlan guest_vianid Specifies the vian_id of the guest_vlan Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a guest vlan DES 3528 5 delete mac_based_access_control guest_vlan default Command delete mac_based_access_control guest_vlan default Success DES 3528 5 423 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual clear mac_based_access_ control auth_state Purpose Used to reset the current state of a user The re authentication will be started after the user traffic is received again Syntax clear mac_based_access_conitrol auth_ state ports all portlist mac_addr lt macaddr gt Description This command is used to clear the authentication state of a user or port The port or the user will return to un authenticated state All
476. o disable autoconfig This instructs the Switch not to accept autoconfiguration instruction from the DHCP server This does not change the IP settings of the Switch The ipif settings will continue as DHCP client until changed with the config ipif command Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To stop the autoconfiguration function 62 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 disable autoconfig Command disable autoconfig Success DES 3528 5 show autoconfig Purpose Used to display the current autoconfig status of the Switch Syntax show autoconfig Description This command will list the current status of the autoconfiguration function Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage DES 3528 5 show autoconfig Command show autoconfig Autoconfig State Disabled DES 3528 5 config configuration Purpose Used to delete the specific firmware or configure the specific firmware as boot up image Syntax config configuration lt config_id 1 2 gt boot_up delete active Description This command is used to delete the specific firmware or configure the specific firmware as boot up image Parameters lt config_id 1 2 gt Specifies the serial number of the indicated configuration boot_up Specifies the config is boot_up config delete Delete the configuration acti
477. o enable or disable jwac auth_failover Syntax config jwac auth_failover enable disable Description This command allows the administrator to enable or disable jwac auth_failover When the authentication failover is disabled and Radius servers are unreachable the authentication will fail When the authentication failover is enabled and Radius servers authentication are unreachable the local database will be used to do the authentication By default the state is disabled Parameters enable Enable jwac auth_failover disable Disable jwac auth_failover Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable jwac auth_failover DES 3528 5 config jwac auth_failover enable Command config jwac auth_failover enable Success DES 3528 5 config jwac authorization network Purpose Used to enable or disable the accepting of authorized configuration Syntax config jwac authorization network radius enable disable local enable disable 1 Description This command allows the administrator to configure authorization network for JWAC When the authorization is enabled for JWAC s radius the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled When the authorization is enabled for JWAC s local the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted Parameters radius lf specified to enable
478. obally or just for the port The default state is disable Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure forwarding of EAPOL PDU DES 3528 5 config 802 1x fwd_pdu system enable Command config 802 1x fwd_pdu system enable Success DES 3528 5 config 802 1x authorization network Purpose Used to enable or disable the accepting of authorized configuration Syntax config 802 1x authorization network radius enable disable Description This command is used to enable or disable the accepting of authorized configuration When the authorization is enabled for 802 1x s radius the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted by the Switch if the global authorization network is enabled Parameters radius When specified to enable the authorization data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted by the Switch if the global authorization network is enabled The default state is enabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable to accept the authorized data assgined from the RADIUS server DES 3528 5 config 802 1x authorization network radius disable Command config 802 1x authorization network radius disable Success DES 3528 5 225 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config 802 1x fwd_pdu ports Purpo
479. ode 100BASE FX WDM transceiver Supported 1 DEM 330T TX 1550 RX 1310nm up to 10km Single Mode 2 DEM 330R TX 1310 RX 1550 nm up to 10km Single Mode 3 DEM 331T TX 1550 RX 1310 nm up to 40km Single Mode 4 DEM 331R TX 1310 RX 1550 nm up to 40km Single Mode Network Cables Cat 5 Enhanced for 1000BASE T UTP Cat 5 Cat 5 Enhanced for 100BASE TX UTP Cat 3 4 5 for 1OBASE T EIA TIA 568 100 ohm screened twisted pair STP 100m 509 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Physical and Environmental Internal Power Supply DES 3528 Input 100 240V AC 0 5A Max 50 60Hz Output 12V 1 2A Max Internal universal power supply DES 3552 Input 100 240V AC 0 8A Max 50 60Hz Output 12V 2 1A Max Internal universal power supply DES 3528P Input 100 240V AC 6 3A Max 50 60Hz Output 50V 7 5A Max 12V 1 4A Max Internal universal power supply DES 3528DC DC Power Input 36 75V DC 0 6A Max Output 12V 1 2A Max Internal universal power supply DES 3528 DES 3552 Provides one connector on the rear panel to install an optional external RPS DPS 200 to enhance the reliability When the internal power fails the optional external RPS will take over all the power immediately and automatically DES 3528P Provides one connector on the rear panel to install an optional external RPS DPS 600 to enhance the reliability When the internal power fails the
480. of 255 characters is allowed A NULL string is accepted if there is no location desired Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the Switch location for HQ 5F DES 3528 5 config snmp system_location HQ 5F Command config snmp system_location HQ 5F Success DES 3528 5 config snmp system_name Purpose Used to configure the name for the Switch Syntax config snmp system_name lt sw_name gt Description This command configures the name of the Switch Parameters lt sw_name gt A maximum of 255 characters is allowed A NULL string is accepted if no name is desired Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the Switch name for DES 3526 Switch 54 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config snmp system_name DES 3526 Switch Command config snmp system_name DES 3526 Switch Success DES 3528 enable snmp Purpose Used to enable the SNMP interface access function Syntax enable snmp Description This command is used to enable the SNMP function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable snmp on the Switch DES 3528 5 enable snmp Command enable snmp Success DES 3528 5 disable snmp Purpose Used to d
481. of ports that will be configured for traffic segmentation all Specifies all the ports that will be configured for traffic segmentation forward_list Specifies a range of ports that will receive forwarded frames from the ports specified in the portlist above e _null No ports are specified e all All ports are specified e lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports for the forwarding list This list must be on the same Switch previously specified for traffic segmentation i e following the lt portlist gt specified above for config traffic_segmentation Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure ports through 10 to be able to forward frames to port 11 through 15 DES 3528 5 config traffic_segmentation 1 10 forward_list 11 15 Command config traffic_segmentation 1 10 forward_list 11 15 Success DES 3528 5 show traffic_segmentation Purpose Used to display the current traffic segmentation configuration on the Switch Syntax show traffic_segmentation lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the current traffic segmentation configuration on the Switch Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports for which the current traffic segmentation configuration on the Switch will be displayed Restrictions The port lists for segmentation and the forwarding list must be on the same Switch Example usage
482. ol_name 12 gt lt network_address gt This command Specifies the network for the DHCP pool The addresses in the network are free to be assigned to the DHCP client The prefix length specifies the number of bits that comprise the address prefix The prefix is an alternative way of specifying the network mask of the client The prefix length must be preceded by a forward slash When the DHCP server receives a request from the client the server will automatically find a pool to allocate the address If the request is relayed to the server by the intermediate device the server will match the gateway IP address carried in the packet against the network of each DHCP pool The pool which has the longest match will be selected If the request packet is not through relay then the server will match the IP address of the IPIF that receives the request packet against the network of each DHCP pool lt pool name 12 gt Spcifies the name of the pool lt network address gt Specifies the IP address that the DHCP server may assign to clients Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure the address range of the DHCP address pool DES 3528 5 config dhcp pool network_addr accounting 10 10 10 0 24 Command config dhcp pool network_addr accounting 10 10 10 0 24 475 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config dhcp pool domain_name Purpose Used to spe
483. om 10 48 74 121 time lt 10ms Reply from 10 48 74 121 time lt 10ms Ping statistics for 10 48 74 121 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 DES 3528 5 64 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual NETWORK MONITORING COMMANDS The network monitoring commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table feces POSS feabegsog fssebiesyseg wss i create syslog host lt index 1 4 gt severity informational warning all facility localO local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7 udp port lt udp_port_number gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt state enable disable config syslog host all lt index 1 4 gt severity informational warning all facility localO local local2 locals local4 local5 local6 local7 udp port lt udp_port_number gt ipaddress lt ipaddr gt state enable disable pshowlog_save timing fe unit lt unit_id 1 8 gt index lt value_list gt EOT PT Each command is listed in detail in the following sections show packet ports Purpose Used to display statistics about the packets sent and received by the Switch Syntax show packet ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display statistics about packets sent and received by ports specified in the lt portlist gt Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a por
484. om the list above local7 Specifies that local use 7 messages will be sent to the remote host This corresponds to number 23 from the list above udp_port lt udp_port_number gt Specifies the UDP port number that the syslog protocol will use to send messages to the remote host state enable disable Allows the sending of syslog messages to the remote host specified above to be enabled and disabled Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To create a Syslog host DES 3528 5 create syslog host 1 severity all facility localO ipaddress 1 1 1 1 Command create syslog host 1 severity all facility localO ipaddress 1 1 1 1 Success DES 3528 5 config syslog host Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Used to configure the syslog protocol to send system log data to a remote host config syslog host all lt index 1 4 gt severity informational warning all facility localO local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local6 local7 udp_port lt udp_port_numbers ipaddress lt ipaddr gt state enable disable This command is used to configure the syslog protocol to send system log information to a remote host lt index 1 4 gt Specifies that the command will be applied to an index of hosts There are four available indexes numbered 1 through 4 ipaddress lt ipaddr gt Specifies the IP address of the remote host where syslog messages will b
485. on in the data field of the DHCP reply packet The TFTP server must be running and have the requested configuration file in its base directory when the request is received from the Switch Consult the DHCP server and TF TP server software instructions for information on loading a configuration file If the Switch is unable to complete the autoconfiguration process the previously saved local configuration file present in Switch memory will be loaded Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command mice NOTE Dual purpose DHCP TFTP server utility software may require entry of the d configuration file name and path within the user interface Alternatively the DHCP software li may require creating a separate ext file with the configuration file name and path in a specific l directory on the server Consult the documentation for the DCHP server software if users are unsure Example usage To enable autoconfiguration on the Switch DES 3528 5 enable autoconfig Command enable autoconfig Success DES 3528 5 When autoconfig is enabled and the Switch is rebooted the normal login screen will appear for a few moments while the autoconfig request i e download configuration is initiated The console will then display the configuration parameters as they are loaded from the configuration file specified in the DHCP or TFIP server This is exactly the same as using a download configuration command After the entire
486. on protocol enabled the Switch will send authentication packets to a remote TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host ona remote host The TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server host will then verify or deny the request and return the appropriate message to the Switch More than one authentication protocol can be run on the same physical server host but remember that TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS are separate entities and are not compatible with each other The maximum supported number of server hosts is 16 Parameters server_host lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the remote server host the user wishes to alter protocol The protocol used by the server host The user may choose one of the following tacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol xtacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the XTACACS protocol tacacs Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the TACACS protocol radius Enter this parameter if the server host utilizes the RADIUS protocol port lt int 1 65535 gt Enter a number between 7 and 65535 to define the virtual port number of the authentication protocol on a server host The default port number is 49 for TACACS XTACACS TACACS servers and 1872 and 1813 for RADIUS servers but the user may set a unique port number for higher security key lt key_string 254 gt Authentication key to be shared with a configured TACACS or RADIUS server only S
487. on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable IGMP snooping on the Switch DES 3528 5 disable igmp snooping Command disable igmp snooping Success show igmp_snooping Purpose Used to show the current status of IGMP snooping on the Switch Syntax show igmp_ snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt Description This command will display the current IGMP snooping configuration on the Switch Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view the IGMP snooping configuration lt vidlist gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured Restrictions None Example usage To show IGMP snooping 196 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show igmp_snooping Command show igmp_ snooping IGMP Snooping Global State Data Driven Learning Max Entries VLAN Name Query Interval Max Response Time Robustness Value Last Member Query Interval Querier State Querier Role Querier IP Querier Expiry Time State Fast Leave Report Suppression Rate Limit Version Data Driven Learning State Data Driven Learning Aged Out Data Driven Group Expiry Time Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 show router_ports Purpose Syntax forbidden Description Parameters Enabled 128 default 125 10 2 1 Enable
488. onfig dscp map DES 3528 5 config dscp map 1 8 dscp priority 1 to 1 Command config dscp map 1 8 dscp_ priority 1 to 1 Success DES 3528 5 show dscp map Purpose Used to display the DSCP map configure parameter Syntax show dscp map lt portlist gt dscp_priotity dscp_dscp dscp_color dscp lt dscp_list gt Description This command is used to show DSCFP trusted portlist and mapped color priority and DSCP Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to display dscp Specifies DSCP value that will be mapped Restrictions None Example usage This show dscp map DES 3528 5 show dscp map dscp_color Command show dscp map dscp_color DSCP to Color mapping Port 1 DSCP 0 7 is mapped to Green DSCP 8 15 17 is mapped to Yellow DSCP 16 18 63 is mapped to Red DES 3528 5 config 802 1p map Purpose Used to configure mapping of 1p to packet s initial color Syntax config 802 1p map lt portlist gt all 1p color lt priority_list to green red yellow Description This command is used to configure mapping of 1p to packet s initial color The mapping of 1p to color will be used to determine the initial color of the packet when the policing function of the packet is color aware and the packet is 1p trusted Parameters portlist A range of ports to configure priority source priority of incoming packets color mapped color for packet default value is green Restrictions
489. onfiguration lt config_id 1 2 gt boot_up delete active lt ipaddr gt times lt value 1 255 gt timeout lt sec 1 99 gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections download Purpose Used to download and install new firmware or a Switch configuration file from a TFTP server Syntax download firmware_fromTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename 64 gt image_id lt int 1 2 gt unit all lt unitid 1 8 gt cfg_fromTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename 64 gt lt config_id 1 2 gt increment Description This command is used to download a new firmware or a Switch configuration file from a TFTP server Parameters firmware_fromTFTP Download and install new firmware on the Switch from a TFTP server cfg_fromTFTP Download a switch configuration file from a TFTP server lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the TFTP server lt path_filename gt The DOS path and filename of the firmware or switch configuration file on the TFTP server For example C 3528 had image_id lt int 1 2 gt Specify the working section ID The Switch can hold two firmware versions for the user to select from which are specified by section ID unit Specifies which unit s on the stacking system can download and install new firmware from a TF IP server If it is not specified it refers to all the units For example unit 1 3 conftig_id Specifies configuration ID in the system If it is not specified it refers to
490. onfigured manual binding entries DES 3528 5 show dhcp pool manual_binding Command show dhcp pool manual_binding 192 168 0 1 00 08 C8 08 13 88 Ethernet 192 168 0 2 00 80 C8 08 13 99 Etherent Total Entries 2 DES 3528 5 show dhcp pool Purpose Used to display the information for DHCP pool Syntax show dhcp pool lt pool_name 12 gt Description If the name is not specified information for all pools will be displayed Parameters lt pool name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool Restrictions None Example usage To display dhcp pool entries DES 3528 5 show dhcp pool accounting Command show dhcp pool accounting Pool Name accounting Network Address 10 10 10 0 24 Domain Name 10 10 10 0 24 DNS Server 10 10 10 1 NetBIOS Name Server 10 10 10 1 NetBIOS Node Type Hybrid Default Router 10 10 10 Pool Lease Infinite Boot File boot had Next Server 192 168 0 1 Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 483 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable dhcp_server Purpose Used to enable the DHCP server function Syntax enable dhcp_server Description If the DHCP relay is enabled the DHCP server cannot be enabled The opposite is also true Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the dhcp_server DES 3528 5 enable dhcp_server Command enable dhcp_serv
491. onsole will log out the current user if there is no user input for 15 minutes Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure baud rate DES 3528 5 config serial_port baud_rate 115200 Command config serial_port baud_rate 115200 Success DES 3528 5 15 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual NOTE If a user configures the serial ports baud rate the baud rate will take effect and save Soa immediately Baud rate settings will not change even if the user resets or reboots the Switch The diy Baud rate will only change when the user configures It again The serial port s baud rate setting is not stored in the Switch s configuration file Resetting the Switch will not restore the baud rate to the default setting enable clipaging Purpose Used to pause the scrolling of the console screen when a command displays more than one page Syntax enable clipaging Description This command is used when issuing a command which causes the console screen to rapidly scroll through several pages This command will cause the console to pause at the end of each page The default setting is enabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable pausing of the screen display when the show command output reaches the end of the page DES 3528 5
492. oop max_entry ports lt portlist gt binding entry port lt port gt config address_binding dhcp_snoop lt portlist gt all limit lt value 1 50 gt no_limit max_entry ports config address_binding recover_learning ports lt portlist gt all Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress Purpose Used to create an IP MAC Port Binding entry in the white list Syntax create address _ binding ip_mac ipaddress lt ipaddr gt mac_address lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all mode arp acl Description This command is used to create an IP MAC Port Binding entry Parameters lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the device where the IP MAC Port Binding is made lt macadadr gt The MAC address of the device where the IP MAC Port binding is made lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured for address binding all Specifies that all ports on the switch will be configured for address binding mode This command is used to be compatible with Release 1 CLI firmware Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create address binding entry on the Switch 152 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 create address _binding ip_mac ipaddress 10 1 1 3 mac_address 00 00 00 00 00 04
493. ooping multicast_vlan This command is used for the MLD Multicast VLAN to take effect The MSM VLAN will take effect when MLD snooping multicast VLAN is enabled None Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To enable MLD Multicast VLAN DES 3528 5 enable mld_snooping multicast_vlan Command enable mld_snooping multicast_vlan Success DES 3528 5 189 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable mid_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to disable the MLD Multicast VLAN function Syntax disable mld_snooping multicast_vlan Description This command is used to disable the MLD Multicast VLAN function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable MLD Multicast VLAN DES 3528 5 disable mld_snooping multicast_vlan Command disable mld_snooping multicast_vlan Success DES 3528 5 show mid_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to show the information of MLD multicast VLAN Syntax show mlid_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command allows you to show the information of an MLD multicast VLAN Parameters lt vian_name gt The name of the multicast VLAN to be shown If not specified all MLD multicast VLANs will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To show MLD multicast VLAN 190 xStack DES 352
494. opped By Multicast VLAN O O O O O O Report amp Leave IGMP v1 Report IGMP v2 Report IGMP v3 Report IGMP v2 Leave Total Dropped By Rate Limitation Dropped By Max Group Limitation Dropped By Group Filter Dropped By Multicast VLAN O O O O O O O O O Transmit Statistics Query IGMP vl Query 0 IGMP v2 Query 0 IGMP v3 Query 14 Total 14 Report amp Leave IGMP vl Report IGMP v2 Report IGMP v3 Report IGMP v2 Leave Total O O O O O Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 204 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual clear igmp_snooping statistic counter Purpose Used to clear the current IGMP snooping statistic on the Switch Syntax clear igmp_snooping statistic counter Description All IGMP snooping statistic counters will be cleared Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear IGMP snooping statistic counter DES 3528 5 clear igmp_snooping statistic counter Command clear igmp_snooping statistic counter Success DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry Purpose Used to configure the max number of groups that can be learned by data driven Syntax config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning max_learned_entry lt value 1 1024 gt Description This command is used to configure the maximum number of groups that can be learned by data driven When the ta
495. or authentication and can be responsible for receiving user connection requests authenticating the user and returning all configuration information necessary for the client to deliver service through the user RADIUS may be facilitated on this Switch using the commands listed in this section In order for the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS security function to work properly a TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server must be configured on a device other than the Switch called a server host and it must include usernames and passwords for authentication When the user is prompted by the Switch to enter usernames and passwords for authentication the Switch contacts the TACACS XTACACS TACACS RADIUS server to verify and the server will respond with one of three messages A The server verifies the username and password and the user is granted normal user privileges on the Switch B The server will not accept the username and password and the user is denied access to the Switch C The server doesn t respond to the verification query At this point the Switch receives the timeout from the server and then moves to the next method of verification configured in the method list The Switch has four built in server groups one for each of the TACACS XTACACS TACACS and RADIUS protocols These built in server groups are used to authenticate users trying to access the Switch The users will set server hosts in a preferable order in the built
496. or delete Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add port 5 to static group 226 1 1 1 on VID 1 DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping static_group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 add 5 Command config igmp_snooping static_group vlanid 1 226 1 1 1 add 5 Success DES 3528 5 show igmp_snooping statistic counter Purpose Used to view the current IGMP snooping statistics on the Switch Syntax show igmp_snooping statistic counter vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to view this information snooping must be enabled first Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view IGMP snooping statistic counter lt vidlist gt The list of the VLAN IDs for which to view IGMP snooping statistic counter lt portlist gt The list of the ports for which to view IGMP snooping statistic counter Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To view IGMP snooping statistic on VID 1 203 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show igmp snooping statistic counter vlanid 1 Command show igmp_ snooping statistic counter vlanid 1 VLAN Name default Group Number Receive Statistics Query IGMP vl Query IGMP v2 Query IGMP v3 Query Total Dropped By Rate Limitation Dr
497. or level users can issue this command Example usage To clear port 1 OAM statistics DES 3528 5 clear ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics Command clear ethernet_oam ports 1 statistics Success DES 3528 5 470 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual clear ethernet_oam ports event_log Purpose Used to clear Ethernet OAM event log Syntax clear ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all event_log Description This command is used to clear ports Ethernet OAM event log information Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to clear the event log Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear port 1 OAM event DES 3528 5 clear ethernet_oam ports 1 event_log Command clear ethernet_oam ports 1 event_log Success DES 3528 5 471 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DHCP SERVER COMMANDS The DHCP Server commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table show dhep excluded_address lt pool name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt config dhcp pool lt pool_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt netbios name_server config dhcp pool lt pool_name 12 gt broadcast peer_to_peer mixed hybrid netbios node_type lt
498. ore configuring the multicast VLAN member port by using this command the multicast VLAN must be created first Parameters lt vian_name32 gt The name of the VLAN to be created Each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters member_port Adds a range of member ports to the multicast VLAN They will become the untagged member port of the MLD multicast VLAN source_port Adds a range of source ports to the multicast VLAN untag_source_port Adds a range of untagged source ports to the multicast VLAN The PVID of the untag source port will be automatically changed to the multicast VLAN It shall be only one kind of source port tag or untag for an ISM VLAN tag_member_port Specifies the tagged member port of the MLD multicast VLAN state enable or disable multicast VLAN for the chosen VLAN replace_source_ip With the MLD snooping function the MLD report packet sent by the host will be forwarded to the source port Before the forwarding of the packet the source IP address in the join packet needs to be replaced by this IPv6 address remap_priority Associates the remap priority value 0 to 7 with the data traffic and is forwarded on the multicast VLAN If none is specified the packet s original priority will be used The default setting is none Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config MLD multicast VLAN mvl DES 3528 5 confi
499. orithm AES256 This parameter will enable or disable the Advanced Encryption Standard AES256 encryption algorithm arcfour This parameter will enable or disable the Arcfour encryption algorithm blowfish This parameter will enable or disable the Blowfish encryption algorithm cast128 This parameter will enable or disable the Cast128 encryption algorithm twofish128 This parameter will enable or disable the twofish128 encryption algorithm twofish192 This parameter will enable or disable the twofish1 92 encryption algorithm MD5 This parameter will enable or disable the MD5 Message Digest encryption algorithm SHAT This parameter will enable or disable the Secure Hash Algorithm encryption RSA This parameter will enable or disable the RSA encryption algorithm DSA This parameter will enable or disable the Digital Signature Algorithm encryption enable disable This allows the user to enable or disable algorithms entered in this command on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage example To configure SSH algorithm DES 3528 5 config ssh algorithm blowfish enable Command config ssh algorithm blowfish enable Success DES 3528 5 show ssh algorithm Purpose Used to display the SSH algorithm setting Syntax show ssh algorithm Description This command will display the current SSH algorithm setting status Parameters None
500. ority lower than the new port the port with the lowest priority will be disconnected This process will stop until enough power is released for the new port Note that if the disconnect_method is set to deny_ low_priority_port then the power provision can utilize the system s maximum power Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the PoE system wide settings 446 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528P 5 config poe system power_limit 250 power_disconnect_method deny _low_priority_ port Command config poe system power_limit 250 power_disconnect_method deny _low_priority_ port Success DES 3528P 5 config poe ports Purpose Used to configure the PoE port settings Syntax config poe ports all lt portlist gt state enable disable time_range lt range_name 32 gt clear_time_range priority critical high low power _limit class_0 class_1 class_2 class_3 user_define lt value 1000 35000 gt 1 Description This command is used to configure the PoE port settings Parameters portlist Specifies the list of ports whose setting is under configuration state When the state is set to disable power will not be supplied to the powered device connected to this port time_range Specifies a range of the time to the port set as POE If time range is configured the power can only be s
501. ort Purpose Used to configure the TCP port that the WAC Switch listens to Syntax config wac switch_http_port lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt http https Description This command is used to identify the HTTP or HTTPs packets that will be trapped to the CPU for authentication processing or to access the login page If not specified the default port number for HTTP is 80 and the default port number for HTTPS is 443 If no protocol is specified the protocol is HTTP The HTTP cannot run at TCP port 443 and the HTTPS cannot run at TCP port 80 Parameters lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt A TCP port which the WAC Switch listens to and uses to finish the authenticating process htto To specify that WAC runs HTTP protocol on this TCP port httos To specify that WAC runs HTTPS protocol on this TCP port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the WAC switch http port DES 3528 5 config wac switch_http_port 8888 http Command config wac switch_http_ port 8888 http Success DES 3528 5 440 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config wac user Used to configure the VLAN ID of the user account Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage config wac user lt username 15 gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt clear_vlan This co
502. orwarding database Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides lt macaddr gt The MAC address that will be added to the forwarding table Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create multicast MAC forwarding DES 3528 5 create multicast fdb default 01 00 00 00 00 01 Command create multicast fdb default 01 00 00 00 00 01 Success DES 3528 5 94 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config multicast_fdb Purpose Used to configure the Switch s multicast MAC address forwarding database Syntax config multicast_fdb lt vlan_name 32 gt lt macaddr gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command configures the multicast MAC address forwarding table Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the MAC address resides lt macaddr gt The MAC address that will be added to the multicast forwarding table add delete add will add ports to the forwarding table delete will remove ports from the multicast forwarding table lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add multicast MAC forwarding DES 3528 5 config multicast_fdb default 01 00 00 00 00 01 add 1 5 Command config mul
503. ote PC and manage the Switch using secure in band communication The Secure Shell SSH commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table C e aaa O config ssh server maxsession lt int 1 8 gt contimeout lt sec 120 600 gt authfail lt int 2 20 gt rekey 10min 30min 60min never port lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt 1 show ssh server config ssh user lt username gt authmode hostbased hostname lt domain_name gt hostname_ P lt domain_name gt eS password publickey show ssh user authmode ssh show ssh user authmode authmode config ssh algorithm Pa AES128 AES192 AES256 arcfour blowfish cast128 twofish128 twofish192 twofish256 MD5 SHA1 RSA DSA enable disable show ssh algorithm ssh show ssh algorithm Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable ssh Purpose Used to enable SSH Syntax enable ssh Description This command allows users to enable SSH on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage example To enable SSH 328 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable ssh Command enable ssh TELNET will be disabled when enable SSH Success DES 3528 5 disable ssh Purpose Used to disable SSH Syntax disable ssh Description
504. otection ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable mode drop block disable 1 Description This command is used to setup the BPDU Attack Protection function for the ports on the switch Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured all In order to set all ports in the system you may use the all parameter state Specifies the state of BPDU Attack Protection The default state is disable enable Enables the port or ports for BPDU Attack Protection disable Disables the port or ports for BPDU Attack Protection mode Specifies the BPDU Attack Protection mode The default mode is drop drop Will drop all RX BPDU packets when the port enters under_attack state block Will drop all RX packets include BPDU and normal packets when the port enters under_attack state disable Will shut down the port when the port enters under_attack state the port enters under_attack state while in drop and block fo NOTE The RX BPDU Attack Protection takes affect only when mode Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the BPDU Attack Protection mode to drop for port 1 457 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config bpdu_protection ports 1 state enable mode drop Command config bpdu_protection ports 1 state enable mode drop config bpdu_protect
505. other profiles where the lowest profile ID has the highest priority add access_id lt value 1 100 gt Adds an additional rule to the above specified access profile The value is used to index the rule created ethernet Specifies that the Switch will look only into the layer 2 part of each packet vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Specifies that the access profile will only apply to this VLAN vian_id lt value 1 4094 gt Specifies that the access prfile will only apply to this VLAN ID source_mac lt macadadr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to this source MAC address destination_mac lt macadadr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to this destination MAC address ethernet_type lt hex 0x0 0xffff gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets with this hexadecimal 802 1Q Ethernet type value in the packet header ip Specifies that the Switch will look into the IP fields in each packet 255 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config cpu access_profile Parameters vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Specifies that the access profile will only apply to this VLAN vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt Specifies that the access prfile will only apply to this VLAN ID source_ip lt ipaddr gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only packets with this source IP address de
506. p Log Disabled DHCP Snoop Disabled DES 3528 5 To show IP MAC Port Binding entries DES 3528 5 show address_binding ip_mac all Command show address_binding ip_mac all IP Address MAC Address Mode Ports 00 00 00 00 00 05 Static 1 28 Total Entries DES 3528 5 To show IP MAC Port Binding blocked MAC entries DES 3528 5 show address_binding blocked all Command show address_binding blocked all VID VLAN Name MAC Address default 00 05 5D 0B AD A5 default 00 05 5D 65 76 60 default 00 OF EA 13 4F 4A default 00 15 E9 85 BD 3F default 00 16 36 8A 42 CB default 00 16 76 33 FC 88 default 00 1A 4D 65 FE A5 default 00 1B 11 C8 55 CB PPP PP Pp Pp Pp PPP PP PP Pp Total Entries DES 3528 5 To show IP MAC Port Binding ports DES 3528 5 show address_binding ports Command show address_binding ports DHCP Packet Stop Learning Threshold Mode Forward 60 Normal Strict Forward 500 Normal Strict Forward 500 Normal Strict Forward 500 Normal Strict Forward 500 Normal Strict Forward 500 Normal Strict Forward 500 Normal 157 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Strict Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Not Allow Allow Allow Allow Allow Allow Allow Allow Allow Allow Allow Allow Allow Forward Forward Forward Forward
507. p conflict_ip clear ethernet_oam ports clear fdb clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group clear igmp_snooping statistic counter clear jwac auth_state clear log clear mac_based_access_control auth_state clear mld_snooping data_driven_group clear mld_snooping statistic counter fe Quit hi Next Page iygya Next Entry M All Figure 2 2 The Command When users enter a command without its required parameters the CLI will prompt users with a Next possible completions message DES 3528 5 config account Command config account Next possible completions lt username gt DES 3528 5 Figure 2 3 Example Command Parameter Help In this case the command config account was entered with the parameter lt username gt The CLI will then prompt users to enter the lt username gt with the message Next possible completions Every command in the CLI has this feature and complex commands have several layers of parameter prompting In addition after typing any given command plus one space users can see all of the next possible sub commands in sequential order by repeatedly pressing the Tab key To re enter the previous command at the command prompt press the up arrow cursor key The previous command will appear at the command prompt DES 3528 5 config account Command config account Next possible completions lt username gt DES 3528 5 config account Command config account Next possible completions lt username
508. p messages You might lower this interval to reduce the amount of time it takes a router to detect the loss of the last listener of a group state Allows you to enable or disable the MLD snooping function for the chosen VLAN Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the MLD snooping querier query interval to 125 secs and state enable DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping querier vlan default query _interval 125 state enable Command config mld_snooping querier vlan default query_interval 125 state enable Success DES 3528 5 406 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config mld_snooping mrouter_ports Purpose Used to configure ports as router ports Syntax config mld_snooping mrouter_ports vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command allows you to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicast enabled routers This will ensure that all packets sent to VLAN with the specified router port list will be forwarded to the port list regardless of protocols Parameters vlan_name The name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be configured add delete Specifies to add or delete the router ports portlist Specifies a range of ports to be configured Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command
509. p_name lt name 32 gt Description This command creates a protocol group for protocol VLAN function Parameters eroup_id The ID of a protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols group_name The name of the protocol group The maximum length is 32 characters Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a protocol group DES 3528 5 create dotlv_protocol_group group_id 1 group_name General_Group Command create dotlv_protocol_ group group_id 1 group_name General_ Group Success DES 3528 5 126 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config dot1v_protocol_group Purpose Used to add delete a protocol to from a protocol group Syntax config dotiv_protocol_group group_id lt id 1 16 gt group_name lt name 32 gt add protocol ethernet_2 ieee802 3_ snap ieees02 3 IIc lt protocol value gt delete protocol ethernet_2 ieee802 3_ snap ieees802 3_Ilc lt protocol value gt Description This command adds deletes a protocol to from a protocol group The selection of a protocol can be a pre defined protocol type or a user specified protocol type Parameters group_id The id of protocol group which is used to identify a set of protocols group_name The name of the protocol group The maximum length is 32 chars protocol_value The protoocl viaue is used to identify a protocol of the
510. pecifies that communication between the specified user and a specified network will occur NNI Network to Network Interface speficies that communication between two specified networks will occur missdrop enable disable C VLAN based SP VLAN assignment miss drop outer_tpid Allows the interoperation with devices on a public network by specifying ports use_inner_priority Specifies whether to use the priority in the C VLAN tag as the priority in the SP VLAN tag vian_preservation Specifies to enable or disable VLAN preservation add_inner_tag Specifies whether to add inner tag for ingress untagged packets If set the inner tag will be added for the ingress untagged packets and thus the packets egress to the NNI port will be double tagged If disable only s tag will be added for ingress untagged packets Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command You must be in the Q in Q mode Example usage To config port list 1 4 as NNI port set outer TPID to 0x88a8 DES 3528 5 config qinq ports 1 4 role nni outer_tpid 0x88a8 Command config ging ports 1 4 role nni outer_tpid 0x88a8s Success DES 3528 5 show ging ports Purpose Used to show global Q in Q and port s Q in Q mode status Syntax show ging ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to show the Q in Q configuration for a port include port role in Q in Q mode enable disable to drop the SP VLAN assign
511. pecify an alphanumeric string up to 254 characters or choose none timeout lt int 1 255 gt Enter the time in seconds the Switch will wait for the server host to reply to an authentication request The default value is 5 seconds retransmit lt int 1 255 gt Enter the value in the retransmit field to change how many times the device will resend an authentication request when the server does not respond This field is inoperable for the TACACS protocol Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure a TACACS authentication server host with port number 4321 a timeout value of 12 seconds and a retransmit count of 4 DES 3528 5 config authen server_host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs port 4321 timeout 12 retransmit 4 Command config authen server_host 10 1 1 121 protocol tacacs port 4321 timeout 12 retransmit 4 Success DES 3528 5 320 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete authen server_host Purpose Used to delete a user defined authentication server host Syntax delete authen server_host lt ipaddr gt protocol tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius Description This command is used to delete a user defined authentication server host previously created on the Switch Parameters server_host lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the remote server host to be deleted protocol The protocol used by the server host t
512. perate based on the guest VLAN configured by the single authentication module s command If the single authentication module s guest VLAN command for example JWAC has no guest VLAN command is not available the port will not be in guest VLAN mode If Multiple authentication mode is not none The port is doing the multiple authentication The port will be operated based on the guest VLAN configured by the common authentication command Parameters vian_name Assign a name of a guest VLAN The VLAN must be an existing static VLAN vianid Assign a VLAN ID of a guest VLAN The VLAN must be an existing static VLAN add Specifies to add a port list to the guest VLAN delete Specifies to delete a port list from the guest VLAN portlist Specifies the configured port s Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure authentication guest VLAN ports DES 3528 5 config authentication guest_vlan vlan RG add ports all Command config authentication guest_vlan vlan RG add ports all Success DES 3528 5 431 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config authentication ports Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure security ports config authentication ports lt portlist gt all auth_mode port_based host_based multi_authen_methods none
513. ple usage To configure the Switch s MAC address table notification global settings DES 3528 5 config mac_notification interval 1 historysize 500 Command config mac_notification interval 1 historysize 500 Success DES 3528 5 config mac_notification ports Purpose Used to configure MAC address notification status settings Syntax config mac_notification ports lt portlist gt all enable disable Description This command is used to monitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the FDB Parameters lt portlist gt Specify a port or range of ports to be configured all Entering this command will set all ports on the system enable disable These commands will enable or disable MAC address table notification on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable port 7 for MAC address table notification DES 3528 5 config mac_notification ports 7 enable Command config mac_notification ports 7 enable Success DES 3528 5 show mac_notification Purpose Used to display the Switch s MAC address table notification global settings Syntax show mac_ notification Description This command is used to display the Switch s MAC address table notification global settings Parameters None Restrictions None 305 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To vi
514. pool_ name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt lt ipaddr gt create dhcp pool manual_binding lt pool_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt hardware_address lt macaddr gt type Ethernet IEEE802 e e PO owes o Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 472 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create dhcp excluded_address Purpose Used to specify the IP addresses that the DHCP server will not assign to DHCP client Syntax create dhcp excluded_address begin_address lt ipaddr gt end_address lt ipaddr gt Description The DHCP server assumes that all IP addresses in a DHCP pool subnet are available for assigning to DHCP clients This command is used to specify the IP address that the DHCP server should not assign to clients This command can be used multiple times in order to define multiple groups of excluded addresses Parameters lt ipaddr gt Specifies the beginning and end of the IP address range Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create the IP address that the DHCP server should not assign to clients DES 3528 5 create dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10 10 10 1 end address 10 10 10 10 Command create dhcp excluded_address begin_address 10 10 10 1 end_address 10 10 10 10 delete dhcp excluded_address Purpose Used to specify the IP addresses that the DHCP server will
515. port Therefore supposed that a port is a dynamic member port learned by MLD If this port is configured as a static member later then the MLD protocol will stop operating on this port The MLD protocol will resume once this port is removed from static member ports The static member port will only affect MLD v1 operation vlan The name of the VLAN that has been configured vianid The ID of the VLAN that has been configured joaddr Specifies the multicast group IP address for Layer 3 switch add delete Specifies to add or delete the member ports portlist Specifies a port number or a range of ports to be configured Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To unset port range 9 10 from MLD Snooping static member ports for group 239 1 1 1 on default VLAN DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E 1 add 2 9 2 10 Command config mld_snooping static_group vlan default FF1E 1 add 2 9 2 10 Success DES 3528 5 delete mid_snooping static_group Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to delete a MLD Snooping multicast static group delete mid_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipv6addr gt This command is used to delete a MLD Snooping multicast static group and will not affect the MLD snooping dynamic member ports for a group vlan The name of the VLAN on which the router por
516. ports lt portlist gt all basic_tivs all port_description system_name system_description system_capabilities enable disable Description An active LLDP port on the switch always includes the mandatory data in its outbound advertisements And there are four optional data that can be configured for an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of these data types from outbound LLDP advertisements The mandatory data type include four basic types of information end of LLDPDU TLV chassis ID TLV port ID TLV and Time to Live TLV The mandatory type cannot be disabled There are also four data types which can be optionally selected They are port_description system_name system_description and system_capability Parameters lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured all Use this parameter to set all ports in the system port_description This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit Port Description TLV on the port The default state is disabled system_name This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit System Name TLV The default state is disabled system_description This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit System Description TLV The default state is disabled system_capabilities This TLV optional data type indicates that LLDP agent should transmit System Capabilities TLV
517. profile_id 2 profile name MOD Success DES 3528 5 165 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config mcast_filter_profile Purpose Used to add or delete a range of multicast addresses to the profile Syntax config mcast_filter_profile profile_id lt value 1 24 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt profile_name lt name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcast_address _list gt 1 Description This command allows the user to add or delete a range of multicast IP addresses previously defined Parameters profile_id ID of the profile The range is 7 to 24 profile_name Provides a meaningful description for the profile mceast_address_list List of the multicast addresses to be put in the profile You can either specifiy a single multicast IP address or a range of multicast addresses using Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config a multicast filter profile DES 3528 5 config mcast_filter_ profile profile_id 2 add 225 1 1 1 225 1 1 1 Command config mcast_filter_profile profile_id 2 add 225 1 1 1 225 1 1 1 Success DES 3528 5 delete mcast_filter_profile profile _id Purpose Used to delete a multicast address profile Syntax delete mcast_filter_profile profile_id lt value 1 24 gt all Description This command deletes a multicast address profile Parameters profile_id ID of the profil
518. ption This command is used to update the STP instance configuration settings on the Switch The MSTP will utilize the priority in selecting the root bridge root port and designated port Assigning higher priorities to STP regions will instruct the Switch to give precedence to the selected instance_id for forwarding packets The lower the priority value set the higher the priority Parameters priority lt value 0 61440 gt Select a value between 0 and 61440 to specify the priority for a specified instance ID for forwarding packets The lower the value the higher the priority This value must be divisible by 4096 instance_id lt value 0 15 gt Enter the value corresponding to the previously configured instance ID of which the user wishes to set the priority value An instance id of 0 denotes the default instance_id CIST internally set on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the priority value for instance_id 2 as 4096 DES 3528 5 config stp priority 4096 instance_id 2 Command config stp priority 4096 instance_id 2 Success DES 3528 5 config stp mst _config_id Purpose Used to update the MSTP configuration identification Syntax config stp mst_config_id revision_level lt int 0 65535 gt name lt string 32 gt 1 Description This command will uniquely identify the MSTP configuration currently configured on the Switch Information enter
519. que combinations of IP addresses and UDP port numbers Parameters owner The entity making use of this sflow analyzer_server When owner is set or modified the timeout value will become 400 automatically tmeout The length of time before the server is timed out When the analyzer_server times out all of the flow_samplers and counter_pollers associated with this analyzer_server will be deleted infinite indicates that analyzer_server never times out If not specified its default value is 400 collectoraddress The IP address of the analyzer_server If not specified the address will be 0 0 0 0 which means that the entry will be inactive collectorport The destination UDP port for sending the sFlow datagrams If not specified the default value is 6364 maxdatagramsize The maximum number of data bytes that can be packed in a single sample datagram If not specified the default value is 1400 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create the sflow analyzer_server DES 3528 5 create sflow analyzer _server 1 owner monitor Command create sflow analyzer_server 1 owner monitor Success DES 3528 5 config sflow analyzer_server Purpose Used to configure the analyzer_server information Syntax config sflow analyzer_server lt value 1 4 gt timeout lt sec 1 2000000 gt infinte collectoraddress lt ipaddrs gt collectorport lt udp_port_
520. r gt type Ethernet IEEE802 An address binding is a mapping between the IP address and MAC address of a client The IP address of a client can be assigned manually by an administrator or assigned automatically from a pool by a DHCP server The dynamic binding entry will be created when an IP address is assigned to the client from the pool network s address When creating a DHCP pool manual binding entry if the type is not specified then the type will be defaulted to ethernet For the match operation the hardward type and the hardware address field in the protocol fields will be used to match against the entry The IP address specified in the manual binding entry must be a range within the network used by the DHCP pool If the user specifies a conflict IP address an error message will be returned If a number of manual binding entries are created and the network address for the pool is changed so that a conflict occurs those manual binding entries which are in conflict with the new network address will be automatically deleted lt pool name 12 gt Specifies the name of the pool lt macaddr gt Specifies the hardware address type Either Ethernet or IEEE802 can be specified lt paddr gt Specifies the IP address which will be assigned to the specifies client Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To create manual binding entries DES 3528 5 create dhcp pool manual_binding
521. re the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch method _list_name Enter a previously implemented method list name defined by the user create authen_enable The user may add one or a combination of up to four 4 of the following authentication methods to this method list tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server server_group lt string 15 gt Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch local_enable Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch The local enable password of the device can be configured using the config admin local_ password command none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the administration level privileges on the Swit
522. rediscovery process cannot occur This version will support multiple switch upload and downloads for firmware configuration files and log files as follows e Firmware The switch now supports multiple MS firmware downloads from a TFTP server e Configuration Files This switch now supports multiple downloading and uploading of configuration files both to for configuration restoration and from for configuration backup MS s using a TFTP server e Log The switch now supports uploading multiple MS log files to a TFTP server ra ay a NOTE For more details regarding improvements made in SIMv1 6 please refer to the White Paper located on the D Link website The SIM commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters enable sim disable sim show sim candidates lt candidate_id 1 100 gt members lt member_id 1 32 gt group commander_mac lt macaddr gt neighbor recontig member_id lt value 1 32 gt exit config sim_group add lt candidate_id 1 100 gt lt password gt delete lt member_id 1 32 gt config sim commander group_ name lt groupname 64 gt candidate dp_interval lt sec 30 90 gt hold_time lt sec 100 255 gt download sim_ms firmware_from_tttp configuration_from_tftp lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename gt members lt mslist 1 32 gt all configuration_to
523. regation command above group _id lt value 1 8 gt Specifies the group ID The Switch allows up to 8 link aggregation groups to be configured The group number identifies each of the groups master_port lt port gt Master port ID Specifies which port by port number of the link aggregation group will be the master port All of the ports in a link aggregation group will share the port configuration with the master port ports lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports that will belong to the link aggregation group state enable disable Allows users to enable or disable the specified link aggregation group Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Link aggregation groups may not overlap To define a load sharing group of ports group id 1 master port 5 with group members ports 5 7 plus port 9 DES 3528 5 config link_aggregation group_id 1 master_port 5 ports 5 7 9 Command config link_aggregation group_id 1 master_port 5 ports 5 7 9 Success DES 3528 5 147 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config link_aggregation algorithm Purpose Used to configure the link aggregation algorithm Syntax config link_aggregation algorithm mac_source mac_destination mac_source_dest ip_source ip_destination ip_source_dest Description This command configures the part of the packet examined by the Switch when selectin
524. resh config 802 1x capability Purpose Used to configure the port capability Syntax config 802 1x capability ports lt portlist gt all authenticator none Description This command configures the port capability Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to be displayed all Specifies all of ports to be displayed authenticator The port that wishes to enforce authentication before allowing acess to services that are accessible via that Port adops the authenticator role none Allows the flow of PDUs via the Port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the port capabilty DES 3528 5 config 802 1x capability ports 1 10 authenticator Command config 802 1x capability ports 1 10 authenticator Success 228 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config 802 1x max _users Purpose Used to configure the max number of users that can be learned through 802 1x authentication Syntax config 802 1x max users lt value 1 448 gt no_limit Description The setting is a global limitation on the maximum number of users that can be learned through 802 1x authentication In addition to the global limitation per port max users is also limited It is specified by config 802 1x auth_parameter command Parameters Max_users Specifies the maximum number of users The number of the m
525. responses show cfm linktrace mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt String 22 gt trans_id lt uint gt The maximum linktrace responses a device can hold is 64 mepname Specifies the MEP name mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance association name trans_id Specifies the identifier of the transaction to show None 499 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the cfm linktrace DES 3528 5 show cfm linktrace mep mep1 Command show cfm linktrace mep mepi Trans ID Source MEP Destination 00 01 02 03 04 05 DES 3528 5 5 show cfm linktrace mep mepl trans_id 26 Command show cfm linktrace mep mepi trans_id 26 Transaction ID 26 From MEP mepl to 00 01 02 03 04 05 Start Time 2009 01 01 12 00 00 Hop MEPID MAC Address Forwarded Relay Action 00 01 02 03 04 05 Yes 00 01 02 03 04 05 Yes 00 01 02 03 04 05 No DES 3528 5 delete cfm linktrace Purpose Used to delete received linktrace responses Syntax delete cfm linktrace md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt mepname lt string 32 gt Description This command deletes the stored link trace response data that Is initiated by the specified MEP Parameters mepname Specifies the MEP name mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID
526. ress is moved to a different port In order to avoid conflict where both static entry and DHCP Snooping entry are the same DHCP Snooping entries will not be created if the IP MAC entry has already been statically configured Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the address binding DHCP snooping mode DES 3528 5 enable address_binding dhcp_snoop Command enable address_binding dhcp_snoop Success DES 3528 5 disable address_binding dhcp_snoop Purpose Used to disable the DHCP snooping option for IMPB Syntax disable address_binding dhcp_snoop Description When the DHCP snoop function is disabled all of the auto learned binding entries will be removed Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the address binding DHCP snooping mode DES 3528 5 disable address_binding dhcp_snoop Command disable address_binding dhcp_snoop Success DES 3528 5 161 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry Purpose Used to clear DHCP snooping entries on specified ports Syntax clear address_binding dhcp_snoop binding_entry ports lt portlist gt all Description This command is used to clear the DHCP snooping entries learned for the specified ports Paramet
527. riority queues are identified by number from 0 to 6 with the queue 0 being the lowest priority lt portlist gt alll Specifes a range of ports to be configured strict Specifies this queue is always working in strict mode weight lt value 1 127 gt Using weighted fair algorithm to handle packets in priority queues Each queue will operate based on its setting of weight values Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the traffic scheduling for each CoSqueue DES 3528 5 config scheduling ports 10 3 strict Command config scheduling ports 10 3 strict Success DES 3528 5 config scheduling mechanism Purpose Used to configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for a port or a range of ports Syntax config scheduling mechanism ports lt portlist gt all strict wrr Description This command is used to specify how the switch handles packets in priority queues Parameters lt portlist gt Select a port or a list of ports to configure all Choose this option to select all ports Strict The highest queue first process That is the highest queue should always be processed first wrr Using weighted roundrobin algorithm to handle packets in priority queues 108 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config scheduling mechanism Restrictions Only Administrator and Opera
528. ription This command is used to enter an IP address and the corresponding MAC address into the Switch s ARP table Parameters lt paddr gt The IP address of the end node or station lt macadadr gt The MAC address corresponding to the IP address above Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command The Switch supports up to 255 static ARP entries Example Usage To create a static arp entry for the IP address 10 48 74 121 and MAC address 00 50 BA 00 07 36 293 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 create arpentry 10 48 74 121 00 50 BA 00 07 36 Command create arpentry 10 48 74 121 00 50 BA 00 07 36 Success DES 3528 5 config arpentry Purpose Used to configure a static entry in the ARP table Syntax config arpentry lt ipaddr gt lt macaddr gt Description This command is used to configure a static entry in the ARP Table The user may specify the IP address and the corresponding MAC address of an entry in the Switch s ARP table Parameters lt paddr gt The IP address of the end node or station lt macadar gt The MAC address corresponding to the IP address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example Usage To configure a static ARP entry for the IP address 10 48 74 12 and MAC address 00 50 BA 00 07 36 DES 3528 5 config arpentry 10 48 74 12 00 50 BA 00
529. rity lt value 1 63 gt Description This command is used to configure the box switch priority Parameters current_box_id lt value 1 8 gt Identifies the Switch being configured Range is 1 to 8 priority lt value 1 63 gt Assigns a priority value to the box A Lower number denotes a higher priority The valid priority range is 1 to 63 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage example To configure box priority DES 3528 5 config box_priority current_box_id 1 priority 1 Command config box_priority current_box_id 1 priority 1 Success DES 3528 5 config box_id Purpose Used to configure box ID Users can use this command to reassign box IDs Syntax config box_id current_box_id lt value 1 8 gt new_box_id auto 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description This command is used to assign box IDs to switches in a stack Parameters current _box_id Identifies the Switch being configured Range is 1 to 8 new_box_id The new ID being assigned to the Switch box Range is 1 to 8 e auto Allows the box ID to be assigned automatically Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage example To change a box ID 34 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config box_id current_box_id 1 new_box_id 2 Command config box_id current_box_id 1 new_box_id 2 Success
530. rity 7 lt Class 2 gt lt Class 0O gt lt Class 1 gt lt Class 3 gt lt Class 4 gt lt Class 5 gt lt Class 6 gt lt Class 6 gt lt Class 2 gt lt Class 0 gt lt Class 1 gt lt Class 3 gt lt Class 4 gt lt Class 5 gt lt Class 6 gt lt Class 6 gt ei Quit h Next Page itpyas Next Entry Al All 112 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config 802 1p default_priority Purpose Used to configure the 802 1p default priority settings on the Switch If an untagged packet is received by the Switch the default priority configured with this command will be written to the packets priority field Syntax config 802 1p default_priority lt portlist gt all lt priority 0 7 gt Description This command is used to specify the default priority for the Switch to handle the untagged packets The priority value entered with this command will be used to determine which of the seven hardware priority queues the packet is forwarded to Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured all Specifies that the command applies to all ports on the Switch lt priority O 7 gt The priority value to assign to untagged packets received by the Switch ora range of ports on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure 802 1p default priority on the Swi
531. rmware or switch configuration Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To download firmware 348 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 download sim ms firmware_from_tftp 10 53 13 94 c des3526 had members all Command download sim_ms firmware_from_tftp 10 53 13 94 c des3526 had members all This device is updating firmware Please wait Download Status MAC Address Result 00 01 02 03 04 00 00 07 06 05 04 03 Success 00 07 06 05 04 03 Success DES 3528 5 To download configuration files DES 3528 5 download sim ms configuration_from_tftp 10 53 13 94 c des3528 txt members all Command download sim_ms firmware_from_tftp 10 53 13 94 c des3528 txt members all This device is updating configuration Please wait Download Status MAC Address Result 00 01 02 03 04 00 Success 00 07 06 05 04 03 Success 00 07 06 05 04 03 Success DES 3528 5 upload sim_ms Purpose User to upload a configuration file to a TFTP server from a specified member of a SIM group Syntax upload sim_ms configuration_to_tftp log_to_tftp lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename gt members lt mslist gt all Description This command will upload a configuration file to a TFTP server from a specified member of a SIM group Parameters configuration_from_tftp Specify this parameter to upload a switch configuration to members of a SIM group
532. ro moasa aseme snooping mticastvan config igmp_snooping multicast vlan disable enable forward_unmatched create igmp_ snooping lt profile name 1 32 gt multicast_vlan_group_ profile config igmp_ snooping lt profile_ name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcast_address list gt multicast_vlan_group_profile delete igmp_snooping lt profile_ name 1 32 gt all multicast_vlan_group_profile show igmp_ snooping lt profile name 1 32 gt multicast_vlan_group_profile config igmp_ snooping lt vian_name 32 gt add delete profile name lt profile_name 1 32 gt multicast_vlan_group show igmp_ snooping lt vian_name 32 gt multicast_vlan_group create mld_snooping multicast_vlan lt vian_name 32 gt lt vlanid 2 4094 gt config mld_snooping multicast_vlan lt vian_name 32 gt add delete member_port lt portlist gt source_port lt portlist gt untag_source_port lt portlist gt tag_member_port lt portlist gt State enable ao replace_source y lt ipv6addr gt remap _ priority lt value 0 7 gt none replace_priority 1 create mld_snooping lt profile name 1 32 gt multicast_vlan_group_profile config mld_ snooping lt profile_ name 1 32 gt add delete lt mcastv6_address_list gt multicast_vlan_group_profile delete mld_snooping lt profile_ name 1 32 gt all multicast_vlan_group_profile show mld_snooping lt profile name 1 32 gt multicast_vlan_group_profile config mld_snooping
533. rocess Command config ethernet_oam ports 1 received_remote_loopback process Success DES 3528 5 show ethernet_oam ports status Purpose Used to show primary controls and status information for Ethernet OAM Syntax show ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt status Description This command is used to show primary controls and status information for Ethernet OAM on specified ports The information includes 1 OAM administration status enabled or disabled 2 OAM operation status See below values Disable OAM is disabled on this port LinkFault The link has detected a fault and is transmitting OAMPDUs with a link fault indication PassiveWait The port is passive and is waiting to see if the peer device is OAM capable ActiveSendLocal The port is active and is sending local information SendLocalAndRemote The local port has discovered the peer but has not yet accepted or rejected the configuration of the peer SendLocalAndRemoteOk The local device agrees the OAM peer entity PeeringLocallyRejected The local OAM entity rejects the remote peer OAM entity PeeringRemotelyRejected The remote OAM entity rejects the local device Operational The local OAM entity learns that both it and the remote OAM entity have accepted the peering NonOperHalfDuplex Since Ethernet OAM functions are not designed to work completely over half duplex ports This value indicates Ethernet OAM is enabled but the port is in half duplex operation 3
534. rotocol from a remote TACACS server xtacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the XTACACS protocol from a remote XTACACS server tacacs Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the TACACS protocol from a remote TACACS server radius Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the RADIUS protocol from a remote RADIUS server server_group lt string 15 gt Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using a user defined server group previously configured on the Switch local Adding this parameter will require the user to be authenticated using the local user account database on the Switch none Adding this parameter will require no authentication to access the Switch r Base Seia NOTE Entering none or local as an authentication protocol will override any other authentication that follows it on a method list or on the default method list Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the user defined method list Trinity with authentication methods TACACS XTACACS and local DES 3528 5 config authen_login method_list_name Trinity method tacacs xtacacs local Command config authen_login method_list_name Trinity method tacacs xtacacs local Success DES 3528 5 Example usage To configure the default method list with a
535. router A SIM group accepts one Commander Switch numbered 0 and up to 32 switches numbered 0 31 There is no limit to the number of SIM groups in the same IP subnet broadcast domain however a single switch can only belong to one group If multiple VLANs are configured the SIM group will only utilize the default VLAN on any switch SIM allows intermediate devices that do not support SIM This enables the user to manage a switch that are more than one hop away from the CS The SIM group is a group of switches that are managed as a single entity The DES 3528 may take on three different roles Commander Switch CS This is a switch that has been manually configured as the controlling device for a group and takes on the following characteristics It has an IP Address Itis not a Commander Switch or Member Switch of another Single IP group Itis connected to the Member Switches through its management VLAN Member Switch MS This is a switch that has joined a single IP group and is accessible from the CS and it takes on the following characteristics Itis nota CS or MS of another IP group Itis connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN Candidate Switch CaS This is a switch that is ready to join a SIM group but is not yet a member of the SIM group The Candidate Switch may join the SIM group through an automatic function of the DES 3528 or by manually configuring it to be a MS of a SIM group A swi
536. rs ports Specifies the logical port list state Is used to enable or disable CFM function Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure cfm ports DES 3528 5 config cfm ports 2 5 state enable Command config cfm ports 2 5 state enable Success DES 3528 5 show cfm ports Purpose Used to show cfm state of specified ports Syntax show cfm ports lt portlist gt Description CFM state of speicified ports will be shown Parameters ports Specifies the logical port list Restrictions None Example usage 495 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To display cfm ports DES 3528 5 show cfm ports 3 6 Command show cfm ports 3 6 Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled DES 3528 5 show cfm Purpose Used to show CFM information Syntax show cfm md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt mepname lt string 32 gt Description This command is used to show CFM information Parameters md Specifies the maintenance domain name ma Specifies the maintenance domain name mepid Specifies the MEP MEPID mepname Specifies the MEP name Restrictions None Example usage To display cfm DES 3528 5 show cfm Command show cfm CFM State Enabled Level MD Name op_domain DES 3528 5 Example usage To display cfm md DES 3528
537. rst syn fin 1 udp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt protocol_id_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxif gt user_define_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxititffff gt 1 packet_content_mask offset 0 15 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset 16 31 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex Ox0 Oxffffftit gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset 32 47 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex Ox0 Oxfffttfff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset 48 63 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt offset 64 79 lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt 1 ipv6 class flowlabel source_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt destination_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt 1 delete cpu profile_id lt value 1 5 all access _ profile config cpu lt value 1 5 gt add access_id lt value 1 100 gt ethernet vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vian_id access _profile lt value 1 4094 gt source_mac lt macaddr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt destination mac profile id lt macaddr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt 802 1p lt value 0 7 gt ethernet_type lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt 1 ip vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt source_ip lt ipaddr gt destination_ip lt ipaddr g
538. rt Binding entries for blocked MAC entries all specifies all the blocked MAC entries Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete an IP MAC Port Binding entry on the Switch DES 3528 5 delete address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10 1 1 1 mac_address 00 00 00 00 00 06 Command delete address binding ip _mac ipaddress 10 1 1 1 mac_address 00 00 00 00 00 06 Success DES 3528 5 158 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable address_binding trap_log Purpose Used to enable the trap log for the IP MAC Port Binding function Syntax enable address _binding trap_log Description This command along with the disable address_binding trap_log will enable and disable the sending of trap log messages for IMPB When enabled the Switch will send a trap log message when an ARP packet is received that doesn t match the IMPB white list Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable address binding trap log on the Switch DES 3528 5 enable address_binding trap_log Command enable address binding trap_log Success DES 3528 5 disable address_binding trap_log Purpose Used to disable the trap log for the IP MAC Port Binding function Syntax disable address_binding trap_log Description This command along with the enable
539. rt binding is made lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured for address binding if no port is specified it will apply to all ports all Specifies that all ports on the switch will be configured for address binding Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure address binding entry on the Switch DES 3528 5 config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10 1 1 3 mac_address 00 00 00 00 00 05 Command config address_binding ip_mac ipaddress 10 1 1 3 mac_address 00 00 00 00 00 05 Success DES 3528 5 config address_binding ip_mac ports Purpose Used to configure IMPB settings for specified ports Syntax config address_binding ip_mac ports lt portlist gt all state enable strict loose disable allow_zeroip enable disable forward_dhcppkt enable disable mode arp acl stop_learning_threshold lt value 0 500 gt 1 Description This command is used to configure the per port state of IP MAC binding on the Switch If a port has been configured as a group member of an aggregated link then it cannot enable the IP MAC binding function When IMPB is enabled on a port IP packets and ARP packets received by this port will be checked depending on the setting The packet will be dropped if its IP MAC pair does not match the IMPB white list IMPB allows the user to choose either ARP or ACL mode In ARP Mode a sw
540. rts Specify source portlist to add to or delete from the RSPAN source rx Only monitor ingress packets tx Only monitor egress packets both Monitor both ingress and egress packets Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the rx traffic of port 2 to port 5 mirrored and add vid tag 2 DES 3528 5 config rspan vlan vlan_name v3 source add ports 2 5 rx Command config rspan vlan vlan_name v3 source add ports 2 5 rx Success DES 3528 5 393 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show rspan Purpose Used to display RSPAN configuration Syntax show rspan vlan_name lt vlan_names gt vlan_id lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command displays the RSPAN configuration Parameters vian_name Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name vian_id Specify the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID Restrictions None Example usage To display special setting DES 3528 5 show rspan vlan_id 63 Command show rspan vlan_id 63 RSPAN Enabled Source Ports RX TX Total RSPAN VLAN 1 DES 3528 5 394 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual STATIC MAC BASED VLAN COMMANDS The Static MAC Based VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create ma
541. ry should be created by ACL with high priority so as to permit packets from the trusted DHCP server When the DHCP Server filter function is enabled all DHCP Server packets will be filtered from a specific port Also you are allowed to create entries for specific port based Server IP address and Client MAC address binding entries Be aware that the DHCP Server filter function must be enabled first Once all settings are complete all DHCP Server packets will be filtered from a specific port except those that meet the Server IP Address and Client MAC Address binding NetBIOS Filtering Setting When the NetBIOS filter is enabled all NetBIOS packets will be filtered from the specified port Enabling the NetBIOS filter will create one access profile and create three access rules per port UDP port numbers 137 and 138 and TCP port number 139 For Extensive NetBIOS Filter when it is enabled all NetBIOS packets over 802 3 frames will be filtered from the specified port This command is used to configure the state of the NetBIOS filter Enabling the Extensive NetBIOS filter will create one access profile and create one access rule per port DSAP Destination Service Access Point FO and SASP Source Service Access Point F0 The DHCP Server NetBIOS Filter commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config filter dhcp server add permit server_ip lt ipa
542. s BPDU Attack Protection to be globally disabled on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the BPDU Attack Protection function globally for the entire switch DES 3528 5 disable bpdu protection Command disable bpdu protection 459 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show bpdu_protection Purpose Used to display BPDU Attack Protection status Syntax show bpdu_protection ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display BPDU Attack Protection global configuration or per port configuration and current status Parameters portlist Specifies a range of prots to be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the BPDU Attack Protection status of the entire switch DES 3528 5 show bpdu protection Command show bpdu protection BPDU Protection Global Settings BPDU Protection Status Enabled BPDU Protection Recover Time 120 seconds BPDU Protection Trap Status Both BPDU Protection Log Status Both DES 3528 5 To display the BPDU Attack Protection status for ports 1 4 of the Switch DES 3528 5 show bpdu_protection ports 1 4 Command show bpdu_protection ports 1 4 State Status Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled DES 3528 5 460 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manua
543. s Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 208 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To config DHCP relay DES 3528 5 config dhcp relay hops 2 time 23 Command config dhcp_relay hops 2 time 23 Success DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay add ipif Purpose Used to add an IP destination address to the switch s DHCP BOOTP relay table Syntax config dhcp_relay add ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt Description This command adds an IP address as a destination to forward relay DHCP BOOTP relay packets to Parameters lt ipif name 12 gt The name of the IP interface in which DHCP relay is to be enabled lt paddr gt The DHCP server IP address Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To add an IP destination to the DHCP relay table DES 3528 5 config dhcp _ relay add ipif System 10 58 44 6 Command config dhcp_relay add ipif System 10 58 44 6 Success DES 3528 5 config dhcp_relay delete ipif Purpose Used to delete one or all IP destination addresses from the Switch s DHCP BOOTP relay table Syntax config dhcp_relay delete ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt lt ipaddr gt Description This command is used to delete an IP destination addresses in the Switch s DHCP BOOTP relay table Parameters lt ipif name 12 gt The name of the IP interface that contains the
544. s are flooding the network based on the threshold level provided by the user Once a packet storm has been detected the Switch will drop packets coming into the Switch until the storm has subsided This method can be utilized by selecting the Drop option of the Action field in the window below The Switch will also scan and monitor packets coming into the Switch by monitoring the Switch s chip counter This method is only viable for Broadcast and Multicast storms because the chip only has counters for these two types of packets Once a storm has been detected that is once the packet threshold set below has been exceeded the Switch will shutdown the port to all incoming traffic with the exception of STP BPDU packets for a time period specified using the countdown field If the packet storm discontinues before the countdown timer expires the port will again allow all incoming traffic If this field times out and the packet storm continues the port will be placed in a Shutdown Forever mode which will produce a warning message to be sent to the Trap Receiver Once in Shutdown Forever mode the port will be recovered after 5 minutes or the user manually resets the port using the config ports enable command mentioned previously in this manual The broadcast storm control commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config traffic control lt portli
545. s been successfully loaded the message End of configuration file for DES 3528 appears followed by the command prompt DES 3528 5 disable authen_policy Command disable authen_policy Success DES 3528 5 DES 3528 St fen nn rrr rrr rrr rrr DES 3528 5 End of configuration file for DES 3528 DES 3528 St fam nr rrr rrr errr rrr DES 3528 5 config firmware Purpose Used to configure the firmware section as a boot up section or to delete the firmware section Syntax config firmware unit lt unit_id 1 8 gt image_id lt int 1 2 gt delete boot_up Description This command is used to configure the firmware section The user may choose to remove the firmware section or use it as a boot up section Parameters unit Specifies the unit on the stacking system If it is not specified it refers to the master unit image_id Specifies the working section The Switch can hold two firmware versions for the user to select from which are specified by image ID delete Entering this parameter will delete the specified firmware section boot_up Entering this parameter will specify the firmware image ID as a boot up section Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure firmware image 1 as a boot up section 57 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config firmware image_id 1 boot_up Command confi
546. s can issue this command Example usage To disable the Telnet protocol on the Switch DES 3528 5 disable telnet Command disable telnet Success DES 3528 5 enable web Purpose Used to enable the HT TP based management software on the Switch Syntax enable web lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt Description This command is used to enable the Web based management software on the Switch The user can specify the TCP port number the Switch will use to listen for Telnet requests Parameters lt tco_port_number 1 65535 gt The TCP port number TCP ports are numbered between 1 and 65535 The well known port for the Web based management software is 80 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable HTTP and configure port number DES 3528 5 enable web 80 Command enable web 80 Success DES 3528 5 disable web Purpose Used to disable the HT TP based management software on the Switch Syntax disable web Description This command disables the Web based management software on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable HTTP 18 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 disable web Command disable web Success DES 3528 5 Purpose Used to save changes in the Switch s configurat
547. s can issue this command Example usage To enable MAC notification without changing basic configuration DES 3528 5 enable mac_notification Command enable mac_notification Success DES 3528 5 disable mac_notification Purpose Used to disable global MAC address table notification on the Switch Syntax disable mac_notification Description This command is used to disable MAC address notification without changing configuration Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable MAC notification without changing basic configuration DES 3528 5 disable mac_notification Command disable mac_notification Success DES 3528 5 304 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config mac_notification Purpose Used to configure MAC address notification Syntax config mac_notification interval lt int 1 2147483647 gt historysize lt int 1 500 gt 1 Description This command is used to monitor MAC addresses learned and entered into the FDB Parameters interval lt sec 1 2147483647 gt The time in seconds between notifications The user may choose an interval between 1 and 2 147 483 647 seconds historysize lt 1 500 gt The maximum number of entries listed in the history log used for notification Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Exam
548. s the procedure for resetting passwords on D Link Switches Authenticating any user who tries to access networks is necessary and important The basic authentication method used to accept qualified users is through a local login utilizing a Username and Password Sometimes passwords get forgotten or destroyed so network administrators need to reset these passwords This document will explain how the Password Recovery feature can help network administrators reach this goal The following steps explain how to use the Password Recovery feature on D Link devices to easily recover passwords Complete these steps to reset the password L For security reasons the Password Recovery feature requires the user to physically access the device Therefore this feature is only applicable when there is a direct connection to the console port of the device It is necessary for the user needs to attach a terminal or PC with terminal emulation to the console port of the switch 2 Power on the switch After the runtime image is loaded to 100 the Switch will allow 2 seconds for the user to press the hotkey Shift 6 to enter the Password Recovery Mode Once the Switch enters the Password Recovery Mode all ports on the Switch will be disabled Boot Procedure V1 00 B06 Power On Self Test 2 tt tt tt tt tt te ws 100 MAC Address 00 19 5B EC 32 15 H W Version Al Please wait loading V2 00 B33 Runtime image 100
549. sable max_authenticating_host lt value 0 n gt aging_time infinite lt min 1 14405 idle_time infinite lt min 1 1440 gt block_time lt sec 0 300 gt auth_mode host_based port_based 1 Description This command allows you to configure port state of JWAC The default value of max_authenticating_host is 50 The default value of aging_time is 1440 minutes The default value of d e_time is infinite The default value of block_time is 0 seconds Parameters lt portlist gt A port range to set the JWAC state all All the Switch ports JWAC state is to be configured state To specify the port state of JWAC max_authenticating_host Max number of host process authentication on each port at the same time The max authenticating hosts depends on a specific project aging_time A time period during which an authenticated host will keep an authenticated state infinite indicates never to age out the authenticated host on the port idle_time If there is no traffic during idle_time the host will be moved back to unauthenticated state infinite indicates never to check the idle state of the authenticated host on the port block_time If a host fail to pass the authentication it will be blocked for a period specified by block_time Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure JWAC ports DES 3528 5
550. sable MLD snooping fast done function If it is enabled the membership is immediately removed when the system receive the MLD done message report_suppression When it is enabled multiple MLD reports will be intergrated into one report before sending to the router port Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the MLD snooping to the default vlan with noted_timeout 250 sec and state enable DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping vlanid 1 fast_done enable state enable report_suppression disable config mld_snooping vlanid 1 fast_done enable state enable report_suppression 405 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config mld_snooping querier Purpose Used to configure the timers and the attributes of the MLD snooping querier Syntax config mld_snooping querier vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt all query_interval lt sec 1 65535 gt max_response_time lt sec 1 25 gt robustness_variable lt value 1 255 gt last_listener_query_interval lt sec 1 25 gt state enable disable version lt value 1 2 gt 1 Description This command configures the timer in seconds between general query transmissions the maximum time in seconds to wait for reports from listeners and the permitted packet loss that guarantees by MLD snooping Parameters vlan_name The name of the VLAN for which MLD snooping
551. sable qinq Command disable qinq Success DES 3528 5 show qing Purpose Used to show global Q in Q Syntax show ging Description This command is used to show the global Q in Q status Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show global Q in Q status DES 3528 5 show ging Commands show ging QinQ Status Enabled DES 3528 5 386 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual configure qinq ports Purpose Used to configure Q in Q port Syntax config qinq ports lt portlist gt all role uni nni missdrop enable disable outer_tpid lt hex 0x1 Oxffff gt use_inner_priority enable disable vian_preservation enable disable add_inner_tag lt hex 0x1 Oxffff gt disable 1 Description This command is used to configure the Q in Q VLAN mode for ports include port role in double tag VLAN mode enable disable SP VLAN assignment miss drop port outer TPID use inner priority and enable disable add inner tag If missdrop is enabled the packet that does not match any assignment rule in the Q in Q profile will be dropped If disabled then the packet will be assigned to the PVID of the received port This setting will not be effective when Q in Q mode is disabled Parameters portlist A range of ports to configure role Port role in Q in Q mode it can be either UNI port or NNI port UNI User to Network Interface s
552. sabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled show traffic control Multicast Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled None Unicast Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Action Count O O O O O O O O O O O O O OOO Time Interval ounwnunonononononon ooo Oo Oo Oo q Quit n Next Page ENTER Next Entry A All config traffic trap Purpose Used to configure the trap settings for the packet storm control mechanism Syntax config traffic trap none storm_occurred storm_cleared both Description This command is used to configure how packet storm control trap messages will be used when a packet storm is detected by the Switch This function can only be used for the software traffic storm control mechanism when the action field in the config traffic storm_control command is set as shutdown Parameters none No notification will be generated or sent when a packet storm control is detected by the Switch storm _occurred A notification will be generated and sent when a packet storm has been detected by the Switch storm_cleared A notification will be generated and sent when a packet storm has been cleared by the Switch both A not
553. se restricted_tcn true false fopdu enable disable 1 create stp instance_id lt value 1 15 gt config stp instance_id lt value 1 15 gt add_vian remove_vlan lt vidlist gt delete stp instance_id lt value 1 15 gt config stp priority lt value 0 61440 gt instance_id lt value 0 15 gt config stp mst_config_id revision_level lt int 0 65535 gt name lt string gt 1 config stp mst_ports lt portlist gt instance_id lt value 0 15 gt internalCost auto lt value 1 200000000 gt priority lt value 0 240 gt 1 owse show stp ports lt portlist gt 80 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters config stp nni_bpdu_addr dotid dot1ad Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable stp Purpose Used to globally enable STP on the Switch Syntax enable stp Description This command allows the Spanning Tree Protocol to be globally enabled on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable STP globally on the Switch DES 3528 5 enable stp Command enable stp Success DES 3528 5 disable stp Purpose Used to globally disable STP on the Switch Syntax disable stp Description This command allows the Spanning Tree Protocol to be globally disabled on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Admi
554. se Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure if the port will flood EAPOL PDU when 802 1X functionality is disabled config 802 1x fwd_pdu ports lt portlilst gt all enable disable This is a per port setting to control the forwarding of EAPOL PDU When 802 1X functionality is disabled globally or for a port and if 802 1X fwd_pdu is enabled both globally and for the port a received EAPOL packet on the port will be flooded in the same VLAN to those ports with 802 1X fwd_pdu enabled and 802 1X disabled globally or just for the port The default state is disable portlist Specifies a range of ports to be displayed all Specifies all of ports to be displayed enable Enable flood EAPOL PDU on the ports disable Disable flood EAPOL PDU on the ports Only Administrator level users can issue this command To configure 802 1 X fwd PDU for ports DES 3528 5 config 802 1x fwd_pdu ports 1 2 enable Command config 802 1x fwd_pdu ports 1 2 enable Success DES 3528 5 show 802 1x Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the 802 1X state or configurations show 802 1x auth_state auth_configuration ports lt portlist gt This command displays the 802 1X state or configurations auth_state Used to display 802 1X authentication state information of some ports auth_configuration Used to display 802 1X conf
555. se Used to show rate limitation Syntax show igmp_snooping rate_limit ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt Description This command shows the rate of IGMP control packet that is allowed per port or VLAN Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports that will be displayed lt vidlist gt Specifies a VLAN or range of VLANs that will be displayed Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To show rate limitation DES 3528 5 show igmp_ snooping rate_limit ports 1 Command show igmp_snooping rate_limit ports 1 No Limitation Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 config igmp_snooping rate_limit Purpose Used to configure rate limitation Syntax config igmp_snooping rate_limit ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt value 1 1000 gt no limit Description This command configures the rate of IGMP control packets that are allowed per port or VLAN Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports that will be displayed lt vidlist gt Specifies a VLAN or range of VLANs that will be displayed lt value 1 1000 gt Specifies the rate of IGMP control packet that the switch can process ona specific port or VLAN The rate is specified in packets per second The packets that exceeds the limited rate will be dropped The default setting is no_limit no_limit Allows users to configure the rate limitation to
556. se the same destination port as defined by the mirror command The redirect command makes sure that the RSPAN VLAN packets can be egress to the redirect ports In addition to this redirect command the VLAN setting must be correctly configured to make the RSPAN VLAN work correctly That is for the intermediate switch the redirect port must be a tagged member port of RSPAN VLAN For the last switch the redirect port must be either a tagged member port or an untagged member port of the RSPAN VLAN based on the users requirements If untagged membership is specified the RSPAN VLAN tag will be removed The redirect function will only work when RSPAN is enabled Multiple RSPAN VLANs can be configured with redirect settings at the same time NOTE If RSPAN is enabled the packets mirrored to the destination port are always added with an RSPAN VLAN tag If mirror is enabled but RSPAN is disabled the packets mirrored to the destination port may be in tagged form or in untagged form NOTE Only one RSPAN VLAN can be configured with source settings Parameters vian Specify the RSPAN VLAN on the source switch vian_name Specify RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name vian_id Specify RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID redirect Specify ouptut port for the RSPAN VLAN packets source Specify the source settings for the RSPAN VLAN on the source switch add Add source ports into the RSPAN source delete Delete source ports from the RSPAN source po
557. sections enable voice_vian Purpose Used to enable the global voice VLAN function Syntax enable voice_vian lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command is used to enable the global voice VLAN function on the Switch To enable the voice VLAN the voice VLAN must be assigned to an existing static 802 1Q VLAN The VLAN with assigned voice VLAN cannot be deleted To change the voice VLAN the user must disable the voice VLAN function first and then re issue this command By default the global voice VLAN state is disabled Parameters lt vilan_name 32 gt Specifies the voice VLAN by VLAN name Vianid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Specifies the voice VLAN by VLAN ID Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable a voice VLAN DES 3528 5 enable voice vlan vlanid 1 Command enable voice vlan vlanid 1 Success DES 3528 5 134 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable voice_vian Purpose Used to disable the global voice VLAN function Syntax disable voice_vlian Description This command disables the global voice VLAN function on the Switch When the voice VLAN function is disabled the voice VLAN will become unassigned Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the voice VLAN DES 3528
558. security configuration Syntax show port_security ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display port security information of the Switch s ports The information displayed includes port security trap log state admin state maximum number of learning address and lock mode Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be viewed Restrictions None Example usage To display the port security configuration DES 3528 5 show port_security ports 1 5 Command show port_security ports 1 5 Port_security Trap Log Disabled Admin State Max Learning Addr Lock Address Mode Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset Disabled DeleteOnReset DES 3552 5 enable port_security trap log Purpose Used to enable the trap log for port security Syntax enable port_security trap_log Description This command along with the disable port_security trap_log will enable and disable the sending of log messages to the Switch s log and SNMP agent when the port security of the Switch has been triggered Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the port security trap log setting DES 3528 5 enable port _security trap_log Command enable port_security trap_log Success DES 3528 5 32 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Swi
559. sed to identify the access profile that will be configured with this command This value is assigned to the access profile when it is created with the create access_profile command The profile ID sets the relative priority for the profile and specifies an index number that will identify the access profile being created with this command Priority is set relative to other profiles where the lowest profile ID has the highest priority The user may enter a profile ID number between 1 and 14 yet remember only 14 access profiles can be created on the Switch profile_name Specifies the name of the profile The maximum length is 32 characters add access_id lt value 1 128 gt Adds an additional rule to the above specified access profile The value is used to index the rule created For information on number of rules that can be created for a given port lease see the introduction to this chapter ethernet Specifies that the Switch will look only into the layer 2 part of each packet vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Specifies that the access profile will only apply to this VLAN vian_id lt value 1 4094 gt Specifies that the access prfile will only apply to this VLAN ID source_mac lt macadadr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only packets with this source MAC address destination_mac lt macadadr 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only packets with
560. set by this function which may cause both access profile types to experience problems The IP MAC Port Binding commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table 151 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters create address_binding ip_mac ipaddress lt ipaddr gt mac_address lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all mode arp acl config address_binding ip mac ipaddress lt ipaddr gt mac_address lt macaddr gt ports lt portlist gt all config address_binding ip _mac ports lt portlist gt all state enable strict loose disable allow_zeroip enable disable forward_dhcppkt enable disable mode arp acl stop_learning_threshold lt value 0 500 gt 1 show address_ binding flip_mac all ipaddress lt ipaddr gt mac_address lt macaddr gt blocked all vlan name lt vilan_name gt mac_address lt macaddrs gt ports delete address_binding ip _mac ipaddress lt ipaddr gt mac_address lt macaddr gt all blocked all vian_name lt vlan_name gt mac_address lt macaddr gt rable adcese brdngvaneg ssabie aderese brangiap_og sf ro sebug acces binding enable assess binding chop snoop sable adores bang dh stoop sf clear address_binding dhcp_snoop ports lt portlist gt all binding_ entry show address_binding dhcp_ sn
561. setting Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the time range on the Switch DES 3528 5 show time_range Command show time_range Time Range Information Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Start Time 11 21 20 End Time 11 44 40 Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 show current_config access_profile Purpose Used to display the ACL part of current configuration Syntax show current_config access_profile Description This command displays the ACL privilege of the current configuration in user level of privilege The overall current configuration can be displayed by show config command which is accessible in administrator level of privilege Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the current configuration access profile on the Switch 262 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show current_config access_profile Command show current_config access_profile access profile ethernet vlan profile_id 1 access profile profile_id 1 add access_id 1 ethernet vlan default port 1 permit access_profile ip source_ip mask 255 255 255 255 profile_id 2 access_profile profile_id 2 add access_id 1 ip source_ip 10 10 10 10 port 2 DES 3528 5 263 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual SAFEGUARD ENGINE COMMANDS Periodically malicious hosts on the network will attack the Switch by u
562. sk the packet header beginning with the offset value specified as follows e offset 0 15 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 0 to byte 15 e offset 16 31 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 16 to byte 31 e offset_32 47 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 32 to byte 47 e offset 48 63 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 48 to byte 63 e offset_64 79 Enter a value in hex form to mask the packet from byte 64 to byte 79 IPV6 Denotes that IPv6 packets will be examined by the Switch for forwarding or filtering based on the rules configured in the config access_ profile command for IPv6 class Entering this parameter will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Type of Service TOS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 flowlabel Entering this parameter will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header This flow label field is used by a source to label sequences of packets such as non default quality of service or real time service packets source_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the source IPv6 address destination_ipv6_mask lt ipv6mask gt Specifies an IP address mask for the destination IPv6 address profile_id lt value 1 5 gt Enter an integer between 1 and 5 that is used to identify
563. snmp groups Purpose Used to display the group names of SNMP groups currently configured on the Switch The security model level and status of each group are also displayed Syntax show snmp groups Description This command displays the group names of SNMP groups currently configured on the Switch The security model level and status of each group are also displayed Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the currently configured SNMP groups on the Switch 46 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show snmp groups Command show snmp groups Vacm Access Table Settings Group Name Group3 ReadView Name ReadView WriteView Name WriteView Notify View Name NotifyView Security Model SNMPv3 Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Group Name Group4 ReadView Name ReadView WriteView Name WriteView Notify View Name NotifyView Security Model SNMPv3 Security Level authNoPriv Group Name Group5 ReadView Name ReadView WriteView Name WriteView Notify View Name NotifyView Security Model SNMPv3 Security Level authNoPriv Group Name initial ReadView Name restricted WriteView Name Notify View Name restricted Security Model SNMPv3 Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Group Name ReadGroup ReadView Name CommunityView WriteView Name Notify View Name CommunityView Security Model SNMPv1 Security Level NoAuthNoPriv Total Entries 5 DES 3528 5 47 xStack DES 352
564. specified port Parameters ports Specifies the list of ports to be configured Restrictions Only Administrators and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the sflow counter_poller DES 3528 5 delete sflow counter_poller ports 1 Command delete sflow counter_poller ports 1 Success DES 3528 5 show sflow counter_poller Purpose Used to show the sflow counter_poller information of ports which have been created Syntax show sflow counter_poller Description This command is used to show the sflow counter_pollers which have been configured for port Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the sflow counter_poller DES 3528 5 show sflow counter_poller Command show sflow counter_poller Port Analyzer Server ID Polling Interval secs Total Entries 2 DES 3528 5 284 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create sflow analyzer_server Purpose Used to create the analyzer_server Syntax create sflow analyzer_server lt value 1 4 gt owner lt name 16 gt timeout lt sec 1 20000005 infinite collectoraddress lt ipaddrs collectorport lt udp_port_number 1 65535 gt maxdatagramsize lt value 300 1400 gt Description This command creates the analyzer_server You can specify more than one analyzer_server with the same IP address but with different UDP port numbers You can have up to four uni
565. splay the I3 control packet CPU filtering status Syntax show cpu_filter I3_control_pkt ports lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the I3 control packet CPU filtering status Parameters portlist Specifies the port list to filter control packet Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage 271 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To display the filtering status DES 3528 5 show cpu_filter 13_control_pkt ports 1 1 1 2 Command show cpu_filter 13_control_pkt ports 1 1 1 2 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled DES 3528 5 212 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual LOOP BACK DETECTION COMMANDS The Loop back Detection commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters contig loopdetect recover_timer value 0 lt value 60 1000000 gt interval lt 1 32767 gt mode port based vian based 1 contig loopdetect ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable contig loopdetect trap none loop detected loop_cleared both fembemopseee ssabieoopdetee mowe Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config loopdetect Purpose Used to configure loop back detection on the switch Syntax config
566. splay the multicast group profiles configured for the specified IGMP multicast VLAN Syntax show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command is used to display the multicast group profiles configured for the specified IGMP multicast VLAN Parameters vlan_name The name of the multicast VLAN to be configured each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters If not specified all Ipv4 multicast VLAN groups will be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the multicast group profiles configured for an IGMP multicast VLAN DES 3528 5 show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group Command show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan_group VLAN ID Multicast Group Profiles create mid_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to create an MLD multicast VLAN Syntax create mid_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt lt vlanid 2 4094 gt Description This command will create a MLD multicast_vlan Multiple multicast VLANs can be configured When creating MLD multicast VLAN it cannot duplicate with the VLAN entries in the existing 802 1Q VLAN database The MLD Multicast VLAN snooping function co exists with the 1Q VLAN snooping function Parameters lt vlan_name gt The name of the VLAN to be created Each multicast VLAN is given a name that can be up to 32 characters vlanid The VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN to be create The range is 2 4094 Restrictions Only Admini
567. ss lt macadadr gt Enter the MAC address to be re authorized Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure 802 1 X reauthentication for ports to 18 DES 3528 5 config 802 1x reauth port_based ports 1 18 Command config 802 1x reauth port_based ports 1 18 Success DES 3528 5 create 802 1x guest_vlan Purpose Used to configure a pre existing VLAN as a 802 1X Guest VLAN Syntax create 802 1x guest_vlan lt vilan_name 32 gt Description This command is used to configure a pre defined VLAN as a 802 1X Guest VLAN 802 1X Guest VLAN clients are those who have not been authorized for 802 1X or they haven t yet installed the necessary 802 1X software yet would still like limited access rights on the Switch Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of no more than 32 characters to define a pre existing VLAN as a 802 1X Guest VLAN This VLAN must have first been created with the create vlan command mentioned earlier in this manual Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command This VLAN must have already been previously created using the create vlan command Only one VLAN can be set as the 802 1X Guest VLAN Example usage To configure a previously created VLAN as a 802 1X Guest VLAN for the Switch DES 3528 5 create 802 1x guest_vlan Trinity Command create 802 1x guest_vlan Trinity Success
568. ss control server application on the Switch To select between Port based or Host based use the config 802 1x auth_mode command Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable 802 1X switch wide DES 3528 5 enable 802 1x Command enable 802 1x Success DES 3528 5 disable 802 1x Purpose Used to disable the 802 1X server on the Switch Syntax disable 802 1x Description This command is used to disable the 802 1X Network Access control server application on the Switch To select between Port based or Host based use the config 802 1x auth_mode command Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable 802 1X on the Switch DES 3528 5 disable 802 1x Command disable 802 1x Success DES 3528 5 222 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create 802 1xX user Purpose Used to create 802 1X user Syntax create 802 1x user lt username 15 gt Description This command creates a 802 1X user Parameters lt username 15 gt Specifies adding user name Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create user test DES 3528 5 create 802 1x user test Command create 802 1x user test Enter a case sensitive new password Enter the new password
569. ss_id lt value1 128 gt Description This command is used view the current state of ACL flow meter on the Switch Parameters profile_id lt value 1 14 gt Specifies the profile ID profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Specifies the name of the profile The maximum length is 32 characters access_id lt value1 128 gt Specifies the access ID Restrictions None Example usage To show the ACL flow meter state on the Switch 260 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show flow meter Command show flow meter Flow Meter Information Profile ID 1 Access ID 1 Mode trTCM CIR 64Kbps 1000 CBS Kbyte 2000 PIR 64Kbps 2000 PBS Kbyte 2000 Action Conform Permit Replace DSCP 11 Counter Enabled Exceed Permit Replace DSCP 22 Counter Enabled Violate Counter Disabled Profile ID 1 Access ID 2 Mode srTCM CIR 64Kbps 2500 CBS Kbyte 2000 EBS Kbyte 3500 Permit Replace DSCP Counter Enabled Permit Replace DSCP 33 Counter Enabled Counter Disabled Total Entries DES 3528 5 config time_range Purpose Used to configure the range of time to activate a function on the switch Syntax config time_range lt range_name 32 gt hours start_time lt time hh mm ss gt end_time lt time hh mm ss gt weekdays lt daylist gt delete Description This command defines a specific range of time to activate a function
570. ssive cannot process LACP control frames In order to allow the linked port group to negotiate adjustments and make changes dynamically at one end of the connection must have active LACP ports see above Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure LACP port mode settings DES 3528 5 config lacp_ port 1 12 mode active Command config lacp_port 1 12 mode active Success DES 3528 5 149 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show lacp_port Purpose Used to display current LACP port mode settings Syntax show lacp_port lt portlist gt Description This command will display the LACP mode settings as they are currently configured Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured If no parameter is specified the system will display the current LACP status for all ports Restrictions None Example usage To display LACP port mode settings DES 3528 5 show lacp port 1 10 Command show lacp_ port 1 10 Activity Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active Active 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 w Fi T W UI N 00 Ol 150 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual IP MAC PORT BINDING IMPB COMMANDS The IP network layer uses a four byte IP address The Etherne
571. st Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show policy _route Purpose Used to display policy route rule Syntax show policy_route Description This command is used to display policy route rule Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show available policy routes DES 3528 5 show policy_route Command show policy_route Policy Routing Table Profile ID Access ID Nexthop 20 1 1 100 Enabled Total Entries DES 3528 5 456 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual BPDU ATTACK PROTECTION COMMANDS The BPDU Attack Protection commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Eo NOTE The BPDU Attack Protection commands and STP Function commands are mutually ar exclusivly Therefore when the STP function is enabled on a particular port BPDU Attack Protection cannot be enabled If BPDU Attack Protection function is enabled on a port BPDU cannot be forwarded Command Parameters config bpdu_protection ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable mode drop block disable 1 recovery_timer enable bpdu_protestion disable bpdu_protestion ports lt portlist gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config bpdu_protection ports Purpose Used to configure the BPDU Attack Protection state and mode of a port Syntax config bpdu_pr
572. st Prio Status Role 0 N A 200000 128 Disabled Disabled 3 N A 200000 128 Disabled Disabled show stp instance Purpose Used to display the Switch s STP instance configuration Syntax show stp instance lt value 0 15 gt Description This command displays the Switch s current STP Instance Settings and the STP Instance Operational Status Parameters lt value 0 15 gt Enter a value defining the previously configured instance_id on the Switch An entry of 0 will display the STP configuration for the CIST internally set on the Switch Restrictions None Example usage To display the STP instance configuration for instance 0 the internal CIST on the Switch 90 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show stp instance 0 Command show stp instance 0 STP Instance Settings Instance Type Instance Status Instance Priority Enabled 32768 bridge priority 32768 sys ID ext STP Instance Operational Status Designated Root Bridge External Root Cost Regional Root Bridge Internal Root Cost Designated Bridge Root Port Max Age Forward Delay Last Topology Change Topology Changes Count 32766 00 90 27 39 78 E2 200012 32768 00 53 13 1A 33 24 0 32768 00 50 BA 71 20 D6 1 20 15 856 2987 i Quit hi Next Page ij Previous Page Refresh config stp nni _bpdu_addr Used to configure BPDU destination address as dotid or dot1ad config stp nni
573. st groups that a port can join Syntax show max_mcast_group ports lt portlist gt vlanid lt vidlist gt Description This command display the max number of multicast groups that a port can join Parameters lt portlist gt A range of ports to display the max number of multicast groups lt vidlist gt A range of VLAN IDs to display the max number of multicast groups Restrictions None Example usage To display the maximum number of multicast groups DES 3528 5 show max_mcast_group ports 1 3 Command show max_mcast_group ports 1 3 Max Multicast Group Number Action Infinite Infinite Total Entries 2 DES 3528 5 170 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Basic IP COMMANDS The IP interface commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config ipif lt ipif name 12 gt ipaddress lt network_address gt vlan lt vian_name 32 gt state enable disable proxy_arp enable disable local enable disable 1 bootp dhcp create ipif lt ipif_ name 12 gt lt network_address gt lt vlan_name 32 gt state enable disable proxy_arplenable disable local enable disable delete ipif lt ipif_ name 12 gt all enable ipif 12 gt all disable ipif lt ipif_ name 12 gt all Each command is listed in detail in the fol
574. st gt all broadcast enable disable multicast enable disable unicast enable disable action drop shutdown threshold lt value 0 255000 gt time_interval lt value 5 30 gt countdown lt value 0 gt lt value 5 30 gt 1 show traffic control lt portlist gt contig traffic trap none storm_occurred storm_cleared both Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config traffic control Purpose Used to configure broadcast multicast unicast packet storm control The software mechanism is provided to monitor the traffic rate in addition to the hardware storm control mechanism previously provided Syntax config traffic control lt portlist gt all broadcast enable disable multicast enable disable unicast enable disable action drop shutdown threshold lt value 0 255000 gt time_interval lt value 5 30 gt countdown lt value 0 gt lt value 5 30 gt 1 Description This command is used to configure broadcast multicast unicast storm control By adding the new software traffic control mechanism the user can now use both a hardware and software mechanism the latter of which will now provide shutdown recovery and trap notification functions for the Switch Parameters lt portlist gt Used to specify a group list of ports to be configured for traffic control as defined below all Specifies all portlists are to be configured for traffic con
575. st hosts DES 3528 5 show trusted host Command show trusted host Management Stations IP Address Netmask 10 62 32 1 32 10 62 32 1 16 Total Entries 2 50 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete trusted_host ipaddr Purpose Used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host command above Syntax delete trusted host ipaddr lt ipaddr gt Description This command is used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host command above Parameters lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the trusted host Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a trusted host with an IP address 10 62 32 1 DES 3528 5 delete trusted_host ipaddr 10 62 32 1 Command delete trusted_host ipaddr 10 62 32 1 Success delete trusted host network Purpose Used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host network command above Syntax delete trusted host network lt network_address gt Description This command is used to delete a trusted host entry made using the create trusted_host network command above Parameters lt network_address gt IP address and netmask of the trusted host network Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a trusted host network IP address 10 62 31 1 16 DES 35
576. status remote_ccm error_ccm xcon_ccm none alarm_time lt centiseconds 250 1000 gt alarm_reset_time lt centiseconds 250 1000 gt 1 C www md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt mepname lt string 32 gt show cfm remote_mep mepname lt string 32 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt remote_mepid lt int 1 8191 gt show cfm mipcem Pe ports lt portlist gt rx tx rx tx com ports lt portlist gt rx tx rx tx cem cfm loopback lt macaddr gt mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt num lt int 1 65535 gt length lt int 0 1500 gt pattern lt string 1500 gt pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt cfm linktrace lt macaddr gt mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt ttl lt int 2 255 gt pdu_priority lt int 0 7 gt show cfm linktrace mepname lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt trans_id lt uint gt delete cfm linktrace md lt string 22 gt ma lt string 22 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt mepname lt string 32 gt config cfm ccm_fwd software hardware 488 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters show cfm cem fwd fo config cfm mp_ltr_all enable disable show ofm metal P
577. stic counter Description All MLD snooping statistic counters will be cleared Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear IGMP snooping statistic counter 416 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 clear mld_snooping statistic counter Command clear mld_snooping statistic counter Success DES 3528 5 config mlid_snooping data_driven_learning Purpose Used to configure the data driven learing of a MLD snooping group Syntax config mld_snooping data_driven_learning all vian_name lt vlan_name gt vlanid lt vidlist gt state enable disable aged_out enable disable expiry _time lt sec 1 65535 gt 1 Description This command is used to configure the data driven learning of a MLD snooping group When data driven learning is enabled for the VLAN the switch receives the IP multicast traffic on this VLAN and a MLD snooping group will be created The learning of an entry is not activated by MLD membership registration but by the traffic For an ordinary MLD snooping entry the MLD protocol will take care that the ageing out of the entry For a data driven entry the entry can be specified so that it doesnt ageout or ageout by the aged timer When data driven learning is enabled and data driven table is not full the multicast filtering mode for all ports are ignored
578. stination_ip lt ipaddr gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to only packets with this destination IP address dscp lt value 0 63 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this value in their Type of Service DiffServ code point DSCP field in their IP packet header icmp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP field within each packet type lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to this ICMP type value e code lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to this ICMP code value igmp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP field within each packet type lt value 0 255 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply to packets that have this IGMP type value tcp Specifies that the Switch will examine the Transmission Control Protocol TCP field within each packet e src_port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this TCP source port in their TCP header e dst port lt value 0 65535 gt Specifies that the access profile will apply only to packets that have this TCP destination port in their TCP header e urg ack psh rst syn fin Enter the appropriate flag mask parameter All incoming packets have TCP port numbers contained in them as the forwarding crit
579. strator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create MLD multicast VLAN mvl 184 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 create mld_snooping multicast_vlan mvl 2 Command create mld_snooping multicast_vlan mv1 2 Success DES 3528 5 config mid_snooping multicast_vlan Purpose Used to configure the parameter of the specific MLD multicast VLAN Syntax config mld_snooping multicast_vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt add delete member_port lt portlist gt source_port lt portlist gt untag_source_port lt portlist gt tag_member_port lt portlist gt state enable disable replace_source_ip lt ipv6addr gt remap_ priority lt value 0 7 gt none replace_priority 1 Description This command allows you to add a untagged member port a tagged member port a untagged source port and a tagged source port to the port list The untagged member port and the untagged source port will automatically become the untagged members of the multicast VLAN the tagged member port and the tagged source port will automatically become the tagged members of the multicast VLAN To change the port list the Switch will add or delete the port list that user entered and update the previous port list The member port list and source port list cannot overlap However the member port of one multicast VLAN can overlap with another multicast VLAN Bef
580. strator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the default Gateway from the routing table 302 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 delete iproute default Command delete iproute default Success DES 3528 5 show iproute Purpose Used to display the Switch s current IP routing table Syntax show iproute Description This command will display the Switch s current IP routing table Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the contents of the IP routing table DES 3528 5 show iproute Command show iproute Routing Table IP Address Netmask Gateway Protocol Total Entries 303 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual MAC NOTIFICATION COMMANDS The MAC notification commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed in the following table along with their appropriate parameters Command Parameters enable mac_notification fs disable mac_notification a rowne Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable mac_notification Purpose Used to enable global MAC address table notification on the Switch Syntax enable mac_notification Description This command is used to enable MAC address notification without changing configuration Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level user
581. t Specifies a mask to be combined with the value found in the frame header and if this field contains the value entered here apply the following rules packet_content_mask Allows users to examine any up to four specified offset_chunk within a packet at one time and specifies that the Switch will mask the packet header beginning with the offset value specified as follows packet_content offset_chunk_1 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_2 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_3 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_4 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff With this advanced unique Packet Content Mask also known as Packet Content Access Control List ACL D Link xStack switch family can effectively mitigate some network attacks like the common ARP Spoofing attack that is wide spread today This is the reason that Packet Content ACL is able to inspect any specified content of a packet in different protocol layers IPV6 Denotes that IPv6 packets will be examined by the Switch for forwarding or filtering based on the rules configured in the config access_ profile command for IPv6 e class Entering this parameter will instruct the Switch to examine the class field of the IPv6 header This class field is a part of the packet header that is similar to the Typeag Service ToS or Precedence bits field in IPv4 e flowlabe Entering this parameter will instruct the Switch to examine the flow label field of the IPv6 header This flow label fie
582. t dscp lt value 0 63 gt icmp type lt value 0 255 gt code lt value 0 255 gt igmp type lt value 0 255 gt tcp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt urg ack psh rst syn fin udp src_port lt value 0 65535 gt dst_port lt value 0 65535 gt protocol_id lt value 0 255 gt user_define lt hex Ox0 Oxffftttff gt 1 packet_content offset_0 15 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_16 31 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt offset_32 47 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_48 63 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_64 79 lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt lt hex Ox0 Oxffffffff gt 1 ipv6 class lt value 0 255 gt flowlabel lt hex 0x0 Oxfffff gt source_ipv6 lt ipv6addr gt destination _ipv6 lt ipv6addr gt 1 port lt portlist gt all permit deny time_range lt range_name 32 gt delete access_id lt value 1 100 gt show cpu profile_id lt value 1 5 gt access _ profile 244 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Command Parameters con
583. t space a VLAN name in the lt vlan_name 32 gt space and the network address in the lt network_address gt space Do not type the angle brackets Example Command config ipif Engineering ipaddress 10 24 22 5 255 0 0 0 vlan Design state enable square brackets Purpose Encloses a required value or set of required arguments One value or argument can be specified create account admin operator user lt username 15 gt Description In the above syntax example users must specify either an admin or a user level account to be created Do not type the square brackets Example Command create account admin Tommy vertical bar Purpose Separates two or more mutually exclusive items in a list one of which must be entered Syntax create account admin operator user lt username 15 gt In the above syntax example users must specify either admin or user Do not type the vertical bar Example Command create account admin Tommy braces Encloses an optional value or set of optional arguments reset config system force _agree Description In the above syntax example users have the option to specify config or system It is not necessary to specify either optional value however the effect of the system reset is dependent on which if any value is specified Therefore with this example there are three possible outcomes of performing a system reset See the following chapter Basic Commands for more details about the rese
584. t Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable jwac forcible _logout Purpose Used to enable JWAC Forcible Logout function Syntax enable jwac forcible_logout Description This command allows a Ping packet with TTL 1 from an authenticated host to be regarded as a logout request by the JWAC enabled switch As a result the host will be moved back to an unauthenticated state Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable JWAC forcible_logout DES 3528 5 enable jwac forcible logout Command enable jwac forcible_ logout Success DES 3528 5 disable jwac forcible_logout Purpose Used to disable JWAC forcible logout function Syntax disable jwac forcible _logout Description This command is used to disable JWAC forcible logout function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable JWAC forcible_logout DES 3528 5 disable jwac forcible_logout Command disable jwac forcible_logout Success DES 3528 5 enable jwac udp filtering function Purpose Used to enable JWAC UDP filtering function Syntax enable jwac udp_filtering Description This command is used to drop all UDP and ICMP packets except DHCP and DNS packets from unauthenticated hosts Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Ex
585. t command Do not type the braces xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual parentheses Purpose Indicates at least one or more of the values or arguments in the preceding syntax enclosed by braces must be specified Syntax config dhcp_relay hops lt value 1 16 gt time lt sec 0 65535 gt 1 Description In the above syntax example users have the option to specify hops or time or both of them The 1 following the set of braces indicates at least one argument or value within the braces must be specified Do not type the parentheses Example command config dhcp_relay hops 3 Line Editing Key Usage Delete Deletes the character under the cursor and then shifts the remaining characters in the line to the left Backspace Deletes the character to the left of the cursor and then shifts the remaining characters in the line to the left Left Arrow Moves the cursor to the left Right Arrow Moves the cursor to the right Up Arrow Repeats the previously entered command Each time the up arrow is pressed the command previous to that displayed appears This way it is possible to review the command history for the current session Use the down arrow to progress sequentially forward through the command history list Down Arrow The down arrow will display the next command in the command history entered in the current session This displays each command sequentially as it was entered Use the up
586. t link layer uses a six byte MAC address Binding these two address types together allows the transmission of data between the layers The primary purpose of IP MAC Port Binding is to restrict the access to a switch to a number of authorized users Only the authorized client can access the Switch s port by checking the pair of IP MAC addresses with the pre configured white list If an unauthorized user tries to access an IMPB enabled port the system will block the access by dropping its packet The maximum number of IP MAC Port Binding entries is dependant on chip capability e g the ARP table size and storage size of the device For the DES 3528 Series the maximum number of IP MAC Binding entries is 511 The creation of authorized IP MAC pairs can be manually configured by CLI or Web or can be leaned automatically when DHCP snooping is enabled The function is port based meaning a user can enable or disable the function on the individual port ACL Mode Due to some special cases that have arisen with the IP MAC Port Binding this Switch has been equipped with a special ACL Mode for IP MAC Port Binding When enabled the Switch will create one entry in the Access Profile Table The entry may only be created if there are at least a Profile ID available on the Switch If not when the ACL Mode is enabled an error message will be prompted to the user When the ACL Mode is enabled the Switch will only accept packets from a created entry in the I
587. t multiple authentication is not enabled any lf any one of the authentication methods 802 1x MAC and JWAC are passed then authentication will be passed dot1x_impb Dot1x will be verified first and then IMPB will be verified Both authentication methods need to be passed impb_jwac IMPB will be verified first and then JWAC will be verified Both authentication methods need to be passed Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure the authentication mode of all ports to host based DES 3528 5 config authentication ports all auth_mode host_based Command config authentication ports all auth_mode host_based Success DES 3528 5 To configure the multi authentication method of all ports to any DES 3528 5 5 config authentication ports all multi_authen_methods any Command config authentication ports all multi_authen_methods any Success DES 3528 5 432 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show authentication guest_vlan Purpose Used to display the guest VLAN settings Syntax show authentication guest_vlan Description This command allows you to show the information of the guest vlan Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the guest VLAN settings on the Switch DES 3528 5 show authentication guest_vlan Command show authentication guest_vlan Guest VLAN VID ral Guest VLAN M
588. t or range of ports to be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the packets analysis for port 7 of module 2 65 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show packet port 2 Command show packet port 2 128 255 256 511 512 1023 1024 1518 Unicast RX Multicast RX Broadcast RX O O O O O O O O O O Frame Type Total sec RX Bytes RX Frames TX Bytes TX Frames i Quit hi Next Page ij Previous Page Refresh show error ports Purpose Used to display the error statistics for a range of ports Syntax show error ports lt portlist gt Description This command will display all of the packet error statistics collected and logged by the Switch for a given port list Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the errors of the port 3 of module 1 66 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show error ports 3 Command show error ports 3 Port Number CRC Error Undersize Oversize Fragment Jabber Drop Pkts Symbol Error Frames Excessive Deferral CRC Error Late Collision Excessive Collision Single Collision Collision ei Quit h Next Page Previous Page f Refresh show utilization Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to
589. t portlist gt lt class_id 0 7 gt Description This command displays the current threshold per port and per queue parameters in use on the switch Parameters portlist A range of ports to show class_id This specifies which of the n 1 hardware CoS queues the config sred command will apply to Restrictions None Example usage To show sred DES 3528 5 show sred Command show sred Simple RED Globale Status Disabled Port Class Drop Green Threshold Drop Low High Low Disabled Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 Disabled 60 80 PPP RP PPP PRP RP RP PhP PP Pe PPP RPP PPP RP RP RP PP PP Pe eR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 ON OO UP WDNDRPF ON DOD UO BP WD FEF O ei Quit h Next Page ENTER Next Entry All 399 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show sred drop_counter Purpose Used to display the simple RED drop packet counter per port Syntax show sred drop_counter lt portlist gt Description This command displays for the egress port the count of dropped packets Parameters portlist A range of ports to show Restrictions None Example usage This example displays red and yellow packet drop counts for all ports DES
590. t resides vlanid The ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides ipaddr Specifies the multicast group IP address for Layer 3 switch Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 414 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To unset port range 9 10 from MLD Snooping static member ports for group 239 1 1 1 on default VLAN DES 3528 5 delete mld_snooping static_group vlan default FFI1E 1 Command delete mld_snooping static_group vlan default FFI1E 1 Success DES 3528 5 show mlid_snooping static_group Purpose Used to display a MLD Snooping multicast group static member port Syntax show mid_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipv6addr gt Description This command is used to display a MLD Snooping multicast group static member port Parameters vlan The name of the VLAN on which the router port resides vlanid The ID of the VLAN on which the router port resides ipaddr Specifies the multicast group IP address for Layer 3 switch Restrictions None Example usage To display all the MLD snooping static groups DES 3528 5 show mld_snooping static _group Command show mld_snooping static_group IP Address Static Member Ports 1 Default Total Entries show mlid_snooping statistic counter Purpose Used to display a MLD Snooping statistics counter Sy
591. tAccessRejects radiusAuthClientAccessChallenges radiusAuthClientMalformedAccessResponses radiusAuthClientBadAuthenticators radiusAuthClientPendingRequests radiusAuthClientTimeouts radiusAuthClientUnknownTypes O O O O O O O O O O O O O radiusAuthClientPacketsDropped q Quit n Next Page p Previous Page Refresh show acct _ client Purpose Used to display account client information Syntax show acct_client Description This command displays account client information Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To display account client information 240 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show acct client Command show acct client radiusAcctClient gt radiusAcctClientInvalidServerAddresses radiusAcctClientIdentifier radiusAuthServerEntry gt radiusAccServerIndex 1 O O O radiusAccServerAddress radiusAccClientServerPortNumber radiusAccClientRoundTripTime radiusAccClientRequests radiusAccClientRetransmissions radiusAccClientResponses radiusAccClientMalformedResponses radiusAccClientBadAuthenticators radiusAccClientPendingRequests radiusAccClientTimeouts radiusAccClientUnknownTypes 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 radiusAccClientPacketsDropped ei Quit h Next Page ij Previous Page f Refresh config accounting service Purpose Used to configure the stat
592. t_number 1 65535 gt maxdatagramsize lt value 300 1400 gt config sflow analyzer_server lt value 1 4 gt timeout lt sec 1 2000000 gt infinite collectoraddress lt ipaddr gt collectorport lt udp_port_number 1 65535 gt maxdatagramsize lt value 300 1400 gt 1 delete sflow analyzer_server lt value 1 4 gt Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable sflow Purpose Used to enable the sFlow function Syntax enable sflow Description This command enables the sFlow function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable sflow DES 3528 5 enable sflow Command enable sflow Success DES 3528 5 219 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable sflow Purpose Used to disable the sFlow function Syntax disable sflow Description This command disables the sFlow function Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable sflow DES 3528 5 disable sflow Command disable sflow Success DES 3528 5 show sflow Purpose Used to display the sFlow function Syntax show sflow Description This command displays the sFlow function settings on the Swicth Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display sflow DES 3528 5 sho
593. t_security_entry port clear wac auth_state ports config 802 1p default_priority config 802 1p map config 802 1p user_priority config 802 1x auth_mode config 802 1x auth_parameter ports config 802 1x auth_protocol config 802 1x capability ports config 802 1x force_disconnect config 802 1x fwd_pdu ports config 802 1x fwd_pdu system 802 1x guest_vlan ports config 802 1x init 505 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config 802 1x reauth config access _ profile config account config accounting service config address_binding dhcp_snoop max_entry ports config address binding ip_mac ipaddress config address_binding ip_mac ports config admin local_enable config arp_aging time config arpentry config authen application config authen parameter attempt config authen parameter response_timeout config authen server_group config authen server_host config authen_enable config authen_login config bandwidth_control config command_history config command_prompt config configuration config cpu access_profile profile _id config dhcp_relay config dhcp_relay add ipif config dhcp_relay delete ipif config dhcp_relay option_82 check config dhcp_relay option_82 policy config dhcp_relay option_82 state config dotlv_protocol_group config dscp map config dscp trust config dst config fdb aging_time config filter dhcp_server config filter extensive_netbios config filter net
594. tax config Ildp message_tx_hold_multiplier lt 2 10 gt Description This command is a multiplier on the msgTxlnterval that is used to compute the TTL value of txTTL in an LLDPDU TheTTL will be carried in the LLDPDU packet The lifetime will be the minimum of 65535 and message_tx_interval message_tx_hold_multiplier At the partner switch when the tme to Live for a given advertisement expires the advertised data is deleted from the neighbor switch s MIB Parameters Message_tx_hold_multiplier The range is from 2 to 10 The default setting is 4 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Usage Example To change the multiplier value DES 3528 5 config lldp message_tx_hold multiplier 3 Command config lldp message_tx_ hold multiplier 3 Success DES 3528 5 config lldp tx_delay Purpose Used to change the minimum time delay interval any LLDP port will delay advertising successive LLDP advertisements due to a change in LLDP MIB content The tx_delay defines the minimum interval between sending of LLDP messages due to constantly change of MIB content Syntax config Ildp tx_delay lt sec 1 8192 gt Description The LLDP message_tx_interval transmit interval must be greater than or equal to 4 x tx_delay interval Parameters tx_delay The range is from 7 second to 8192 seconds The default setting is 2 seconds NOTE txDelay should be less than or equal to 0 25 msgTxlnter
595. tch DES 3528 5 config 802 1lp default_priority all 5 Command config 802 1p default_priority all 5 Success DES 3528 5 show 802 1 default_priority Purpose Used to display the current configured 802 1p priority value that will be assigned to an incoming untagged packet before being forwarded to its destination Syntax show 802 1p default_priority lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the current configured 802 1p priority value that will be assigned to an incoming untagged packet before being forwarded to its destination Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured Restrictions None 113 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To display the current 802 1p default priority configuration on the Switch DES 3528 5 show 802 1p default_priority Command show 802 1p default_priority Priority Effective Priority PRPRPRPRPRPRPRPRPRPRPRPRPRPRPRPRPRPRP EB Oo0oo0o000000000 0000000 Ooo0o0o00000000000 00000 20 0 q Quit n Next Page ENTER Next Entry A All enable hol_prevention Purpose Used to enable the HOL prevention state Syntax enable hol_prevention Description This command is used to enable the HOL prevention function on the switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable HOL prevention DE
596. tch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show config current_config Command show config current_config DES 3528 Configuration Firmware Build 2 00 B031 Copyright C 2009 D Link Corporation All rights reserved BASIC ACCOUNT LIST ACCOUNT END PASSWORD ENCRYPTION disable password encryption config serial_port auto_logout 10 minutes enable telnet 23 enable web 80 q Quit n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All Purpose Used to upload the current switch settings or the switch history log to a TFTP Syntax upload cfg_toTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename 64 gt lt config_id 1 2 gt log toTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename 64 gt attack_log toTFTP lt ipaddr gt lt path_filename 64 gt unit lt unit_id 1 8 gt Description This command is used to upload either the Switch s current settings or the Switch s history log to a TFTP server Parameters cfg_toTFIP Specifies that the Switch s current settings will be uploaded to the TFTP server log_toTFTP Specifies that the switch history log will be uploaded to the TFTP server attack_log toTFTP Specifies that the switch attack log will be uploaded to the TFTP server lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the TFTP server The TFTP server must be on the same IP subnet as the Switch contig_id Specifies configuration ID in the system If it is not specified it refers to the boot up configuration ID unit Specifies which switch unit s attack log will be uploade
597. tch CLI Reference Manual disable port_security trap_log Purpose Used to disable the trap log for port security Syntax disable port_security trap_log Description This command along with the enable port_security trap_log will enable and disable the sending of log messages to the Switch s log and SNMP agent when the port security of the Switch has been triggered Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable the port security trap log setting DES 3528 5 disable port_security trap_log Command disable port_security trap_log Success DES 3528 5 33 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual STACKING COMMANDS The stacking configuration commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config box_priority current_box_id lt value 1 8 gt priority lt value 1 63 gt config box_id current_box_id lt value 1 8 gt new_box_id auto 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 config stacking mode disable enable show stacking mode Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config box_priority Purpose Used to configure box priority so as to determine which box switch becomes the master A lower number denotes a higher priority Syntax config box_priority current _box_id lt value 1 8 gt prio
598. tch configured as a CaS is not a member of a SIM group and will take on the following characteristics Itis nota CS or MS of another Single IP group Itis connected to the CS through the CS management VLAN The following rules also apply to the above roles 1 Each device begins in the Commander state 2 CS s must change their role to CaS and then to MS to become a MS of a SIM group Thus the CS cannot directly be converted to a MS The user can manually configure a CS to become a CaS A MS can become a CaS by a Being configured as a CaS through the CS b If report packets from the CS to the MS time out 5 The user can manually configure a CaS to become a CS 6 The CaS can be configured through the CS to become a MS After configuring one switch to operate as the CS of a SIM group additional DES 3528 switches may join the group by either an automatic method or by manually configuring the Switch to be a MS The CS will then serve as the in band entry point for access to the MS The CS s IP address will become the path to all MS s of the group and the CS s Administrator s password and or authentication will control access to all MS s of the SIM group With SIM enabled the applications in the CS will redirect the packet instead of executing the packets The applications will decode the packet from the administrator modify some data then send it to the MS After execution the CS may receive a response packet from the MS wh
599. te Disabled Maximum Frame Size 1536 Bytes 29 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual PORT SECURITY COMMANDS The Switch s port security commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config port_security ports lt portlist gt all admin_state enable disable max_learning_addr lt max_lock_no 0 64 gt lock_address_mode Permanent DeleteOnTimeout DeleteOnReset 1 delete port_security_ entry vian_name lt vilan_name 32 gt mac_address lt macaddr gt port lt port gt clear port_security_entry port lt portlist gt show port_ security ports lt portlist gt disable port_security trap_log Each command is listed in detail in the following sections config port_security ports Purpose Used to configure port security settings Syntax config port_security ports lt portlist gt all admin_state enable disable max_learning_addr lt max_lock_no 0 64 gt lock_address_mode Permanent DeleteOnTimeout DeleteOnReset 1 Description This command allows for the configuration of the port security feature Only the ports listed in the lt portlist gt are affected Parameters portlist Specifies a port or range of ports to be configured all Configure port security for all ports on the Switch admin_state enable disable Enable or disable port s
600. te authentication vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vianid 1 4094 gt guest_vlan config authentication vlan lt vian_name 32 gt vlanid lt vianid 1 4094 gt add delete ports lt portlist gt all guest_vlan config authentication ports lt portlist gt all auth mode port_based host_based multi_authen_methods none any dot1x_impb impb_jwac 1 show authentication guest_vlan show authentication ports lt portlist gt enable authorization network authorization network eee authorization network show authorization eer a Each command is listed in detail in the following sections create authentication guest_vian Purpose Used to assign a static VLAN to be guest VLAN Syntax create authentication guest_vlan vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vilanid lt vlanid 1 4094 gt Description This command will assign a static vlan to be a guest vlan The specific VLAN which is assigned to a guest vlan must exist first The specific VLAN which has been assigned to a guest VLAN can t be deleted For further description of this command please see description for config authentication guest_vlan ports Parameters vian_name 32 Specifies the guest vlan by VLAN name vianid Specifies the guest vlan by VLAN ID Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create an authentication guest VLAN DES 3528 5 create authentication guest_vla
601. te enable aged_out enable expiry time 270 Command config igmp_snooping data_driven_learning vlan_name default state enable aged_out enable expiry time 270 Success DES 3528 5 206 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group Purpose Used to delete the IGMP snooping group learned by data driven Syntax clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group all vlan_name lt vlan_name gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipaddr gt all Description This command is used to delete the IGMP snooping group learned by data driven Parameters all Delete all groups learnt by data driven vlan_name lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping data driven learning group Is to be deleted Vianid lt vidlist gt The VID of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping data driven learning group is to be deleted lt ipaddr gt The group address for which IGMP snooping data driven learning group is to be deleted on the specified VLAN lt all gt All groups learnt by data driven on the specified VLAN will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete all groups learnt by data driven on VLAN default DES 3528 5 clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group vlan_name default all Command clear igmp_snooping data_driven_group vlan_name default all Success DES 3528 5
602. te for an interface DES 3528 5 disable ipif System Command disable ipif System Success DES 3528 5 show ipif Purpose Used to display the configuration of an IP interface on the Switch Syntax show ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt Description This command will display the configuration of an IP interface on the Switch Parameters lt ipif name 12 gt The name of the IP interface Restrictions None Example usage To display IP interface settings DES 3528 5 show ipif System Command show ipif System IP Interface System VLAN Name default Interface Admin State Enabled IPv4 Address 10 24 73 21 8 Manual Primary Proxy ARP Disabled Local Disabled DES 3528 5 174 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual MULTICAST VLAN COMMANDS The Multicast VLAN commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create igmp_ snooping multicast_vlan lt vian_name 32 gt lt vianid 2 4094 gt remap_priority lt value 0 7 gt none replace_priority lt vian_name 32 gt add delete member_port lt portlist gt source_port lt portlist gt untag_source_port lt portlist gt tag_member_port lt portlist gt state enable disable replace_source lt ipaddr gt remap_priority E 0 7 gt replace_priority 1 multicast_vlan_group Tenable omp sop
603. te the MLD protocol operation to the querier and forward the traffic destined to the multicast group to the member ports The device is also responsible to route the packet destined for this specific group to static member ports The static member port will only affect V2 MLD operation The Reserved IP multicast address 224 0 0 X must be excluded from the configured group The VLAN must be created first before a static group can be created vlan The name of the VLAN that has been configured vianid The ID of the VLAN that has been configured ipaddr Specifies the multicast group IP address for Layer 3 switch Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 413 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To create a mld snooping static group for VLAN 1 group 239 1 1 1 DES 3528 5 create mld_snooping static_group vlan default FFI1E 1 Command create mld_snooping static_group vlan default FFI1E 1 Success DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping static_group Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to configure a MLD Snooping multicast group static member port config mld_snooping static_group vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt lt ipv6addr gt add delete lt portlist gt When a port is configured as a static member port the MLD protocol will not operate on this
604. that a user may try to logon utilizing SSH authentication After the maximum number of attempts is exceeded the Switch will be disconnected and the user must reconnect to the Switch to attempt another login rekey 10min 30min 60min never Sets the time period that the Switch will change the security shell encryptions tco_port_number 1 65535 Specifies the TCP port used to communicate between SSH client and server The default value is 22 Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure the SSH server DES 3528 5 config ssh server maxsession 2 contimeout 300 authfail 2 Command config ssh server maxsession 2 contimeout 300 authfail 2 Success DES 3528 5 330 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show ssh server Purpose Used to display the SSH server setting Syntax show ssh server Description This command allows users to display the current SSH server setting Parameters None Restrictions None Usage example To display the SSH server DES 3528 5 show ssh server Command show ssh server The SSH Server Configuration Max Session 8 Connection Timeout 120 Authfail Attempts 2 Tcp Port Number 22 Rekey Timeout DES 3528 5 config ssh user Purpose Used to configure the SSH user Syntax config ssh user lt username 15 gt authmode hostbased hostname lt domain_name gt hostname_IP lt domain_name gt
605. the MLD multicast VLAN profile name max length is 32 all All MLD multicast VLAN group profile will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the MLD multicast VLAN group profile g1 DES 3528 5 delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl Command delete mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile gl Success DES 3528 5 show mid_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Purpose Used to show the information about an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Syntax show mid_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile lt profile_name 1 32 gt Description This command is used to show the information about an MLD multicast VLAN group profile on the switch Parameters lt profile_name 32 gt Specifies the MLD multicast VLAN profile name max length is 32 If not specified all MLD multicast VLAN group profiles will be displayed Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the MLD multicast VLAN group profile DES 3528 5 show mld _ snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Command show mld_snooping multicast_vlan_group_profile Multicast Addresses FF12 1 FF12 2 187 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config mid_snooping multicast_vlan multicast_group Purpose Used to bind a multicast group profile to a multicast VLA
606. the RSPAN VLAN Up to 16 RSPAN VLANs can be created vian_name Create the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name vian_id Create the RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To create a RSPAN VLAN DES 3528 5 create rspan vlan vlan_name v3 Command create rspan vlan vlan_name v3 Success DES 3528 5 delete rspan vian Used to delete a RSPAN VLAN Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage delete rspan vlan vlan_name lt vlan_name gt vlan_id lt value 1 4094 gt This command is used to delete RSPAN VLANs vian_name Delete RSPAN VLAN by VLAN name vian_id Delete RSPAN VLAN by VLAN ID Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete a RSPAN VLAN 392 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 delete rspan vlan vlan_name v3 Command delete rspan vlan vlan_name v3 Success DES 3528 5 config rspan vian Purpose Used by the source switch to configure the source setting for the RSPAN VLAN Syntax config rspan vlan vlan_name lt vlan_name gt vilan_id lt vlanid 1 4094 gt redirect add delete port lt port gt source add delete ports lt portlist gt rx tx both Description This command configures the source and redirect setting for the RSPAN VLAN on the Switch The output port of the RSPAN mirrored packet will u
607. the VLAN for which MLD snooping data driven learning group Is to be deleted Vianid lt vidlist gt The VID of the VLAN for which MLD snooping data driven learning group is to be deleted lt ipv6addr gt The group address for which MLD snooping data driven learning group is to be deleted on the specified VLAN lt all gt All groups learnt by data driven on the specified VLAN will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete all groups learnt by data driven on VLAN default DES 3528 5 clear mld_snooping data_driven_group vlan_name default all Command clear mld_snooping data_driven_group vlan_name default all Success DES 3528 5 418 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual MAC BASED ACCESS CONTROL COMMANDS LIST The MAC based Access Control Commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters config mac_based_access_ control lt passwd 16 gt password config mac_based_access_control method mac_ config mac_based_access_control method access _conitrol method local radius local radius radius config mac_based_access_control lt portlist gt guest_vlan ports config mac_based_access_control ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable mode port_based host_based ag
608. the authorized data assigned by the RADUIS server will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled The default state is enabled local f specified to enable the authorized data assigned by the local database will be accepted if the global authorization network is enabled The default state is enabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the accepting of authorized configuration DES 3528 5 config jwac authorization network radius enable Command config jwac authorization network radius enable Success DES 3528 5 368 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config Mm Aicclem lentat lald er 1 lt M ey Le l Purpose Used to choose authenticate page Syntax config jwac authenticate_page Japanese english Description This command allows administrator to decide which authenticate page to be used Parameters jappanese Choose the Japanese page english Choose the english page the default page is english Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To choose Japanese authenticate page DES 3528 5 config jwac authenticate_page japanese Command config jwac authenticate_page japanese Success DES 3528 5 show jwac authenticate page element Purpose Used to show the element mapping of the customize authenti
609. the state of interface proxy_arp enable disable Allows users to enable or disable the proxy ARP function The default setting is Disabled local enable disable Controls whether the system provides the proxy reply for the ARP packets destined for IP address located in the same subnet as the received interface When proxy ARP is enabled for an interface the system will reply the ARP query destined for IP address located in a different IP subnet from the interface IP For ARP packets destined for IP address located in the same IP subnet as the interface IP the system will check this setting to determine whether to reply The default setting is Disabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create an interface DES 3528 5 create ipif if2 vlan2 state enable Command create ipif if2 vlan2 state enable Success NOTE The DES 3528 52 Series does not support cross VLAN routing Clients on different VLANs subnets within the same DES 3528 52 switch need to communicate with each other via an external L3 router or switch 172 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual delete ipif Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to delete an interface delete ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt all This command deletes an interface or all interfaces Note that the system interface c
610. the switch Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Enabling the NetBIOS filter will create one access profile and one access rules per port DSAP FO0 SASP FO Example usage To configure the extensive NetBIOS state DES 3528 5 config filter extensive_netbios 1 10 state enable Command config filter extensive_netbios 1 10 state enable Success DES 3528 5 show filter extensive_netbios Purpose Used to display the switch settings to filter NetBIOS packets from specified ports Syntax show filter extensive_netbios Description This command will display the switch settings to filter NetBIOS packets from the specified ports Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To display the extensive NetBIOS filter status DES 3528 5 show filter extensive netbios Command show filter extensive netbios Enabled Ports 1 3 DES 3528 5 270 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual L3 CPU FILTER COMMANDS The L3 CPU Filter commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table When the Switch receives a packet such as PIM DVMRP OSPF RIP VRRP or IGMP query the L3 CPU filter mode will determine how the packet is handled If the mode is disabled the packets will be sent to the CPU and will be treated according to the
611. the timer associated with the port or the user will be reset Parameters ports To specify the port range to delete MAC on them lt macadar gt To delete a specified host with this MAC Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To clear MAC auth_state on MAC enable ports DES 3528 5 clear mac_based_access_ control auth_state ports all Command clear mac_based_access_ control auth_state ports all Success DES 3528 5 create mac_based_access_control_local mac Purpose Used to create the local database entry Syntax create mac_based_ access control _local mac lt macaddrs gt vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vianid lt vianid 1 4094 gt Description This command is used to create a database entry Parameters mac The MAC address that access accept by local mode vlan lf the MAC address is authorized the port will be assigbed to this vlan vianid lf the MAC address is authorized the port will be assigbed to this vlan Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a local database entry DES 3528 5 create mac based access control local mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 vlan default Command create mac based access control local mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 vlan default Success DES 3528 5 424 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config mac_based_
612. this setting to determine whether to reply The default setting is Disabled bootp Allows the selection of the BOOTP protocol for the assignment of an IP address to the Switch s System IP interface dhcp Allows the selection of the DHCP protocol for the assignment of an IP address to the Switch s System IP interface If users are using the autoconfig feature the Switch becomes a DHCP client automatically so it is not necessary to change the ipif settings Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the IP interface System 171 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config ipif System ipaddress 10 48 74 122 8 Command config ipif System ipaddress 10 48 74 122 8 Success DES 3528 5 create ipif Purpose Used to create a L3 interface Syntax create ipif lt ipif_name 12 gt lt network_address gt lt vlan_name 32 gt state enable disable proxy_arp enable disable local enable disable Description This command creates a L3 interface This interface can be configured with IPv4 address Currently it has a restriction An interface can have only one IPv4 address defined Parameters lt ipif_ name 12 gt The name created for the IP interface lt network_address gt The network address for the IP interface to be created lt vian_name 32 gt The name of vlan state
613. this command Example usage To create a VLAN ID on the Switch DES 3528 5 create vlan vlanid 5 advertisement Command create vlan vlanid 5 advertisement Success DES 3528 5 delete vian Purpose Used to delete a previously configured VLAN on the Switch Syntax delete vlan lt vian_name 32 gt Description This command will delete a previously configured VLAN on the Switch Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The VLAN name of the VLAN to be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To remove the VLAN v1 120 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 delete vlan v1 Command delete vlan v1 Success DES 3528 5 delete vlan vlanid Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to delete multiple VLANs by VLAN ID on the switch delete vlan vlanid lt vidlist gt This command deletes previously configured multiple VLANs on the Switch lt vidlist gt Specifies a range of multiple VLAN IDs to be deleted Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To delete VLAN ID on the Switch DES 3528 5 delete vlan vlanid 5 Command delete vlan vlanid 5 Success DES 3528 5 config vian Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to add additional ports to a previously configured
614. this parameter along with the proper destination stated above will instruct the Switch to send critical and warning events to the Switch s log or SNMP agent information Entering this parameter along with the proper destination stated above will instruct the switch to send informational warning and critical events to the Switch s log or SNMP agent Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the system severity settings DES 3528 5 config system_severity trap critical Command config system_severity trap critical Success DES 3528 5 show system_ severity Purpose Used to display system_severity level of an alert required for log entry or trap message Syntax show system_severity Description This command is used to display system_severity level of an alert required for log entry or trap message Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the system severity settings for critical traps and log 78 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show system_severity Command show system_severity System Severity Trap information System Severity Log information DES 3528 5 79 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE PROTOCOL MSTP COMMANDS This Switch supports three versions of the
615. ticast_fdb default 01 00 00 00 00 01 add 1 5 Success DES 3528 5 config fdb aging_time Purpose Used to set the aging time of the forwarding database Syntax config fdb aging_time lt sec 10 1000000 gt Description The aging time affects the learning process of the Switch Dynamic forwarding table entries which are made up of the source MAC addresses and their associated port numbers are deleted from the table if they are not accessed within the aging time The aging time can be from 10 to 1000000 seconds with a default value of 300 seconds A very long aging time can result in dynamic forwarding table entries that are out of date or no longer exist This may cause incorrect packet forwarding decisions by the Switch If the aging time is too short however many entries may be aged out too soon This will result in a high percentage of received packets whose source addresses cannot be found in the forwarding table in which case the Switch will broadcast the packet to all ports negating many of the benefits of having a switch Parameters lt sec 10 1000000 gt The aging time for the MAC address forwarding database value The value in seconds may be between 10 and 1000000 seconds Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set the FDB aging time DES 3528 5 config fdb aging_time 300 Command config fdb aging_time 300 Success DES 3528 5 95 xStack DES 35
616. tication policy 309 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show authen_policy Command show authen_policy Authentication Policy Enabled DES 3528 5 create authen_login method _list_name Purpose Used to create a user defined method list of authentication methods for users logging on to the Switch Syntax create authen_login method_list_name lt string 15 gt Description This command is used to create a list for authentication techniques for user login The Switch can support up to eight method lists but one is reserved as a default and cannot be deleted Multiple method lists must be created and configured separately Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the given method list Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create the method list Trinity DES 3528 5 create authen_login method_list_name Trinity Command create authen_login method_list_name Trinity Success DES 3528 5 config authen_login Purpose Used to configure a user defined or default method list of authentication methods for user login Syntax config authen_login default method_list_name lt string 15 gt method tacacs xtacacs tacacs radius server_group lt string 15 gt local none 1 Description This command will configure a user defined or default
617. tilizing packet flooding ARP Storm or other methods These attacks may increase the CPU utilization beyond its capability To alleviate this problem the Safeguard Engine function was added to the Switch s software The Safeguard Engine can help the overall operability of the Switch by minimizing the workload of the Switch while the attack is ongoing thus making it capable to forward essential packets over its network in a limited bandwidth When the Switch either a receives too many packets to process or b exerts too much memory it will enter an Exhausted mode When in this mode the Switch will perform the following tasks to minimize the CPU usage a It will limit bandwidth of receiving ARP packets b It will limit the bandwidth of IP packets received by the Switch IP packets may also be limited by the Switch by configuring only certain IP addresses to be accepted This method can be accomplished through the CPU Interface Filtering mechanism explained in the previous section Once the user configures these acceptable IP addresses other packets containing different IP addresses will be dropped by the Switch thus limiting the bandwidth of IP packets To keep the process moving fast be sure not to add many conditions on which to accept these acceptable IP addresses and their packets this limiting the CPU utilization Once in Exhausted mode the packet flow will decrease by half of the level that caused the Switch to enter Exhausted mode
618. tion the p2p status changes to operate as if the p2p value were false The default setting for this 84 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config stp ports parameter is auto state enable disable Allows STP to be enabled or disabled for the ports specified in the port list The default is enable Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure STP with path cost 19 hellotime set to 2 seconds migration enabled and state enabled for ports 1 5 of module 1 DES 3528 5 config stp ports 1 5 externalCost 19 hellotime 2 migrate yes state enable Command config stp ports 1 5 externalCost 19 hellotime 2 migrate yes state enable Success DES 3528 5 create stp instance_id Purpose Used to create a STP instance ID for MSTP Syntax create stp instance_id lt value 1 15 gt Description This command allows the user to create a STP instance ID for the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol There are 16 STP instances on the Switch one internal CIST unchangeable and the user may create up to 15 instance IDs for the Switch Parameters lt value 1 15 gt Enter a value between 1 and 15 to identify the Spanning Tree instance on the Switch Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To create a spanning tree instance 2 DES 3528 5 create stp instance_id 2 Com
619. tion in detailed mode Restrictions None Example usage To display remote table in brief mode DES 3528 5 show lldp remote_ports 1 2 mode brief Command show lldp remote_ports 1 2 mode brief Port ID Remote Entities Count Entity 1 Chassis ID Subtype MAC Address Chassis ID 00 01 0 2 03 04 01 Port ID Subtype Local Port ID 1 3 Port Description RMON Port 1 on Unit 3 q Quit n Next Page ENTER Next Entry a All 383 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show Ildp statistics Used to display the system LLDP statistics information Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage show Ildp statistics This command displays an overview of neighbor detection activity on the switch None None To display global statistics information DES 3528 5 show lldp statistics Command Last Change Time Number Number Number Number of Table of Table of Table of Table DES 3528 5 show lldp statistics 1705 Insert 0 Delete 0 Drop 0 Ageout 0 show Ildp statistics ports Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Usage Example Used to display the ports LLDP statistics information show Ildp statistics ports lt portlist gt This command displays per port LLDP statistics lt portlist gt Use this parameter to define ports to be configured When portlist is not specifie
620. tion level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the traffic scheduling mechanism for each COS queue DES 3528 5 config scheduling_mechanism ports 1 strict Command config scheduling_mechanism ports 1 strict Success DES 3528 5 show scheduling Purpose Used to display the current configured traffic scheduling for a port or a range of ports on the Switch Syntax show scheduling lt portlist gt Description This command will display the current traffic scheduling settings for a port or a range of ports on the Switch Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a port or a range of ports to be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the current scheduling configuration 109 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show scheduling Command show scheduling QOS Output Scheduling On Port 1 1 QOS Output Scheduling On Port 1 2 Class ID Weight ei Quit h Next Page 943d Next Entry Al All show scheduling_mechanism Purpose Used to show the current traffic scheduling mechanism for a port or a range of ports on the Switch Syntax show scheduling_mechanism lt portlist gt Description This command is used to display the current traffic scheduling mechanism for a port or a range of ports on the Switch Parameters lt portlist gt Specifies a range of ports to be displayed Restrictions None Example
621. tion of the authenticator associated with a port DES 3528 5 config 802 1x auth_parameter ports 1 20 direction both Command config 802 1x auth_parameter ports 1 20 direction both Success DES 3528 5 230 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config 802 1x auth_mode Purpose Used to configure 802 1X authentication mode Syntax config 802 1x auth_mode port_based mac_based Description This command configures the authentication mode Parameters port_based Configure the authentication as Port Based mode mac_based Configure the authentication as Host Based mode Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the authentication mode DES 3528 5 config 802 1x auth_mode port_based Command config 802 1x auth_mode port_based Success DES 3528 5 config 802 1 x init Purpose Used to initialize the authentication state machine of some or all ports Syntax config 802 1x init port_based ports lt portlist all gt mac_based ports lt portlist gt all mac_address lt macaddrs gt Description This command used to initialize the authentication state machine of some or all Parameters port_based This instructs the Switch to init 802 1X functions based only on the port number Ports approved for init can then be specified mac_based This instructs the Switch to init 802 1X functions based only
622. tion to be advertised none Specifies that there is no information to be advertised This is the default value chassis Advertises the Chassis ID information 490 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config cfm ma Restrictions Example usage manage Advertises the Management Address information chassis_manage Advertises both Management Address and Chassis ID information ccm_interval Specifies the CCM interval 10ms 10 milliseconds Not recommended For test purposes 100ms 100 milliseconds Not recommended For test purposes 1sec One second 10sec Ten seconds This is the default value 17min One minute 10min Ten minutes mepid_list Specify the MEPIDs contained in the maintenance association The range of MEPID is 1 8191 add Add MEPID s delete Specifies to delete MEPID s By default there s no MEPID in a newly created maintenance association Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To configure cfm maintenance association DES 3528 5 config cfm ma opl md op_domain vlanid 1 ccm_interval lsec Command config cfm ma opl md op_domain vlanid 1 ccm_interval l1sec Success DES 3528 5 create cfm mep Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Used to create a cfm MEP create cfm mep lt string 32 gt mepid lt int 1 8191 gt md lt string 22 gt m
623. tlv_protocol_identity This TLV optional data type indicates whether the corresponding Local System s Protocol Identity instance will be transmitted on the port The Protocol Identity TLV provides a way for stations to advertise protocols that are important to the operation of the network Such as Spanning Tree Protocol the Link Aggregation Control Protocol and numerous vendor proprietary variations are responsible for maintaining the topology and connectivity of the network If EAPOL GVRP STP including MSTP and LACP protocol identity is enabled on this port and it is enabled to be advertised then this protocol identity will be advertised The default state is disabled Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command 378 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Example usage To configure exclude the protocol identity TLV from the outbound LLDP advertisements for all ports DES 3528 5 config lldp ports all dotl_tlv_protocol_identity all enable Command config lldp ports all doti1_tlv_protocol_identity all enable Success DES 3528 5 config lidp dot3_tlvs Purpose Used to configure an individual port or group of ports to exclude one or more of IEEE 802 3 Organizationally Specific TLV data types from outbound LLDP advertisements Syntax config Ildp ports lt portlist gt all dot3_tlvs all mac_phy_configuration_status link_aggregation pow
624. to or greater than in order for the event to be generated The range is from 0 to 4294967295 The default value of threshold is 1 symbol error window The range is 1000 to 60000 ms The default value is 1000ms notify_state Specifies to enable or disable the event notification The default state is enable Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the error symbol threshold to 2 and period to 1000ms for port 1 DES 3528 5 config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error _symbol threshold 2 window 1000 notify state enable Command config ethernet_oam ports 1 link_monitor error_symbol threshold 2 window 1000 notify state enable Success DES 3528 5 462 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config ethernet_oam ports link_monitor error_frame Purpose Used to configure Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frame Syntax config ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt all link_monitor error_frame threshold lt range 0 4294967295 gt window lt millisecond gt notify _state enable disable 1 Description The command used to configure ports Ethernet OAM link monitoring error frames Link monitoring function provides a mechanism to detect and indicate link faults under a variety of conditions OAM monitors the counter on the number of frame errors as well as the number of coding symbol errors When t
625. to configure ports as router ports Syntax config router_ports vlan lt vilan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command allows users to designate a range of ports as being connected to multicast enabled routers This will ensure that all packets with such a router as its destination will reach the multicast enabled router regardless of protocol etc Parameters lt vian_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN on which the router port resides lt vidlist gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured add delete Specifies whether to add or delete forbidden ports of the specified VLAN lt portlist gt Specifies a port or range of ports that will be configured as router ports Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To set up static router ports DES 3528 5 config router _ports default add 2 1 2 10 Command config router_ports default add 2 1 2 10 Success DES 3528 5 config router _ports_forbidden Purpose Used to configure ports as forbidden multicast router ports Syntax config router_ports_forbidden vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt add delete lt portlist gt Description This command allows designation of a port or range of ports as being forbidden to multicast enabled routers This will ensure that multicast packets will not be forwarded to this port
626. to enable or disable e Create a ACL rule If no acl rule exists system will show an error message e lf any ACL rule action is dropped the packet will not be forwarded and not implement policy route e Packets pass from policy route its TTL will decrease 1 e f user delete a ACL rule that is linked a policy rule system will pop error message Parameters name Specifies the name of police rule profile_id Specifies the ACL profile ID access_id Specifies the ACL access ID nexthop Specifies the next hop IP address state Enables or disables the rule Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To config a policy route DES 3528 5 config policy route name engineer acl profile_id 1 access_id 1 nexthop 20 1 1 100 state enable Command config policy route name engineer acl profile_id 1 access_id 1 nexthop 20 1 1 100 state enable delete policy_route Purpose Used to delete policy route rule Syntax delete policy_route name lt policyroute_name 32 gt Description This command is used to delete policy route rule Parameters lt policyroute_name 32 gt Specifies the name of police rule Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete a policy route DES 3528 5 delete policy route name engineer Command delete policy route name engineer 455 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fa
627. trictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example Usage To turn on SNMP authentication trap support DES 3528 5 enable snmp authenticate_traps Command enable snmp authenticate_traps Success DES 3528 5 show snmp traps Purpose Used to show SNMP trap support on the Switch Syntax show snmp traps Description This command is used to view the SNMP trap support status currently configured on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To view the current SNMP trap support 52 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show snmp traps Command show snmp traps SNMP Traps Enabled Authenticate Trap Enabled DES 3528 5 disable snmp traps Purpose Used to disable SNMP trap support on the Switch Syntax disable snmp traps Description This command is used to disable SNMP trap support on the Switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To prevent SNMP traps from being sent from the Switch DES 3528 5 disable snmp traps Command disable snmp traps Success DES 3528 5 disable snmp authenticate_traps Purpose Used to disable SNMP authentication trap support Syntax disable snmp authenticate_traps Description This command is used to disable SNMP authentication support on the Switch Parameters None R
628. trictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To download a certificate file and key file to the Switch DES 3528 5 DES 3528 5 download ssl certificate 10 55 47 1 certfilename cert der keyfilename pkey der Command download ssl certificate 10 55 47 1 certfilename cert der keyfilename pkey der Success DES 3528 5 339 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual D LINK SINGLE IP MANAGEMENT COMMANDS Simply put D Link Single IP Management is a concept that will stack switches together over Ethernet instead of using stacking ports or modules Switches using D Link Single IP Management labeled here as SIM must conform to the following rules SIM is an optional feature on the Switch and can easily be enabled or disabled SIM grouping has no effect on the normal operation of the Switch in the user s network There are three classifications for switches using SIM The Commander Switch CS which is the master switch of the group Member Switch MS which is a switch that is recognized by the CS a member of a SIM group and a Candidate Switch CaS which is a switch that has a physical link to the SIM group but has not been recognized by the CS as a member of the SIM group A SIM group can only have one Commander Switch CS All switches in a particular SIM group must be in the same IP subnet broadcast domain Members of a SIM group cannot cross a
629. trol on the Switch broadcast enable disable Enables or disables broadcast storm control multicast enable disable Enables or disables multicast storm control unicast enable disable Enables or disables unicast traffic control action Used to configure the action taken when a storm control has been detected on the Switch The user has two options e drop Utilizes the hardware Traffic Control mechanism which means the Switch s hardware will determine the Packet Storm based on the Threshold value stated and drop packets until the issue is resolved shutdown Utilizes the Switch s software Traffic Control mechanism to determine 100 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config traffic control Restrictions Example usage the Packet Storm occurring Once detected the port will deny all incoming traffic to the port except STP BPDU packets which are essential in keeping the Spanning Tree operational on the Switch If the countdown timer has expired and yet the Packet Storm continues the port will be placed in Shutdown Forever mode It can be recovered after 5 minutes or the user manually resets the port using the config ports enable command Choosing this option obligates the user to configure the time_interval field as well which will provide packet count samplings from the Switch s chip to determine if a Packet Storm is occurring threshold
630. ts MAC address format for NNI ports when used in Q in Q mode The default value for Join time is 200 milliseconds for Leave time is 600 milliseconds for LeaveAll time is 70000 milliseconds join Specifies the Join time will be set leave Specifies the Leave time will be set leaveall Specifies the LeaveAll time will be set value The time value will be set The value range is 700 to 100000 milliseconds In addition the Leave time should greater than 2 Join times and the LeaveAll time should greater than Leave time nni_bdpu_addr Uses to determine the BPDU protocol address for GVRP in service provide site It can use 802 1d GVRP address or 802 1ad service provider GVRP address Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command To set the Join time to 200 milliseconds DES 3528 5 config gvrp timer join 200 Command config gvrp timer join 200 Success DES 3528 5 show gvrp Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to display the GVRP global setting and it s timer s value show gvrp This command displays GVRP global setting and it s timer s value None None To display the timer s value of GVRP 131 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3552 5 show gvrp Command show gvrp Global GVRP Disabled Join Time 200 Milliseconds Leave Time 600 Milliseconds LeaveAll Time
631. ts to display None To show OAM control and status information on port 1 2 DES 3528 5 show ethernet_oam ports 1 2 status Command show ethernet_oam ports 1 2 status Port 1 Local Client Remote Loopback Unidirection Enabled Passive 1518 Bytes Support Not Supported Link Monitoring Variable Request PDU Revision Operation Status Loopback Status Support Not Supported 1 gt LinkFault No Loopback There is no peer entry information exist Port 2 Local Client Disabled Active 1518 Bytes ei Quit h Next Page bixgyas Next Entry M All 467 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show ethernet_oam ports configuration Purpose Used to display Ethernet OAM configuration Syntax show ethernet_oam ports lt portlist gt configuration Description This command is used to show port s Ethernet OAM configurations Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to display Restrictions None Example usage To show Ethernet OAM configuration on port 1 2 DES 3528 5 show ethernet_oam ports 1 2 configuration Command show ethernet_oam ports 1 2 configuration Enabled Passive Dying Gasp Enabled Critical Event Enabled Remote Loopback OAMPDU Processed Symbol Error Notify State Enabled Window 1000 milliseconds Threshold 2 Errored Symbol Frame Error Notify State Enabled Window 1000 milliseconds
632. tting If the Switch is configured for RSTP the port will be capable to migrate from 802 1D STP to 802 1w RSTP If the Switch is configured for MSTP the port is capable of migrating from 802 1D STP to 802 1s MSTP RSTP and MSTP can coexist with standard STP however the benefits of RSTP and MSTP are not realized on a port where an 802 1D network connects to an 802 1w or 802 1s enabled network Migration should be set as yes on ports connected to network stations or segments that are capable of being upgraded to 802 1w RSTP or 802 1s MSTP on all or some portion of the segment edge true false auto true designates the port as an edge port Edge ports cannot create loops however an edge port can lose edge port status if a topology change creates a potential for a loop An edge port normally should not receive BPDU packets If a BPDU packet is received it automatically loses edge port status false indicates that the port does not have edge port status auto Indicates that the port will be able to automatically enable the edge port status if this port links to an end station or a device that does not support the STP function restricted_role true false f true causes the Port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI even it has the best spanning tree priority vector Such a Port will be selected as an Alternate Port after the Root Port has been selected This parameter should be false by default If set it can caus
633. tual_ip 1 1 1 1 Success DES 3528 5 441 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show wac auth_ state Purpose Used to display the authentication state of a port Syntax show wac auth_state ports lt portlist gt Description Used to display the authentication state for ports If port 1 is in host based mode 1 mac 00 00 00 00 00 01 is authenticated without VLAN assigned may be the specified target VLAN does not exist or the target VLAN has not been specified the ID of RX VLAN will be displayed RX VLAN ID is 4004 in this example 2 mac 00 00 00 00 00 02 is authenticated with target VLAN assigned the ID of target VLAN will be displayed target VLAN ID is 1234 in this example 3 mac 00 00 00 00 00 03 failed to pass authentication the VID field will be shown as indicating that packets with SA 00 00 00 00 00 03 will be droped no matter which VLAN these packets are from 4 mac 00 00 00 00 00 04 attempts to start authentication the VID field will be shown as until authentication completed If port 2 is in port based mode 1 mac 00 00 00 00 00 10 is the mac which made port 2 pass authentication mac address with P in the end indicats that this authentication is from a port in port based mode If port 3 is in port based mode 1 mac 00 00 00 00 00 20 attempts to start authentication mac address with P in the end indicats the port based mod
634. ueues stated above The Switch will empty the eight hardware priority queues in order beginning with the highest priority queue 6 to the lowest priority queue 0 Each hardware queue will transmit all of the packets in its buffer before permitting the next lower priority to transmit its packets When the lowest hardware priority queue has finished transmitting all of its packets the highest hardware priority queue will begin transmitting any packets it may have received The commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters contig bandwidth_control lt portlist gt all rx_rate no_limit lt value 64 1024000 gt tx_rate no_limit lt value 64 1024000 gt 1 show bandwidth_control lt portlist gt contig cos bandwidth_control ports lt portlist gt all lt cos_id_list 0 6 gt min_rate no_limit lt value 64 1024000 gt max_rate no_limit lt value 64 1024000 gt 1 feabieraipevenion fsaabieotpreverton fom otpreventon Each command is listed in detail in the following sections 104 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config bandwidth_control Purpose Used to configure bandwidth control on a port by port basis Syntax config bandwidth_control lt portlist gt all rx_rate no_limit lt value 64 1024000 gt tx_rate no_limit lt value 64 1024000 gt
635. ugh the commander switch using Telnet reconfig member_id lt value 1 32 gt exit This command is used to reconnect to a member switch using Telnet member _id lt value 1 32 gt Select the ID number of the member switch to configure exit This command is used to exit from managing the member switch and will return to managing the commander switch Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To connect to the MS with member ID 2 through the CS using the command line interface 345 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 reconfig member_id 2 Command reconfig member_id 2 DES 3528 5 Login config sim_group Purpose Used to add candidates and delete members from the SIM group Syntax config sim_group add lt candidate_id 1 100 gt lt password gt delete lt member_id 1 32 gt Description This command is used to add candidates and delete members from the SIM group by ID number Parameters add lt candidate_id gt lt password gt Use this parameter to change a candidate switch CaS to a member switch MS of a SIM group The CaS may be defined by its ID number and a password if necessary delete lt member_id 1 32 gt Use this parameter to delete a member switch of a SIM group The member switch should be defined by ID number Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example us
636. uiet_period lt sec 0 65535 gt tx_period lt sec 1 65535 gt supp_timeout lt sec 1 65535 gt server_timeout lt sec 1 65535 gt max_req lt value 1 10 gt reauth_period lt sec 1 65535 gt max_users lt value 1 448 gt no_limit enable_reauth enable disable 1 config 802 1x init port_based ports lt portlist all gt mac_based ports lt portlist gt all mac_address lt macadar gt config 802 1x auth_mode port_based mac_based config 802 1x reauth ti based ports lt portlist gt all mac_based ports lt portlist gt all mac_address lt macadar gt config radius add lt server_index 1 3 gt lt server_ip gt key lt passwd 32 gt default auth_port lt udp_port_number 1 65535 gt acct_port lt udp_port_number 1 65535 gt timeout lt int 1 255 gt retransmit lt int 1 255 gt config radius lt server_index 1 3 gt ipaddress lt server_ip gt key lt passwd 32 gt auth_port lt udp_port_number 1 65535 gt acct_port lt udp_port_number 1 65535 gt timeout lt int 1 255 gt retransmit lt int 1 255 gt 1 E rowo 221 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show auth_session_ statistics Each command is listed in detail in the following sections enable 802 1x Purpose Used to enable the 802 1X server on the Switch Syntax enable 802 1x Description This command enables the 802 1X Network Acce
637. upplied during the specified period of time Clear_time_range delete the setting of time range priority Port priority determines the priority with which the system attempts to supply the power to the ports There are three levels of priority that can be selected critical high and low When multiple ports happen to have the same level of priority the port ID will be used to determine the priority The lower port ID has higher priority The setting of the priority will affect the ordering of supplying power Even if the disconnect_method is set to deny_low_priority_port priority of the ports will be used by the system to manage and supply power to ports power_limit Configure the per port power limit If a port exceeds its power limit it will be shut down Based on 802 3af at there are 5 kinds of PD classes Class 0 0 44 12 95W Class 1 0 44 3 84W Class 2 3 84 6 49W Class 3 6 49 12 95W Class 4 12 95W 29 5W The following is the power limit applied to the port for these five classes For each class the power limit is a little more than the power consumption range for the class This takes the factor of the power loss on cable into account Thus the following are the typical values defined by the chip vendor class _0 15400mW class_1 4000mW class 2 7000mW class 3 15400mW User define 35000mW only for ports 1 8 but ports 1 8 are only tested up to the 30W mode for the maximum pow
638. urce_ip_mask 255 255 255 0 to give the IP address 10 42 73 0 for any source IP address between 10 42 73 0 to 10 42 73 255 Due to a chipset limitation the Switch supports a maximum of 6 access profiles The rules used to define the access profiles are limited to a total of 768 rules for the Switch One rule can support ACL per port or per portmap The access profile commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table Command Parameters create access _ profile ethernet vlan source_mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt destination mac lt macmask 000000000000 ffffffffffff gt 802 1p ethernet_type 1 lip vlan source_ip mask lt netmask gt destination_ip mask lt netmask gt dscp icmp type code igmp type tcp src_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffff gt flag_mask all urg ack psh rst syn fin 1 udp src_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt dst_port_mask lt hex Ox0 Oxffff gt protocol_id_ mask lt hex 0x0 Oxff gt user_define_mask lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 packet_content_mask offset_chunk_1 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_2 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_3 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt offset_chunk_4 lt value 0 31 gt lt hex 0x0 Oxffffffff gt 1 ijpv6 class flowlabel tcp src_port_mask
639. urpose Used to show address binding entries blocked MAC entries and port status Syntax show address_binding ip_mac all ipaddress lt ipaddr gt mac_address lt macaddr gt blocked all vian_name lt vlan_name gt mac_address lt macaddr gt ports Description This command is used to display IP MAC Port Binding entries Three different kinds of information can be viewed e ip _mac Address Binding entries can be viewed by entering the MAC and IP addresses of the device blocked Blocked address binding entries bindings between VLAN names and MAC addresses can be viewed by entering the VLAN name and the MAC address of the device e ports Address binding status of all ports can be viewed Parameters all Displays all IP MAC Port binding entries for Blocked Address Binding entries all specifies all the blocked VLANs and their bound MAC addresses lt ipaddr gt The IP address of the device where the IP MAC Port binding is made lt macadadr gt The MAC address of the device where the IP MAC Port binding is made lt vian_name gt The VLAN name of the VLAN that is bound to a MAC address in order to block a specific device on a known VLAN Restrictions None Example usage To show IP MAC Port Binding global configuration 156 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show address_binding Command show address_binding Tra
640. usage To display the scheduling mechanism 110 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show scheduling _ mechanism 1 4 Command show scheduling_mechanism 1 4 Strict Strict Strict Strict config 802 1p user_priority Purpose Syntax Description Parameters Restrictions Example usage Used to map the 802 1p user priority of an incoming packet to one of the eight hardware queues on the Switch config 802 1p user_priority ports lt portlist gt all lt priority 0 7 gt lt class_id 0 6 gt This command allows users to configure the way the Switch will map an incoming packet based on its 802 1p user priority to one of the eight available hardware priority queues on the Switch The Switch s default is to map the following incoming 802 1p user priority values to the eight hardware priority queues 802 1p Hardware Queue Remark 0 2 Mid low 1 0 Lowest 2 1 Lowest 3 3 Mid low 4 4 Mid high 5 5 Mid high 6 6 Highest 7 6 Highest This mapping scheme is based upon recommendations contained in IEEE 802 1D Change this mapping by specifying the 802 1p user priority users want to map to the lt class_id 0 6 gt the number of the hardware queue lt portlist gt all Specifes a range of ports to be configured All specifies all ports lt priority 0 7 gt The 802 1p user priority to associate with the lt class_id 0 6 gt the number of the
641. username table Syntax show snmp user Description This command displays information about each SNMP username in the SNMP group username table Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the SNMP users currently configured on the Switch DES 3528 5 show snmp user Command show snmp user Group Name VerAuthPriv initial V3 NoneNone Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 create snmp view Purpose Used to assign views to community strings to limit which MIB objects and SNMP manager Can access Syntax create snmp view lt view_name 32 gt lt oid gt view_type included excluded Description This command assigns views to community strings to limit which MIB objects an SNMP manager can access Parameters lt view_name 32 gt An alphanumeric string of up to 32 characters that identifies the SNMP view that will be created lt oid gt The object ID that identifies an object tree MIB tree that will be included or excluded from access by an SNMP manager view type Sets the view type to be e included Include this object in the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access excluded Exclude this object from the list of objects that an SNMP manager can access Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To create an SNMP view 40 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 cr
642. uthentication methods XTACACS TACACS and local in that order 311 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 config authen_login default method xtacacs tacacs local Command config authen_login default method xtacacs tacacs local Success DES 3528 5 delete authen_login method_list_name Purpose Used to delete a previously configured user defined method list of authentication methods for users logging on to the Switch Syntax delete authen_login method_list_name lt string 15 gt Description This command is used to delete a list for authentication methods for user login Parameters lt string 15 gt Enter an alphanumeric string of up to 15 characters to define the given method list the user wishes to delete Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the method list name Trinity DES 3528 5 delete authen_login method_list_name Trinity Command delete authen_login method_list_name Trinity Success DES 3528 5 312 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show authen_login Purpose Used to display a previously configured user defined method list of authentication methods for users logging on to the Switch Syntax show authen_login default method_list_name lt string 15 gt all Description This command is used to show a list of authenticat
643. utilizing the discovery interval protocol The user may set the hold time from 100 to 300 seconds candidate Used to change the role of a CS commander to a CaS candidate dp_interval lt 30 90 gt The user may set the discovery protocol interval in seconds that the Switch will send out discovery packets Returning information to the CS will include information about other switches connected to it Ex MS CaS The user may set the dp_interval from 30 to 90 seconds hold time lt 100 255 gt Using this parameter the user may set the time in seconds the Switch will hold information sent to it from other switches utilizing the discovery interval protocol The user may set the hold time from 100 to 255 seconds Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To change the time interval of the discovery protocol DES 3528 5 config sim commander dp_interval 30 Command config sim commander dp_interval 30 Success DES 3528 5 To change the hold time of the discovery protocol DES 3528 5 config sim commander hold time 120 Command config sim commander hold_time 120 Success DES 3528 5 To transfer the CS commander to be a CaS candidate DES 3528 5 config sim candidate Command config sim candidate Success DES 3528 5 347 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual To transfer the Switch to be a C
644. v ports lt portlist gt Description This command dsplaysthe VLAN to be associated with untagged packet ingressed from a port based on the protocol group Parameters portlist Specifies a range of ports to apply this command Restrictions None Example usage The example display the protocol VLAN information for ports 1 2 DES 3528 5 show port dotlv ports 1 2 Command show port dotlv ports 1 2 Protocol Priority default vlan 2 vlan _ 3 vlan 4 Protocol Priority O Total Entries 2 DES 3528 5 129 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable pvid auto_assign Purpose Used to enable auto assignment of PVID Syntax enable pvid auto_assign Description This command enables the auto assign of PVID When this is enabled PVID will be possibly changed by PVID or VLAN configuration When user configures a port to VLAN X s untagged membership this port s PVID will be updated with VLAN X In the form of VLAN list command PVID is updated with last item of VLAN list When user removes a port from the untagged membership of the PVID s VLAN the port s PVID will be assigned with default VLAN The default setting is enabled Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable the auto assign PVID DES 3528 5 enable pvid auto_assign Command enable pvid auto_assign Success
645. val Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the delay interval DES 3528 5 config lldp tx_delay 8 Command config lldp tx_delay 8 Success DES 3528 5 373 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual config lldp reinit_delay Purpose Change the minimum time of the reinitialization delay interval Syntax config Ildp reinit_delay lt sec 1 10 gt Description An re enabled LLDP port will wait for reinit_delay after last disable command before reinitializing Parameters reinit_delay The range is from 7 second to 10 seconds The default setting is 2 seconds Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To changes the re initialization delay interval to five seconds DES 3528 5 config lldp reinit_ delay 5 Command config lldp reinit_delay 5 Success DES 3528 5 config lldp notification _interval Purpose Used to configure the timer of the notification interval for sending notification to configured SNMP trap receiver s Syntax config Ildp notification_interval lt sec 5 3600 gt Description This command is used to globally change the interval between successive LLDP change notifications generated by the switch Parameters notification_interval The range is from 5 seconds to 3600 seconds The default setting is 5 secon
646. ve Active specifies the configuration Restrictions You must have Administrator level privileges Example usage To configure the specific configuration as boot up image DES 3528 5 config configuration 2 boot_up Command config configuration 2 boot_up Success DES 3528 4 63 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to test the connectivity between network devices Syntax ping lt ipaddr gt times lt value 1 255 gt timeout lt sec 1 99 gt Description This command sends Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP echo messages to a remote IP address The remote IP address will then echo or return the message This is used to confirm connectivity between the Switch and the remote device Parameters lt padadr gt Specifies the IP address of the host times lt value 1 255 gt The number of individual ICMP echo messages to be sent A value of 0 will send an infinite ICMP echo messages The maximum value is 255 The default is 0 timeout lt sec 1 99 gt Defines the time out period while waiting for a response from the remote device A value of 1 to 99 seconds can be specified The default is 1 second Restrictions None Example usage To ping the IP address 10 48 74 121 four times DES 3528 5 ping 10 48 74 121 times 4 Command ping 10 48 74 121 Reply from 10 48 74 121 time lt 10ms Reply from 10 48 74 121 time lt 10ms Reply fr
647. w sflow Command show sflow sFlow Version 1 00 sFlow Address 10 24 73 21 sFlow State Disabled DES 3528 5 280 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual create sflow flow_sampler Purpose Used to create the sflow flow_sampler Syntax create sflow flow_sampler ports lt portlist gt all analyzer_server_id lt value 1 4 gt rate lt value 0 65535 gt maxheadersize lt value 18 256 gt Description This command is used to create the sFlow flow_sampler By configuring the sampling function for a port a sample packet received by this port will be encapsulated and forwarded to the analyzer server at the specified interval Parameters ports Specifies the list of ports to be configured analyzer_server_id The analyzer_server_id specifies the ID of a server analyzer where the packet will be forwarded rate The sampling rate for packet sampling The configured rate value multiplied by 256 is the actual rate For example if the rate is 20 the actual rate 5120 As a result one packet will be sampled from every 5120 packets If set to 0 the sampler is disabled If the rate is not specified its default value is 0 maxheadersize The maximum number of leading bytes in the packet which has been sampled that will be encapsulated and forwarded to the server If not specified the default value is 128 Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue
648. what is the next parameter For example if users enter the show command with no additional parameters the CLI will then display all of the possible next parameters xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show Command show Next possible completions 802 1p 802 1x accounting acct_client arp _spoofing prevention attack_log auth_client auth_session_statistics authen_enable authen_login access profile address _ binding arpentry auth_diagnostics auth_statistics authen_policy bandwidth control config current_config dhcp_relay fdb gratuitous_arp igmp_snooping authorization autoconfig cfm command_history cpu cpu_filter dhcp dhcp_local_relay dnsr dotliv_protocol_group error ethernet_oam firmware flow_meter gvrp hol_prevention 1proute jumbo_frame limited multicast addr jJwac link_aggregation account asymmetric vlan authen authentication bpdu_protection cos device_status dhcp_server dscp filter greeting_message ipif lacp_port lidp log log_save_timing mac based access control mac based vlan mac _ notification loopdetect mac based access control local max_mcast_group mcast_filter_ profile mld_snooping multicast poe policy route port_vlan ports qing radius safeguard_engine scheduling serial port session snmp sntp ssl stack_information subnet_vlan Switch time time_range traffic _ segmentatio
649. wing table feabewee Sd fssvewae Sid eablewacredre id ssaviewacredret i enable waciorsueogat ssavie wactobe got enable wacudp ttemrg ssaviewacusp tena enable jwac quarantine_server_monitor disable jwac quarantine_server_monitor config jwac lt sec 5 300 gt quarantine_server_error_timeout config jwac redirect oe quarantine_server jwac_login_page delay_time lt sec 0 1 vail config jwac quarantine_server_url lt string 128 gt config jwac clear_quarantine_server_url config jwac update_ server add delete ipaddress lt network_address gt config jwac switch_http_port lt tcp_port_number 1 65535 gt http httos config jwac ports lt portlist gt all state enable disable max_authenticating host lt value 0 50 gt aging_time infinite lt min 1 1440 gt idle_time infinite lt min 1 1440 gt block_time lt sec 0 300 gt auth_mode host_based port_based 1 config jwac radius protocol local pap chap ms_chap ms_chapv2 eap_md5 lt username 15 gt vlan lt vlanid 1 4094 gt cusemame 15 gt vlan lt vianid 1 40945 delete jwac user lt username 15 gt all_ users show jwac user show jwac user user clear jwac auth_state ports all lt portlist gt authenticated authenticating blocked mac_addr lt macaddr gt sows show jwac auth_state ports lt portlist gt 351 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Eth
650. with higher probability For the single rate three color mode users need to specify the committed rate in Kbps the commited burst size and the excess burst size For the two rate three color mode users need to specify the committed rate in Kbps the commited burst size the peak rate and the peak burst size The green color packet will be treated as the conforming action the yellow color packet will be treated as the exceeding action and the red color packet will be treated as the violating action profile_id lt value 1 14 gt Enter an integer used to identify the access profile that will be configured with this command This value is assigned to the access profile when it is created with the create access_profile command The profile ID sets the relative priority for the profile and specifies an index number that will identify the access profile being created with this command Priority is set relative to other profiles where the lowest profile ID has the highest priority The user may enter a profile ID number between 1 and 14 profile_name lt name 1 32 gt Specifies the name of the profile The maximum length is 32 characters access_id lt value 1 128 gt Adds an additional rule to the above specified access profile The value is used to index the rule created For information on number of rules that can be created for a given port lease see the introduction to this chapter replace_dscp mark the packet with a specifie
651. ws you to show the information of multicast VLAN Parameters lt vlan_name gt The name of the multicast VLAN to be shown Restrictions None Example usage To display IGMP snoop multicast VLAN 179 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show igmp_snooping multicast_vlan Command show igmp_ snooping multicast_vlan ISM VLAN Global State Disabled VLAN Name mul VID 2 Member Untagged Ports Tagged Member Ports Source Ports Untagged Source Ports Status Disabled Replace Source IP 0 0 0 0 Remap Priority None VLAN Name VID Member Untagged Ports Tagged Member Ports Source Ports Untagged Source Ports Status Disabled m Quit M Next Page ON Next Entry M all config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched Purpose Used to configure forwarding or dropping of the multicast VLAN unmatched packet Syntax config igmp_snooping multicast_vlan forward_unmatched disable enable Description When the Switch receives a tagged IGMP group packet if the VID in the tagged packet belongs to a multicast VLAN and the group does not match all profiles then the configuration takes effect and the packet will be forwarded or dropped based on the setting By default the packet will be dropped Parameters enable The packet will be forwarded disable The packet will be droped Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue
652. xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show serial_ port Purpose Used to display the current serial port settings Syntax show serial_ port Description This command displays the current serial port settings Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To display the serial port setting DES 3552 5 show serial_port Command show serial_port Baud Rate 115200 Data Bits 8 Parity Bits None Stop Bits 1 Auto Logout Never DES 3552 5 config serial_port Purpose Used to configure the serial port Syntax config serial_ port baud_rate 9600 19200 38400 115200 auto_logout never 2 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 1 Description This command is used to configure the serial port s baud rate and auto logout settings Parameters baud_rate 9600 19200 38400 115200 The serial bit rate that will be used to communicate with the management host There are four options 9600 19200 38400 115200 Factory default setting is 115200 never No time limit on the length of time the console can be open with no user input 2 minutes The console will log out the current user if there is no user input for 2 minutes 5 minutes The console will log out the current user if there is no user input for 5 minutes 10_minutes The console will log out the current user if there is no user input for 10 minutes 15 minutes The c
653. xample usage To delete a cfm md DES 3528 5 delete cfm md 3 Command delete cfm md 3 Success DES 3528 5 enable cfm Purpose Used to enable CFM globally Syntax enable cfm Description This command is used to enable CFM globally Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable cfm DES 3528 5 enable cfm Command enable cfm Success DES 3528 5 494 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual disable cfm Purpose Used to disable CFM globally Syntax disable cfm Description This command is used to disable CFM globally Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable cfm DES 3528 5 disable cfm Command disable cfm Success DES 3528 5 config cfm ports Purpose Used to enable or disable CFM function on per port basis Syntax config cfm ports lt portlist gt state enable disable Description By default CFM function is disabled on all ports If CFM is disabled on a port e MIPs are never created on that port e MEPs can still be created on that port and the configuration can be saved e MEPs created on that port can never generate or process CFM PDUs If the user issues a Loop back or Linktrace test on those MEPs it will prompt user that CFM function is disabled on that port Paramete
654. y Success DES 3528 5 Purpose Used to log in a user to the Switch s console Syntax login Description This command is used to initiate the login procedure The user will be prompted for a Username and Password Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To initiate the login procedure DES 3528 5 login Command login UserName 20 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual Purpose Used to log out a user from the Switch s console Syntax logout Description This command terminates the current user s session on the Switch s console Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To terminate the current user s console session DES 3528 5 logout 21 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual MODIFY BANNER AND PROMPT COMMANDS Administrator level users can modify the login banner greeting message and command prompt by using the commands described below Command Parameters config command_prompt lt string 16 gt username default config greeting_message default The Modify Banner and Prompt commands in the Command Line Interface CLI are listed along with the appropriate parameters in the following table config command prompt Purpose Used to configure the command prompt Syntax config command_prompt lt string 16 gt username default Description This
655. y Parameters lt username gt Name of the user who will be deleted Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To delete the user account System DES 3528 5 delete account System Command delete account System Success DES 3528 5 1 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual enable password encryption Purpose Used to enable password encryption Syntax enable password encryption Description The user account configuration information will be stored in the configuration file and can be applied to the system later If the password encryption is enabled the password will be in encrypted form When password encryption is diabled if the user specifies the password in plain text form the password will be in plain text form However if the user specifies the password in encrypted form or if the password has been converted to encrypted form by the last enable password encryption command the password will still be in the encrypted form It cannot be reverted to the plaintext Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable password encryption DES 3528 5 enable password encryption Command enable password encryption Success DES 3528 5 disable password encryption Purpose Used to disable password encryption Syntax disable password encrypt
656. y Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure MLD snooping rate limit DES 3528 5 config mld_snooping rate_limit port 1 4 500 Command config mld_snooping rate_limit ports 1 4 500 Success DES 3528 5 41l xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show mid_snooping Me IC mm lanl Purpose Used to display the MLD snooping rate limite on ports Syntax show mld_snooping rate_limit ports lt portlist gt vianid lt vidlist gt Description This command displays the MLD snooping rate limite on ports Parameters ports A port number or a range of ports for you to view the MLD snooping rate limited vianid The id of the VLAN for which MLD snooping is to be displayed Restrictions None Example usage To display the MLD snooping rate limit DES 3528 5 show mld_snooping rate_limit ports 1 4 Command show mld_snooping rate_limit ports 1 4 Rate Limitation Total Entries 4 DES 3528 5 show mld_snooping forwarding Purpose Used to display the current MLD snooping forwarding table Syntax show mid_snooping forwarding vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt vlanid lt vidlist gt Description This command displays the current MLD snooping forwarding table It provides an easy way for user to check the list of ports that a specific source of a multicast group will be forwarded to Parameters vlan The name of the VLAN
657. y the current IGMP setup currently configured on the Switch Parameters lt vlan_name 32 gt The name of the VLAN for which to view IGMP snooping group information lt vidlist gt The VIDs of the VLAN for which IGMP snooping is to be configured lt portlist gt The list of ports for which to view IGMP snooping group information lt ipaddr gt To view the information of this specified group data_driven To view the groups learnt by data driven only If no parameter is specified the system will display all current IGMP snooping groups Restrictions None Example usage To view the current IGMP snooping group DES 3528 5 show igmp_ snooping group Command show igmp_snooping group Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports UP Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports UP Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports UP Time Expiry Time Filter Mode Source Group VLAN Name VID Member Ports Router Ports UP Time Expiry Time Filter Mode DES 3528 5 10 0 0 2 255 0 0 2 default 1 1 2 127 120 INCLUDE gt 10 0 0 2 255 0 0 3 default 1 3 320 120 gt EXCLUDE gt NULL 255 0 0 5 default 1 4 5 130 120 gt EXCLUDE gt NULL 255 0 0 5 default 1 24 1335 120 EXCLUDE 199 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual show igmp_snooping rate _limit Purpo
658. you to enable MLD snooping on the switch Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To enable MLD snooping on the switch DES 3528 5 enable mld_snooping Command enable mld_snooping Success DES 3528 5 disable mid_snooping Purpose Used to disable MLD snooping on the switch Syntax disable mld_snooping Description This command disables MLD snooping on the switch Disabling MLD snooping allows all MLD and IPv6 multicast traffic to flood within all IPv6 interfaces Parameters None Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To disable MLD snooping on the switch DES 3528 5 disable mld_snooping Command disable mld_snooping Success DES 3528 5 show mlid_snooping Purpose Used to display the current status of MLD snooping on the switch Syntax show mid_snooping vlan lt vlan_name 32 gt Description This command will display the current MLD snooping configuration on the switch Parameters vlan_name The name of the VLAN for which you want to view the MLD snooping configuration If no parameter specified the system will display all current MLD snooping configurations Restrictions None Example usage To show MLD snooping on the switch 408 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show mld_snooping Command
659. yzer_server lt value 1 4 gt Description This command deletes the analyzer_server Parameters value analyzer_server ID Restrictions Only Administrator and Operator level users can issue this command Example usage To configure the sflow analyzer_server DES 3528 5 delete sflow analyzer _server 2 Command delete sflow analyzer server 2 Success DES 3528 5 show sflow analyzer_server Purpose Used to show the sflow analyzer_server information Syntax show sflow analyzer_server Description This command is used to show the sflow analyzer_server information The Timeout field specifies the time configured by user The Current countdown times is the current time remaining before the server timesout Parameters None Restrictions None Example usage To show the sflow analyzer_server 286 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual DES 3528 5 show sflow analyzer_server Command show sflow analyzer_server sFlow Analyzer_server Information Server ID Owner monitor Timeout 400 Current Countdown Time 400 Collector Address 10 90 90 1 Collector Port 6343 Max Datagram Size 1400 Total Entries 1 DES 3528 5 287 xStack DES 3528 DES 3552 Series Layer 2 Fast Ethernet Switch CLI Reference Manual TIME AND SNTP COMMANDS The Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP an adaptation of the Network Time Protocol NTP commands in the Command Lin

- D-Link

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents